HomeMy WebLinkAbout6645 TP 37.1-1-9 COMMERCIAL NEW PROJECT MAN UAL
Country Inn & Suites
11-00 Danby Road, Route 9613, Ithaca, NY
Owner Garuda Hotels, Inc.
Jay Brahmandkar,President
2303 North Triphammer Road
Ithaca, New York
Architect Jagat P. Sharma
312 East Seneca Street
Ithaca, NY 14850
phone (607)272 9361
Fax (607) 272 0605
Structural Consultant Ravi Engineering, P.C.
6605 Pittsford Palmyra Road
Fairport, NY 14450
phone(585) 223 3660
fax(585)223 4250
MEP Consultant BESE Engineering
110 cedar grove
Pawleys Island, SC 29585
phone (843) 235 8280
fax (253)423 3576
Civil Engineering Consultant T.G. Miller, P.C.
203 North Aurora Street
Ithaca, NY 14850
phone(607) 272 6477
fax(607) 272 6322
Landscape Architects Trowbridge&Wolf, LLP
1001 West Seneca Street,Suite 101
Ithaca, NY 14850
phone (607) 2771400
fax(607) 277 6092
October 10, 2005
CONTENTS:
Instructions to Bidders
Bid Form
Geotechnical Engineering Investigation
DIVISION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 0100: General & Supplementary Conditions
Section 0 1100'. Summary Of Work
Section 01200: Temporary Facilities
Section 01300: Insurance
Section 01400: Project Closeout
DIVISION 2A: SITE WORK
Section 02230: Site Clearing
Section 02300: Earthwork
Section 02610: Stone Curbing
Section 02741: Hot Mix Asphalt Paving
Section 02751: Cement Concrete Paving
Section 02870: Site Furnishings
Section 02900: Landscaping
DIVISION 213: SITE WORK - CIVIL
Section 01354: Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan
Section 02250: Trenching and Backfill for site Utilities
Section 02510: Water Distribution
Section 02530: Sanitary Sewerage
Section 02630: Storm Sewerage
Section 02675: Hydrostatic Testing and Distribution of water System
DIVISION 3: CONCRETE
Section 03100: Concrete Formwork
Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcing
Section 03300: Cast-n Place Concrete
DIVISION 4: MASONRY
Not Used
DIVISION 5: METAL
Section 05120: Structural steel
Section 05500: Miscellaneous Metals
DIVISION 6: WOOD & PLASTIC
Section 06100: Rough Carpentry
Section 06200: Finish Carpentry
Section 06400: Cab!hetry& Millwork
DIVISION 7: THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07100: Thermal & Moisture Protection
Section 07200: Insulation
Section 07240: Exterior Insulation Finish System
Section 07270: Firestopping
Section 07510: Asphalt Shingles Roofing
Section 07520: Single Ply Roofing
Section 07600: Flashing & Sheet Metal
Section 07800: Skylights
Section 07900: Caulking & Sealants
DIVISION 8: DOORS AND WINDOWS
Section 08100: Hollow Metal Doors & Frames
Section 08200: Aluminum Doors, Sidelights & Storefronts
Section 08300: Wood Doors
Section 08310: Access Doors
Section 08460: Automatic Sliding doors
Section 08520: Metal Windows
Section 08600: Glass & Glazing
Section 08710: Finished Hardware
DIVISION 9: FINISHES
Section 09100: Drywall construction
Section 09200: Acoustical Tile Ceiling Systems
Section 09300: Tiles
Section 09530: Acoustical Treatment
Section 09640: Stone Fabrications
Section 09660: Resilient Flooring
Section 09680: Carpeting
Section 09900: Painting
Section 09952: Wall Coverings
DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES
Section 10165: Laminated Plastic Toilet Partitions
Section 10201: Building Louvers
Section 10260: Wall Corner Guards
Section 10300: Prefabricated Fireplace
Section 10350: Flagpole
Section 10520: Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets &Accessories
Section 10800: Toilet & Bath Accessories
Section 10900: Wardrobe Specialties
DIVISION 11: EQUIPMENT
Section 11175- Laundry Chute
Section 11451: Appliances
DIVISION 12: FURNISHINGS
Section 12675: Entry Mat
DIVISION 13: SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Section 13150: Pool
DIVISION 14: CONVEYING SYSTEMS
Section 14200: Hydraulic Elevators
DIVISION IS: MECHANICAL
Section 15050: Basic Materials & Methods
Section 15190: Natural Gas Systems
Section 15250: Mechanical Insulation
Section 15300: Fire Protection
Section 15400: Plumbing
Section 15530: Refrigerant Piping
Section 15531: Refrigerant Specialties
Section 15670: Remote Air Cooled Heat Pump Unit
Section 15800: Heating, Ventilation, &Air Conditioning
Section 15880: Ductwork
Section 15950: Automatic Temperature Control
Section 15990: Testing, Adjusting & Balancing
DIVISION 16,. ELECTRICAL
Section 16050: Basic Materials & Methods
Section 16110: Raceway Systems
Section 16119: Wiring Systems
Section 16400: Service & Distribution
Section 16500: Lighting
Section 16622: Elevator Equipment Wiring
Section 16660: Lighting Protection
Section 16721: Fire Alarm
Section 16740: Empty Conduit System For Telephone Wiring
Section 16780: Empty Conduit System For Television Antenna
BID FORM - Page 1
PROJECT: Country Inn & Suites
1100 Danby Road, Route 96B
Ithaca, New York
CONTRACT: General Construction, Mechanical,& Electrical Work
SUBMITTED BY:
DATE:
TO: Garuda Hotels, Inc.
Jay Brahmandkar, President
2303 North Triphammer Road
Ithaca, New York 14850
Gentlemen:
The undersigned,
(Name Of Bidder)
(Type Of Firm, State Of Incorporation, If Applicable)
of
(Address) (Phone)
having carefully examined the Drawings, and associated Bid Documents dated September
1, 2005 as prepared by Jagat P. Sharma, Architect, as well as the site and conditions
affecting the work, proposes to furnish all material, equipment, labor, plant, machinery,
tools, supplies, services, applicable taxes and specified insurance necessary to perform the
entire work, as set forth in, and in accordance with the said documents for the following
considerations:
1. BASE BID:
All Work complete, for the sum of
(For Materials, Supplies, Labor, and Services
and all other costs.)
BID FORM - Page 2
2. START OF WORK AND TIME FOR COMPLETION:
The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to commence work at the site within (5)
calender days after date of issuance of written notice to proceed, and to substantially
complete the Contract Work within 7 calender months.
3. LIST OF PROPOSED PRINCIPAL SUBCONTRACTORS:
3.1 The undersigned agrees, if awarded the contract, to employ subcontractors from the
following list for the Sections or Subdivisions of Work stated below subject to the following
provisions:
a) Prior to the award of the Contract, the Owner and Architect reserves the right to
review the list of "Proposed Principal Subcontractors", and to delete from it the
name of any to whom they may have a reasonable objection. The Contractor may
make the final selection of principal subcontractors at his option from the
resulting list after the award of the contract.
3.2 Bidder shall list the name of at least one subcontractor for each Section of Subdivision
of the Work listed below.
3.3 If Bidder does not propose to employ a Subcontractor for any Section or Subdivision of
the work'listed below, he shall enter the name of his firm for each Section or Subdivision.
1. Site Work
2. Concrete work:
3. Wood Framing
4. Structural steel:
5. Roofing
6. Drywall
6. EIFS:
7. Painting:
BID FORM - Page 3
8. Floor Covering:
9. Millwork :
10. Doors:
11. Windows:
12. HVAC
13. Plumbing:
14. Sprinkler System:
15. Electrical:
4. TIME PROGRESS SCHEDULE:
The undersigned, if awarded the Contract, to furnish a "Time Progress Schedule" showing
the starting and completion dates for all principal trades and subdivisions of the Work,
together with such additional information related thereto as may reasonable be required.
6. BONDS:
5.1 Performance and Payment Bonds: Is not required.
5.2 Bid Bond: Is not requested.
B. SCHEDULE OF VALUES:
6.1 The undersigned agrees, prior to the award of a construction contract and upon the
request of the Architect or Owner, to submit a complete, itemized and detailed "Schedule of
Values" including Alternates elected, if any showing the amount allocated to the various
trades and subdivisions of the work, aggregating the total Contract Sum.
6.2 To facilitate the evaluation of Bids, the undersigned has included in each part of his Bid
the following values for the trades and/or subdivisions of the work as listed below.
BID FORM - Page 4
1. General Construction: $
Includes:
1. Site Work
2. Concrete work:
3. Wood Framing
4. Structural steel:
5. Roofing
6. Drywall
7. EIFS:
8. Painting:
9. Floor Covering:
10. Millwork :
11. Doors :
12. Windows:
13. Others:
2. HVAC:
3. Plumbing:
4. Sprinkler System:
5. Electric:
TOTAL CONTRACT SUM:
BID FORM - Page 5
7. ACCEPTANCE:
7.1 The undersigned agrees that this Proposal shall remain in force and effect for a period
of not less than thirty (30) calendar days following the bid due date.
7.2 If written notice of the acceptance of this Proposal is mailed, telegraphed or delivered to
the undersigned within ten (10) calendar days after the date of opening of Bids, or any time
thereafter before this Proposal is withdrawn, the undersigned will immediately upon receipt
of such mailing, telegraphing or delivery of such notice, execute an Agreement between
Contractor and Owner, amended and/or supplemented, if required, in accordance with the
Proposal as accepted. The form of Agreement will be AIA Document A-201
7.3 It is understood and agreed that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all
proposals, to waive any informalities in bidding, and to hold all proposals for the above
noted period of time.
8. ADDENDUM RECEIPT:
8.1 Receipt of the following addenda to the Terms and Conditions, drawings or
Specification is acknowledged:
Addendum No. Dated
Addendum No. Dated
Addendum No. Dated
Addendum No. Dated
9. SUBSTITUTIONS:
9.1 Proposals shall conform to the requirements of the Bid Documents.
BID FORM - Page 6
9.2 The bidder may offer substitutions for any item of material or equipment, element of
work, or method of construction set forth in the Bid Documents by listing the proposed
substitutions and the amounts to be deducted from the Base Bid corresponding to each
such proposed substitution. However, the Bidder is cautioned to make his base proposal on
the materials and items specified by name or other particular reference.
(Bidder)
By
(Title)
Legal Business Address For
Duration Of Contract
Date
Instructions to Bidders - Page 1
PROJECT: Country Inn & Suites
1100 Danby Road, Route 96B
Ithaca, New York
OWNER: Garuda Hotels, Inc.
Jay Brahmandkar, President
2303 North Triphammer Road
Ithaca, New York 14850
ARCHITECT: Jagat P. Sharma,
312 East Seneca Street,
Ithaca, New York 14850
1. PROPOSAL FORMS:
Proposals shall be made only on the forms provided therefor and all blank and underlined
spaces in the forms shall be fully filled in, in ink or typed; amount shall be fully stated both
in writing and figures. Proposals shall be signed by Principals or Officers duly authorized to
execute such documents on behalf of their respective firms or organizations, and Certificate
included in the Bid Form shall be completed accordingly. Bidder's legal name must be fully
stated. Completed form shall be without interlineation, alterations, or erasures unless
-initialed and dated by the signer.
2. RECAPITULATION OF PROPOSAL:
Proposals shall not contain any recapitulation of the Work to be done. No oral, telegraphic
or telephonic proposals or modifications will be considered..
3. METHOD OF SUBMISSION:
3.1 Proposals shall be prepared and enclosed in sealed envelope. Envelope shall be
addressed to:
Garuda Hotels, Inc.
Jay Brahmandkar, President
2303 North Triphammer Road
Ithaca, New York 14850
On the face of the envelope write
Proposal for:
Country Inn & Suites
1100 Danby Road, Route 96B
Ithaca, New York
Instructions to Bidders - Page 2
Submitted by:
(Bidder) (Phone)
3.2 Proposal shall be delivered to the Architect at the address listed above not later than
4.00 PIVI on October 21, 2005.
4. BID OPENING:
4.1 Proposals will be opened privately by the Owner and the Architect. The Owner reserves
the right to postpone the date and time of opening of proposals at any time prior to the date
and time announced in this Instructions to Bidders or arnmendments thereto.
S. BIDDING DOCUMENTS:
The Bidding Documents will consist of the following:
a. Instructions to Bidders.
b. Project Manual.
C. Drawings.
d. Addenda and/or bulletins issued prior to date of opening of Proposals.
6. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FURNISHED:
6.1 Contract Documents may be obtained from the Owner. Deposit of$150.00 per set is
required. No partial sets will be issued. Deposit amount will be refunded if the
documents are returned unmarked and in good condition . Documents remain the
property of the Architect.
6.2 All checks for sets of the Contract Documents to be made payable to Jagat P.
,Sharma, Architect.
6.3 The successful bidder will be allowed six (6) sets-of drawings and specifications at
no cost.
7. START OF WORK:
7.1 Work at the site shall begin upon receiving notice to proceed.
Instructions to Bidders - Page 3
7.2 Upon issuance of written authorization to proceed, Bidder shall proceed promptly with
required submittals and subsequent ordering and fabrication of materials and systems to
avoid construction delays.
8. TIME TO COMPLETE:
8.1 The entire work under the Contract shall be substantially completed and Certificate of
Occupancy obtained not later than 7 calendar months from the date of commencement.
9. BONDS:
9.1 Performance and Payments Bonds: are not requested. However, the Owner reserves
the right to request that the successful bidder show satisfactory evidence of bondability in
the form of a letter from a bonding company prior to award of the Contract.
9.2 Bid Bond is not requested.
10. AWARD OF CONTRACT:
10.1 It is the intent of the Owner to enter into a Contract with one General Contactor for the
entire work. All labor and services and materials and supplies, etc. are to be furnished in
accordance with the Contract, except as otherwise specifically stated.
10.2 The competence and responsibility of the Bidder's proposed principal subcontractors
will be considered in making the Award. Any bidder may be required to furnish financial
statement, or other evidence satisfactory to the Owner that he and his proposed
subcontractors have sufficient means and experience in the types of work called for to
assure completion of the Contract in a satisfactory manner.
10.3 The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and to waive any
informalities in Bidding.
10.4 All Proposals shall remain in force and effect for a period of not less than thirty (30)
CALANDAR DAYS following the bid opening.
10.5 The Owner reserves the right to accept any of the Alternate. Proposals listed within
fifteen (15) calendar days following the award of construction contract.
Instructions to Bidders - Page 4
11. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:
11.1 Each Bidder shall visit the Site of the Proposed Work, fully acquaint and familiarize
himself with the conditions as they exist and the character of the operations to be carried
on under the proposed Contract, and make such investigation as he may see fit so that he
shall fully understand the facilities, physical conditions and restrictions attending the work
under the Contract.
11.2 Each Bidder shall also thoroughly examine and become familiar with the Drawings,
Specificatins and associated Bid Documents, the Addenda and Bulletins, if any, and the
Site, that he relies on no representation by the Owner, and that from his own investigation
he has satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local
conditions, and all matters which may in any way affect the work or its performance, and
that as a result of such examination and investigation, he fully understands the conditions
of bidding and that he will not make any claim for, and waives any right to damage because
of misinterpretation or misunderstanding the Bid Documents and the condition of bidding.
12. DISCREPANCIES:
12.1 Should a Bidder find discrepancies in or omissions from the Drawings, Specifications
and associated Bid Documents, or should he be in doubt as to their meaning, he shall at
once notify the Architect, who will send written instruction to all bidders. Neither the Owner
nor the Architect will be responsible for oral instructions. Every request for such
interpretation should be in writing, addressed to the Architect. Inquiries received three (3)
or more days prior to date fixed,for opening of Bids will be given consideration.
13. PRE-BID CONFERENCE:
13.1 A pre-bid conference is scheduled for (to be determined) at the site. The purpose of
the conference will be to clarify the intent of the Contract Documents if necessary. Results
will be published in an Addendum.
NOTE: Bidder should visit site prior to pre-bid conference to familiarize himself with
conditions under which he will be working.
Instructions to Bidders - Page 5
14. TRADE SUBCONTACTORS, MATERIAL SUPPLIERS:
14.1 Each portion of the work shall be performed by organization equipped and
experienced to do work in that particular field, and no portion of the work shall be reserved
by the Bidder to himself unless he is so equipped and experienced. Subcontracts shall be
awarded only to parties satisfactory to the Owner and Architect. Each subcontractor, and
materials supplier shall be approved individually.
14.2 In the spaces provided in the Bid Form, the Bidder shall list all portions of the work he
proposes to perform directly with his own forces.
14.3 A list of names from which the Bidder proposes to select subcontractors, material
suppliers, and/or manufactureers for the principal trades or sub-divisions of the work is
required as part of the Proposal.
14.4 In the Bid Form, there has been listed the principal trades or sub-divisions of the work
for which such a listing is required, together with the provisions which govern the listing,
selection and approval of principal subcontractors.
15. SCHEDULE OF VALUES:
15.1 A partial "Schedule of Values" for certain trades and/or sub-divisions of the work is
required as part of the Bidder's Proposal in the Bid Form.
15.2 The successful Bidder shall submit a complete "Schedule of Values" showing the
amounts allocated to the various trades, suppliers, subcontractors, installers and General
Contractor's work, aggregating the total sum of the Contract. If requested by the Owner or
Architect, the complete "Schedule of Values" shall be submitted prior to award of Contract.
16. ADDENDA AND BULLETINS:
16.1 Addenda and/or bulletins issued during the bidding period shall be acknowledged in
the space provided in the Bid Form,
17. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES:
17.1 The contractor shall pay the owner liquidated damages equal to an amount of
$7,500.00 per day for each and every day the building is not Substantially Completed and a
Certtificate of Occupancy obtained after the 7 month Contract Time. If the Contractors
achieves Substantial Completion and obtains a Certificate of Occupancy in Six calendar
months, the Owner shall pay the Contractor $10,000.00 for early completion.
Instructions to Bidders - Page 6
18. SUBSTITUTIONS:
18.1 Proposals shall conform to the requirements of the Bid Documents.
18.2 The Bidder may offer subsititutions for any item of material or equipment, element of
work, or method of construction set forth in the Bid Documents by listing the proposed
substitutions and the amounts to be deducted from the Base Bid corresponding to each
such proposed substitution. However, the Bidder is cautioned to make his base proposal in
the materials and items specified by name or other particular reference.
19. APPLICABLE TAXES:
19.1 It shall be the responsibilty of the Contractor to pay all New York State and County
Sales Taxes for rmaterials supplied in connection with the work of this Contract. This
amount shall be listed separately in the bid amount and schedule of values.
20. REQUIRED SUBMISSIONS:
20.1 Provide with Bid Proposal:
a. Acknowledgement of Addenda and/or Bulletins issued prior to bid opening.
b. Certificate as to Corporate Bidder.
c. List of Proposed Subcontractors.
d. Schedule of Values
20.2 Within 5 days after Execution of Contract:
a. Insurance Certificate.
20.3 Within 10 days after Execution of Contract:
a. Schedule of Work (Bar Chart)
(END OF SECTION)
RAVI ENGINEERING & Nagappa Ravindra,P.E.
LAND SURVEYING, P.C. President
CONSULTING ENGINEERS&SURVEYORS
REPORT
GE
OTECHNICAL ENGINEERING INVESTIGATION
PROPOSED COUNTRY INNS & SUrrF_S HOTEL
DANBY ROAD AND WEST KING ROAD
TOWN OF ITHACA,TOMPKINS COUNTY,NEW YORK
f , For
Jagat P. Sharma,Architect
January 2005
62aokwatoh Offlc,,Par,Suite E-5 Ph-,(716)223-3660
6605 Pittsford-Palmyra Road Fax:(716)223-4250
Fairport,New York 14450 General E-Mail:smailkoti@aol.com
RAVI ENGINEERING & Nagappa Ravindra,P.E.
LAND SURVEYINGfP.C. President
CONSULTING ENGINEERS&SURVEYORS
January 3, 2005
jagat P. Sharma, Architect
312 East Seneca Street
Ithaca,New York 14850
Subject: Report
Geotechnical Engineering Investigation
Proposed Country Inns& Suites Hotel
Darby Road and West King Road
Town of Ithaca, Tompkins,New York
Sharma:
This report presents the results of a geoteclinical engineering investigation for the project
identified above.
We understand that it is proposed to construct a two-story hotel with no basement.
SUBSURFACE EXPLORATIONS
Subsurface explorations for this investigation consisted of five test borings, designated B 1
through B5. The approximate locations of the borings are shown on the plan in Appendix B.
The borings,were perfbrm' ed by Lyon Drilling Company, using a truck-mounted rotary drilling
rig, on December 2,2004. The borings were advanced to depths ranging from 8.9 to 19.8 feet
below the ground surface.
The logs of the borings, as prepared by Lyon Drilling Company, are presented in Appendix A.
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
The driller noted approximately 3 to 5 inches of topsoil.
Materials that appeared to be fill were encountered by all five of the borings, to depths as great
as approximately 17 feet below the ground surface. The fill appeared to consist primarily of
varying amounts of silt, sand, and gravel,with varying minor amounts clay and organic matter.
Standard Penetration Test N values in the fill ranged from 4 to 57, and averaged approximately,
20 blows per foot.
Blaokwatch Office Park Suite E-5 Ph:(716)223-3660
6605 Pittsford-Palmyra Road Fax:(716)223-4250
tt Fairport,Now York 14450 General E-Mail:smalikot@aol.com
Sharma, 1/3/05
A relatively thin stratum of so il that appeared to be natural, and generally less than 5 feet in
thickness, was encountered below the fill materials. This stratum appeared to consist primarily
of varying amounts of silt, sand, and gravel, Standard Penetration Test N values were generally
greater than 50 blows per foot.
All five of the borings were terminated after encountering practical refusal to the drilling and/or
sampling equipment, at depths ranging from 8-9 to 19.8 feet below the ground sur.face. It is
likely that this refusafrepresents bedrock, believed to be a shale at this site.
Groundwater was noted in only one boring(B4), at a depth of approximately 6 feet below the
ground surface. Rather than a true groundwater table, it is likely that this observation represents
a zone of"perched"water. It should be noted that subsurface water levels are likely to vary with
factors including location,time,precipitation, season, and site activities.
as encountered by the borings, are
More detailed descriptions of the subsurface conditions
provided on the logs in Appendix A.
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
General
The design and construction of foundations Will be complicated by the presence of the existing
fill materials. Options for foundations include spread footings and drilled piers.
The following sections of this report include more detailed discussions of seismic considerations,
the spread footing option,the drilled pier option,floor slabs, site grading and permanent slopes,
site preparation, excavation,-construction dewatering, subgrade preparation, and fill and backfill.
Seismic Considerations
With regard to the Building Code of New York State, a Site Class of"D"should be applied to
this project. This corresponds to a"Stiff Soil Profile."
Spread Footing Foundation Option
Because of the potential for unacceptable total and differential settlements, it is generally against
accepted geotechnical engineering practice to construct footings over randomly placed fill
materials. An exception is possible at this site, however, because of factors including the
apparent age and density of the fill materials, and the minor amounts of organic matter
encountered by the borings.
2
Sharma, 1/3/05
The use of footings would be linked to: an increased emphasis on site preparation,subgrade
preparation, and construction monitoring;the use of relatively low bearing pressures;the partial
removal and replacement of existing fill materials below footings; an acknowledgment of the
potential need to remove and replace additional unsuitable materials;the stiffening of footing-
wall systems; and an acknowledgment,on the part of the owner,that a shallow footing
foundation system is likely to undergo more settlement than a deep foundation system
In estimating the probable settlements of footings,the uncertainty associated with randomly
placed fill materials is greater than that associated with natural soils and controlled 0 materials.
For this project,we estimate that the shear strain(angular distortion)resulting from Merential
settlement is unlikely to exceed 0.2 percent This value is generally considered acceptable for
structures of this type, and is equivalent to a differential settlement of approximately I inch over
a distance of 50 feet. Total settlements are unlikely to exceed 2 inches.
If the spread footing option is chosen, all of the following requirements should be satisfied:
• The site and subgades should be prepared, and compacted granular fill should be placed and
compacted, as described in subsequent sections of this report.
• All footings should be seated at least 4 feet below the lowest adjacent floor or ground
surface.
Each column footing should be at least 3 feet wide.
Continuous wall footings should be at least 2 feet wide.
• Footings should be designed for a bearing pressure not exceeding 2000 pounds per square
foot.
• Each square column footing of width B should be underlain by a pad of granular fill at least
0.513 in vertical thickness.
a Each wall footing of width B should be underlain by a pad of granular fill at least LOB in
vertical thickness.
e Each pad of granular fill should be at least twice as wide as the footing above it.
* Foundation walls should consist of reinforced concrete,to provide additional
stiffness to the foundation-wall system
3
Sharma, 1/3/05
Drilled Pier Foundation Option
Drilled pier foundations, if used for this project, should satisfy the following requirements:
* Drilled piers should bear directly on sound bedrock,below any severely weathered or
fractured zones.
* Drilled piers should be designed for a bearing pressure not exceeding 20,000 pounds per
square foot
• Each drilled pier should be at least 2.5 feet in diameter.
No loose, soil,wet,frozen,or otherwise unsuitable material should be left in place below a
drilled pier.
• The bearing,
surface below each pier should be relatively level,with a slope no steeper than
one vertical on ten horizontal.
It is anticipated that each drilled pier will be installed using conventional rotary drilling methods
and temporary casings.' Drilling difficulties (including obstructions, boulders, cobbles, and dense
overburden soils) should he expected. Dewatering may be necessary. All concrete should be
placed in the dry, or by a suitable tremie,method.
Exterior grade beams between drilled piers should be seated at least 4 feet below final adjacent
exterior grade.
Floor Slabs
Conventional slab-on-grade floor construction is feasible. It is understood that floor loads will.
be modest, and that the floors will not support equipment that might be sensitive to minor
settlement.
At least 6 inches of compacted granular fill should be placed immediately beneath all floor slabs.
Drained, unsaturated conditions should be maintained within the granular fill. Compacted
common fill may be placed as required below the granular fill. Recommendations regarding site
preparation, subgrade preparation, granular fill, and common fill are presented in subsequent
sections of this report.
Floor slabs should be designed and constructed in accordance with ACI recommendations. It is
also recommended that the design be based on a subgrade modulus (K)not exceeding 100
pounds per cubic inch, and that the slab thickness be at least 4 inches.
J
ti
Sharma, 1/3/05
Site Grading and Permanent Slopes
The final grading should be such that surface waters are conducted away from structures and
paved areas, First-floor slabs should generally be at least 6 inches above the adjacent exterior
ground surface. -
Permanent slopes, if adequately vegetated and protected from erosion, should remain stable if
graded no steeper than I vertical on 2 horizontal. Surface waters should be directed away from
the crests and faces of all slopes.
Site Preparation
A thorough program of site preparation would enhance the performance of footings (if that
option-is chosen) and floor slabs.
All topsoil should be removed from within the building area. This area should then be graded
sufficiently to permit a thorough tamping.
The building area should be tamped using a vibratory roller having the following characteristics:
* A static,unsprung drum weight of at least 10,000 pounds.
9 An additional dynamic force of at least 25,000 pounds.
9 A drum width of at least 50 inches.
e A PLI rating (as defined by the NYSDOI) of at least 700 pounds per inch.
* An operating frequency of 18 to 25 cycles per second.
* A roller velocity not exceeding 6 feet per second(fps).
* A coverage Tate of at least 2 passes for each fps of velocity.
The purpose of this tamping is to finther densify the potentially looser soils in the upper portions
of the subsurface profile.
Excavation
Excavation should be performed in accordance with all applicable local,state, and federal
requirements. The sides of all excavations should be sloped or supported'as required by safety
regulations.
5
Sharma, 1/3/05
Based on the borings, it appears that most of the overburden excavation for this project can be
performed using conventional excavating equipment. It should be noted,however,that
obstructions,very dense soil conditions, and other difficulties are likely to be encountered.
To minimize subgrade disturbance, excavation should be performed with increasing care as
subgrade levels are approached.
Construction Dewatering
All excavation, fill placement, and foundation construction should be performed in the dry
Based on the subsurface explorations and the proposed construction, it appears unlikely that a
or this project. Any dewatering system,however,
major dewatering program will be required f
should be operated in such a way that disturbance or removal of the subgrade soil does not occur.
Subgrade Preparation
It is cautioned that the soils at this site contain fine-grained material, and that they will be
sensitive to disturbance. Subgrades should be kept free of water, subjected to a minimum
amount of construction traffic, exposed no longer than necessary, and not permitted to freeze.
Subgrades should be carefully prepared and thoroughly examined by qualified personnel.
Subgrades should also be tamped using vibratory equipment,to the greatest extent possible
without loosening the subgrade soils. Where space permits(such as in floor slab areas),
subgrades should be proofrolled using a My-loaded ten-wheel dump truck or full-size (ten-ton
or larger)roller.
No fill or foundation concrete should be placed over material that is loose, soft,wet,frozen,
organic, or otherwise unsuitable with respect to the design recommendations.
FBI and Backlill
The requirements for granular fill and common fill are presented in Table 1.
Some of the inorganic on-site soil is likely to be suitable for use as common ML Little if any of
the on-site soil,however,will be suitable for use as granular fill. It should also be noted that
granular fill meets all of the requirements of common fill, and that granular fill can generally be
placed and compacted with greater ease.
Granular fill should be used below footings,and within 6 inches of floor slabs. Common fill
may generally be used elsewhere, except where different materials are required by the project
designers.
All load-bearing fill should be compacted, in lifts of 9 inches or less,to at least 95 percent of the
maximum dry density determined by ASTM D 1557.
6
Sharma, 1/3/05
CLOSING COMMENTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
Professional services for this investigation were performed in accordance with generally
accepted geotechnical engineering practices, exclusively for the subject project. No other
warranty, expressed or implied, is made.
Subsurface conditions described in this report are inferred from the logs of subsurface
explorations. Conditions between, beyond,and below these explorations are likely to vary. It
should also be noted that subsurface conditions are often described on the basis of visual
examinations of recovered samples, and that,these visual descriptions may not always agree well
with descriptions made on the basis of laboratory tests. If subsurface conditions are
subsequently revealed that appear to be significantly different or less favorable than those
described,we should be given the opportunity to revise the statements in this report.
Prospective. contractors are advised that this report was prepared primarily for,4esign purposes,
and that it may not contain sufficient information for bidding. Contractors should be given the
opportunity to make site visits and perform additional explorations.if desired.
It is recommended that qualified personnel be retained to review the geoteclmical portions of the
contract drawings and specifications, and to provide monitoring services during construction.
It has been a pleasure assisting you with this investigation. If you have questions or comments
regarding this report,please contact the undersigned.
Yours truly,
RAVI ENGINEERING &LAI►ND SURVEYING,P-C-
Nagappa.Ravindra,P.E. Ray M. Teeter,P.E.
President Geotechnical Engineer
Attachments: Table I -Fill Materials
Appendix A-Test Boring Logs
Appendix B-Boring Location Plan
7
7
Table 1.
Fill Materials
Percent Finer by Weight
Sieve Size Common Fill Granular Fill
6 100 100
3 90-100 100
314 30-100 30-100
No. 4 20-100 20-80
No. 10 10-100 10-70
No.40 5-100 5-40
No.200 0-100 0-10
Notes: 1. All material should be durable and inorganic.
2. The plasticity index of common fill should be less than 15.
3. The plasticity index of granular fill should be less than 5.
4. Refer to the accompanying report for additional information regarding the use and
placement of these materials.
r
t
I
i
t
Appendix A.
Test Boring]Logs
f
f
i
f
!
/
/
/
/
|
Boring No.
Client RAn ENGINEERING&LAND No.
UNTRY INN LYON DRILLING CO. Sheet
Project PROPOSED CO Date Started 12/02104
AND SUITES HOTEL - a& Date Completed 12102104
Location DANBY ROAD!ND WEST BORING LOG mer JEFF GRANT
KING ROAD ITHACA N.Y. Baring 1-coatlon SOUTH ST COR (SEE PLAN)
Sufface Elevation
Owing 311el.D.HOI-Low rEMAUGERS Ground Water Observations
Water t
CaslngHarnmerWt _lb. Fal_IfL Date Time Casing at Hole at 7n at I
sail Sampler 27 SPLIT SPOON 17.5 18.0 DRY
Rock Sampler
SOIL
Sample a) an Sampl r IPTION REMARKS
C. N MATERIAL DESCR
Rook d)
C' Depth of
`
MOIST,BROWN,MEDIUM SILT,SOME COARSE, 16.0 POSSIBLE REW`6RKE
MEDIUM FINE SAND,LITTLE FINE GRAVEL,
MATERIAL
( From To Recmrry
�
|
'
|
|
`
. `
�
i
.. '
_
(
. �
�
| .
|
project No.
suRVEYING,P.C. Sheet
| AND SUITES HOTEL Data Completed 2/02J04
` Date Started 12/02104
JEFFDO Pig 45B surface Elevation
'
Casing 3114-I.D.HbLLO STEMAUGERS Ground Water Observations
Casing Hammer Wt —lb. Fai— IrL Data Time casing at Hole at Water at
so sampler 2SPLIT SPOON 19.8 DRY
Rock Sampler.
SOIL
Rook Depth of
110.0 r2.0 6 2 — MOIST,BROWN.LOOSE SILT.TRACE COARSE, APPROAMATELY
ME
DIUM FjNE SAND.TRACE FINE GRAVEL, 12!-0 POSSIBLE REWOM
3.0 MATERIAL
TRACE ORGANICS
- COARSE,MEDIUM FINE SAND,LITTLE COARSE
GRAVEL.TRACE SILT
10.0
ITH FRAGMENTS OF WOOD
MOIST,DARK GRAy SILT.TRACE FINE SAND.
TRACE ORGANICS
'
>
|
(
'
�
/
`
,
AT
� `
|
! POSSIBLE W HERED ROCK,SHALEPHONE (607)842-5580
|
P742
6 SHACKH :)AD TULLY, N.Y.
'
�
\
'
`
�
/
Boring No.
Ghent RAVI ENGINEERING_&LAND Pmject No B3
.
SURVEYING,P.C. 1 1 or
Project PROPOSED COUNTRY I LYON DRILLING CO. sheet
HOTEL Date started 12=104
AND SUITES 16 Date completed 12JO2104
Location DANBY ROAD AND WEST_ BORING LOG mier JEff GRANT
KING ROAD ITHACA N.Y. Boring Location —NORTHEAST CORNER(BEE PLAN)
Drill Rig 4513
Casing 310 I.D.HOLLOW STEM AUGERS surface Elevation Ground Water Observations
Casing Hammer.WL _Ib. Fal In.Sol{Sampler Z SPLIT SPOON DRY Date Time Casing at Hole at Water at
Sample Hammer,Wt 140 lb. Fal 30 In. 12102104 __12:20 P.M.
Rock Sampler.
Other: —
Weather Condit on—s: 40 UP-
SOIL T REMARKS Sample Blows an Sam ]Or
11" R I Sao N MATERIAL DESCRIPTION REMARKS
De th cc
Rock Depth of
Recovery 7anc.
63 &3 Ft V/D ROD Change
1 0.0 1 2.0 S 4 8 1 11 14 IV 1.3 TOPSOIL0.3
MOIST,BROWN,FIRM SILT AND COARSE,
MEDIUM FINE SAND.LITTLE FINE To COARSE
GRAVEL-TRACE ORGANICS 4.0
5 2 5.0 7.0 9- S 7 1 50 7 02 SATURATED,GREENISH GRAY.COMPACT SILT.
LITTLE COARSE,MEDIUM FINE SAND,TRACE CLAN
TRACE ORGANICS
3 8.5 8.7 IS 5012 02 815
10 — I DRY,GRAY,COMPACT,COARSE TO FINE
GRAVEL.TRACE COARSE,MDEJUM FINE SAND
BORING TERMINATED AT 8'.9 AUGER REFUSAL AT&.9
BORING#.83AAUGERED
TO 4!2,AUGER REFUSAL
AT 4'2
—t5H—UNE(607)842-65
:7426 SHACKHAM ROAD N.Y.
Client RAVI ENGINEERING LAND Boring No. B4
&
Project No.
SURVEYING,P.Q...................... LYON DRILLING CO. Sheet
Project PROPOSED COUNTRY INN Date Started 12/02104
HOTELi AND
096 Date Compteted 12MV04
U BORING LOG
Location DMIAD AND WEST 3L 0 H
KING ROAD ITI N.Y.
Boring Location SQI9 99ZST CORNER(BEE P4M_
Drill Rig 45B
Casing 3 J/4'1.D HOLLOW STEM AUGERS Surface Elevation Ground Water Observations
casing Hammer.Wt lb. Fat Date Time Casing at Hole at Water at
Soil Sampler 2"SPLIT SPOON P.M. 9.5 10.7 6.7
Sample Hammer.Wt 140 lb. Fat_ ZU_I1L �121=04 r. 1:00 5-9
11211 0—UT 118—
Rook Sampler
other.
Weather Can it onS'.
SOIL
Sample Siam on Sam ler MATERIAL DESCRIPTION REMARKS
E wn,w 1.61fUr
De nth 0.6no
Rork
Depth of
'a r= From To E Recove change-
ROD
b Ft Ft. 0.3
(F� 2 3 6 7 9 1.3 TOPSOIL
0.0 2.0 — MOIST,BROWN,MEDIUM SILT TRACE COARSE,
SAND.TRACE FINE GRAVEL TRACE ORC-AMCS
50
5 —2 -To— 7.0 1 81 2 —2 2 �24 11.5
SATURATED,BROWN,SOFT SILT.TRACE COARSE
SAND.TRACE FINE SAND.TRACE CLAY.TRACE
ORGANICS
10 3 10.0 12.0 5 5 7 9 0.9 16 11.5 AUGERS HARD ATIV-5
'WET,BROWN,BROWN,1 IIARD SILT.SOME COARSE TO BOREHOLE CAVED AT
FINE GRAVEL.TRACE COARSE SAND.TRACE 111.6
0.7 FINE SAND.TRACE CLAY '115.6 NOTE.-A&8 SAMPLES
15 4 15.0 15.7 S 27 50/2 ,POSSIBLE WEATHERED SHALE
BORING TERMINATE
,=SOMEE To :
CO S TRACE SANI
2-658�0
PHONE(607)84
26 ROAD TULL(, N.Y.
Boling Na S5
F
RAM ENGINEERING&LAND Project No.F-.`enEYING'P.C. LYON DRILLING CO. Sheet I
Project PROPOSED COUNTRY INN Date Started 12/02/04
AND SUITES HOTEL IL BORING LOG Date Completed 12102:104
Location 5A—NSYR016 AND'WEST Drtiller JEFF GRANT
KING ROAD M4AC N.Y. Boling Location 1^AST SIDE MIDDLE{SEE PM
Drill Rig AIZO Surrace Elevation
Casing 3-1/4'J.D.HOLLOWSTEM Ground Water ObsOrvaullne
Casing HammerWL _lb. Fal___"'- Date Time Casing at
Hate at Water at
Soli Sampler 2!SP 'SPOON— 12102104 _�2:20PM. 11.0 qRY
samplel-lammerWt 140 lb. Fal_.301n.
Rack sampler.
Other.
^'�`�—
eather Con tons.
SOIL
�5 tier J3 PIG Blom on MATERIAL DESCRIPTION REMARKS
De 0110.51 015/10 t.an.s Isao, N
Rack
Depth of
Recove
E --LLCh8—ng-
Ft Ft Ft 4'a ROD
4 6 1 8 13 1.0-1 vt1->U1k.
IM DIST,BROWN,MEDIUM SILT,SOME FINE GRAVEL
SOME COARSE SAND.TRACE MEDIUM To FINE
— SAND.TRACE ORGANICS 4.0
S 2 5.0 17.0 IS 7 8 11 18 is 1.7 MOIST,BROWN,STIFF SILT.SOME COARSE, 4'JO-1 11.0 TILL UKF-
MED I ILIM FINE SAND.TRACE SHALE FRAGMENTS.
SAND.7-RACE FINE SAND,TRACE CLAY.TRACE MATERIAL
ORGANICS
10 3 10.0 '111-3 8 1 20 500 11.0
6500 POSSIBLE W rHERSDROCK
BORING TERMINATED AT 1 V-9
15
.7426 SHACKHAM RClAD TULLY,N.Y.
r
1 Appendix.B
Baring Location Plan
{
s
t
r
f
l :
B-3
• ! I j
I .
► a
X z
B 1B-15
pq
! j 0%
B-1 B-4
NOTESt
1. LOCATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE
2. THIS PLAN IS BASED ON INFORMATION--' ,,,�
f y PROVIDED BY OTHERS.
3. REFER TO ACCOMPANYING REPORT FOR
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
4 ONE INCH EQUALS APPROXIMATELY 60 FEET.
2ww mom= 20=Comm
Jagat P. Sharma Architect
312 E.Saneca St. JtAW
Ithaca, Now York 14850
BORING LOCATION As Rom
I
PLAN AMWI Jr.
Country inn & Suites Hotel 11C.-MGM
Dcr&j &West King Rd.
're" of"am Towpldno Co. NY -
B1
General and Supplimentary General Conditions: Page 0100 - 1
GENERAL CONDITIONS AND SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
1. A.I.A. DOCUMENTS:
A. The "General Conditions Of The Contract for Construction" AIA Document
A201-Latest Edition will become a part of the Agreement, one of the
documents of the contract, and shall govern the work under this Contract.
B. Where any Article to the AIA General Conditions is supplemented herein, the
AIA provisions of such an Article shall remain in effect; all supplementary
provisions shall be considered as added hereto. Where any such Article is
amended, voided, or superseded herein, the provisions of such an Article not
so specifically amended or superseded, shall remain in effect.
C. A copy of the AIA General Conditions may be obtained from the office of the
Architect, or from the office of the AIA.
2. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS:
Article and Paragraph numbers used hereinafter refer to those specified Articles
and Paragraphs under AIA General Conditions.
ARTICLE 1 -CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:
1.1 DEFINITIONS:
Sub-Paragraph 1.1.1 Delete last sentence of paragraph and substitute as
follows:
The Contract Documents shall also include Instructions to Bidders,
Contractor's Proposal, as accepted by Owner, and Performance and
Payment Bonds, if any.
Add New Sub-paragraphs:
1.1.8 OWNER - Refer to Instructions to Bidders for Owner's name and
address.
1.1.9 CONTRACTOR - Where used in the General and Supplementary
Conditions, Bidding Requirements and General Requirements, refers to
Prime Contractors.
General and Supplimentary General Conditions: Pane 0100 -2
ARTICLE I - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: (Con't)
1.1.10 GENERAL CONTRACTORS - Where used in these Documents, refers to
the Contractor for General Construction Work.
1.1.11 FURNISH - Shall moan purchase and/or fabricate and deliver to the job
site or other location when so designated.
1.1.12 INSTALL - Shall mean build-in, mount-in position, connect or apply the
specified object(s) and where applicable, adjust and start in operation.
1.1.13 PROVIDE - Shall be understood to mean "Provide complete in place"
that is "furnished and installed".
1.1.14 Where AS DIRECTED, AS ALLOWED, APPROVED, ACCEPTANCE or
words similar ,are used, it shall be understood that the. direction, allowance,
approval or acceptance of the Architect is intended, except where otherwise
stated.
1.1.15 ABBREVIATED - Reference to Technical Society, organization or body is
made in Specifications in accordance with the following:
AIA American Institute of Architects
ACI American Concrete Institute
AIEE American Institute of Electrical Engineers
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
ASA American Standards Association
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society of Testing Materials
AWSC American Welding Society Code
FS Federal Specifications
NRFU National Board of Fire Underwriters
NBS National Bureau of Standards
,NEC National Electrical Code
SPR Simplified Practice Recommendations
UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
General and Supplimentary General Conditions: Page 0100 -3
1.2 CORRELATION & INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:
Add following sub-paragraphs:
1.2.4 FIGURED DIMENSIONS:
Drawings in general, are made to scale, but all working dimensions shall
be taken from the figured job dimensions or by actual measurements, at
the job and in no case by scaling. The contractor shall study and compare
all drawings and verify all figures before laying out or constructing the
Work, and shall be responsible for any or all errors in his Work which
might,have been avoided thereby. Whether or not an error is believed to
exist, deviation from the Drawings and Specifications and the dimensions
given thereon shall be made only after approval in writing is obtained from
the Architect.
1.2.6 CONFLICTS:
During the course of the Work, should any errors, inconsistency,
omissions, ambiguities, discrepancies, or conflicts be found on the
Drawings or in the Specifications, or should there be found any
discrepancies or conflicts between the Drawings and Specifications to
which the Contractor has failed to call attention to before submitting his
Bid, then the Architect will interpret the intent of the Drawings and
Specifications and the Contractor hereby agrees to provide better quality
or greater quantity in accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
ARTICLE 3 -CONTRACTOR:
3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS:
Sustitute sub-paragraph 3.4.2 with:
EQUIVALENTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS - Where, in these specifications,
certain kinds, types, or manufacturers of materials are named, they shall
be regarded as the required standard of quality. Where two or more are
named these are presumed to be equal. If the Contractor desires to use
any kind, type, brand, or manufacturer of material other than those named
in the Specifications, he shall notify the Architect in writing prior to Award
of Contract what kind, type, brand, or manufacturer he is including in his
Base Bid for the specified items and shall submit information describing in
specific detail wherein it differs from the quality and performance required
General and Supplimentary General Conditions: Page 0100 -4
by the Base Specifications and all other information as may be required
by the Owner.
3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
Add the following Sub-Paragraph
3.12.11 Unless otherwise directed or specified, the. submittal and
resubmittal of shop drawings, setting drawings and schedules shall be in
the form of six (6) B & W prints. Six copies of catalogs and catalog data
shall be submitted. Space shall be allowed on each sheet for approval
stamp. All drawings shall be of not less than 24 x 30 inches, except as
otherwise approved.
3.12.12 Immediately after signing of Contract between Owner and
Contractor, submit a complete list of shop drawings for all trades and the
approximate dates on which they will be submitted for approval.
3.12.13 Samples shall be properly labeled, giving the following
information as applicable:
The project name and location.
The manufacturer supplying.
The name, finish and composition of material.
The Contractor fabricating and/or supplying.
The location where materials are to be used.
When approved, the samples shall be so identified.
Labels shall be large enough for approval stamp.
ARTICLE 5 - SUB-CONTRACTORS:
5.1 DEFINITIONS:
Sub-Paragraph 5.1.1 modify first sentence of paragraph as follows:
A Sub-Contractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the
Contractor to provide material and/or labor for the project, on or off of the
site.
General and Supplimentary General Conditions: Page 0100 - 5
5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS, ETC.
Sub-Paragraph 5.2.2 Add:
Approval of a Sub-Contractor may be revoked or withdrawn if, in the
opinion of the Architect, such Sub-Contractor evidences unwillingness or
inability to perform his Work in strict accordance with the Contract
Documents.
ARTICLE 6 -,,, CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE
CONTRACTORS:
Add New Sub-Paragraph: 6.4 CUTTING PATCHING
6.4.1 The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall provide all openings in walls,
floors and partitions which are required for pipes, ducts, registers, etc.,
and the Work in connection therewith. Such openings shall be of size
and in locations required by other Contractors. Sleeves for piping and
conduit shall be provided and installed by these contractors and the
General contractor shall cooperate with them in allowing ample time for
installation. If the other contractors require chases or openings after
construction Work is in place, the General Contractor shall provide them
and the COST SHALL BE BORNE by the CONTRACTOR WHO
REQUIRES THE WORK TO BE DONE.
6.4.2 Each Contractor shall do all digging, cutting, fitting and/or patching
in connection with his Work that may be required to make its several parts
come together properly and fit to receive or be received by Work of other
contractors as shown upon or reasonably implied by the Drawings and the
Specifications for the completed structure.
6.4.3 If through neglect of any Contractor to give required information in
regard to cutting of Work of other trades in AMPLE TIME to prevent
unnecessary Work, or if through the delay or mistake of any Contractor, it
is necessary to do any additional amount of cutting or replacing or Work,
the contractor requiring the cutting SHALL PAY for such cutting and all
necessary patching and repairing in connection with this additional
cutting. The Contractor shall not impair the strength of the construction
nor endanger any Work by cutting, digging or other wise the consent of
the Architect.
General and'Supplimentary General Conditions: Page 0100 - 6
6.4.4 All required cutting and patching and restoring shall be neatly done
by mechanics skilled in their trades and to the satisfaction of the
Architect.
6.4.5 Each contractor shall leave Work of his trade WHOLE, PERFECT
AND COMPLETE at the final completion of the project.
ARTICLE 8 - TIME:
Add New Sub-Paragraph
8.1.5 Work remaining to be completed after substantial completion of the
Work shall be limited to items which can ordinarily be completed within
the period between the payment at the time of substantial completion and
final payment.
ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION:
9.3 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
Add New Sub-Paragraph:
9.3.4 SEMI-FINAL APPLICATION - When advised by the contractor that
Work is substantially completed, the Architect and the Contractor shall,
within a reasonable time make a joint inspection of the Work and prepare
a punch list of items to be completed or to be corrected. If the Architect
shall determine that the Work is substantially completed, the Contractor
shall submit a semi-final application.The semi-final application shall
contain all claims of the Contractor against the Owner for money which he
alleges is due on the contract and the extra compensation of any
description or amount will be made after the semi-final application is
presented.
9.3.5 FINAL APPLICATION - Final application for payment shall be
made not less than thirty (30) days from date of semi-final
certificate. The Architect and the contractor shall make a joint
inspection and when the Architect determines to his satisfaction
that all defects that may have appeared in any part of the Work
have been made good and the punch list items have been
completed in strict accordance with the provisions of the Contract,
the Contractor may submit a final certificate. The final application
4
General and Supplimentary General Conditions: Page 0100 - 7
SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY THE DOCUMENTS called for in
the Project Closeout Section of the Specifications.
9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS:
Add New Sub-paragraph 9.6.8:
The Contractor shall periodically, and in accordance with the Contract,
submit a requisition for payment for Work performed and/or materials
furnished. The Owner, in accordance with the terms of the contract, shall
pay the requisition, less an amount necessary to satisfy any outstanding
claim, liens or judgments, and less *a retained amount per contract, except
that not more than ten percent may be retained if there is not a
Performance Bond and a Labor and Material bond, both in the full amount
of the Contract. The Owner shall pay upon requisition for materials
delivered to the site or off-site and suitably stored and secured as
required by the Owner. However, the Owner may limit such payment to
materials in short and/or critical supply and materials specifically
fabricated for the project as defined in the Contract. When work
contemplated by the terms of the contract is substantially complete, the
contractor shall submit a Semi-final Application per item 9.3.4. The
Owner shall pay the remaining amount less two times the value of any
items to be completed and an amount necessary to satisfy any
outstanding claims, liens, judgments against the contractor. As remaining
items of Work are satisfactorily completed or corrected, the Owner shall
pay upon requisition for these items.
Within 15 calendar days after receipt of a payment from the Owner, the
Contractor shall pay each of his Sub-Contractors.and material men for
Work performed and/or materials furnished by them as reflected in the
payment from the Owner, less an amount necessary to satisfy any
outstanding claims, liens, judgments and less a retained amount of not
more than five percent, except that the Contractor may retain not more
than ten percent provided that prior to entering into a Sub-Contract with
the Contractor, the Sub-Contractor is unable or unwilling to provide a
Performance Bond and a Labor and Material bond both in the full amount
of the Sub-Contractor at the request of the Contractor.
General and Supplimentary General Conditions: Page 0100 - 8.
The Contractor shall not retain portions of proceeds owed the Sub-
Contractor and/or material men from the Owner's payment to the
Contractor for the "contract balance". Similar provisions apply to the Sub-
Contractor and/or material mem paying each of his Sub-Contractors and
material men. There will be no obligation on the part of the Owner to pay,
or to see a payment of, Sub-Contractors or material men from a
Contractor, - nor, any relationship
ationship in Contract of otherwise implied or
expressed, between the Sub-Contractor and material men and the Owner.
ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY:
ADD NEW SUB-PARAGRAPH 10.2.8:
Title to all completed and partially completed Work at the job site, and to
all materials delivered to and stored at said job site which are intended to
become part of the completed Work covered by the Contract, shall be in
the name of the Owner. Notwithstanding the foregoing, and prior to the
acceptance of the completed Work by the Owner, the contractor shall be
liable ,for all loss and/or damage to said completed Work, partially
completed Work, materials or equipments furnished by others, the
custody,of which has been given to the contractor arising from any cause
other than a cause against which the Owner herein undertakes to carry
insurance. In the event of the loss or damage from cause other than those
against which the Owner undertakes to carry insurance, the Contractor
shall replace and repair the said Work or materials at his own cost and
expense, to the complete satisfaction of the Owner and Architect.
The Contractor shall sustain the loss or damage arising from the nature of
the Work to be done under this Contract or from unforeseen or unusual
obstructions of difficulties which may be encountered in prosecuting the
Work or from the actions of the elements including water, or wind, or frost.
The Contractor shall maintain suitable, adequate, lawful barricades, guard
lights, warning and all safeguards to protect all property and personnel,
public or private.
(END OF SECTION)
Section 01100 - Summary of Work: Page 01100 - 1
DIVISION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01100 - SUMMARY OF WORK
1.01 WORK UNDER THIS CONTRACT:
Scope: The Work, in general, consists of general construction, mechanical and electrical
work for a new two story, 58 room Hotel building and related site work. The Work is
described by the Drawings and Specifications.
1.02 SITE INSPECTION:
The Contractor shall visit 66 site and satisfy himself as to the existing conditions under
which he is to operate or that will in any way effect the Work. No allowance will be made
for corrective Work for claims based on ignorance of such conditions, subsequent to
signing the Contract.
1.03 LAWS, PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS:
Work installed under the Contract shall conform to all requirements of any Local, State or
National Codes governing such Work. This shall not be construed as relieving the
Contractor from complying with any of the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications
which may be in excess of the requirements of the governing code. Should any Work as
specified or shown on the. Drawings conflict with the prevailing Code, call same to the
attention of the Architect before submitting bid and the necessary changes will be promptly
made.
A Certificate of Compliance and Certificate of Occupancy from all governing authorities will
be required from the Contractor before request for final payment is approved.
The Contractor assumes full responsibility for the safety of employees, authorized visitors,
materials and work, with respect to persons and property.
National Safety Codes:
All Contractors, Sub-Contractors and material suppliers shall comply with the latest
regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) of the U.S. Labor
Department.
Section 01100 - Summary of Work: Page 01100 - 2
No work shall be provided which is in conflict with this Code. Should the Contractor detect a
conflict between the Contract Documents and OSHA Regulations, he shall, notify the
Architect in writing immediately.
Ail references to Codes, specifications, and standards in the Specification Sections and on
the Drawings shall mean, and are intended to be, the latest editions, amendment and/or
revision of such reference standard in effect as of the date of these Contract Documents.
The Owner shall obtain Building Permit and supply a copy of the same to the Contractor.
The, Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all other permits and inspections for the
work to legally proceed.
1.04 PLAN OF OPERATIONS AND PROGRESS SCHEDULE:
In order to facilitate coordination and fitting, the General Contractor shall prepare a "Plan of
Operations" and "Progress Schedule" which shall show concisely the manner in which work
will be started, executed and the interrelationship of work under various contracts, times
upon which different phases of work are to be started, methods and speed for progressing
different phases of work and dates upon which certain Sub-Contractors are dependent
upon that under other Sub-Contractors.
The plan of operations and progress schedule shall be "weighted" to schedule each trade
in proportion to the entire project, both physically and financially.
After approval of the above document, the Contractor shall be responsible for seeing to it
that it is adhered to, and for ascertaining that proper coordination is maintained between
work of all Contracts.
1.05 JOB MEETINGS:
The Contractor, the Architect, and those Sub-Contractor whose presence is necessary,
shall attend periodic (once a week or as directed by the Architect) meetings for purpose of
discussing the progress and execution of the work. These meetings shall be held at a time
and place designated by the Architect. The proceedings of these meetings will be recorded
by the Architect and a copy of same will be subsequently furnished to each Contractor for
his use. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to distribute copies as may be required to
his Sub-Contractors.
Section 01100 - Summary of Work: Page 01100 - 3
The above job meetings are separate and in addition to job meetings called for by the
Contractor for general construction, for the purpose of job coordination, job direction, and
expediting, and updating progress schedules. Such meetings shall be held at least once
per month and shall be attended by responsible representatives of each prime Contractor.
(END OF SECTION)
Section 01200 -Temporary Requirements: Page 01200 - 1
DIVISION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01200 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES
PART ONE: GENERAL
1.01 Temporary Services and Facilities:
A. The General Contractor shall provide, maintain, and remove when no longer
required temporary services and facilities as may be necessary, including but not
limited to, field office, job telephone, temporary heat and electric, water, chemical
toilets, temporary doors, closures, temporary stairs, hoists, scaffolds, project sign,
etc. The costs of these services and facilities shall be included in the Contract
Sum and shall include costs of obtaining permits and approvals, costs of fuel and
equipment etc.
B. Make all temporary connections to utilites and services in locations acceptable to
Owner; maintain such connections; remove the temporary installation and sources
of supply to proper operating condition.
PART TWO: WORK BY CONTRACTOR
2.01 Temporary Field Offices:
A. The project occupies the entire site. The Contractor shall make arrangements to
provide and maintain a suitable office at the site for use of the field suprintendent,
the contractor and the architect. It shall have outside door, windows for cross-
ventilation, electric outlets and lights, heat and an adequate pad lock. Provide a
separate toll free dial phone for use by the architect and the contractor. Job office
shall have adequate furniture and plan table for proper use.
2.02 Temporary Toilets:
A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain chemical toilets on the site of adequate
capacity for all Contractor personnel use.
2.03 Water:
A. Water for construction purposes as well as potable water shall be provided by the
General Contractor. The General Contractor shall make and pay for all temporary
connections and removal thereof and shall make the water available for use of all
trades of contracts.
Section 01200 - Temporary Requirements: Page 01200 - 2
2.04 Temporary Heat and Enclosure:
A. The contractor shall provide temporary heat as necessary to carry out the work in
accordance with specifications. Provide enclosures for the duration of the project
as required to execute the work within the temperature ranges required by the
Specifications. Provide enclosures as required for the protection of materials
stored on the site,
2.06 Temporary Stairs, Hoists, Scaffolds, etc.:
A. Furnish and maintain all equipment such as temporary stairs, doors, pedestrian
walkways, ladders, ramps, hatchways; equipment and construction shall meet all
requirements of the Labor Law, and other applicable State and/or Local Laws.
2.06 Protection of Occupied Portions of Building:
A. In general, the Contractor will be required to protect at all times, occupied portions
of the building affected by the construction operations against weather, noise and
dust. Access to and from the existing five story building at the rear shall be
maintained at all times. Provide protected access as determined by the City of
Ithaca.
2.07 Parking:
A. The Contractor shall arrange for parking for Contractor personnel.
2.08 Temporary Light and Power:
A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for temporary electric service during
construction for lighting and for power tools. Temporary lighting system shall be
furnished, installed and maintained as required to satisfy minimum requirements for
safety and security, and for general illumination in the areas where work is being
performed. Provide ground-fault personnel protection for all single phase 15 and 20
ampere receptacle outlets. All receptacle and portable cord connectors shall have
NEMA type configurations. Install all temporary wiring and equipment in conformity
with the National Electric Code.
2.09 Staging Area:
A. The project occupies the entire site. The Contractor shall arrange and provide for
on site staging areas for use by all trades.
Section 01200 -Temporary Requirements: Page 01200 - 3
2.10 Surface and Sub-surface Water:
A. Provide and maintain all necessary pumps and equipment to keep all areas of the
work free from accumulation of water.
2.11 Repair of Damaged Property:
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for Roadways, pavements, curbs, and utility
lines, structures, or facilities that are broken, damaged,,, settled, or otherwise
defective as a result of receiving, handling, or storage of materials or of any neglect
of any Contractor to properly protect the pavements against damage shall be fully
restored to the satisfaction of the Authorities having jurisdiction at the full cost and
expense of the Contractor responsible for the damage. The extent of the repairs
and replacements shall be determined by those Authorities or by the Owner of the
damaged items.
(END OF SECTION)
Section 01300 - Insurance: Page 01300 - 1
DIVISION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01300 - INSURANCE
1. GENERAL:
1.1 In addition to the requirements specified under the AIA General Conditions and in
addition to the insurance required by law, the Contractor shall, before commencing work
under his contract and during the period of construction to the date of final acceptance by
the Owner, effect and maintain insurance coverage as decribed in this Section.
1.2 No Sub-Contractor shall be permitted to undertake any portion of this contract without
first having presented to the Contractor certification attesting to similar coverages as are
required by the Contractor under this Section. Such certification shall be issued to and in
the form acceptable to the Contractor.
2. CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE:
2.1 File with Owner, Cerifficates of Insurance for each policy, containing the information
described herein. Do not commence construction until approval of ceffificates has been
obtained from the Architect or Owner.
a) Name and address of the insured.
b) Job location and title for the Contract.
c) Policy number and expiration date.
d) Insurance date of certification.
e) Types of coverage included.
f) Limit of liability for each type.
g) Types of operations covered (classifications).
h) Types of operations or of coverages specifically excluded.
i) Verification that not less than 15 days written notice shall be sent to both Owner and
the Architect at the addresses shown in Specifications in event that the policy is to
be cancelled, reduced or changed in coverage or will not be renewed.
Section 01300 - Insurance: Page 01300 -2
2.2 ,No certificates for policies containing escape clauses or exclusions contrary to the
Owner's interests will be accepted.
3. TYPES OF COVERAGE:
3.1 Workmen's Compensation Insurance as required by the Laws of the State Of New York.
3.2 Comprehensive General Liability Insurance as required including:
a) Manufacturer's and Contractor's coverage on all premises and operations.
b) Eldvators or hoists, if any.
c) Contractor's protective liability and property damage.
d) Completed operations.
e) Note: Where coverage under classifications normally exculde XCU (explosion,
collapse, underground damage) Contractor's must obtain coverage to eliminate such ,,
exclusions.
3.3 Automobile Liability Insurance
a) Owned Vehicles.
b) Non-Owned Vehicles.
c) Hired Vehicles
3.4 Builder's Risk Insurance: The Contractor shall effect, maintain and pay for Builder's
Risk Insurance on the insurable portions of the project for the benefit of the Owner, the
Contractor, and all other Contractors and Sub-Contractors as their interests may appear.
Coverage shall include fire and extended coverage, and cover all materials or work in
place.
3.5 During the life of this Contract, each Contractor shall carry insurance or protection or
specified fire insurance equivalent to the standard coverage and theft, vandalism and
malicious mischief endorsements on all Contractor's machinery, equipement, tools, forms,
scaffolding, construction work, but not becoming part of the completed building,
The Owner and Architect shall be indemnified in case of loss from any cause whatsoever.
There shall be no liability on the part of the Owner for the property of this nature belonging
Section 01300 - Insurance: Page 01300 - 3
to or rented by any Contractor or Sub-Contractor or to any employee of a Contractor or
Sub-Contractor.
4. MINIMUM LIMITS OF COVERAGE
4.1 While Contractors are required to furnish the required coverage with limits not less than
the amounts tabulated herein, they are encouraged to carry higher limits.
a) Compensation: Statutory coverage is required by Law.
b) Bodily Injury: Single 3,000,000.00.
c) Property Damage: Single Limit---------$ 3,000.000,00.
d) Automobile covering owned and/or rented vehicles off and on the premises: same
limits as above.
5. CONTINUITY:
5.1 In the event of loss by fire or other insured hazard during the term of the Contract, the
Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner and Architect and insurance adjustors in all
procedures incidental to the expeditious adjustment of the loss, and shall during this period
maintain progress of construction. The Contractor will not be relieved from his obligation for
the proper execution of this Contract except that the time of completion may be extended
for such number of days as may have been delayed by reason of such loss, as determined
by the Architect.
(END OF SECTION)
Section 01400 - Project Close Out: Page 01400 -1
DIVISION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01400 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT
1. CLEANING UP:
1.1 The premises and the job sites shall be maintained in a neat and orderly condition and
kept free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish during the entire construction
period. Remove crates, cartons, and other flammable waste materials or trash from the
work areas at the end�of each working day.
1.2 All parts of the construction site used by the Contractor shall be kept clean and left free
from non-reusable existing materials, rubbish, containers, equipment, extraneous
construction materials, dirt and dust by daily disposal of trash and by end of week general
cleanup.
1.3 All disposable materials shall be removed from the property and be legally and properly
disposed of off-site. No on-site burning will be permitted.
1.4 Care shall be taken by workmen not to mark, soil, or otherwise deface existing or
finished structures. In the event that finished surfaces become defaced, clean and restore
such surfaces to their original condition.
1.5 Clean up immediately upon completion of each trade's work.
1.6 Upon completion of the work, remove temporary platforms and structures, fences,
scaffolding,
affolding, surplus materials, and rubbish of every kind from the job site.
1.7 Final Cleaning: Before final acceptance of the work, all *ceiling and wall surfaces, floors,
metal work, and equipment, etc. shall be thoroughly cleaned.
A. Use experienced workmen or professional cleaners for final cleaning.
B. Maintain cleaning until the building or portion thereof is occupied by the owner.
C. Remove grease, dirt, dust, stains, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from
interior and exterior surfaces.
D. Repair, patch, and touch up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishes.
E. Wash all glass installed as work of this contract. Windows shall be cleaned both
inside and outside including tracks.
F. Clean transparent and glossy materials to a polished condition. Remove foreign
substances. Polish reflective surfaces to a clear shine.
G. Vacuum clean carpeted and similar soft surfaces.
H. Clean resilient and hard surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
I.* Clean surfaces of equipment. Remove excess lubrication.
Section 01400 - Project Close Out: Page 01400 -2
J. Clean plumbing fixtures and similar items to a sanitary condition.
K. Clean permanent filters of ventilating equipment and replace disposable filters
when units have been -operated during construction. In addition, -clean ducts,
blowers, and coils when units have been operated without filters during
construction.
L. Clean light fixtures and lamps.
M. Remove waste, foreign matter, and debris from roots, gutters, areaways, and
drainage system.
N. Remove waste, debris, and surplus materials from site. Clean grounds, remove
stains, spills, and foreign substances from paved areas annd swep clean. rake
clean and other exterior surfaces.
2. DOCUMENTS REQUIRED PRIOR TO FINAL PAYMENT:
2.1 Guarantees: The guarantees required by the General and Supplementary Conditions
and any other extended guarantees stated in the technical sections of the Specifications.
2.2 Release of Liens (Refer to General Conditions):
a) Affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials equipment and other indebtedness
connected with the work have been paid.
b) Consent of surety (if any) to final payment.
c) Receipts, releases and waivers of liens from Sub-Contractors and material suppliers.
2.3 Confirmed Construction Drawings:
a) As work progresses, keep a complete and accurate record of all changes deviations,
have them neatly and correctly entered in colored crayon on proper print of drawings
affected and have print kept available at site for inspection.
b) When work is completed and before requesting approval, make final corrections to
complete set of sepias and two sets of black line prints. Sign each sepia as
certification of accuracy and deliver same to Architect.
2.4 Fixture, Furnishing, Equipment and Materials: Upon completion of work, the Contractor
shall submit two bound copies of all Fixture, Furnishing, Equipment and Materials used in
the building including approved shop drawings.
Section 01400 - Project Close Out: Page 01400 -3
2.5 Maintenance Manuals: Upon completion of work, the Contractor shall submit two bound
copies of maintenance manuals presenting full details for care and maintenance of all
equipment and surfaces under each Contract.
(END OF SECTION)
COUNTRY INN&SUITES
Ithaca, New York
SECTION 02230 -SITE CLEARING AND DEMOLITION
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Protecting existing trees and vegetation to remain.
2. Removing trees and other vegetation.
3. Topsoil stripping.
4. Clearing and grabbing.
5. Construction fence.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division I Section"Storinwater Pollution Prevention Plan":Requirements for implementing
and modifying the SWPPP.
2. Division 2 Section"Earthwork"for soil materials,excavating,backfilling,and site grading.
3. Division 2 Section"Landscaping"for finish grading,including placing and preparing topsoil
for lawns and planting.
1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain Owner's property,cleared materials
shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to include Owner, Architect,
General Contractor and Subcontractors.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
SITE CLEARING & DEMOLITION 02230- 1
COUNTRY INN &SUITES
Ithaca, New York
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adj oining roads,streets,walks,and other adjacent occupied or
used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct road, streets,walks,or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
3. NYS Route 96(Danby Road)is a state route under the jurisdiction of the New York State
Department of Transportation(NYSDOT).All work performed in the NYSDOT right of
way shall conform to NYSDOT standards.
B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's
premises where indicated.
C. Notify utility locator service for area where project is located before site clearing.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.
B. Provide erosion-control measures as specified on the erosion control and sedimentation plan.
C. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain.
D. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
2.2 TREE PROTECTION
A. Erect and maintain,a temporary chain link fence along part of west perimeter of site to protect
vegetation to remain, as shown on Drawing L101, Demolition Plan. Remove fence when
construction is complete.
1. Do not store construction materials,debris,or excavated material within drip line of trees to
remain.
2. Do not permit vehicles,equipment, or foot traffic within drip line of trees to remain.
B. Do not excavate within drip line of trees, unless otherwise indicated.
SITE CLEARING & DEMOLITION 02230-2
COUNTRY INN &SUITES
Ithaca, New York
1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within drip line of
remaining trees.
2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within drip line of remaining trees.
C. Where excavation fornew construction is required within drip line oftrees,hand clear and excavate
to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks,comb soil to expose roots,and
cleanly out roots as close to excavation as possible.
I. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly.
2. Temporarily support and protectroots from damage until they are permanentlyrelocated and
covered with soil.
3. Cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out. Backfill with soil as
soon as possible.
D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction
operations, in a manner approved by Architect.
I. Employ a qualified arborist licensed in jurisdiction where Projectis located,to submit details
of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs.
2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to fall-growth status,as determined by
the qualified arborist.
2.3 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Topsoil within the project area has been found to be unsuitable. There is to be no stripping and
stockpiling and any soil present may be re-used only as earth fill in areas of site grading. No earth
fill is to be re-used within the building footprint.Topsoil is to be imported for establishing lawns and
for planting beds.
2.4 UTILITIES
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
2.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new
construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots.
SITE CLEARING & DEMOLITION 02230-3
COUNTRY INN&SUITES
Ithaca, New York
1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.
2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner
where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.
3. Completely remove stumps,roots,-obstructions, and debris except in lawn areas where
removal shall extend to a depth of 18 inches(450 mm)below exposed subgrade.
4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees.
B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material,unless
further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1 Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 8-inch (200-mm) loose depth, and
compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
2.6 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove cobbles,boulders,obstructions,demolished materials,and waste materials,
including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them.off Owner's property..
B. All surplus soil material and unsuitable topsoil are to be spoiled on site as indicated as per grading
plan and shall not be disposed of off site.
2.7 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES
A. Preconstruction Planning: Review thoroughly the SWPPP.Reserve in the field those areas shown
on the Drawings to be dedicated to temporary orpermanent control measures.Notify the Architect
whenever deviations ormodifications ofthe SVvTPPP requirements will affect the management of
erosion and sedimentation.
B. Land Clearing and Grading: Begin major clearing and grading only after installing the primary
erosion and sediment control measures. Install temporary silt fence parallel to finish grade contours
at locations shown on the drawings. Maintain and adjust layout of silt fence as construction
progresses.
C. Surface Stabilization: Stabilize embankment and slopes that are 3:1 or steeper with erosion control
blanket. Install blankets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as soon as slopes are made
ready for topsoiling.
D. Landscaping and Final Stabilization: Vegetate exposed soils with specified landscape materials.
Install rock outlet protection at locations shown on drawings.
END OF SECTION 02230
SITE CLEARING &DEMOLITION 02230-4
1
COUNTRY INN& SUITES
SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 'SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Preparing subgrades for walks,pavements, lawns, and plantings.
2. Granular base course for walks and pavements.
3. Stone materials.
4. Geotextiles.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I. Division I Section"General Conditions."
2. Division 2 Section"Site Clearing"for site clearing and protecting trees to remain.
3. Division Section"Landscaping"for finish grading,including placing and preparing topsoil
for lawns and plantings.
C. Structural excavation,backfill and compaction(building area)are specified in Section 02320.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.
B. Base Course:Layer placed between the subbase and a pavement, walk or structure.
C. Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and base course or between subgrade and
pavement,walk or structure.
D. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill orbackfill when sufficient approved
on-site soil material is not available from excavations.
E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.
I. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation,as well as remedial
work directed by Architect,shall be without additional compensation. Fill and compact
EARTHWORK 02300- 1
COUNTRY INN & SUITES
unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of the same classification,
unless otherwise directed by the Architect.
2. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations,notify
Architect, who will make an inspection of conditions. If the Architect determines that
bearing materials at required subgrade elevations are unsuitable,continue excavation until
suitable bearing materials are encountered and replace excavated material as directed by
Architect.
F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
G. Structures: Buildings,footings,foundations,retaining walls,slabs,tanks,curbs,mechanical and
electrical appurtenances, manholes, catch basins, or other man-made stationary features
constructed above or below the ground surface.
H. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of undisturbed earth remaining after completing excavation,or top
surface of a compacted fill or backfill immediately below base course,pipe bedding,lined channel
or topsoil materials.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1 Separation fabric.
B. Samples: For the following:
1. 12-by-12-inch(300-by-300-mm)sample of separation fabric.
C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for
compliance of the following with requirements indicated:
1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 ofeach on-site orborrow soil material proposed
for fill and backfill.
2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or borrow soil
material proposed for fill and backfill.
3. Sieve analysis results for base course materials.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according
to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials testing,as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and
ASTM E 548.
B. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section"Field Meetings."
EARTHWORK 02300-2
COUNTRY INN & SUITES
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services
according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two weeks in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
4. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.
5. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during
excavation,consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and
utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged
utilities to the satisfaction of utility owner.
B. Use of explosives:Use of explosives will be determined by the Owner.
C. Protection ofPersons and Property:Barricade open excavations occurring as part ofthis work and
post with warning lights.
I. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Protect structures,utilities,sidewalks,pavements,and other facilities from damage caused
by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by
earthworks operations..
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available
from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW,GP,GM,SW,SP,and SM,or a
combination of these group symbols;free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches(75 mm)in any
dimension, debris,waste, frozen materials,vegetation,and other deleterious matter.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC,SC,ML,MH,CL,CH,OL,OH,
and PT, or a combination of these group symbols.
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils notmaintained within 2 percent of optimum
moisture content at time of compaction.
D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials.
E. Base Course: Crushed ledgerock in conformance with NYSDOT Type 2.
EARTHWORK 02300-3
COUNTRY INN&SUITES
F. Subbase Course:Stone,sand and gravel orblends of these materials in accordance with NYSDOT
Type 4.
G. Drainage Stone: Washed,narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone,or crushed or uncrushed
gravel;ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57;with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
(3 8-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.3 6-mm) sieve.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Separation Fabric: Woven geotextile,specifically manufactured foruse as a separation geotextile;
made from polyolefins,polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following minimum properties
determined according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test methods:
1. Grab Tensile Strength: 200 lbf(890 N); ASTM D 4632.
2. Tear Strength: 75 lbf(333 N); ASTM D 4533.
3. Puncture Resistance: 90 lbf(400 N); ASTM D 4833.
4. Water Flow Rate: 4 gpin per sq. ft.(2.7 L/s per sq. in); ASTM D 4491.
5. Apparent Opening Size: No. 30(0.6 mm); ASTM D 4751.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures,utilities, sidewalks,pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective
insulating materials as necessary.
C. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of
soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
3.2 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared
subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
I. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of
subgrade material, undercutting pavement, and soil changes detrimental to stability of
subgrades and structures. Provide and maintain pumps,well points,sumps, suction and
discharge lines,and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away
from excavations. Saturated,unstable soil conditions are not suitable for subgrades under
structures.
EARTHWORK 02300-4
COUNTRY INN & SUITES
2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage swales and other diversions outside excavation
limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collecting or runoff
areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. Provide temporary
erosion and sediment control.
3.3 EXPLOSIVES
A. Explosives:Do not bring explosives to project site or use explosives on proj ect site unless there is
permission of owner.
3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless ofthe character of surface
and subsurface conditions encountered,including rock soil materials, and obstructions.
I. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and
rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections,elevations,and grades.
3.6 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS
A. General: Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of agencies having jurisdiction.
B. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes,ordinances,and requirements of agencies
having jurisdiction. Shore andbrace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or
stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until
completion of backfilling.
C. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing,such as sheet piling, uprights,
stringers, and cross braces, in good serviceable condition. Maintain shoring and bracing in
excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Extend shoring and bracing as
excavation progresses.
3.7 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE
A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with
compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
EARTHWORK 02300-5
COUNTRY INN &SUITES
1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract
provisions for changes in the Work.
C. Proof roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of
excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades.
D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities, as directed by Architect.
3.8 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations orwall footings by extending bottom elevation of
concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom,without altering top elevation. Lean concrete
fill may be used when approved by Architect.
I. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction orutilitypipe as directedby Architect
3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials
without intermixing. Place,grade,and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent
windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
3.10 BACKFILL AND FILL
A. Place soil material in compacted layers to required subgrade elevations promptly,but not before
completing the following:
1 Construction below finish grade including,where applicable,dampproofing,waterproofing,
and perimeter insulation.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents.
3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork.
5. Removing trash and debris.
6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing,and sheeting.
3.11 PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION
A. Ground Surface Preparation:Remove vegetation,debris,unsatisfactory soil materials,obstructions,
and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow strip,or break up
sloped surfaces steeper than I vertical to 4 horizontal so that fill material will bond with existing
surface.
EARTHWORK 02300-6
COUNTRY INN &SUITES
1. Paved Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer,at least one test for
every 2000 sq. ft.(186 sq.m)or less of paved area or slab,but in no case fewer than three
tests.
C. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified,scarify and moisten or aerate,orremove and replace soil to depth required;
recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained at Contractor's expense.
3.15 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic,freezing,and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect;reshape and
recompact.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses,remove finished surfacing,backfill
with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance,quality,and condition offinished surfacing to match adjacentwork,and
eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
3.16 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal:
1. Remove waste material,including unsatisfactory excavated material,demolished pavements,
trash, and debris,and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02300
EARTHWORK 02300-9
COUNTRY INN &SUITES
Ithaca, New York
SECTION 02610-STONE CURBING
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes placing and backfilling new stone curbing.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section"Earthwork"for trenching,bedding, and backfilling.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of material indicated
B. Qualification Data:Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the"Quality Assurance"
Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects(five)
with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other
information specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards:Provide stone curbing according to the materials,workmanship,and other
applicable requirements of the New York State Department of Transportation (NYSDOT)
Standard Specifications, Construction and Materials.
1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard
NYSDOT specifications do not apply to this Section.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed stone curbing
installations similar in material,design,and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record
of successful in-service performance.
STONE CURBING 02610- 1
COUNTRY INN &SUITES
Ithaca, New York
C. Single Source Responsibility:Obtain stone curbing from a single source with resources to provide
products and materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying
progress of the Work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect stone curbing during storage and construction against soiling or contamination from earth
and other materials.
B. Protect grout and mortar materials from deterioration by moisture and temperature.Store in a dry
location or waterproof container.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Site Information:Perform site survey and layout for curbing.Verify that straight length,radius,and
drop curbing sections may be installed in compliance with drawings and referenced standards.
B. Weather Limitations:Protect mortar material against freezing when ambient air temperature is 40
degrees F or lower. Heat materials and provide temporary protection of completed joints.
C. Sequencing and Scheduling: Coordinate stone curbing work with location and alignment of
roadways,parking lot entrances,traffic islands, walks, and drainage inlets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STONE CURBING
A. Stone Curb:Granite,complying with the requirements ofNYSDOT Specifications 714-01 for Type
C curb:
1. Size: 6 inches wide by 16 inches deep.
2. For radii less than 100 feet, radiused curb shall be provided.
B. Concrete Backing and Bedding: Portland cement concrete, 3,000psi mix.
C. Mortar: Cement mortar complying with the requirements of NYSDOT Specifications 705-20.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
STONE CURBING 02610 -2
COUNTRY INN&SUITES
Ithaca, New York
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Do not use stone curbing with cracks,voids,discolorations,and other defects that mightbe visible
in the finished work.
B. Place stone curbing on a continuous concrete backing in accordance with NYSDOT Specifications
609-3.01.
C. Set stone curb on true line and grade to provide a minimum 4-inch and maximum 6-inch reveal
above final pavement elevations,and fit no closer than 114 inch at the aris line.
D. Fill all joints solid with cement mortar,and remove excess mortar from exposed faces of stone
curbing.
E. Backfill,after cement has properly set, with material indicated for applicable pavement section.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tolerances: Provide completed stone curbing installation that does not exceed the following
deviations from specifications and alignments indicated:
1. Curb Reveal: Plus or minus 3/8 inch.
2. Curb Grade: 1/4 inch per 10 feet.
3. Horizontal Alignment: Within 2 inches.
4. Elevation:Within 1/2 inch at any point.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Cleaning:Remove any visible stains,temporary paint,and excess mortar from exposed surfaces,
wash and scrub clean.
B. Protect the installed curbing from chipping,staining,displacement or other damage during backfilling
and paving operations.
END OF SECTION 02610
STONE CURBING 02610 -3
COUNTRY INN & SUITES
Ithaca,New York
SECTION 02741 - HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I. Hot-mix asphalt paving.
2. Hot-mix asphalt patching.
3. Pavement-marking paint.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing and Demolition" for saw-cutting edges of existing
pavement.
2. Division 2 Section"Earthwork"for aggregate base and subbase courses,and geotextile.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product specified. Include technical data and tested physical and
performance properties.
B. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pavement markings, lane separations, and defined parking spaces.
Indicate dedicated handicapped spaces with international graphics symbol.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
E. Material Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of materials with
requirements indicated.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 1
COUNTRY INN &SUITES
Ithaca,New York
F. Material Certificates: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that each material complies
with requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards:Provide hot-mix asphalt pavement according to the materials,workmanship,
and other applicable requirements of the New York State Department of Transportation
(NYSDOT) Standard Specifications, Construction and Materials.
I Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard
specifications do not apply to this Section.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed hot-mix asphaltpaving
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing hot-mix asphalt similar
to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
1. Firm shall be a registered and approved paving mix manufacturer with NYSDOT.
D. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of
Division I Section"Project Meetings"Review methods and procedures related to asphalt paving
including,but not limited to,the following:
I. Review proposed sources of'paving materials,including capabilities and location ofplantthat
will manufacture hot-mix asphalt.
2. Review condition of substrate and preparatory work performed by other trades.
3. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic during
installation period and for remainder of construction period.
4. Review and finalize construction schedule for paving and related work. Verify availability
of materials, paving Installer's personnel, and equipment required to execute the Work
without delays.
5. Review inspection and testing requirements,governing regulations,andproposed installation
procedures. -
6. Review forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable
conditions.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken and
bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material,date of manufacture,
and directions for storage.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 -2
COUNTRY INN & SUITES
Ithaca,New York
B. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean,dry,protected location and within temperature range
required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations,: Do not apply asphalt materials if substrate is wet or excessively damp
or if the following conditions are not met:
1. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F.
2. Asphalt Binder Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of
placement.
3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of placement.
B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean,dry surfaces and at a
minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil-based materials, 50 deg F for
water-based materials,and not exceeding 95 deg F.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ASPHALT MATERIALS
4
A. Tack Coat:Comply with requirements ofNYSDOT Standard Specifications for asphalt emulsion
for tack coat,Material Designation 702-90.
B. Bituminous Joint and CrackFiller:Comply with requirements ofNYSDOT Standard Specifications
for miscellaneous asphalt cements, Material Designation 702-0700.
2.2 MIXES
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt:Comply with requirements ofNYSD0T Standard Specifications 401-2:01 through
401-2.06 for the material and composition of the following courses:
1. Binder Course: Type 3 asphalt concrete.
2. Surface Course: Type 7 asphalt concrete.
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, water-base emulsion, ready'-mixed, complying with FS
TT-P-195 2.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 -3
COUNTRY INN &SUITES
Ithaca,New York
I Color: White.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that subbase and base courses are dry and in suitable condition to support paving and
imposed loads.
B. Proof-roll prepared base course in presence of Architect to locate areas that are unstable or that
require further compaction.
C. Do notbegin paving installation until deficient areas in base course and subbase course have been
satisfactorily corrected.
3.2 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A. Patching: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base or
subbase. Re-compact new subgrade. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches,extending 12
inches into adjacent sound pavement,unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically.
1. Tack coat faces of excavation and allow to cure before paving.
2. Fill excavation with hot-mix asphalt binder mix and, while still hot,compact flush with
adjacent surface. -
B. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot-mix asphalt surface course
to level sags and fill depressions deeper than I inch in existing pavements.
1. Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 3 inches thick.
C. Crack and Joint Filling:Apply oint and crack filler to finished joints between new and previously
constructed asphaltpavements,to longitudinal j oints abutting curbing and at joints with storm sewer
drainage inlets.
D. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to existing surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or portland
cement concrete paving and to surfaces abutting orprojecting into new,hot-mix asphalt pavement.
Apply at a uniform rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd.of surface.
1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before paving.
2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces,appurtenances,and surroundings. Remove
spillages and clean affected surfaces.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 -4
COUNTRY INN &SUITES
Ithaca,New York
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General: Immediatelybefore placing aspbaltmaterials,remove loose and deleterious material from
substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared base course or subbase is ready to receive paying.
1 Sweep loose granular particles from surface ofunbound-aggregate base course or subbase
course. Do not dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base
course or subbase course.
3.4 GEOTEXTILE PLACEMENT
A. Apply bond coat,consisting of asphalt cement,uniformly to existing surfaces at a rate of 0.20 to
0.30 gal./sq. yd.
B. Place paving geotextile promptly according to manufacturer's written instructions. Broom orroll
geotextile smooth and free of wrinkles and folds. Overlap longitudinal joints 4 inches and transverse
joints 6 inches.
1. Protect paving geotextile from traffic and other damage and place overlay paving the same
day.
3.5 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING
A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt mix on prepared surface,spread uniformly,and strike off. Place
asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of
mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section,and thickness,when compacted.
1. Place hot-mix asphalt binder course in a single lift to the thicknesses indicated.
2. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F.
3. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of
one-way slopes,unless otherwise indicated.
4. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth,continuous surface free ofpulls and tears
in asphalt-paving mat.
B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide,except where infill edge strips of a
lesser width are required.
I. After first strip has been placed and rolled,place succeeding strips and extend rolling to
overlap previous strips. Complete asphalt binder course for a section before placing asphalt
surface course.
C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to
remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent
segregation of mix;use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 -5
COUNTRY INN &SUITES
Ithaca,New York
3.6 JOINTS
A. Constructjoints to ensure continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Constructjoints free
of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course.
I. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat.
2. Offset longitudinal joints in successive courses aminimum of 6 inches.
3. Offset transverse joints in successive courses a minimum of 24 inches.
4. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive
displacement.
5. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.
3.7 COMPACTION
A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without
excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate
compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.
1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F.
B. Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and
outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown,grade,and
smoothness. Repair surfaces by loosening displaced material,filling with hot-mix asphalt,and re-
rolling to required elevations.
C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately afterbreakdown rolling,while hot-mix
asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course
has been uniformly compacted to the following density:
1. Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to ASTM D 1559,
but not less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent.
2'. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to
ASTM D 2041,but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent.
D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.
E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished,trim edges of'pavement to proper
alignment. Bevel edges while still hot,with back ofrake or smooth iron. Compact thoroughly using
tamper or other satisfactory method.
F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials. Remove
paving course over area affected and replace with fresh,hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to
specified density and surface smoothness.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 -6
COUNTRY INN & SUITES
Ithaca,New York
G. Protection: After final rolling,do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and
hardened.
H. Eiect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become
marked.
3.8 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances:
I. Binder Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch,no minus.
B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following
tolerances as determined by using a I 0-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to
paved areas:
I. Binder Course: 1/4 inch.
2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch.
3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.
Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch(6 mm).
3.9 PAVEMENT MARKING
A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout,colors,and placementhave been verified with
Architect.
B. Allow paving to cure for 30 days before starting pavement marking.
C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
D. Applypaintwith mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings ofdimensions indicated with
uniform,straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet
film thickness of 15 mils.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency:Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field
inspections and tests and to prepare test reports.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 -7-
COUNTRY INN&SUITES
Ithaca,New York
I Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested Work
complies with or deviates from specified requirements.
B. Additional testing,at Contractor's expense,will be performed to determine compliance of corrected
Work with specified requirements.
C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according
to ASTM D 3549.
D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance
with smoothness tolerances.
E. In-Place Density: Samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement will be
secured by testing agency according to ASTM D 979.
1. Reference laboratory density will be determined by averaging results from 4 samples of
hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site,prepared according to ASTM D 1559,
and compacted according to job-mix specifications.
2. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from 4
samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site,prepared according to
ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.
3. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples
according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.
a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq.yd.(83 6 sq.in)or less of installed
pavement,but in no case will fewer than 3 cores be taken.
b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear
method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or
ASTM D 2726.
F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements
indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 02741
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 -8
COUNTRY INN & SUITES
Ithaca, New York
SECTION 02751 - CEMENT/CONCRETE PAVEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior cement/concrete pavement for the following:
1. Walkways.
2. Concrete curbing.
3. Steel reinforcement for concrete pavements.
4. Concrete footings for wood enclosures and handicap parking signs.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 Division 2 Section"Earthwork" for subgrade preparation,grading,and subbase course.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended
hydraulic cement,expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated
blast-furnace slag, and silica fame.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix. Include alternate mix designs when
characteristics of materials,project conditions,weather,test results,or other circumstances warrant
adjustments.
C. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials
complies with requirements:
CEMENT/CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751-1
COUNTRY INN & SUITES
Ithaca, New York
1. Cementitious materials and aggregates.
2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
3. Admixtures.
4. Curing compounds.
5. Applied finish materials.
6. Joint fillers.
7. Joint sealants.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed pavement work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with
ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mix Concrete Association's
Plant Certification Program.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency,acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction,qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated,
as documented according to ASTM E 548.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the
same manufacturer's plant and each aggregate from one source.
E. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301,"Specification for Structural Concrete,"unless modified
by the requirements of the Contract Documents.
F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
G. Mockups: Castmockups of full-size sections of concrete pavement to demonstrate typical joints,
surface finish, texture,color,and standard of workmanship.
1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or,if not indicated,as directed by
Architect.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Obtain Architect's approval of mockiips before starting construction.
4. Maintain approved mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed pavement.
CEMENT/CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751-2
COUNTRY INN & SUITES
Ithaca, New York
5. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to include Owner, Architect,
General Contractor and Concrete Subcontractor.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMS
A. Form Materials: Plywood,metal,metal-framed plywood,or other approved panel-type materials
to provide full-depth, continuous, straight,smooth exposed surfaces.
I. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a radius 100 feet(30.5 m) or less.
B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,stain,
or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete
surfaces.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615,Grade 60.
B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat
sheets.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. General: Use the same brand and type of cementitious material from the same manufacturer
throughout the Project.
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or H.
1 Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.
CEMENT/CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751-3
COUNTRY INN &SUITES
Ithaca, New York
C. Aggregate: ASTM C 33,uniformly graded,from a single source,with coarse aggregate as follows:
1. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inch(38 mm)nominal.
2. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing substances that cause spalling.
D. Water: ASTM C 94.
PART 3 -ADMIXTURES
A. General: Admixtures certifiedby manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble
chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures.
B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
C. High-Range,Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.
D. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
3.1 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182,Class 2,burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq.yd.(305 g1sq.m) dry.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
C. Water: Potable.
3.2 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: Ceramar, closed cell foam, available from W. R.
Meadows,Inc,Hampshire,Illinois, or approved equivalent.
B. Exterior Curing and Sealing Compound for walks:
1. Products
a. Masterbuilders Kure-N-Seal W,transparent acrylic water-based curing,sealing and
dustproofing compound or approved equivalent.
CEMENT/CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751-4
COUNTRY INN & SUITES
Ithaca, New York
3.3 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, for each type and
strength ofnormal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience.
B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for
the trial batch method.
C. Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength(28 Days): 4000 psi(27.6 MPa), minimum.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.46.
3. Slump Limit: 3 inches(75 nun).
D. Cementitious Materials: Limitpercentage,by weight,oftementitious materials other than portland
cement according to ACI 301 requirements for concrete exposed to deicing chemicals.
E. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of
placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus or minus .1.5 percent:
1. Air Content: 5.5 percent for 1-1/2-inch(38-mm)maximum aggregate.
3.4 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94.
1 When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg Q and 90 deg F(32 deg Q,reduce
mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes;when air temperature is above 90
deg F (32 deg C),reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
B. Project-Site Mixing: Comply with requirements and measure,batch,and mix concrete materials
and concrete according to ASTM C 94. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch
machine mixer.
1. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project
identification name and number,date,mix type,mix time,quantity,and amount of water
added.
PART 4 - EXECUTION
4.1 PREPARATION
CEMENT/CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751-5
COUNTRY INN & SUITES
Ithaca, New York
A. Proof-roll prepared base surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional
compaction. Proceed with pavement only after non-conforming conditions have been corrected
and subgriade is ready to receive pavement.
B. Remove loose material from compacted base surface immediately before placing concrete.
4.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A. Set,brace, and secure edge forms,bulkheads,and intermediate screed guides for pavement to
required lines,grades,and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so
forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent to ensure separation from concrete
without damage.
4.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice"for fabricating reinforcement' and
with recommendations in CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting
reinforcement.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale,earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.
C. Arrange, space,and securely tie bars and bar supports to bold reinforcement in position during
concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.
D. Install welded wire mesh in lengths as long as practicable.Lap adjoining pieces at least one full
mesh,and lace splices with wire.Offset laps ofadjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either
direction.
4.4 JOINTS
A. General: Construct construction,expansion,and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with
faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to
centerline,unless otherwise indicated.
I. When joining existing pavement place transverse joints to align with previouslyplaced joints,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at
locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour,unless pavement
terminates at isolation joints.
CEMENT/CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751-6
COUNTRY INN & SUITES
Ithaca, New York
1. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not
continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Expansion Joints: Form expansion joints ofpreformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curb,light
pole footings, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, and other fixed objects, and where
indicated.
1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 30 feet(12.192 in)as indicated on the drawings,
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Extend joint fillers fall width and depth of joint.
3. Terminate j oint filler less than 1/2 inch(12 mm)or more than 1 inch(25 mm)below finished
surface if joint sealant is indicated.
4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated.
5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required,lace or clip
joint-filler sections together.
6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other
temporary preformed cap.Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both
sides ofjoint.
D. Edging: Tool edges of concrete pavement and joints,in concrete after initial floating with an edging
tool to the following radius.Repeat tooling ofedges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool
marks on concrete surfaces.
4.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete,inspect and complete formwork installation,reinforcement
steel,and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.
B. Remove snow,ice,or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do
not place concrete on frozen surfaces.
C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not
place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation
and alignment.
D. Comply with requirements and with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing,
transporting, and placing concrete.
E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.
F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or
drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
CEMENT/CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751-7
COUNTRY INN & SUITES
Ithaca, New York
G. Consolidate concreteby mechanical vibrating equipment supplementedbyhand-spading,rodding,
ortamping. Use equipment andprocedures to consolidate concrete according to recommendations
in ACI 309R.
H. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Commence initial floating using bull
floats or darbies to form an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or
bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning
finishing operations or spreading dry-shake surface treatments.
I. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C),
uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature
of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C)and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of
placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
3. Do not use calcium chloride,salt,or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical
accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
4. Protect all work and blanket to retain temperatures above freezing. Place high-low
thermometers under blankets to document temperature. Concrete that has frozen within
seven days of placement shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the Owner.
J. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as
follows when hot-weather conditions exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of'placementbelow
90 deg F (32 deg Q. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control
temperature,provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water.
Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover reinforcement steel with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed
ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3. Fog-spray forms,reinforcement steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade moisture uniform without standing water,soft spots, or dry areas.
4.6 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. General: Wetting of concrete surfaces during screeding,initial floating,or finishing operations is
prohibited.
B. FloatFinish: Begin the second floating operation wheribleed-water sheen has disappeared and the
concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Do not use power trowels on
CEMENT/CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751-8
COUNTRY INN & SUITES
Ithaca, New York
concrete pavement.Float surface by hand floating. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high
spots,and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.
1. Broom finish:Apply nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete walks. Immediately after float
finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom,
perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect prior to
application.
4.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weatherprotection and follow recommendations
in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Apply two coats of'curing and sealing compound as permanufacturer's written directions prior to
beginning moisture curing. First coat is to be applied to fresh concrete and second coat is to be
applied prior to substantial completion.
C. Begin curing after finishing and application of curing and sealing compound on concrete.
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist fornot less than seven(7)days with the
following materials:
a. Water.
b. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch(300-min)lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover
for curing concrete,placed in widest practicable width,with sides and ends lapped at least
12 inches(300 min),and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive and maintain for seven(7)
days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and
waterproof tape.
4.8 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:
1. Elevation: 1/4 inch(6 mm).
2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch(9 nun), minus 1/4 inch(6 mm).
3. Surface: Gap below I 0-foot-(3-m-)long,unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch(6
111111).
4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches(75 mm).
5. Control Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 nun), no minus.
6. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch(3 mm), no minus.
CEMENTICONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751-9
COUNTRY INN & SUITES
Ithaca, New York
4.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency:Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspection agency to
sample materials,perform tests,and submit test reports during concrete placement according to
requirements specified in this Article.
B. Additional Tests: Testing agency shall make additional tests of the concrete when test results
indicate slump,air entrainment,concrete strengths,or other requirements have not been met,as
directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by
cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.
C. Testing Services: Testing shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1 Sampling Fresh Concrete: Representative samples of fresh,concrete shall be obtained
according to ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143;one test atpoint ofplacement for each compressive-strength test,but
not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will be
required when concrete consistency changes.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231,pressure method;one test for each compressive-strength test,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064;one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
(4.4 deg C)and below and when 80 deg F(27 deg C)and above,and one test for each set
of compressive-strength specimens.
5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 3 IM;one set of five standard cylinders for
each compressive-strength test,unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders shall be molded and
stored for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required.
6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete
class exceeding 5 cu.yd.(4 cu.ni),but less than 25 cu.yd.(19 cu.m),plus one set for each
additional 50 cu.yd.(3 8 cu.in). One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and three specimens
at 28 days; one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required.
7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured
cylinders,current operations shall be evaluated and corrective procedures shall be provided
for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
8. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three
consecutive compressive-strength testresults equal or exceed specified compressive strength.
and no individual compressive-strengib test result falls below specified compressive strength
by more than 500 psi(3.4 MPa).
9. Microwave test(AASHTOTP23)for water/cementitious ration in final concrete.This test
shall be performed on each load of concrete.
D. Test results shallbe reported in writing to Architect,concrete manufacturer,and Contractor within
24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name
CEMENT/CONCRETE PAVEMENT 0275iA0
COUNTRY INN & SUITES
Ithaca, New York
and number,date of concrete placement,name of concrete testing agency,concrete type and class,
location of concrete batch in pavement,batch reports/tickets,design compressive strength at 28
days,concrete mix proportions and materials,compressive breaking strength,and type ofbreak for
both 7-and 28-day tests.
E. Additional Tests: Testing agency shall make additional tests of the concrete when test results
indicate slump,air entrainment,concrete strengths,or other requirements have not been met,as
directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by
cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42,or by other methods as directed.
4.10 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken,damaged,or defective,or does not meet
requirements in this Section.
B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or
defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement
concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.
C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after
placement. When construction traffic is permitted,maintain pavement as clean as possible by
removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
D. Maintain concrete pavement free ofstains,discoloration,dirt,and other foreign material. Sweep
concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion
inspections.
END OF SECTION 02751
CEMENT/CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751-11
COUNTRY INN & SUITES
Ithaca, New York
SECTION 02870 - SITE FURNISHINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Bicycle Rack.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section"Cement Concrete Pavement"for concrete pad.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Product Data:For each type of site furnishing specified. Include details of construction relative to
materials, dimensions of individual components,profiles,and finishes.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of site furnishing through one source from a single
manufacturer.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 BICYCLE RACKS
A. General: Provide the following manufacturer's Bicycle Rack,or approved equivalent:
1.Product:The Bike Rib
2.Color: Black
3.Quantity: Three(3).
4.Mounting: Surface Mount Option
5.Manufacturer:Function First,Inc. Phone# 1888-245-3742.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SITE FURNISHINGS 02870-1
COUNTRY INN &SUITES
Ithaca, New York
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Anchorbicycle racks in place in hard-scaped area as shown on plans,using tamper-resistant attachment
Qomplying with manufacturer's written instructions and contract documents.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and shim as necessary so that furnishings are plumb and level.
END OF SECTION 02870
SITE FURNISHINGS 02870-2
COUNTRY INN & SUITES
Ithaca, New York
SECTION 02900 - LANDSCAPING
PARTI - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Trees.
2. Shrubs.
3. Perennials and ornamental grasses.
4. Lawns.
5. Imported topsoil.
6. Soil amendments.
7. Fertilizers and mulches.
8. Seed mixes.
9. Granular weed suppressant.
10. Landscape maintenance.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
I. Division 1 Section"General Requirements" for payment schedule.
2. Division 2 Sect-ion "Site Clearing and Demolition" for protection of existing trees and
planting.
3. Division 2 Section"Earthwork"for excavation,filling,rough grading, and wall backfill.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I
Specification Sections.
B. Product certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that their products comply with specified
requirements.
I. Manufacturer's certified analysis for standard products.
2. Product data for all proposed pesticides,fungicides and herbicides.
LANDSCAPING 02900- 1
COUNTRY INN &SUITES
Ithaca, Now York
3. Analysis for other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods
established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists,where applicable.
4. Label data substantiating that plants, trees, shrubs, and planting materials comply with
specified requirements.
C. Certification of grass seed from seed vendor for each grass-seed mixture stating the botanical and
common name and percentage by weight of each species and variety,and percentage of purity,
germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging
D. Samples of each of the following:
1. Shredded bark mulch in labeled plastic bag.
2. Imported topsoil in labeled plastic bag.
E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the"Quality Assurance"Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists ofcompleted projects(five)with project names and
addresses*,names and address of architects and owners,and other information specified.
F. Material test reports from qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results relative to compliance of the following materials with requirements indicated.
1. Analysis of imported topsoil.
2. Analysis of We Care Organics compost.
G. Planting schedule indicating source ofplant material,anticipated dates and locations for each type
of planting.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed landscaping work
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of
successful landscape establishment.
1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time
supervisor on the Project site during times that landscaping is in progress.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance,an independent testing agency must
demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria
conforming to ASTM E 699,that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the
testing indicated without delaying the Work.
C. Provide quality,size,genus,species,andvariety of trees and shrubs indicated,complying with
applicable requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock."
D. Imported Topsoil Analysis:The Contractor will engage a qualified independent soil-testing agency
to obtain a soil analysis made by a sieve analysis,stating percentages of organic matter,inorganic
LANDSCAPING 02900-2
COUNTRY INN &SUITES
Ithaca, Now York
matter(silt, clay, and sand),deleterious material,pH,and mineral and plant-nutrient content of
topsoil.
1. The report shall state suitability of topsoil for growth of applicable planting material and state
recommended quantities ofnitrogen,phosphorus,and potash nutrients and any limestone,
aluminum sulfate,or other soil amendments to be added to produce a satisfactory topsoil.
It shall be the contractor's responsibility to amend topsoil as recommended by the testing
agency to comply with specified topsoil analysis at no additional cost to the Owner.Rate for
additional phosphorus, if any, in perennial areas shall be stated.
E. Imported compost Analysis: If the standard material test report from We Care Organics does not
include soluble salts,the contractor shall engage a qualified independenttesting agency to test for
salt content using a test for soluble salts or an electrical conductivity test.
F. Measurements: Measure trees and shrubs according to ANSI Z60.1 with branches and trunks or
6anes in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements
6 inches(150 mm)above ground for trees up to 4-inch(I 00-mm)caliper size,and 12 inches(300
mm)above ground for larger sizes. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread;,do
not measure branches or roots tip-to-tip.
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of
Division I Section"Project Meetings."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaged Materials: Deliverpackaged materials in containers showing weight,analysis,and name
of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at site.
B. Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled,and undamaged containers.
C. Trees and shrubs: Deliver freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune before delivery,except as
approved by Architect. Protect bark,branches,and root systems from sun scald,drying,sweating,
whipping,and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a
manner as to destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. Do not drop trees
and shrubs during delivery.
1. Immediately after digging bare-root stock,pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other
suitable material to keep root system moist until planting.
D. Handle balled and burlapped stock by the root ball.
E. Deliver trees,shrubs and perennials after preparations for planting have been completed and install
immediately. lfplanting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery,set planting materials in shade,
protect from weather and mechanical damage,and keep roots moist.
LANDSCAPING 02900-'3
COUNTRY INN &SUITES,
Ithaca, New York
1. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil,peat moss,sawdust,or other acceptable
material.
2. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.
3. Water root Systems of trees and shrubs stored on site with a fine-mist spray. Water as often
as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Utilities: Determine location of above grade and underground-utilities and perform work in a
manner whichwill avoid damage. Hand excavate,as required, Maintain grade stakes until removal
is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned.
B. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill,
adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions,-notify Architect before planting.
1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate installation ofplanting materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant
material required.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Warrant the following living planting materials for a period of one year after date of
Substantial Completion, against defects including,death and'u'nsatisfactory growth, except for
defects resulting from neglect,' or abuse by Owner, abnormal weather conditions unusual for
warranty period,or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control.
I. Trees.
2, Shrubs.
3. Perennials and ornamental grasses.
B. Remove and replace dead planting materials immediately unless required to plant in the succeeding
planting season.
C. Replace planting materials that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end
of warranty period.
1.9 TREE AND SHRUB MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Period: 60 days after date of Substantial Completion.
LANDSCAPING 02900-4
COUNTRY INN & SUITES
Ithaca, New York
B. Begin maintenance of plants immediately after each area is installed and continue until final
acceptance.
C. Plant Maintenance
1. Field inspection:A field inspection for compliance and review shall be held,at the end ofthe
maintenance period,by the Architect, Contractor and Owner's representative.
2. Watering:Watering of trees and groundcovers shall be accomplished by either natural or
artificial means. During the growing season(approximately April I to October 31),the
minimum application shall be one inch layer of waterper plant pit over bed areas per week.
Weather conditions may require additional watering. Contractor shall use a soil probe to
demonstrate that there is consistent moisture to an 18" depth in all planting beds.
3. Control ofInsects,Fungus and Other Diseases:Control of insects,fungus and other diseases
shall be accomplished by means of spraying with an insecticide or fungicide,specifically
formulated for the pest or disease present and through a comprehensive,defined program.
Products and application rates must be approved by Architect prior to application.
4. Adjustment ofplants:Ifahy tree orplantmoves;from its proper elevation orposition,it shall
be shifted or raised to its proper level and not filled in with additional topsoil.
5. Pruning: Pruning as required for common maintenance is to be performed by a trained
horticulturalist in accordance with the specifications or the direction of the Architect.
6. Watering Saucers and Mulch: Watering saucers and mulch will be maintained for the
duration of the maintenance period and then saucers are to be removed.
7. Weeding:The complete removal of weeds from within the mulched area around each tree
and within each planting bed,shall be done every two weeks during the maintenance period.
If an herbicide is deemed necessary by the Architect,products and application rates must
be approved by Architect prior to application.
D. Replacement and Restoration
1. Replacement Requirements:For a period of one year after final acceptance of all planting,
and at no cost to the Owner,the Contractor is to replace any trees or groundcovers that are
dead or that are,in the opinion of the Architect,in an unhealthy or unsightly condition,or that
have lost their natural shape due to dead branches.
2. Replacement ofplanting is to be in accordance with the original specifications and its costs
considered to be included in the original bid price. If after replacement, a plant fails,the
Owner may elect to have the plants replaced as described above OR receive a credit based
upon the original planted value(approximately three times the wholesale price). All areas
damaged by tree or shrub replacement operations are to be fully restored to the project final
acceptance condition, as originally specified.
LANDSCAPING 02900 -5
COUNTRY INN&SUITES
Ithaca, New York
1.10 LAWN MAINTENANCE
A. Begin maintenance of lawns immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable
lawn is established,but for not less than the following periods:
1. Seeded Lawns: 60 days after date of Substantial Completion.
a. When full maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season,or if
lawn is not fully established at that time,continue maintenance during nextplanting
season.
B. Maintain and establish lawns by watering, fertilizing,weeding, mowing, trimming, and other
operations. Roll,regrade,and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly
smooth lawn free of undesirable species,disease and insects.
C. Watering: Provide and maintain temporary piping,hoses,and lawn-watering equipment to convey
water from sources and to keep lawns uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches(100 min).
1. Water seeded lawn at the minimum rate of 1 inch(25 mm)per week or as needed ifunusual
weather conditions require additional watering.
D. Mow lawns as soon as there is enough top growth to cut with mower set at specified height for
principal species planted. Repeatinowing as required to maintain specified height without cutting
more than 40 percent of the grass height. Remove no more than 40 percent of grass-leaf growth
in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bond over and become
matted. Do not mow when grass is wet.
E. Postfertilization: Apply fertilizer to lawn after first mowing and when grass is dry.
1. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least I lb per 1000 sq.ft.(0.5 kgper 100
sq. in) of lawn area.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1. TREE AND SHRUB MATERIAL
A. General: Furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs conforming to ANSI Z60.1,with healthy root
systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped,fully branched,healthy,
vigorous stock free of disease,insects,eggs,larvae,and defects such as knots,sun scald,injuries,
abrasions, and disfigurement.
LANDSCAPING 02900-6
COUNTRY INN& SUITES
Ithaca, Now York.
B. Grade: Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades conforming to ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees
and shrubs required. Trees and shrubs of larger size may be used if acceptable to Architect,with
a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.
C. Label each tree and shrub with securely attached,waterproof tag bearing legible designation of
botanical and common name.
2.2 SHADE AND FLOWERING TREES
A. Shade Trees: Single-stem trees with straight trunk,well-balanced crown, and intact leader, of
height and caliper indicated, conforming to ANSI Z60-1 for type of trees required.
1. Branching Height: 1/3 to 1/2 of tree height.
B. Small Trees: Small upright or spreading type,branched or pruned naturally according to species
and type, and with relationship of caliper,height, and branching recommended by ANSI Z60.1.
C. Provide balled and burlapped trees.
2.3 CONIFEROUS EVERGREENS
A. Form and Size: Normal-quality,well-balanced,coniferous evergreens,of type,height,spread,and
shape required, conforming to ANSI Z60.1.
B. Form and Size: Specimen-quality,exceptionally heavy,tightly knit,symmetrically shaped coniferous
evergreens.
C. Provide balled and burlapped coniferous evergreens.
1. Container-grown coniferous evergreens will be acceptable in lieu ofballed and burlapped
coniferous evergreens subject to meeting ANSI Z60.1 limitations for container stock.
2.4 DECIDUOUS SHRUBS
A. Form and Size: Deciduous shrubs with not less than the minimum number ofcanes required by and
measured according to ANSI Z60.1 for type, shape,and height of shrub.
B. Provide balled and burlapped deciduous shrubs.
I Container-grown deciduous shrubs will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped
deciduous shrubs subject to meeting ANSI Z60.1 limitations for container stock.
2.5 PERENNIALS AND ORNAMENTAL GRASSES
LANDSCAPING 02900-7
COUNTRY INN & SUITES
Ithaca, New York
A. Provide plants established and well rooted in removable containers or integral peat pots and with
not less than the minimum number and length of runners required by ANSI Z60.1 for the pot size
indicated.
2.6 GRASS MATERIALS
A. Grass Seed: Fresh,clean,dry,new--crop seed complying with the Association of Official Seed
Analysts' "Rules for Testing Seeds"for purity and germination tolerances.
1. Seed Mixture: Provide seed of grass species and varieties,proportions by weight, and
minimum percentages of purity,germination,and maximum percentage of weed seed as
indicated on Schedules at the end of this Section.
2.7 IMPORTED TOPSOIL FOR TREE PLANTING AND LAWN ESTABLISHMENT
A. Imported topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7.4; four (4) percent organic material
minimum,free of sub-soil,earth clods,sticks,stumps,clay lumps,roots and stones I inch(25 mm)
or larger in any dimension,and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Topsoil shall
also be free of Quack-grass rhizomes,Argrpyron reptans, and the nut-like tubers of Nutgrass,
Cyperus esculentus and all other primary noxious weeds.
Imported topsoil shall be screened and shall conform to the following gradations:
Approximate Particle Distribution Size
Gravel Less than 10% +2mm
Coarse to medium sand 60-75% 0.25-2mm
Fine sand 5-10% 0.1-0.25mm
Very fine sand 0-5% 0.05-0.1mm
Silt 10-30% 0.002-0.05mm
Clay 15-20% minus 0.002mm
I. Imported topsoil Source: Import topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil from naturally
well-drained sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches(100 mm)deep;do not obtain from
bogs ormarshes. If topsoil cannot be found locally that complies with the specifications,the
contractor should be prepared to create a manufactured soil product using the available
topsoil as a base and amending as directed by the Architect,at no additional expense to the
owner.
2.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS FOR PREPARING PLANTING BEDS WITH IMPORTED
TOPSOIL
LANDSCAPING 02900-8
COUNTRY INN&SUITES
Ithaca, New York
A. Compost:We Care Compost commercial compost as manufactured by We Care Organics,Jordan
New York Phone: 315-689-1937.
1. Compost shall contain organic matter of generally humus nature,capable of sustaining the
growth of vegetation,with no admixture of refuse or material toxic to plant growth. It shall
be free of stones,lumps or similar objects larger than two inches in greatest diameter,roots
and brush. Composts that have been derived from organic wastes such as food and
agriculture residues,animal manures,and sewage sludge thatmeet the above requirements,
and are approved by the State Environmental Agency,are acceptable as compost sources.
Metal contaminants in parts per million shall be within levels allowed by New York State
Department of Environmental Conservation regulations.
2. Nutrient Analysis shall approximately conform with the following:
PH 6.9
C:N ratio 23:1
%Moisture content 38
Density(lbs/cy)750
%Organic Matter 84.92
Soluble Salts(mmhos/cm)2.21
(N)Total Nitrogen 2.42
(P) Phosphorus 1.40
(K)Potassium.12
Calcium 1.49
Magnesium .18
2.9 SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Sand: Clean,washed,natural or manufactured sand,free of toxic materials,
B. Perlite: Horticultural perlite,soil amendment grade.
C. Peat Humus: For acid-tolerant trees and shrubs,provide moss peat,with a pH range of 3.2 to 4.5,
coarse fibrous texture, medium-divided sphagnum moss peat or reed-sedge peat.
D. Herbicides: EPA registered and approved,of type recommended by manufacturer.
E. Water: Potable.
2.10 FERTILIZER
A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw, finely ground; minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 20 percent
phosphoric acid.
LANDSCAPING 02900-9
COUNTRY INN&SUITES
Ithaca, New York
B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; minimum of 20 percent available
phosphoric acid, delivered in unopened packages.
C. Commercial Fertilizer for plants: Ra-Pid-Gro or approved equal, at the rate of one pound of
ferdlizerto 30 gallons ofwaterpertree 3"caliper and larger,orsmallertrees at the rate ofone-third
pound of fertilizerto 10 gallons of waterpertree applied early inthe spring(before May 15)after
the first growing season. Shrubs,groundcovers and perennials are to be fertilized with the same
mixture at the rate of I gallon per shrub and I pint per perennial, and applied during the same
period. Fertilizer is to be approved brand,completely water soluble and containing not less than
23%nitrogen, 21%phosphorus and 17%potassium.
D. Slow-Release Fertilizer for lawns: Granular fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble
nitrogen;phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:
1. .. Composition:Nitrogen,phosphorous,and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports
from a qualified soil-testing agency.
2.11 MULCHES
A. Organic Mulch: Organic mulch,free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of
trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following:
1. Type:Provide bark mulch for mulching plants comprised of either hardwood or softwood
shredded bark. No leaves,young green growth,branches,twigs 2"or less in diameter,wood
shavings, sawdust or foreign material such as stones, etc., shall be mixed with the bark
mulch. Shredded bark mulch shall not exceed 3" in greatest dimension.
2.12 WEED CONTROL
A. If planting occurs between April 1 and September 1,a granular pre-emergent weed suppressant
shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to all areas scheduled to be
mulched. Select pre-emergent for compatibility with species to be planted.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive landscaping far compliance with requirements and for conditions affecting
performance of work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
LANDSCAPING 02900- 10
COUNTRY INN & SUITES
Ithaca, New York
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas formultiple plantings. Stake locations,outline
areas, and secure Ardhitect's acceptance before the start of planting work. Make minor
adjustments as may be required.
3.3 PLANTING SOIL PREPARATION FOR TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING
A. Before mixing,clean imported topsoil ofroots,plants,sods,stones,clay lumps,and other extraneous
materials harmful to plant growth. Mix 3-parts imported topsoil with 1-part imported compost.
B. Mix soil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil at rates indicated. Delay mixing fertilizer ifplanting
I does not follow placing of planting soil within a few days.
C. For tree pit or trench backfill,mix planting soil before backfilling and stockpile at site.
3.4 LAWN PLANTING PREPARATION
A. Limit subgrade preparation to areas that will be planted in the immediate future.
B. Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of inches(100 mm). Remove stones larger than 2 inches
(50 mm)in any dimension and sticks,roots,rubbish,and other extraneous materials.
C. Spread topsoil to 4 inch(100 nun)depth and as required to meet thickness,grades,and elevations
shown,after light rolling and natural settlement. If using on-site stockpiled topsoil,rockbound before
spreading. Do not spread if topsoil or subgrade is frozen.
1. Place approximately V2the thickness oftopsoil mixture required. Work into top of loosened
subgrade to create a transition layer and then place remainder of planting soil mixture.
D. Preparation of Unchanged Grades: Where lawns are to be planted in areas unaltered or
undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface soil stripping operations,prepare soil as follows:
1. Remove and dispose of existing grass,vegetation,and turf. Do not turn over into soil being
prepared for lawns.
2. Till surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches(150 mm). Apply required soil amendments
and initial fertilizers and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches(100 mm)of soil. Trim high areas
and fill in depressions. Till soil to a homogenous mixture of fine texture.
3. Clean surface soil of roots,plants,sods,stones,clay lumps,and other extraneous materials
harmful to plant growth,
4. Remove waste material,including grass,vegetation,and turf,and legally dispose of it off the
Owner's property.
LANDSCAPING 02900- 11
COUNTRY INN&SUITES
Ithaca, New York
E. Grade lawn and grass areas to a smooth,even surface with loose,uniformly fine texture. Roll and
rake,remove ridges,and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas that can
be planted in the immediate future. Remove trash,debris,stones larger than 1-1/2 inches(3 8 mm)
in any dimension, and other objects that may interfere with planting or maintenance operations.
F. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting when soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface
to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
G. Restore prepared areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and before planting.
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR TREES,SHRUBS AND PLANTING BEDS
A. Pits and Trenches: Excavate with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation slightly raised at
center to assist drainage and as shown on planting details. Loosen hard subsoil in bottom of
excavation.
B. Excavate and remove existing soil from entire area designated as planting beds. Dispose of subsoil
removed from landscape excavations. Do not mix with planting soil or use as backfill.
C. Obstructions: Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees are
encountered in excavations.
1. Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch- (I 50-mm-) diameter holes into free-draining strata or to a
depth of 10 feet(3 in), whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining material.
D. Drainage: Notify Architect if'subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention
in tree pits.
E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate out,before placing setting layer and positioning
trees and shrubs.
3.6 PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS
A. Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of ball raised above
adjacent finish grades as indicated.
1. Place stock on setting layer of compacted planting soil.
2. Remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of balls-and partially from sides,but do not
remove from under balls. Remove pallets,ifany,before setting. Do not use planting stock
if ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.
3. Place backfill around ball in layers,tamping to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air
pockets. When pit is approximately 1/2 backfilled,water thoroughlybefore placing remainder
of backfill. Repeat watering until no more is absorbed. Water again after placing and
tamping final layer of backfill.
LANDSCAPING 02900- 12
COUNTRY INN &SUITES
Ithaca, New York
B. Set container-grown stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of ball raised above
adjacent finish grades as indicated.
1. Carefully remove containers so as not to damage root balls.
2. Place stock on setting layer of compacted planting soil.
3. Place backfill around ball in layers,tamping to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air
pockets. When pit is approximately V2 backfilled,waterthoroughlybefore placing remainder
of backfill. Repeat watering until no more is absorbed. Water again after placing and
tamping final layer of backfill.
C. Dish and tamp top of backfill to forma 3-inch-(75-mm-)high mound around the rim of the pit. Do
not cover top of root ball with backfill.
3.7 PLANTING PERENNIALS AND ORNAMENTAL GRASSES
A. Layout individual plant locations and areas formultipleplantings. Stake locations,outline areas and
secure Architect's acceptance before starting planting work.
B. Dig holes in prepared planting beds and backfill with planting soil.
C. Plant perennials at same level at which they grew in the nursery or greenhouse.
D- Work soil around roots to eliminate airpockets and leave a slight saucer indentation aroundplants
to hold water.
E. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.
F. Protect plants from hot sun and wind:remove protection when plants show evidence of recovery
from transplanting shock,
3.8 TREE PRUNING
A. Prune, thin, and shape trees according to standard horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain
required height and spread. Unless otherwise directed by Architect; do not cut tree leaders;
remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees.
3.9 WEED SUPPRESSANT
A. Apply granular weed suppressant according to strict manufacturer's specifications in all mulched
areas. Apply to soil surface prior to mulching.
3.10 MULCHING
LANDSCAPING 02900- 13
COUNTRY INN &SUITES
Ithaca, New York
A. Mulch backfilled surfaces of pits, trenches,planted areas,and other areas indicated.
I In areas where trees and shrubs are planted,provide 4" shredded bark mulch.
2. In areas where perennials and ornamental grasses are planted,provide 2" shredded bark
mulch.
3.11 SEEDING NEW LAWNS
A. Sow seed with a spreader or a seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind
velocity exceeds 5 mph(8 km/h). Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in 2 directions
at right angles to each other.
I Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or storage.
B. Sow seed at the following rates:
1. Seeding Rate: 4 lb per 1000 sq. ft. (1.5 to 2 kg per 100 sq.m).
C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch(3 mm) of topsoil,roll lightly,and water with fine spray.
D. Protect seeded slopes exceeding 1:4 against erosion with erosion-control blankets installed and
stapled according to manufacturer's recommendations,
E. Protect seeded areas with slopes less than 1:6 against erosion by spreading straw mulch after
completion of seeding operations. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons per acre(45 kg
per 100 sq.m)to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches(3 8 mm)loose depth over seeded areas.
Spread by hand,blower, or other suitable equipment.
1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into.topsoil by suitable mechanical equipment, OR
2. Anchor straw mulch by spraying with asphalt-emulsion tackifier at the rate of 10 to 13 gal.
per 1000 sq.ft.(416 53 L per 100 sq.m). :rake precautions to prevent damage or staining
of structures or other plantings adjacent to mulched areas. Immediately clean damaged or
stained areas.
F. Protect seeded areas against hot dry weather or drying winds by applying peat mulch within 24
hours after completion of seeding operations. Soak and scatter uniformly to a depth of 3/16 inch
(4.8 mm)thick and roll to a smooth surface.
3.12 HYDROSEEDING NEW LAWNS
A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed,fertilizer,and fibermulch in water,using equipment specifically
designed forbydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformlyblended into homogenous slurry
suitable for hydraulic application:
ti
LANDSCAPING 02900- 14
COUNTRY INN &SUITES
Ithaca, New York
1. Mix slurry with nonasphaltic tackifier.
2. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a 1-step process. Apply mulch at the
minimum rate of 1500 lb per acre(16.5 kg per 100 sq.in)dry weight but not less than the
rate required to obtain specified seed-sowing rate.
3. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a 2-step process. Apply first slurry
application at the minimum rate of 5 00 lb per acre(5.5 kg per 100 sq.in)dry weight but not
less than the rate required to obtain specified seed-sowing rate. Apply slurry cover coat of
fiber mulbh at a rate of 1000 lb per acre (11 kg per 100 sq.in).
3.13 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. During landscaping,keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition.
B. Protect landscaping from damage due to landscape operations,operations by other contractors and
trades,and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat,
repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed.
3.14 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove all surplus soil and waste material,including excess subsoil,unsuitable soil,
topsoil,trash, and debris,and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property.
3.15 SEED MIXTURES SCHEDULE
A. Seed for Lawn Areas
Provide certified grass-seed blends or mixes,proportioned by weight, as follows:
Min. Pct. Min. Pct. Max. Pct
Proportion Name Germination Pure Seed Weed Seed
60 pet. Kentucky Bluegrass Blend 80 85 0.50
15 pct. Fine Fescue 85 98 0.50
25 pct. Perennial Ryegrass 90 98 0.50
The Kentucky bluegrass portion of the mix shall be a blend of at least four ofthe following varieties:
Allure,Cardiff,Coventry,Champagne,Misty,Nimbus,Northstar,Princeton-105,Raven,Rambo,
Wildwood, SR2100.
Perennial Ryegrass shall be a blend of at least two of the following varieties:Brightstar 11,Divine,
Monterey, Palmer III,Panther, Passport, Secretariat, Sunshine,Top Hat.
LANDSCAPING 02900- 15
COUNTRY INN &SUITES
Ithaca, New York
The fine Fescue shallbo one ofthe following varieties:Culumbra,Banner III,Florentine,K2,Shadow
11,Darwin,Victory II,Tiffany,SR 5100,Eco,Brittany,Discovery,Shadow,Quatro,SR 3100,or
Shademaster 11.
Sow seed at the following rate:
4 lbs per 1000 sq. ft. (1.5 to 2 kg per 100 sq.m).
END OF SECTION 02900
LANDSCAPING 02900- 16
01354 - STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan(SWPPP) attached to this specification section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The Owner has provided the attached Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) for
construction activities at the project site. The SWPPP includes a certification that the plan
complies with applicable local,state and federal regulations for storm water pollution prevention.
B. Related Sections include the following:
L Division 2 Section"Site Clearing".
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall-abide by the terms and conditions of the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan
before initiating any site work.Contractor will be required to sign the certification forms included
in the SWPPP.
1.4 REQUIREMENTS
A. SWPPP and Erosion Control measures shall be maintained,modified as necessary,throughout the
course of site construction activities until satisfactory vegetative growth is established to return the
site to pre-construction conditions and to prevent impairment of receiving waters,at which time
the Contractor shall remove all remaining structures, and properly dispose of accumulated
sediment.
B. Construct temporary control measures required of the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan prior to
initiating mass earthwork operations.
1.5 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
A. At no time shall construction operations or any related disturbance of the site result in the
impairment of local waterways. For the purpose of this Section,impairment shall mean either:
I. The release or entry into any receiving water of water more turbid than the receiving water;
or
Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan 01354- 1
2. The deposition of visible sediment into such waters.
B. Any impairment shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor to prevent further impairment.
Contractor shall be at all times liable for any enforcement or legal action resulting from such
impairment.
C. In addition,and without notice to the Contractor,the Owner shall also have the right,based on the
Owner's independent assessment,to stop work or engage other contractor(s)to construct or correct
such work as may be necessary to prevent such impairment,and to charge all costs related to such
corrective or additional actions against the Contract.
D. Reliance on the SWPPP does not in any way imply that the SWPPP will be adequate in preventing
impairment of waters, or that maintenance and modification will not be necessary. Rather,
acceptance ofthe Plan authorizes the Contractor to begin installation ofthe control measures under
the assumption the appropriate maintenance and modification will be required throughout the life
of the project to meet the project requirements.
E. The Contractor's responsibilities under this Section shall end upon final completion and payment
of the Work of the entire Contract.
1'.6 STORMWATER MANAGEMENT MEASURES
A. As outlined in the SWPPP.
1.7 EROSION CONTROL MEASURES
A. As outlined in the SWPPP.
1.8 SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES
A. As outlined in the SWPPP.
1.9 INSPECTIONS
A. The Owner shall be responsible for retaining a Qualified Professional (a person
knowledgeable in the principles and practices of erosion and sediment controls, such as
a licensed professional engineer,Certified Professional in Erosion and Sediment Control
or soil scientist)to conduct the inspections required by the SWPPP.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01354
Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan 01354-2
Country Inn and Suites Hotel
STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN
1. PROJECT NAME AND LOCATION
COUNTRY INN AND SUITES HOTEL
Town of Ithaca,Tompkins County,New York
X Coordinate: 841801
Y Coordinate, 877166
Estimated area of site:2.74 Acres
Estimated area to be disturbed by construction activities:2.74 acres
11. OPERATOR'S NAME AND ADDRESS
David Auble
I I I West King Road
Ithaca,NY 14850
(607)272-5529
III. SCOPE
A. SPDES GENERAL PERMITS FOR STORMWATER DISCHARGE FROM CONSTRUCTION
SITES: Regulations promulgated by the NYSDEC are applicable to the discharge of storm water from
construction activities on sites where more than I acre of soil is disturbed, One of the ways to comply with
these regulations for affected sites is to request coverage under the General Permit for Construction
Activities (GP-02-01) from the state of New York. In order to use the General Permit, a Notice of Intent
(NOI) form must be completed and received by NYSDEC 5 business days prior to any earth-disturbing
activities and a Storinwater Pollution Prevention Plan(SWPPP)for the site must be prepared and followed
during the construction activities.
B. REGARDING THE GENERAL PERMIT: The Contractor shall manage the discharge of stormwater
from the site in accordance with the conditions of the NYSDEC General Permit for Construction Activities
and the following provisions of this Program. The Contractor shall be responsible for conducting the
storinwater management practices in accordance with the permit. The Operator shall be responsible for
providing a Qualified Professional (a person knowledgeable in the principles and practices of erosion and
sediment controls, such as a licensed professional engineer, Certified Professional in Erosion and Sediment
Control(CPESC) or soil scientist)to conduct the inspections required by the SWPPP. The Contractor shall
be responsible for any enforcement action taken or imposed by federal, state, or local agencies, including
the cost of fines, construction delays,and remedial actions resulting from the Contractor's failure to comply
with the permit provisions. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make any changes to the
SWPPP necessary when the Contractor or any of his subcontractors elects to use borrow or fill or material
storage sites, either contiguous to or remote from the construction site,when such sites are used solely for
this construction site. Such sites are considered to be part of the construction site covered by the permit and
this SWPPP. Off-site borrow,fill,or material storage sites which are used for multiple construction projects
are not subject to this requirement, unless specifically required by state or local jurisdictional entity
regulations. The Contrictor should consider this requirement in negotiating with earthwork subcontractors,
since the choice of an off-site borrow, fill, or material storage site may impact their duty to implement,
make changes to,and perform inspections required by the SWPPP for the site.
C. NOTICE OF INTENT: This Country Inns site has been subdivided from a larger parcel, the majority of
which is comprised of the Holly Creek Subdivision. A SWPPP has been prepared and approved for the
Holly Creek Subdivision which includes treatment of storm water from the Country Inns sites as well, and
the Operator has petitioned the NYSDEC for the storinwater discharges during construction at this site to be
covered by the SPDES General Permit for Construction Activity for the State of New York. A Notice of
Intent (NOT) to be covered under this permit was filed by the Operator. The permit identification number
for the Holly Creek Subdivision is NYR10H791.The requirements of the Country Inns SWPPP herein are
January 2005
Country Inn and Suites Hotel
STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN
in addition to those of the Holly Creek Subdivision SWPPP, and all permanent storm water management
practices for Holly Creek must be complete and operational prior to any site disturbance on the Country
Inns parcel, as required by the Town of Ithaca PB Resolution No. 2004-111. In addition,the Operator will
require the Contractor to be a co-perinittee.
D. CONTRACTOR TRAINING: At the discretion of the Operator training of the Contractor's Project
Manager and Superintendent will be performed by the Operator's Engineer. This Training Program has
been developed to stress the importance of the following topics:
• Erosion and Sedimentation Control for Water Quality Protection
• Implementation of Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plans
• The importance of Proper Installation of Erosion and Sedimentation Control Measures
• Regular Inspection by qualified personnel of Erosion and Sedimentation Control
Measures
• Diligent Maintenance of Erosion and Sedimentation Control Measures
• Contemporaneous preparation of accurate and complete records regarding inspection and
maintenance of Erosion and Sedimentation Control Measures
• Record Keeping for Inspections and Maintenance activities
E. REQUIREMENTS FOR THE CONTRACTOR(s): The project will receive a SWPPP Ledger for use by
the Contractor's Project Manager and Superintendent with all required certifications and record keeping
forms involved with the installation and/or maintenance of erosion and sedimentation control measures.
The SWPPP Ledger includes a"Contractor's Certification Log"(Form 1),identifying the Company Name,
Business Address and Telephone Number along with the Responsible Person for the Contractor and all
subcontractors' who will implement the measures identified in the SWPPP. The entities identified on Form
I shall sign a "Contractor's Certification" (Form 2), verifying they have been instructed and fully
understand the requirements of the NYSDEC and SWPPP. This certification must be signed, by a fully
qualified individual on behalf of each entity and shall be filed in the projects SWPPPLedger.
F. STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PROGRAM LOCATION REQUIREMENTS: The
SWPPP Ledger is meant to be a working document that shall be maintained at the Project site at all times
throughout the project, shall be readily available upon request by the Operator's personnel or NYSDEC or
any other agency with regulatory authority over storinwater issues, and shall be kept on-site until the site
complies with the Final Stabilization section of this document.
G. SWPPP LEDGER: The SWPPP Ledger shall be a 3-ring Binder, tabbed and indexed for the following
sections:
• Table of Contents
• Written SWPPP
• Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan(s)
• NYSDEC Notice of Intent
• NYSDEC SPDES General Permit
• Operator's Certification
• Contractor's Certification Log(Form 1)
• Contractor's Certification(Form 2)
• Inspection Report(Form 3)
• Modification Report(Form 4)
• Project Rainfall Log(Form 5)
• Record of Stabilization and Construction Activities(Form 6)
• Final Stabilization/Termination Checklist(Form 7)
The Operator will review and evaluate for compliance the SWPPP Ledger on a bi-weekly basis.All
Inspection and Maintenance Forms will be initialed by the Operator at this review. The approval of the
Contractor's Application for Payment may be withheld until the SWPPP Ledger is deemed in compliance
and all SWPPP Inspection and Maintenance Forms and have been submitted to the satisfaction of the
January 2005 2
Country Inn and Suites Hotel
STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN
Operator.
H. INSPECTIONS AND RECORD KEEPING: Inspections are required at least weekly and within 24 hours
following a rainfall event exceeding 0.5-inch in precipitation and shall continue until the site complies with
the Final Stabilization section of this document. Each inspection must be followed up by a report
documenting the inspector's findings and request the required maintenance and/or repair for the erosion and
sedimentation control measures. It is imperative that the Contractor documents the Inspection and
Maintenance of all erosion and sedimentation control measures as soon as possible after the inspection
and/or maintenance is completed. These records are used to prove that the required inspection and
maintenance were performed and shall be placed in the SWPPP Ledger. In addition to inspection and
maintenance reports, records should be kept of the Construction Activities that occur on the site. The
Contractor shall retain paper copies of the SWPPP,all reports and data for a minimum of three(3) years
after the project.The following list identifies the required Inspection and Maintenance documentation that
must be maintained by the Contractor under this SWPPP.
• Form 3 Inspection Report for SWPPP
• Form 4 Modification Report
• Form 5 Project Rainfall Log
I. SWPPP MODIFICATIONS: The inspection report should also identify if any revisions to the SWPPP
are warranted due to unexpected conditions. The SWPPP is meant to be a dynamic working guide that is to
be. kept current and amended whenever the design, construction, operation, or maintenance of the site
changes in a way which significantly affects the potential for the discharge of pollutants or when the plan
proves to be ineffective in eliminating or significantly minimizing pollutant discharges.Any such changes to
the SWPPP must be made in writing on the"Requested Changes to the SWPPP"(Form 4)within 7 days of
the date such modification or amendment is made. . The Contractor's failure to monitor or report
deficiencies to the Operator will result in the Contractor being liable for fines and construction delays
resulting from any federal,state,or local agency enforcement action.
J. CONTRACTOR'S MONTHLY TRAINING: It is recommended that the Contractor provide monthly
training sessions for all entities and subcontractors involved with installing, applying, performing,
maintaining and inspection of the SWPPP. Training should educate the attendees on the topics of:
• The Location and type of Control Measures
• The Construction Requirements for the Control Measures
• Maintenance Procedures for each of the Control Measures
• Spill Prevention and Cleanup Measures
• Inspection and Maintenance Record Keeping Requirements
K. FINAL STABILIZATION AND TERMINATION OF PERMIT COVERAGE: A site can be
considered finally stabilized when all soil disturbing activities have been completed and a uniform perennial
vegetative cover with a density of 85%for the unpaved areas and areas not covered by permanent structures
has been established or equivalent permanent stabilization measures have been established and the facility
no Ionizer discharges stormwater associated with construction activities and a final inspection is conducted
by a Qualified Professional prior to filing the Notice of Termination (NOT) to certify that the site has
undergone final stabilization. The NOT form can then be filed by the Operator with the N-YSDEC. This
filing terminates coverage under the General Permit and terminates the Contractor's responsibility to
implement the SWPPP, but the requirements of the SWPPP, including periodic inspections, must be
continued until the NOT is filed. Upon achieving this milestone, the Contractor shall also submit "Final
Stabilization Certification/Termination Checklist" (Form 7). Final payment and/or the release of retainage
may be withheld until all provisions of the SWPPP have been submitted, completed and accepted by the
Operator.
January2005 3
Country Inn and Suites Hotel
STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN
IV. SITE DESCRIPTION AND STORMWATER CONTROLS
A. STORMWATER MANAGEMENT OBJECTIVES
With respect to storniwater the objectives of this development proposal are as follows:
1. To the extent practicable implement techniques to prevent point discharge such as disconnecting
rooftops and impervious areas.
2. Identify site limitations that will cause possible long-term erosion and maintenance problems.
3. Install and maintain temporary water quality practices required by the Permit during construction of all
phased improvements. -
4. Provide post-construction controls to meet pollutant removal goals.
B. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS
1. Stabilization,Practices
Stabilization practices for this site include but are not limited to:
a. The site will not be disturbed until the Holly Creek subdivision permanent storm water
management practices have been constructed and are operational.
b. Land clearing activities shall be done only in areas where earthwork will be performed and
shall progress as earthwork is needed.
c. Tarping or covering of material and spoil piles.
d. Temporary seeding and mulching of exposed soils with conservation mixes.
e. Permanent seeding immediately following placement and fine grading of topsoil.
2. Structural Practices
Structural practices for this site include but are not limited too:
a. Temporary drainage inlet protection
b. Pipe Slope Drain
c. Perimeter protection using silt fences
d. Temporary sediment trap
e. Stone Outlet Weir
f. Rock Outlet Protection
g. Rock Check Dam
h. Bank stabilization with Erosion Control Blanket
i. Truck tracking pad
3. Sequence of Major Activities
The Contractor will be responsible for implementing the following erosion control and stormwater
management practices. The Contractor may designate these tasks to certain subcontractors as he sees
fit,but the ultimate responsibility for implementing these controls and ensuring their proper functioning
remains with the Contractor.The initial order of activities will be as follows:
a. Erect perimeter silt fence in locations shown.
b. Install truck tracking pads at construction entrances.
c. Construct the temporary sediment trap with stone weir outlet and swale to discharge location
indicated on the erosion and sediment control plan,sheet C 100.
d. Stabilize the temporary sediment trap and outlet swale with conservation seed mix.
e. Install the site perimeter drain swale and pipe slope drain (w/ inlet protection) to temporary
sediment trap.
January 2005 4
Country Inn and Suites Hotel
STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN
f Strip topsoil within footprint of proposed buildings and pavements and complete rough
grading. Stabilize any exposed slopes with conservation seed mix and mulch. In any areas
exhibiting concentrated flow provide temporary channel lining(rip-rap or drainage fill).
g. Construct diversion swales as necessary to direct surface runoff from disturbed areas to
perimeter swale and/or the temporary sediment trap.
h. Complete building, site utility construction and paving, including the storm sewer piping and
discbarge/outlet into the Holly Creek Subdivision swale,as indicated on the plans, sheet CIO I.
i. When final grading is complete,install erosion control blankets in slope areas to be stabilized
as indicated on plan CIOL
j. Install permanent pavements.Remove silt and debris from drainage inlet and manhole sumps.
k. Remove any remaining temporary practices.Correct eroded or bare areas in seeded lawns.
C. WATER QUALITY AND QUANTITY CONTROLS
Site storm water will be collected by the storm sewer and piped to a rip rap armored swale located within
the Holly Creek Subdivision. The swale will further channel the storm discharge to permanent treatment
practices within the Holly Creek subdivision. These practices have been designed/sized to treat both the
Holly Creek subdivision and the Country Inns and Suites storm discharge for both water quality and
quantity requirements. The Holly Creek subdivision NOI was received by the NYSDEV on 9/27/04 and
subsequently approved. The permit identification number for the Holly Creek subdivision Storm Water
Management NOI/SWPPP is NYRI OH79 1.
V. OTHER CONTROL
A. Waste Disposal
All waste materials will be collected and stored in a securely lidded metal dumpster rented from a local
waste management company which must be a solid waste management company licensed to do business in
Seneca County.The dumpster will comply with all local and state solid waste management regulations.
All trash and construction debris from the site will be deposited in the dumpster. The dumpster will be
emptied as often as necessary to prevent overflow, and the trash will be hauled to a landfill approved by
New York State. No construction waste materials will be buried on site. All personnel will be instructed
regarding the correct procedures for waste disposal.Notices stating these practices will be posted on site by
the job site superintendent who will be responsible for seeing that these procedures are followed.
B. Sanitary Waste
All sanitary waste will be collected from the portable units a minimum of one time a week by a licensed
portable facility provider in complete compliance with local and state regulations.
C. Off-Site Vehicle Tracking
Stabilized construction exits will be provided to help reduce vehicle tracking of sediments. The paved
streets adjacent to the site entrance will be inspected daily and cleaned with vacuum equipment as necessary
to remove any excess mud, dirt, or rock tracked from the site. Dump trucks hauling material from the
construction site will be covered with a tarpaulin. The job site superintendent will be responsible for seeing
that those procedures are followed.
D. Concrete Waste From Concrete Trucks
a. Emptying of excess concrete and/or washout from concrete delivery trucks will be allowed on
the job site, but only in either (1) specifically designated diked areas which have been
prepared to prevent contact between the concrete and/or washout and stormwater which will
be discharged from the site or(2) in locations where waste concrete can be poured into forms
to make riprap or other useful concrete products.
January 2005 5
Country Inn and Suites Hotel
STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN
b.. The hardened residue from the concrete washout diked areas will be disposed of in accordance
with the procedures given in the Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasures (SPCC) Plan
and in accordance with applicable state and federal regulations. The job site superintendent
will be responsible for seeing that these procedures are followed.
E. Hazardous Substances and Hazardous Waste
a. All hazardous waste materials will be disposed of by the Contractor in the manner specified by
local, state, and/or federal regulations and by the manufacturer of such products. Site
personnel will be instructed in these practices by the job site superintendent,who will also be
responsible for seeing that these practices are followed. Material Safety Data Sheets
(MSDS's) for each substance with hazardous properties that is used on the job site will be
obtained and used for the proper management of potential wastes that may result from these
products. An MSDS will be posted in the immediate area where such product is stored and/or
used and another copy of each MSDS will be maintained in the SWPPP file at the job site
construction trailer office. Each employee who must handle a substance with hazardous
properties will be instructed on the use of MSDS sheets and the specific information in the
applicable MSDS for the product he/she is using, particularly regarding spill control
techniques.
b. The Contractor will implement the Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasures (SPCC)
Plan found within this SWPPP and will train all personnel in the proper cleanup and handling
of spilled materials. No spilled hazardous materials or hazardous wastes will be allowed to
come in contact with stormwater discharges. If such contact occurs,the stormwater discharge
will be contained on site until appropriate measures in compliance with state and federal
regulations are taken to dispose of such contaminated .stormwater. It shall be the
responsibility of the job site superintendent to properly train all personnel in the use of the
SPCC plan.
c. Any spills of hazardous materials which are in quantities in excess of Reportable Quantities as
defined by EPA regulations shall be immediately reported to the EPA National Response
Center 1-800-424-8802.
d. In order to minimize the potential for a spill of hazardous materials to come into contact with
stormwater,the following steps will be implemented:
i. All materials with hazardous properties (such as pesticides, petroleum products,
fertilizers, detergents, construction chemicals, acids, paints, paint solvents, cleaning
solvents, additives for soil stabilization, concrete curing compounds and additives, etc.)
will be stored in a secure location,under cover,when not in use.
ii. The minimum practical quantity of all such materials will be kept on the job site.
iii. A spill control and containment kit (containing, for example, absorbent such as kitty
litter or sawdust, acid neutralizing powder, brooms, dust pans, mops, rags, gloves,
goggles,plastic and metal trash containers,etc.)will be provided at the storage site,
iv. All of the product in a container will be used before the container is disposed of. All
such containers will be triple-rinsed with water prior to disposal. The rinse water used in
these containers will be disposed of in a manner in compliance with state and federal
regulations and will not be allowed to mix with stormwater discharges.
V. All products will be stored in and used from the original container with the original
product label.
vi. All products will be used in strict compliance with instructions on the product label.
January 2005 6
Country Inn and Suites Hotel
STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN
vii. The disposal of excess or used products will be in strict compliance with instructions
on the product label.
F. Contaminated Soils
a. Any contaminated soils (resulting from spills of materials with hazardous properties) which
may result from construction activities will be contained and cleaned up immediately in
accordance with the procedures given in the Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasures
(SPCC)Plan and in accordance with applicable state and federal regulations.
b. The job site superintendent will be responsible for seeing that these procedures are followed.
VI. COMPLIANCE WITH FEDERAL,STATE,AND LOCAL REGULATIONS
A. The Contractor will obtain copies of any and all local and state regulations which are applicable to
storinwater management, erosion control, and pollution minimization at this job site and will comply fully
with such regulations. The Contractor will submit written evidence of such compliance if requested by the
Operator or any agent of a regulatory body. The Contractor will comply with all conditions of the
NYSDEC General Permit for-Construction Activities, including the conditions related to maintaining the
SWPPP and evidence of compliance with the SWPPP at the job site and allowing regulatory personnel
access to the job site and to records in order to determine compliance.
V. MAINTENANCEANSPECTION PROCEDURES
A. Erosion and Sediment Control and Stabilization Measures Maintenance and Inspection Practices-The
following inspection and maintenance practices will be used to maintain erosion and sediment controls and
stabilization measures.
I. All control measures will be inspected at least weekly and within 24 hours following a rainfall
event exceeding 0.5 inches in precipitation.
2. All measures will be maintained in good working order; if repairs are found to be necessary,they
will be initiated within 24 hours of report.
3. Built up sediment will be removed from silt fence when it has reached one-third the height of the
fence.
4. Silt fences will be inspected for proper toe-in depth, depth of sediment, tears, etc., to see if the
fabric is securely attached to the fence posts, and to see that the fence posts are securely in the
ground.
5. Temporary and permanent seeding and all other stabilization measures will be inspected for bare
spots,washouts,and healthy growth.
7. The job site superintendent will be responsible for selecting and training the individuals who will
be responsible for these maintenance and repair activities.
8. Personnel selected for the maintenance responsibilities will receive training from the job site
superintendent. They will be trained in all the maintenance practices necessary for keeping the
erosion and sediment controls that are used onsite in good working order.They will also be trained
in the completion of, initiation of actions required by, and the filing of the inspection forms.
Documentation of this personnel training will be kept on site with the SWPPP.
9. Disturbed areas and materials storage areas will be inspected for evidence of or potential for
pollutants entering stormwater systems.
January 2005 7
Country Inn and Suites Hotel
STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN
10. Report to NYSDEC within 24 hours any noncompliance with the SWPPP that will endanger public
health or the environment. Follow up with a written report within 5 days of the noncompliance
event.
B. Inspection and Maintenance Report Forms
Once installation of any required or optional erosion control device or measure has been implemented,
weekly and within 24 hours following a rainfall event exceeding 1/2-inch in precipitation, inspections of
each measure shall be performed by a Qualified Professional. The Inspection and Maintenance Reports
found in this SWPPP shall be used by the inspector to inventory and report the condition of each measure to
assist in maintaining the erosion and sediment control measures in good working order.
These report forms shall become an integral part of the SWPPP and shall be made readily accessible to
governmental inspection officials,the Operator's Engineer,and the Operator for review upon request during
visits to the project site. In addition, copies of the reports shall be provided to any of these persons, upon
request, via mail or facsimile transmission. Inspection and maintenance report forms are to be maintained
by the Contractor for three years following the final stabilization of the site.
C. Other Record-Keeping Requirements
The Contractor shall keep the following records related to construction activities at the site
-Dates when major grading activities occur and the areas which were graded
-Dates and details concerning the installation of structural controls
-Dates when construction activities cease in an area
-Dates when an area is stabilized,either temporarily or permanently
-Dates of rainfall and the amount of rainfall
-Dates and descriptions of the character and amount of any spills of hazardous materials
-Records of reports filed with regulatory agencies if reportable quantities of hazardous materials spilled
January 2005
Country Inn and Suites Hotel
STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN
SUMMARY OF EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL AND STABILIZATION MEASURES
MAINTENANCEIINSPECTION PROCEDURES
All control measures will be inspected at least weekly and within 24 hours following a rainfall
event exceeding 0.5 inches in precipitation.
❑ All measures will be maintained in good working order;if a repair is necessary,it will be initiated
within 24 hours of report.
❑ Built-up sediment will be removed from silt fences when it has reached one-third the height of the
fence.
❑ Silt fences will be inspected for depth of sediment,tears,to see if the fabric is securely attached to
the fence posts,and to see that the fence posts are firmly in the ground.
❑ Sediment basins,if present, will be inspected for depth of sediment, and built-up sediment will be
removed when it reaches 50%of the design capacity and at the end of the job.
Diversion dikes,if present,will be inspected and any breaches promptly repaired.
❑ Temporary and permanent seeding and planting and other stabilization measures will be inspected
for bare spots,washouts, and healthy growth.
❑ A maintenance inspection report will be made after each inspection. A copy of the report forms to
be used are included in this SWPPP.
❑ The site job superintendent will select the individuals who will be responsible for inspections,
maintenance and repair activities,and filling out the inspection and maintenance reports.
❑ Personnel selected for inspection and maintenance responsibilities will receive training from the
site job superintendent. They will be trained in all the inspection and maintenance practices
necessary for keeping the erosion and sediment controls used onsite in good working order.
❑ Disturbed areas and materials storage areas will be inspected for evidence of or potential for
pollutants entering stormwater systems.
❑ Report to NYSDEC within 24 hours any noncompliance with the SWPPP that will endanger public
health or the environment. Follow up with a written report within 5 days of the noncompliance
event.
January 2005 9
Country Inn and Suites Hotel
STORMWATER.POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN
CONSTRUCTIONAMPLEMENTATION CHECKLIST
1. Maintain Records of Construction Activities, including:
E] Dates when major grading activities occur
❑ Dates when construction activities temporarily cease on a portion of the site
❑ Dates when construction activities permanently cease on a portion of the site
❑ Dates when stabilization measures are initiated on the site
❑ Dates of rainfall and the amount of rainfall
❑ Dates and descriptions of the character and amount of any spills of hazardous materials
❑ Records of reports filed with regulatory agencies if reportable quantities of hazardous materials
spilled
2. Prepare Inspection Reports summarizing:
❑ Name of inspector
❑ Qualifications of inspector
❑ Measures/areas inspected
❑ Observed conditions
❑ Changes necessary to the SWPPP
3. Report Releases of Reportable Quantities of Oil or Hazardous Materials(if they occur):
❑ Notify NYSDEC immediately
❑ Notify permitting authority in writing within 14 days
❑ Modify the pollution prevention plan to include:
-the date of release
-circumstances leading to the release
-steps taken to prevent reoccurrence of the release
4. Modify Pollution Prevention Plan as necessary to:
❑ Comply with the minimum permit requirements when notified by the NYSDEC that the plan does
not comply
❑ Address a change in design, construction operation, or maintenance which has an effect on the
potential for discharge of pollutants
❑ Prevent reoccurrence of reportable quantity releases of a hazardous material or oil
January 2005 10
Country Inn and Suites Hotel
STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN
VII. SPILL PREVENTION CONTROL AND COUNTERMEASURES(SPCC)PLAN
A. MATERIALS COVERED
The following materials or substances with known hazardous properties are expected to be present onsite during
construction:
Concrete Cleaning solvents
Detergents Petroleum based products
Paints Pesticides
Paint solvents Acids
Fertilizers Concrete additives
Soil stabilization additives
B. MATERIAL MANAGEMENT PRACTICES
The following are the material management practices that will be used to reduce the risk of spills or other
accidental exposure of materials and substances to stormwater runoff.
I Good Housekeeping
The following good housekeeping practices will be followed onsite during the construction project.
a. An effort will be made to store only enough product required to do the job.
b. All materials stored onsite will be stored in a neat, orderly manner and, if possible, under a
roof or other enclosure.
c. Products will be kept in their original containers with the original manufacturer's label in
legible condition.
d. Substances will not be mixed with one another unless recommended by the manufacturer.
e. Whenever possible,all of a product will be used up before disposing of the container.
f. Manufacturer's recommendations for proper use and disposal will be followed.
g. The job site superintendent will be responsible for daily inspections to ensure proper use and
disposal of materials.
2. Hazardous Products
These practices will be used to reduce the risks associated with hazardous materials,
a. Products will be kept in original containers with the original labels in legible condition.
b. Original labels and material safety data sheets (MSDS's) will be procured and used for each
material.
c. If surplus product must be disposed of, manufacturer's or local/state/federal recommended
methods for proper disposal will be followed.
d. A spill control and containment kit (containing, for example, absorbent such as kitty litter or
sawdust, acid neutralizing powder,brooms,dust pans,mops,rags,gloves,goggles,plastic and
metal trash containers,etc.)will be provided at the storage site.
January 2005 1
Country Inn and Suites Hotel
STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN
e. All of the product in a container will be used before the container is disposed of All such
containers will be triple-rinsed with water prior to disposal. The rinse water used in these
containers will be disposed of in a manner in compliance with state and federal regulations
and will not be allowed to mix with stormwater discharges.
3. Product SpecificTractices
The following product specific practices will be followed on the job site.
a. Petroleum Products
All onsite vehicles will be monitored for leaks and receive regular preventative maintenance to
reduce the chance of leakage. Petroleum products will be stored in tightly sealed containers
which are clearly labeled. Any petroleum storage tanks used onsite will have a dike or berm
containment structure constructed around it to contain any spills which may occur. Any
asphalt substances used onsite will be applied according to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
b. Fertilizers
Fertilizers will be applied only in the minimum amounts recommended by the manufacturer.
Once applied, fertilizer will be worked in the soil to limit exposure to stormwater. Storage
will be in a covered shed. The contents of any partially used bags of fertilizer will be
transferred to a sealable plastic bin to avoid spills.
c, Paints,Paint Solvents,and Cleaning Solvents
All containers will be tightly sealed and stored when not in use. Excess paint and solvents will
not be discharged to the storm sewer system but will be properly disposed of according to
manufacturer's instructions or state and federal regulations.
d. Concrete Trucks
Concrete trucks will be allowed to wash out or discharge surplus concrete or drum wash water
on the site,but only in either(1) specifically designated diked areas which have been prepared
to prevent contact between the concrete and/or washout and stormwater which will be
discharged from the site or(2) in locations where waste concrete can be poured into forms to
make riprap or other useful concrete products.
The hardened residue from the concrete washout diked areas will be disposed of in the same
manner as other non-hazardous construction waste materials or may be broken up and used on
site as deemed appropriate by the Contractor. The job site superintendent will be responsible
for seeing that these procedures are followed.
4. Spill Prevention Practices
In addition to the good housekeeping and material management practices discussed in the previous
sections of this plan,the following practices will be followed for spill prevention and cleanup.
a. Manufacturer's recommended methods for spill cleanup will be clearly posted and site
personnel will be trained regarding these procedures and the location of the information and
cleanup supplies.
b. Materials and equipment necessary for spill cleanup will be kept in the material storage area
onsite in spill control and containment kit (containing, for example, absorbent such as kitty
litter or sawdust, acid neutralizing powder, brooms, dust pans, mops, rags, gloves, goggles,
plastic and metal trash containers, etc.).
c. All spills will be cleaned up immediately after discovery.
12
January 2005
Country Inn and Suites Hotel
STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN
d. The spill area will be kept well ventilated and personnel will wear appropriate protective
clothing to prevent injury from contact with the hazardous substances.
c. Spills of toxic or hazardous materials will be reported to the appropriate federal, state, and/or
local government agency, regardless of the size of the spill. Spills of amounts that exceed
Reportable Quantities of certain substances specifically mentioned in federal regulations (40
CFR 302 list and oil) will be immediately reported to the EPA National Response Center,
telephone 1-800-424-8802. Reportable Quantities of some substances which may be used at
the job site are as follows:
oil-appearance of a film or sheen on water
pesticides-usually I lb.
acids-5000 lb.
solvents,flammable-100 lb.
f. The SPCC plan will be adjusted to include measures to prevent this type of spill from
recurring and how to clean up the spill if there is another one. A description of the spill, what
caused it, and the cleanup measures will also be included. If the spill exceeds a Reportable
Quantity,all federal regulations regarding reports of the incident will be complied with.
g. The job site superintendent will be the spill prevention and cleanup coordinator. He will
designate the individuals who will receive spill prevention and cleanup training. These
individuals will each become responsible for a particular phase of prevention and cleanup.
The names of these personnel will be posted in the material storage area and in the office
trailer onsite.
VM. CONTROL OF ALLOWABLE NON-STORMWATER DISCHARGES
A. Certain types of discharges are allowable under the NYSDEC General Permit for Construction Activity,and
it is the intent of this SWPPP to allow such discharges. These types of discharges will be allowed under the
conditions that no pollutants will be allowed to come in contact with the water prior to or after its discharge.
The control measures which have been outlined previously in this SWPPP will be strictly followed to
ensure that no contamination of these non-storinwater discharges takes place.The following allowable non-
stormwater discharges which may occur from the job site include:
1. Discharges from fire fighting activities
2. Fire hydrant flushings (see note below)
3. Waters used to wash vehicles or control dust in order to minimize offsite sediment tracking
4. Routine external building washdown which does not use detergents.
5. Pavement washwaters where spills or leaks of hazardous materials have not occurred or detergents
have not been used.
6. Air conditioning condensate.
7. Springs and other uncontaminated groundwater,including dewatering ground water infiltration.
8. Foundation or footing drains where no contamination with process materials such as solvents is
present.
January 2005 13
Country Inn and Suites Hotel
STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN
I.X. CERTIFICATION AND NOTIFICATION
A. The NYSDEC requires that certifications of knowledge of the contents of this SWPPP and agreement to
follow the SWPPP be made by the Operator and the Contractor. The terms of the General Permit also
require that each Contractor sign the SWPPP plan, thereby making them co-permittees and acknowledging
their responsibility for certain operational aspects of the plan. The contractor certifications should be
signed before the contractor begins activities and should be filed with the site's SWPPP at the job site.
These certifications are provided within this document.Refer to the Table of Contents for location.
B. Operator's Certification:
"I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or
supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and
evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the
system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information,the information is, to the best of
my knowledge and belief, true, accurate and complete. I am aware that false statements made herein are
punishable as a class A misdemeanor pursuant to Section 210,45of the Penal Law."
Name:
Title:Project Manager
Signature:
Date:
C. Engineer's Certification of Compliance with Federal, State and Local Regulations:
This Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan reflects the NYSDEC requirements for stormwater management
and erosion and sediment control.
Name:David A.Herrick,P.E.
Title:Priinci all,T.G.Miller,P.C.i
V
Signatu e:
Date:
January 2005 14
02250 -TRENCHING AND BACKFILL FOR SITE UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Excavating trenches for utilities from 5 feet outside building.
2. Compacted fill from top of utility bedding to subgrade elevations.
3. Backfilling and compaction.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section"Water Distribution".
2. Division 2 Section"Sanitary Sewerage".
3. Division 2 Section"Storm Sewerage".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.
B. Base Course:Layer placed between the subbase and a pavement,walk or structure.
C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over excavated subgrade in a trench before laying a pipe.
D. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill when sufficient approved
on-site soil material is not available from excavations.
E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.
1. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial
work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. Fill and compact
unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of the same classification,
unless otherwise directed by the Architect.
2. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations,notify
Architect, who will make an inspection of conditions. If the Architect determines that
bearing materials at required subgrade elevations are unsuitable,continue excavation until
suitable bearing materials are encountered and replace excavated material as directed by
Architect.
Trenching and Backfill for Site Utilities 02250-1
F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
G. Structures: Buildings,footings,foundations,retaining walls,slabs,tanks,curbs,mechanical and
electrical appurtenances, manholes, catch basins, or other man-made stationary features
constructed above or below the ground surface.
H. Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and base course or between subgrade and
pavement,walk or structure.
I. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of undisturbed earth remaining after completing excavation, or
top surface of a compacted fill or backfill immediately below base course, pipe bedding, lined
channel or topsoil materials.
J. Utilities include on-site underground pipes,conduits,ducts,and cables,and appurtenant structures,
as well as underground services within buildings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for
compliance of the following with requirements indicated:
I. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material proposed
for fill and backfill.
2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or borrow soil
material proposed for fill and backfill.
3. Sieve analysis results for pipe bedding and base course materials.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according
to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials testing,as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and
ASTM E 548.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do n*ot interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services
according to requirements indicated:
1, Notify Architect not less than two weeks in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
4. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.
5. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during
excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and
Trenching and Backfill for Site Utilities 02250-2
utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged
utilities to the satisfaction of utility owner.
B. Use of explosives:Use of explosives will be determined by the Owner.
C. Protection of Persons and Property:Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and
post with warning lights.
1. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Protect structures,utilities,sidewalks,pavements,and other facilities from damage caused
by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by
earthworks operations..
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available
from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW,GP,GM, SW, SP,and SM,or
a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm)in any
dimension, debris,waste,frozen materials,vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC,NM,Nffl, CL, CH, OL,
OH, and PT,or a combination of these group symbols.
I. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials.
E. Base:NYSDOT type 2 crushed ledgerock.
F. Bedding Stone: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,crushed stone,
and natural or crushed sand;ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a I-inch(25-mom)
sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200(0.075-mm) sieve.
G. Drainage Stone: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch
(3 8-nim) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.3 6-mm)sieve.
H. Structural Fill: Well-graded sand and gravel or crushed rock product which is capable of being
compacted to required density at the proper moisture content and which is free of deleterious
materials,trash,roots, debris, frozen material and organic or other foreign matter. Fill material
shall be accepted on the basis of gradation, soundness, plasticity index, and a well defined
moisture•-Density Relationship Test(ASTM 1557,Modified Proctor). Soundness shall be less than
30%loss based on a four-cycle magnesium sulfate soundness test. Plasticity Index of that portion
Trenching and Backfill for Site Utilities 02250 -3
of fill material passing the No.40 mesh sieve shall not exceed 5.0. Gradation of the materials shall
be within the following limits:
PERCENT PASSING BY WEIGHT SIEVE SIZE
100 4 inch
90-100 2 inch
30-65 1/4 inch
5-40 No.40
0-10 No. 200
I. Cushion Sand:Clean,hard,durable,uncoated particles,free from lumps of clay and all deleterious
substances conforming to the following limits of gradation when dry:
PERCENT PASSING BY WEIGHT SIEVE SIZE
100 1/4 inch
0-35 No. 50
0-10 No. 100
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Warning Tape:Acid and alkali resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking
and identifying underground utilities,6-inches wide and 4-mils thick,continuously inscribed with
a description of the utility.Provide tape colors to utilities as follows:
1. Red:Electric
2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam
3. Orange:Telephone and other Communications
4. Blue:Water
5. Green: Sewer systems.
PART 3 •EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective
insulating materials as necessary.
Trenching and Backfill for Site Utilities 02250-4
C. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of
soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
3.2 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and around water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared
subgrades,and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
I Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of
subgrade material, undercutting pavement, and soil changes detrimental to stability of
subgrades and structures. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and
discharge lines,and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away
from excavations. Saturated,unstable soil conditions are not suitable for subgrades under
structures.
2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage swales and other diversions outside excavation
limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collecting or runoff
areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. Provide temporary
erosion and sediment control.
3. Do not discharge sediment laden water into the adjoining storm or sanitary sewer system or
open swales. Pump sediment laden water from excavations into a portable sediment tank
or a high-strength, non-woven geotextile fabric bag. Size portable-sediment tanks in
accordance with the New York Guidelines for Urban Erosion and Sediment Control,fourth
printing.
3.3 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface
and subsurface conditions encountered,including rock, soil materials,and obstructions.
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and
rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
3.4 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS
A. General: Comply with local codes, ordinances,and requirements of agencies having jurisdiction.
B. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes,ordinances,and requirements of agencies
having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions
or stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until
completion of backfilling. .
C. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights,
stringers, and cross braces, in good serviceable condition. Maintain shoring and bracing in
excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Extend shoring and bracing as
excavation progresses.
Trenching and Backfill for Site Utilities 02250-5
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY STRUCTURES
A. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot,and
extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of
concrete formwork, and other construction and for inspection.
1. Excavations for utility structures:Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand
to final subgrade just before base material is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and
grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
3.6 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a
minimum of 12 inches of clearance on both sides of pipe or conduit.
B. Excavate trenches and conduit to subgrade depth indicated or required to establish indicated slope
and invert elevations.
1. Where rock is encountered,carry excavation 6 inches below required elevation and backfill
with a 6-inch layer of pipe bedding material prior-to installation of pipe.
2. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal size,hand-excavate bottom cut to accurate
elevations and support pipe or conduit on pipe bedding material.
3. For pipes and equipment 6 inches or larger in nominal size excavate to required subgrade
and provide•pipe bedding material at indicated thickness.
3.7 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE
A. Notify Architect if unsatisfactory soil is present upon reaching required subgrade.
B. Reconstruct,subgrades; damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities,as directed by Architect.
3.8 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of
concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom,without altering top elevation. Lean concrete
fill may be used when approved by Architect.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by
Architect,
3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
Trenching and Backfill for Site Utilities 02250-6
A. Stockpile Borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials
without intermixing. Place,grade,and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent
windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
3.10 BACKFILL AND FILL
A. Place soil material in compacted layers to required subgrade elevations promptly,but not before
completing the following:
1. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents.
2. Inspecting and testing underground utilities.
3. Removing trash and debris.
4. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
3.11 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course
to provide continuous support for bells,joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and
bodies of conduits.
B. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches(450 mm)of bottom of footings;
fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.
C. Place and compact initial backfill of bedding material,free ofparticles larger than 1 inch(25 mm),
to a height of 12 inches(300 min)over the utility pipe or conduit.
1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides
and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of
utility system.
D. Backfill excavated areas under existing and proposed pavements, including driveways and
sidewalks,to subgrade elevations with structural fill.Place backfill from top of bedding material
to pavement subgrade in maximum 8-inch lifts, each lift compacted at or above 95 percent
maximum density.
E. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
F. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing are removed.
G. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 nun)below finished grade, except 6
inches(15 0 mm)below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Trenching and Backfill for Site Utilities -02260-7
A. Contractor to engage a testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer.
Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply
with requirements.
B. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556,ASTM D 2167,
ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937,as applicable. Perform tests at the following locations and
frequencies:
1. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer,at least one test for each
150 feet(46 m) or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.
C. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified,scarify and moisten or aerate,or remove and replace soil to depth required;
recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.13 PROTECTION
A. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses,remove finished surfacing,backfill
with additional soil material, compact,and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance,quality,and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,and
eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
3.14 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal:
1. Remove waste material,including unsatisfactory excavated material,demolished pavements,
excess soil,cobbles,trash,and,debris,and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02250
Trenching and Backfill for Site Utilities 02250 -8
02510 -WATER DISTRIBUTION
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Water systems piping for potable-water and fire-protection water service outside the
building.
2. Abandoning of existing water mains or services.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division I Section"Quality Control".
2. Division I Section"Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls".
3. Division I Section"Contract Closeout":Project Record Documents.
4. Division I Section"Submittals".
5. Division 2 Section "Trenching and Backfill for Site Utilities": Trench excavation and
backfill.
6. Division 2 Section"Hydrostatic Testing and Disinfection of Water System".
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSFAWWA C600-Installation of Ductile-iron Water Mains and their Appurtenances.
B. ANSI/AWWA C651 -Standards for Disinfecting Water Mains
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include pressure rating and rated capacity for the following:
1. Ductile iron pipe,fittings and polyethylene wrap.
2. Valves and valve boxes.
3. Hydrants.
4. Tapping sleeves.
5. Corporation stops for sampling taps.
6. Curb stops and boxes.
B. Certificate: Certify that integrity and cleanliness of water system meets or exceeds specified
requirements.
Water Distribution 02510 - 1
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and valves with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage,and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and entrance of dirt,debris,and moisture,
B. Protect stored pipes and valves from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed
structural capacity of floor,if stored inside.
C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
D. Handling:Use sling to handle valves whose size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to
avoid damage to exposed valve parts.Do not use hand wheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: Perform site survey,research Town of Ithaca utility records,and verify existing
utility-locations.
B. Locate existing water service valves,piping and main connections to be closed and abandoned.
C. Existing Utilities*, Do not interrupt public utilities unless permitted under the following conditions
and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements
indicated:
1. Notify Town of Ithaca and Southern Cayuga Lake Intennunicipal Water Commission
(SCLIWC)not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without SCLIWC written permission.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pipe and Fittings: Marked with manufacturer's name, nominal diameter of openings, pressure
rating, class or thickness, linings,material,date and country of manufacture.
B. Valves and Hydrants: Marked on the bonnet or valve body with manufacturer's name,year the
valve casting was made,pressure rating.
1.8 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for piping and
specialties,unless otherwise indicated:
I. Potable-Water and Fire-Protection Water Service: 150 psig.
1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate interruption of service and connections to water main with SCLIWC.
Water Distribution 02510 -2
B. Coordinate piping materials,sizes,entry locations,and pressure requirements with building water
distribution and fire protection piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by the following:
1. Valves and Tapping Sleeve:
a. Mueller Co.
2,2 PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings:AWWA C 15 1,.Class 52.
1. Lining: AWWA C104,double thickness Portland Cement Mortar with seal coat.
2. Gaskets,Glands,Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111.
3. Push-on Joint Pipe:AWWA C1 11,rubber gaskets.
4. Mechanical Joint Pipe:AWWA C 111,rubber gaskets,ductile or cast iron glands,and low-
alloy high-strength steel bolts and nuts. -
5. Polyethylene Encasement:ANSI/AWWA C 105 for polyethylene film,tube form, Class A
(natural color), 8 mil nominal thickness.
B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88,Type K annealed. Cast copper fittings in accordance with ASTM
B62. Compression connections for joints in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C800.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe Couplings:Ductile iron body and followers,fabricated to match outside diameters of pipes
to be joined, enamel paint finish.
B. Mechanical Joint Pipe Restraint:Ductile iron wedge action retainer gland with auto-torque wedge
bolts.
1. Manufacturers: Ebba Iron,Inc.,Megalug Series 1104.
2.4 VALVES
A. Gate Valve:Resilient-seated gate valves for water in accordance with AWWA C509. Iron body,
bronze trim, single-wedge,non-rising stem with square nut for mechanical joint ends. Stainless
steel bolts,studs and nuts for bonnet.Working pressure of 200 psi through 12-inch size.Open left.
B. Curb Valves and Corporation Stops:Brass body,teflon coated brass ball,rubber seats,compression
connections.Curb valve with tee stem drilled for connection to control rod,quarter turn check and
no drain.
Water Distribution 02510 -3
C, Valve Boxes:Cast-iron screw-type box having top section and cover with lettering"WATER"and
arrow pointing in the direction ofopening and the work"OPEN"at the arrowhead.Bottom section
with base of size to fit over valve and barrel approximately 5-1/4 inches in diameter,and adjustable
cast-iron extension of length required for depth of bury of valve.Box and cover bituminous coated.
2.5 ANCHORAGES
A. Anchoring Rods: 3/4-inch diameter stainless steel threaded rod, with stainless steel nuts and
washers.
B. Concrete Reaction Backing: Portland cement concrete mix,3,000 psi.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify main size, location, and elevations of connection to existing system are as shown on
Drawings.
3.2 EARTHWORK
A. Trench excavation and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section"Trenching and Backfill for
Site Utilities."
B. Place bedding material at trench bottom across entire width of trench in such thickness that
minimum of 6 inches will be under the bottom of the pipe.Extend the level surface of the bedding
material to 12 inches above the top of pipe.
I Shape the bed to receive the pipe. Work bedding material under the pipe to provide
continuous support.
3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and
arrangement of underground water piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design
considerations into account. Install piping as indicated,to extent practical.
3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. General: Install pipe and fittings in accordance with AWWA C600.
B. Maintain minimum 10 feet horizontal separation of water main from_ sewer mains. Maintain
minimum 18 inch vertical separation of water main and sewer main at crossings,
C. Lay piping with bells facing the direction in which the work is progressing.
Water Distribution 02510-4
D. Install piping free of sags,beads and high points.
E. Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure not less than 4.5 feet of cover beneath proposed
finish grade,unless shown otherwise.
F. Close all open pipe ends or fittings at the end of each construction day with watertight expandable
plugs.Do not use plywood,burlap,plastic or other non-watertight covers.
G. Install 1-inch corporation stop at locations directed by SCLIWC to permit filling the main,
hydrostatic testing and disinfection of water system.
I. Use drilling machine compatible with service clamp and corporation stop.
2. Remove corporation stops used for testing and disinfection and install permanent brass plug
in main.
3.5 INSTALLATION -ANCHORAGE
A. Provide anchorages for tees,plugs and caps,bends,crosses,valves and hydrant branches.
B. Form and pour concrete reaction backing against undisturbed trench wall at each bend or change
of direction of pipe.Leave all mechanical joint nuts and bolts accessible after form work has been
removed.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare reports for all flushing,hydrostatic testing and disinfection activities.
END OF SECTION 02510
Water Distribution 02510 -5
02630 - SANITARY SEWERAGE
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Pipe,fittings and accessories for sanitary sewer mains.
2. Pre-cast concrete sanitary sewer manholes,frame and lid.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division I Section "Quality Control".
2. Division 1 Section"Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls".
3. Division 1 Section"Contract Closeout": Project Record Documents.
.4. Division 1 Section"Submittals".
5. Division 2 Section "Trenching and Backfill for Site Utilities": Trench excavation and
backfill.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C1224-02 - Standard Test Method for Concrete Sewer Manholes by the Negative Air
Pressure(Vacuum)Test Prior to Backfill.
B. ASTMF1417-92(1998)Standard TestMethod for Installation Acceptance ofPlastic Gravity Sewer
Lines Using Low-Pressure Air.
C. ANSI/ASTM D3034-Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
D. ASTM D2241 -Standard specification for poly vinyl chloride(PVC)plastic pipe(SDR-PR),
E. ASTM A48 -Gray Iron Castings.
F. ASTM C478-Pre-cast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections.
G. ASTM C923 -Resilient Connectors between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structure and Pipes.
H. ASTM A746—Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Sanitary Sewerage 02530- 1
A. Product data for sewer pipe.
B. Shop Drawings:Include plans,elevations,details and attachments for precast concrete manholes
including flow inverts,benches,frames, covers and grates.
C. Record Drawings: Showing manholes and other structures,pipe sizes,locations,and elevations.
Include details of underground structures and connections.
D. Test Reports: Indicate results comparative to specified requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store plastic structures,pipe,and fittings in direct sunlight.
B. Protect pipe,pipe fittings,and seals from dirt and damage.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: Perform site survey,research Owner's and Town of Ithaca utility records,and
verify existing utility locations.
B. Locate existing sewer laterals to be closed and abandoned.
C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt public utilities unless permitted under the following conditions
and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements
indicated:
1. Notify Town of Ithaca not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Utility Compliance: Comply with the Town of Ithaca Sewage Disposal Ordinance for
regulations and standards pertaining to building laterals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. Plastic Pipe and Fittings: ANSI/ASTM D3034,Type PSM,Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)material,
SDR 35; nominal diameter as shown on the drawings;and bell and spigot style rubber ring sealed
gasket joint.
B. Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings: AWWA C151, Class 51.
1. Lining:Two component polyurethane coating,system with a minimum thickness of40 mils.
Gaskets,Glands,Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C1 11.
Sanitary Sewerage 02530-2
2. Push-on Joint Pipe:AWWA Cl 11,rubber gaskets.
3. Mechanical Joint Pipe:AWWA C 111,rubber gaskets,ductile or cast iron glands,and low-
alloy high-strength steel bolts and nuts.
2.2 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS
A. Sleeve-Type Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1173, rubber or elastomeric sleeve and band assembly
fabricated to mate with OD of pipes to be joined, for nonpressure joints.
B. Sleeve Material for Concrete Pipe: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M),rubber.
C. Sleeve Material for Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM C 564,rubber.
D. Sleeve Material for Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 477,elastomeric seal.
E. Sleeve Material for Dissimilar Pipe: Compatible with pipe materials being joined.
F. Bands: Stainless steel,at least one at each pipe insert.
2.3 PRE-CAST CONCRETE MANHOLE
A. Manhole Sections: Reinforced pre-cast concrete in accordance with ASTM C478;utilize rubber
O-rings for jointing between sections;and eccentric cone or cover slab as shown on Drawings. All
manholes 48 inch interior dimension unless noted otherwise. Top of eccentric cone to match grade
ring dimension.
2.4 MANHOLE FRAME AND COVER
A. Frame and Cover: ASTM A53 6,Grade 60,heavy duty,cast iron,30 inch clear opening by 6 to 9
inch riser,cover with non penetrating pick holes and neoprene gasket cemented into a machined
groove, checkered top design with lettering "SANITARY SEWER"" cast into cover, and coated
with tar pitch varnish.
B. Manufacturer:
1. Syracuse Castings,Pattern 10 1 6A with Flow Seal Cover.
2. Other acceptable equal.
2.5 MANHOLE STEPS
A. Steps: Copolymer polypropylene encapsulated steel,in accordance with ASTM C478, spaced at
12 inches on-center and formed integral with manhole section.
2.6 RESILIENT CONNECTOR
Sanitary Sewerage 02530 -3
A. Connector: Watertight pipe to manhole boot seal, in accordance with ASTM C-923, to match
outside diameter of sewer pipe; stainless steel sleeve,take-up clamps and screws.
2.7 MANHOLE COATINGS
A. Manhole Sections and Concrete Floor: Coal tax-epoxy coating inside and out on all sections and
grouted joints and on interior concrete floor and channel.
B. Manufacturer:
1. Tnemec Company,Inc.,46H-413.
2. Other acceptable equal.
2.8 CONFIGURATION
A. Sanitary Sewer Manholes:
1. Align steps with eccentric riser sections.
2. Shape,clear inside dimensions, and design depth as shown on Drawings.
3. Provide pipe knockouts and openings as shown on Drawings.
2.9 BEDDING MATERIALS
A. Pipe, Fittings and Manholes: All pipe and fittings bedded in Bedding Stone, as specified in
Division 2 Section"Trenching and Backfill for Site Utilities".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify main size, location, and elevations of connection to existing system are as shown on
Drawings.
3.2 EARTHWORK
A. Trench excavation and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section"Trenching and Backfill for
Site Utilities." Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated.
B. Place bedding material at trench bottom across entire width of trench in such thickness that
minimum of 6 inches will be under the bottom of the pipe.Extend the level surface of the bedding
material to 12 inches above the top of pipe.
C. Shape the bed to receive the pipe. Work bedding material under the pipe to provide continuous
support.
Sanitary Sewerage 02530 -4
3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and
arrangement ofunderground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement ofpiping layout
take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated,to extent practical.
3A INSTALLATION - PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Install plastic sewer pipe, fittings and accessories in accordance with ASTM D2321 and
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install pipe in straight line between manholes and fittings to grades indicated on drawings with
unbroken continuity of invert. Horizontal dimensions indicated for piping are to centerline of
manholes or fittings. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream.
C. Use proper size increasers,reducers,and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and
fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
D. Lift or roll pipe into position,do not drop or drag pipe over prepared bedding material.
E. Install gaskets, seals,sleeves,and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for
use of lubricants,cements,and other installation requirements.
F. Shore pipe to required position and retain in place until after placing and compacting of adjacent
backfill.Ensure pipe remains in correct position and to required slope.
G. Maintain minimum 10 feet horizontal separation of sewer main from water mains. Maintain
minimum 18 inch vertical separation of sewer main and water main at crossings.
H. Close all open pipe ends and fittings at the end of each construction day with watertight
expandable plugs. Do not use plywood,burlap,plastic and other non-watertight covers.
1. Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure not less than 4.5 feet of cover, unless shown
otherwise.
J. Refer to Division 2 Section"Trenching and Backfill for Site Utilities"for backfill requirements.
Do not displace or damage pipe when compacting.
3.5 INSTALLATION - SANITARY SEWER MANHOLES
A. Pre-cast Concrete Manholes:
1. Place base sections on leveled bedding material and at required elevation to maintain pipe
invert elevations indicated on Drawings.
2. Place riser sections,tops and cover slabs plumb and level. Grout joints between sections
and apply specified coating.
3. Form inverts of sanitary sewer manholes by running ahalf pipe section through the manhole.
Install concrete floor on top of base section floor to height of top of pipe leaving manhole.
Neatly shape floor to confine sewage from overflowing on manhole bottom if sewer should
Sanitary Sewerage 02530-5
flow more than half full. Provide a minimum of 3/4 inch drop between inlet and outlet
invert elevations. Apply specified coating to concrete floor.
4. Set cover frames centered on manhole section openings to required elevations. Adjust With
grade rings, as necessary. Grout frames and grade rings to manhole section and apply
specified coating. Set lids in frame and correct deficiency in casting such that lid will seat
in any position without rocking.
3.6 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings: As follows:
1 Install according to ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer's written instructions. Join with
elastomeric seals in accordance with ASTM D3212.
2. Join piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this
application. Use couplings that are compatible with and that fit both systems'materials and
dimensions.
3.7 TAP CONNECTIONS
I
A. Make connections to existing sewer piping so finished Work complies as nearly as practical with
requirements specified for new Work.
B. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of
existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6-inch
overlap,with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.
C. Protect existing piping and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap
connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.
3.8 CLOSING ABANDONED SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEMS
A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned sewer laterals at the street line with threaded
metal caps,plastic plugs,or other acceptable methods suitable for size and type of material being
closed. Do not use wood plugs.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses.
B. Pressure Test:
1. Test gravity sewers by use of air equipment. Provide all labor,materials and equipment for
the test.
2. For the section of main being tested,there may be a permissible drop of 0.5 psi gage from
3.5 to 3.0 psi gage in the minimum times listed in the following table:
SPECIFICATION TIME REQUIRED FOR A 0.5 PSIG PRESSURE DROP
FOR SIZE AND LENGTH OF PIPE INDICATED
Sanitary Sewerage 02530-6
Pipe Min.Time Length for Time for Specification Time for Length(I-)Shown
Dia. Min.Time Longer Length (min:sec)
(in) (see Lnun:sec) (Ift) 100 R 200 R 300 ft 400 ft
4 1:53 597 0.190L 1:53 1:53 1:53 1:53
6 2:50 398 0.427L 2:50 2:50 2:50 2:51
8 3:47 298 0.760L 3:47 3:47 3:48 5:04
10 4:43 239 1.187L 4:43 4:43 5:56 7:54
12 5:40 199 1.709L 5:40 5:42 8:33 11:24
C. Interior Inspection: Inspect piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has
occurred. Make initial inspection after pipe has been installed and approximately 2 feet ofbackfill
is in place. Provide necessary lamps, labor and equipment for a final interior inspection with
Architect at completion of work.
D. Vacuum Testing Manholes:
1. Test each manhole after assembly and prior to backfilling with vacuum testing equipment.
2. Plug all lift holes with non-shrink grout.
3. Do not place grout in horizontal joints before testing.
4. Plug all pipes entering manhole. Securely brace the plugs to avoid plugs being drawn into
the manhole.
5. Place the test head at the inside of the top of the cone section or cover slab and inflate the
seal in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
6. Draw a vacuum of 10 inches of mercury and shut off vacuum pump. With pump,valves
closed measure the time for the vacuum to drop to 9 inches. The manhole passes if the time
is greater than 60 seconds for a 48 inch diameter manhole and greater than 75 seconds for
a 60 inch diameter manhole.
7. If the manhole fails the initial test,repair joints with non-shrink grout while the vacuum is
still being drawn.
8. Retest until the manhole passes.
E. Deflection Test for Installed Pipe-, Perform deflection test on all installed sections of the sewer line
or on those sections ordered to be tested by the Architect. The test consists of pulling by hand a
GO-NO-GO mandrel (5% smaller than the pipe ID)or similar device through the installed pipe.
Allowable deflection to be not more than 5.0 percent. Any section of pipe not able to pass this test
shall be replaced with new pipe and the test, including leakage test, shall be repeated until
successful.
F. If testing and inspection indicate defects, correct such defects and retest.
END OF SECTION 02530
Sanitary Sewerage 02530-7
02630 -STORM SEWERAGE
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Storm sewerage system piping,fittings,end sections and accessories.
2. Pre-cast concrete drainage inlets and manholes,outlet structures,frames,grates and covers.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division I Section "Quality Control".
2. Division 1 Section"Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls".
3. Division I Section"Contract Closeout": Project Record Documents.
4. Division I Section"Submittals".
5. Division 2 Section "Trenching and Backfill for Site Utilities": Trench excavation and
backfill.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D3350 -Polyethylene Plastic Pipe.
B. ANST/ASTMD3034-Type PSM Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC),SDR 35,Solid andPerforated Sewer
Pipe.
C. ASTM F405 -Corrugated Polyethylene Tubing and Fittings.
D. AASHTO M294-Strength Requirements for ASTM D3350 Polyethylene PlasticPipe andFittings,
12 to 36 inch diameter.
E. AASHTO M252-Strength Requirements for ASTM D3350 Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage
Tubing.
F. New York State Department of Transportation , Standard Specifications, Construction and
Materials, 1990 edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for drainage pipe,galvanized end sections and filter fabric.
Storm Sewerage 02630 - 1
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans,elevations, details,and attachments for the following:
1 Precast concrete manholes, drop inlets, outlet structures and other structures, including
frames,covers, and grates.
2. Cast-in-place concrete manholes,drop inlets,outlet structures and other structures,including
frames,covers,and grates.
C. Record Drawings: Showing manholes and other structures,pipe sizes,locations,and elevations.
Include details of underground structures and connections.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store plastic structures,pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.
B. Protect pipe,pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
C. Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's written rigging
instructions.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: Perform site survey,research Town's utility records,and verify existing utility
locations.
B. Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Utility Compliance:Comply with the NYSDEC,NYSDOT and Town of Ithaca regulations
and standards pertaining to stormwater systems.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work with location and alignment of curbing.
B. Coordinate work with location and alignment of existing drainage structures and proposed
foundation piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 -PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. Corrugated Polyethylene Plastic Pipe:
Storm Sewerage 02630-2
I. ASTM D3350 with strength requirements ofAASHTO M252 for sizes 4 to 10 inch diameter
and AASHTO M294 for sizes 12 to 36 inch diameter; smooth interior. Sizes and lengths
as shown on Drawings.
2. Coupling bands or external snap couplers same material as pipe.
B. Plastic Pipe and Fittings: ANSI/ASTM D3034,Type PSM,Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC)material,
SDR 35;nominal diameter as shown on the drawings;and bell and spigot style rubber ring sealed
gasketjoint.
C. Galvanized Flared-end Sections: Galvanized, with toe plate; one size larger than corrugated
polyethylene plastic pipe diameter.
2.2 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS
A. Sleeve-Type Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1173, rubber or elastomeric sleeve and band assembly
fabricated to mate with OD of pipes to be joined,for nonpressure joints.
1. Sleeve Material for Concrete Pipe: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M),rubber.
2. Sleeve Material for Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM C 564,rubber.
3. Sleeve Material for Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 477,elastomeric seal.
4. Sleeve Material for Dissimilar Pipe: Compatible with pipe materials being j oined.
5. Bands: Stainless steel,at least one at each pipe insert.
2.3 MANHOLES
A. Normal Traffic Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478(ASTM C 478M),AASHTO HS-20-44
design loading,precast,reinforced concrete,of depth indicated,with provision for rubber gasketed
joints.
1. Diameter: 48 inches minimum,unless otherwise indicated.
2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section,as
required to prevent flotation.
3. Base Section: 8-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 6-inch minimum thickness for
walls and base riser section,.and having separate base slab or base section with integral
floor.
4. Riser Sections: 6-inch minimum thickness, and lengths to provide depth indicated.
5. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type,unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated.
Top of cone of size that matches grade rings.
6. Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M),rubber.
7. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings,of 6-to 9-inch total thickness,
that match 24-inch diameter frame and cover.
9. Steps: ASTM C 478(ASTM C 478M),individual steps or ladder. Omit steps for manholes
less than 60 inches deep.
9. Pipe Connectors: Provide knockouts, of size and orientation required, for each pipe
connecting to base.
B. Manhole Frames and Covers: Grade 60, cast-iron castings designed for heavy-duty service.
Include 24-inch ID with indented top design and lettering"STORM SEWER!'cast into cover,
Storm Sewerage 02630-3
2.4 DRAINAGE INLETS AND OUTLET STRUCTURES
A. Normal-Traffic,Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M),AASHTO HS-
20-44 design loading,precast,reinforced concrete, of depth indicated,with provision for rubber
gasketed joints.
1. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 6-inch minimum thickness for
walls and base riser section,and having base section with integral floor.
2. Riser Sections: 6-inch minimum thickness and lengths to provide depth indicated.
3. Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M),rubber.
4. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings,of 6-to 9-inch total thickness,
that match dimension of frame and grate.
S. Pipe Connectors: Provide knockouts, of size and orientation required, for each pipe
connecting to base.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify main size, location, and elevations of connection to existing system are as shown on
Drawings.
3.2 EARTHWORK
A. Trench excavation and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section"Trenching and Backfill for
Site Utilities."
B. Place bedding material at trench bottom across entire width of trench in such thickness that
minimum of 6 inches will be under the bottom of the pipe.Extend the level surface of the bedding
material to 12 inches above the top of pipe. Shape the bed to receive the pipe. Work bedding
material under the pipe to provide continuous support.
3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and
arrangement of underground storm sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout
take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated,to extent practical.
B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken
continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets,seals,sleeves,and
couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions foruse of lubricants,cements,and other
installation requirements.
C. Use manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch
connections,unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
Storm Sewerage 02630-4
D. Use proper size increasers,reducers,and couplings where different sizes or materials ofpipes and
fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
E. Lift or roll pipe into position,do not drop or drag pipe over prepared bedding material.
F. Shore pipe to required position and retain in place until after placing and compacting of adjacent
backfill. Ensure pipe remains in correct position and to required slope.
3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PE Pipe and Fittings: Install according to ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Join piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this application.
Use couplings that are compatible with and that fit both systems' materials and dimensions.
3.5 INSTALLATION -STORM STRUCTURES
A. General: Install manholes,drainage inlets and outlet structures complete with appurtenances and
accessories indicated.Coordinate alignment ofknockout openings with pipe routes.Align manhole
steps with eccentric riser section.
B Place precast concrete base sections on leveled bedding material and at required elevation to
maintain pipe invert elevations indicated.
C. Install storm sewer pipe flush with the inside face of manhole and drainage inlet wall.Seal voids
between pipe and knockout with cement grout inside and outside of the structure.Leave 3-inch-
projected end for underdrain pipe. Do not begin backfilling until cement grout seal is completely
set.
D. Maintain drainage,where necessary,by installing frame and grate flush with temporary finished
grade and bring to final elevation at time of paving with precast concrete grade ring and grout
frame permanently in place.
E. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated and grout in place.
F. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements.
Align drainage inlet frames to match the line of curbing. Set grate in frame and correct deficiency
in casting such that grate will seat in any position without rocking.
G. Verify installation of manhole steps to avoid conflict with inlet and outlet pipes.
3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Intended Elevation of Pipe Invert: Y2inch.
B. Maximum Offset of Pipe from True Alignment: 3 inches.
Storm Sewerage 02630-5
C. Maximum Variation in Profile of Structure from Intended Position: 1/8 percent.
3.7 TAP CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to existing piping and underground structures so finished Work complies as
nearly as practical with requirements specified for new Work.
B. Make branch connections into underground structures by cutting opening into existing unit large
enough to allow 3 inches of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of
connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with
inside wall, unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe or structure wall, encase entering
connection in 6 inches of concrete for minimum length of 24 inches to provide additional support
of collar from connection to undisturbed ground.
I Use concrete that will attain minimum28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi(20.7 MPa),
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Use epoxy-bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and piping
materials.
C. Protect existing piping and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap
connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.
3.8 CLOSING ABANDONED STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in
place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result
after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below:
1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8-inch thick,brick masonry bulkheads.
2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable
methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs.
B. Abandoned Structures: Remove structure and close open ends of remaining piping.
1. Backfill to grade according to Division 2 Section"Earthwork-"
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses.
B Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred.
Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.
1. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Less than fall diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.
b. Deflection-, Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder
of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
C. Crushed,broken, cracked,or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
Storm Sewerage 02630-6
2. Replace defective piping using new materials,and repeat inspections until defects are within
allowances specified.
3. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
END OF SECTION 02630
Storm Sewerage 02630-7
02675 - HYDROSTATIC TESTING AND DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEM
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Hydrostatic testing and disinfection of water system.
2. Testing and reporting results.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division I Section "Quality Control".
2. Division I Section"Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls".
3. Division 1 Section"Contract Closeout":Project Record Documents.
4. Division 1 Section"Submittals".
5. Division 2 Section"Water Distribution".
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/AWWA B301 -Standard for Liquid Chlorine.
B. ANSI/AWWA C600-Installation of Ductile-iron Water Mains and their Appurtenances.
C. ANSVAWWA C651 -Standards for Disinfecting Water Mains
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports: Indicate results comparative to specified requirements.
1. Pressure and Leakage Report:
a. Time, date and location of testing point.
b. Length and diameter of pipe tested.
C. Average test pressure during the leakage test in pounds per square inch.
d. Actual leakage in gallons per hour.
2. Disinfection Report;Record:
a. Type and form of disinfectant used.
b. Date and time of disinfectant injection start and time of completion.
C. Test locations.
d. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals (quantity in treated water) in ppm for each
outlet tested.
e. Date and time of flushing start and completion.
Hydrostatic Testing and Disinfection of Water System 02675-1
f Disinfectant residual after flushing in ppm for each outlet tested.
3. Bacteriological Report;Record:
a. Date issued, project name, and testing laboratory name, address, and telephone
number.
b. Time and date of water sample collection.
C. Name of person collecting samples.
d. Test locations.
e. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals in ppm for each outlet tested.
f. Coliform bacteria test results for each outlet tested.
g. Certification that water conforms, or fails to conform, to bacterial standards of
N.Y.S.D.O.H.
h. Bacteriologist's signature and authority.
B. Certificate: Certify that integrity and cleanliness of water distribution system meets or exceeds
specified requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Perform hydrostatic testing in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600.
2. Perform disinfection in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C65 1.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Water Treatment Firm: Company specializing in disinfecting potable water systems specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience and maintaining a minimum Class
D Operator certificate in the State of New York.
B. Testing Firm: Company specializing in testing potable water systems,certified by the State ofNew
York.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DISINFECTION CHEMICALS
A. Chemicals: ANSI(AWWAB301,Liquid Chlorine.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify restraint of all joints and fittings before conducting hydrostatic testing.
B. Verify scheduling of hydrostatic testing and disinfection activities with Owner and Architect.
Hydrostatic Testing and Disinfection of Water System 02675-2
3.2 EXECUTION
A. Hydrostatic Testing:
1. Provide and attach required equipment and materials,including water,to perform testing.
2. Slowly fill valved sections of the main through a I inch connection to the existing system.
3. Expel air from the line through taps made at the high points.
4. Maintain an average test pressure for service and domestic mains of 150 psi for not less than
two hours. Maintain an average test pressure for fire mains of 200 psi for not less than two
hours. Measure test pressures at the highest point along the test section.
5. Examine mains for visible leaks or pipe movement and correct obvious defects before the
leakage test is made.
6. Conduct leakage test concurrently with pressure test.Leakage is the quantity of water that
must be supplied into the newly laid pipe,or any valved section thereof,to maintain pressure
within 5 psi of the specified test pressure after the air in the pipeline has been expelled and
the pipe has been filled with water.Leakage is not measured by a drop in pressure in a test
section over a period of time.No installation will be accepted until the leakage is less than
the number of gallons per hour as determined by the formula:
L=SD(R)"'
1331200
in which L equals leakage in gallons per hour; S is the length of pipe-tested in feet;D is
the nominal diameter of the pipe, in inches,and P is the average test pressure during the
leakage test,in pounds per square inch gauge.
B. Disinfection:
1. Provide and attach required equipment and materials, including sampling taps and tapped
plugs,to perform flushing and disinfection.
2. Flush all mains prior to disinfection at a minimum velocity of 2.5 feet per second.
3. Inject chlorine solution into system using a continuous feed method. Proportion the rate of
chlorine solution application to maintain a minimum concentration of 100 mg/1 of available
chlorine.
4. Continue chlorine application until entire main is filled with chlorine solution. Measure and
confirm concentration with a colormetric testing device.
5. Maintain chlorinated water in main for a minimum 24 hours. Operate all valves and
hydrants for their disinfection.
6. Chlorine concentration at the end of the 24-hour period to be at least 24 mg/l.
7. Flush mains until the chlorine concentration leaving the mains is no higher than that
generally in the system or less than 1.0 mg/l.
8. Make provisions for a Testing Firm to determine via water analyses that the system is
potable in accordance with NYSDOH requirements.
9. Repeat procedure if laboratory analysis shows evidence of contamination.
10. Remove all temporary sampling taps and install threaded brass plugs.
3.3 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Do not place water distribution system in service until test results indicate that it is
bacteriologically safe.
END OF SECTION 02675
Hydrostatic Testing and Disinfection of Water System 02675- 3
SECTION 03100—CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. This Section is subject to applicable requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Work includes all Concrete Formwork required by the Contract, and, in general, includes the
following Items:
1. Formwork for cast-in-place concrete.
2. Build In sleeves, angles, anchors, bolts inserts, channel frames, and all items famished
under other Sections and by other Divisions which are to be built into the concrete.
3. Hand excavation required for placing forms and concrete.
4. Install and grout all steel leveling plates and install anchor bolts for structural steel
framing. Plates and bolts are furnished under the Section for Structural Steel.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:For each type of manufactured material and product Indicated.
B. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional
engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. Design and engineering of
formwork are Contractor's responsibility.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar In
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful In-service performance.
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced In providing engineering services
of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for formwork and
shoring and reshoring installations that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material,
design, and extent.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Store materials properly to prevent damage and defacing of form surfaces. Damaged or
defaced form materials are not acceptable,and shall be removed from site.
Concrete Formwork 03100-1
1.6 APPLICABLE CODES,STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Work under this Section shall conform to the following,except as modified herein.
I American Concrete Institute, ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete, and ACI 347, Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), Standard Specifications and
Methods of Testing.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Forms for concrete.
1 3/4" or 5/8" plywood, Product Standard PS 1-83, Exterior BB Concrete Form, Class 1,
APA grade trademarked.
2. Form liner, 1/4"hard pressed fiberboard treated for concrete formwork.
3. Studs,wales, braces, 2"x 4" minimum, S4S, No. 2 or better Southern Pine, Douglas Fir.
4. Steel or other form system, used only upon prior review of Engineer.
B. Chamfer Strips:Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.
C. Ties at waterproofing surfaces. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated
to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.
D. Form ties, minimum working stress 3,000 pounds, no metal left closer than 1"from the finished
concrete surface, Dayton-Superior "Snap-tie", Richmond "Snap-ty" for light walls. For heavy
walls Richmond "Tyscrull, Dayton-Superior"Coll Tie".
E. Form release agent, form free of Anti-Hydro, cast-off of Sonneborn-Contech, Inc., Durograd of
W.R. Meadows.
F. Non-shrink grout, Masterflow 713 grout of Master Builders Co., Axpandcrete-S Hi-Flo of A-H
Products, Sonogrout of Sonnebom-Contech.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete
structure can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation,and position indicated,within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3 mm).
2. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm).
3. Class C, 1/2 inch (13 mm).
4. Class D, I Inch (25 mm).
Concrete Formwork 03100-2
D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide
top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to I vertical. Kerf wood inserts for
forming keyways, reglets, recesses,and the like,for easy removal.
1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
E. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
F. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
Instructions, before placing reinforcement.
G. Layout, lines and levels, are to be located from property monuments and bench marks.
H. Erect batter boards, secure them against movement or displacement and protect them from
damage.
I. Perform all hand excavation required to trim excavations and trenches for placing forms and
concrete.
1. Bearing surfaces, clean, solid, true to line and grade, level or stepped*as required, free
from loose earth, debris and water.
2. Foundations and footings to bear on undisturbed soil or prepared subgrade.
3. Excess excavation under foundations, fill with concrete at no extra cost to Owner.
4. Protect sides of excavations where necessary to prevent sliding or caving of banks.
6. , Maintain excavations free of water from any source at all times.
6. The payment or credit for added or omitted hand excavation shall be based on the unit
price quoted. If no unit price is quoted, the payment or credit shall be as enumerated in
the supplementary general conditions.
3.2 ERECTION
A. All forrn materials shall be new when first used on the project and may be reused if the surfaces
are undamaged and properly cleaned and oiled.
B. Construct suitable and adequate forms, conforming to the shapes, lines, grades and dimensions
required by drawings.
1. The responsibility for safety,strength and stiffness rests solely with the Contractor.
2. All forms are to be inspected prior to placing concrete, by the Contractor for construction,
alignment, cleanliness and-conformity with drawings and specifications.
C. Erect forms plumb, level,true to line, braced, mortar fight,tied and supported to maintain proper
position and shape during and after placing concrete.
1. Fabricate forms to assure proper placing of reinforcing.
2. Provide temporary openings for inspection of forms and removal of chips, debris and
trash.
3. Brace all forms adequately to prevent movement, bulging, or deformation during and after
placing concrete.
4. All exposed edges of pilasters in occupied rooms and spaces, chamfered 3/4" or rounded
to 1" radius.
D. Construct footing forms of the materials specified, braced, clamped,tied and staked to maintain
dimensions. Stakes shall be located and driven to prevent disturbing footing bearing.
Concrete Formwork 03100-3
E. Construct wall forms of material specified with wales not less than double 2" x 4", spaced not
over 24"on center. Secure specified form ties to wales, spaced not over 27"on center vertically.
3.3 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work
that Is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1. Install anchor bolts, accurately located,to elevations required.
2. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.
3.4 BUILT-IN WORK
A. Construct all chases, wall pockets and openings shown, specified and required to be provided
in concrete work. Place and secure in exact position all anchors, hangers, inserts, lintels,
frames, bolts, sleeves, etc., required to be built in as part of the work of this Section.
B. Notify all Contractors and Subcontractors to place and secure all items specified or required to
be built into the concrete work.
C. Install built-in work in strict accordance with the directions of the manufacturer of the items,
Instructions of the Contractor furnishing items, details shown on drawings, and approved shop
drawings.
1. Install anchor bolts, accurately located,to elevations required.
2. Install dovetail anchors slots in concrete structure as indicated.
3. After all items are placed and secured in the forms by the respective Contractors and
Subcontractors,the General Contractor shall be responsible for any displacement of such
items and for any rebuilding made necessary by the displacement, except for items
omitted or improperly located.
3.5 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. All forms left in place for not less than the following periods of time. These periods are the
cumulative number of days which the temperature of the concrete is above 50 degrees F and
are not necessarily consecutive.
1. Walls 3 days
2. Pilasters 3 days
3. Other parts 3 days
B. General: Formwork, for sides of beams,walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work,that does
not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50
deg F(10 deg C)for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be
damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are
maintained.
C. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports
weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following:
1. 28-day design compressive strength.
2. At least 70 percent of 28-day design compressive strength.
3. Determine compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing representative field- or
laboratory-cured test specimens according to ACI 301.
Concrete Formwork 03100-4
4. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms Without
loosening or disturbing shores.
D. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused In the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new
form-release agent.
E. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets.*Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete
surfaces unless approved by Architect.
3.6 SHORES AND RESHORES
A. Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M), ACI 301, and recommendations in ACI 347R for design,
installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.
B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and
provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
3.7 SETTING LEVELING PLATES
A. Set leveling plates and anchor bolts furnished and delivered under Section for Structural Steel,
including steel shims.
1. Leveling plates shall be set to exact elevation, line, and -level upon steel shims, then
grouted with non-shrink grout, mixed and placed in strict accordance with printed
directions of manufacturer.
2. Anchor bolts are to be set and held to line and elevation with templates.
3. Where concrete or grout is supporting structural steel, the concrete or grout shall have
obtained its full strength prior to steel erection.
END OF SECTION 03100
Concrete Formwork 03100-5
SECTION 03200—CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Work Includes all Concrete Reinforcing required by the Contract, and, In general, Includes the
following items:
1. Reinforcing and accessories for cast-in-place concrete.
2. Submittals.
B. Related Sections (the following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section)
1. Division 2 Section"Cement Concrete Pavement"for concrete pavement and walks.
1.3 - SUBMITTALS
A. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared
according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement," Include material,
r supports grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and suppo s of
concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete
structures.
B. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
C. Material Data: Signed by manufacturer's certifying that each of the following items complies with
requirements:
1. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.Delete paragraph below if lumber
grading agencies are not referenced with products.
1.4 APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Work under this Section shall conform to the following, except as modified herein.
1. American Concrete Institute, ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
. Concrete, Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.
2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (bRSI), Manual of Standard Practice.
3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), Standard Specifications and
Methods for Testing.
4. Specifications for Structural Concrete,ACI 301.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4,"Structural Welding Code—
Reinforcing Steel."
PART 2-PRODUCTS
Concrete Reinforcing 03200-1
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel bar reinforcing, deformed billet steel bars conforming to ASTM A 615 Grade 80, or of the
grade indicated on the drawings.
B. Steel mesh reinforcing,welded fabric of cold drawn steel wire,ASTM A 185.
C. Reinforcing accessories, of suitable types and adequate size to support reinforcing and prevent
displacement during concrete placing.
1. Reinforcing accessories Including chairs, high chairs, slab bolsters, spacers, screeds,
etc., which are in contact with form surfaces where the concrete will be exposed or
painted, shall be all plastic or have preformed plastic tips of a color compatible with the
color of the concrete. Richmond Screw Anchor Corp., Dayton-Superior.
D. Wire for tying, not less than 16 gauge annealed cold drawn, ASTM A82. Galvanized for pours at
exterior locations.
E. Steel cross wire clips,welded to 2 continuous longitudinal tie wires, for wrapping structural steel
flanges. Reed Clips#040 rigid type by Richmond Screw Anchor Corp. or equal.
F. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with
ends square and free of burrs.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 REINFORCING INSTALLATION
A. General:Comply with CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice"for placing reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal Vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth,ice, and other foreign materials.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld
crossing reinforcing bars.
1. Shop-or field-weld reinforcement according to AWS DIA,where indicated.
D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize
sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing.
F. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace
overlaps with wire.
G. Steel reinforcement Is to be formed and installed as shown, specified or required. Straightening
or rebending at the site is prohibited.
1. Position reinforcement accurately and secure rigidly against displacement.
2. Support reinforcement to keep away from exposed surfaces of the concrete.
3. Fumish and properly place all bolsters, ties, spacers, chairs, supports and all other
required devices and accessories.
Concrete Reinforcing 03200-2
H. The minimum concrete covering reinforcing Is to be as specified in ACI Building Code.
Requirements for Reinforced Concrete as follows:
1. Footings and structural members in which concrete is deposited against the ground, not
less than 3".
2. Concrete surfaces exposed to weather or In contact with the ground, not less than 2"for
bars larger than No. 5, and 1-1/2"for No.6 and smaller bars.
3. Concrete surfaces not exposed directly to weather or in contact with ground, not Jess
than 3/4"for slabs and walls not less than 1-1/2"for beams, girders and columns.
1. The minimum clear distance between parallel bars except in columns, shall not be less than the
nominal diameter of bar, 1-1/3 times maximum size of aggregate or 1".
J. Splices to conform to ACI 318.
1. The minimum lap splice lengths as per appropriate CRSI latest issue of Reinforcing Bar
Splices.
2. Fabric lapped splices shall be made so that the overlap measured between outer most
cross wires of each fabric sheet is not less than the spacing of the cross wires plus 2
Inches.
3. All splices securely wire tied.
K. Dowels from walls to slabs may be installed straight and field bent provided ACI bend radius Is
maintained. Straightening and rebending of dowels is prohibited.
L. Reinforcing reviewed by this Contractor prior to placing concrete.
M. Electrical conduit which has to be placed in concrete slabs shall be installed after and above
bottom reinforcing, but before and under the top reinforcing.
1. Cross-over of conduit, where necessary, locate so that reinforcing is not displaced from
its specified position.
2. Conduit or outlet boxes shall not be placed In concrete columns.
N. Slabs and topping, unless otherwise shown on drawings,shall be reinforced with not less than 6
x 6-WI x W1.4 welded wire mesh.
END OF SECTION 03200
Concrete Reinforcing 03200-3
SECTION 03300—CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Work includes all Cast In Place Concrete required by the Contract, and, In general, includes the
following items:
1. Cast-in-place concrete for the building, plain and reinforced, as shown, indicated and
specified.
2. Miscellaneous concrete Including, but not limited to, locker bases and concrete topping.
3. Non-slip aggregate concrete surfaces.
4. Submittals.
B. Related-Sections (the following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section)
1. Machine excavation, under the Section for Earthwork.
2. Hand excavation, under the Section for Concrete Formwork.
3. Concrete curbs and walks, under Division 2.
4. Concrete foundations for mechanical equipment, under Division 15 or 16 unless specified
under Scope above.
5. Leveling plates and anchor bolts for structural steel framing,furnished under the Section
for Structural Steel, installed under the Section for Concrete Formwork.
6. Perimeter insulation furnished and installed under Section for Building Insulation.
7. Division 4"Unit Masonry"for dovetail slots installed in poured concrete walls.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. (6) Six test reports of all test specified to be transmitted to Architect, Engineer, with copies to
the owner.
B. Concrete mix designs for each type of concrete to be used including special mixes for concrete
to be pumped.
C. Certified sieve analysis of fine and each class of coarse aggregate submitted to Engineer for
review prior to use.All cost at the expense of the Contractor.
D. Product data:for each type of manufactured material and product Indicated.
E. Design mixes: For each concrete mix. Including alternate mix designs when characteristics of
materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project Site.
F. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency Indicating and interpreting test results for
compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of
current materials.
Cast In Place Concrete 03300-1
G. Material Data Sheets for the following:
1. Cementitious materials and aggregates.
2. Admixtures, and method of adding to the concrete mix.
3. Curing materials
4. Floor and slab treatments
5. Bonding agents
6. Adhesives
7. Vapor retarders
8. Epoxy joint-filler
9. Joint-filler strips
10. Repair materials
H. Minutes of pre-installation conference.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installers Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction.with A record of successful in-service performance.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete
Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities,
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C. 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing
indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
1. Personnel conducting field test shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the
same manufacturer.
E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS DI.4, uStructural Welding
Code—Reinforcing Steel."
F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated:
1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete."
2. ACI 117, "Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
G. Mockups: Cast concrete slabs-on-grade mockup to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish,
texture,tolerances, and standard of workmanship.
I Build mockups approximately 200 sq. ft. (18.6 sq. m) in the location Indicated or, if not
indicated,.as directed by Architect. Maximum joint spacing 8'-0"x8'-0" o.c./e.w.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting construction.
4. If Architect determines that mockups do not meet requirements, demolish and remove
them from the site and cast another until the mockup is approved.
5. Maintain mockups during construction In an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
Cast In Place Concrete 03300-2
6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in.
Division 1 Section"Project Meetings."
1. Before submitting design mixes, review concrete mix design and examine procedures for
ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly
concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixes.
C. Ready-mix concrete producer.
d. Concrete subcontractor.
I. Special Inspection: This project shall be subjected to Special Inspection. All inspection will be
paid for by the owner, contractor shall coordinate with the special Inspectors. The contractor
shall give(3)days advance notice to schedule the special inspections.
1. Refer to Division 1 "SPECIAL INSPECTORS"for inspector and report criteria.
2. The following items shall be inspected continuously:
a. Sampling fresh concrete and performing slump, air content & determining the
temperature of fresh concrete at the time of making specimens for strength tests.
b. Continuous Inspection of concrete placement for proper application techniques.
3. The following items shall be inspected periodically:
a. Periodically Inspection of reinforcing steel,verification of required design mix used,
inspection for maintenance of specified curing temperatures and techniques.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Store materials properly to prevent damage, deterioration and inclusion of foreign matter.
Aggregate shall be stockpiled in a well-drained location. Separate each gradation and pile to
prevent segregation of sizes within gradation.
B. Packaged materials shall be delivered in original unopened containers and stored in a
weatherproof enclosure.
C. Damaged or deteriorated materials are not acceptable and shall be removed from site.
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS
A. No concrete shall be placed when the temperature Is below 40 degrees F except to complete a
pour already begun, unless protection is provided as specified for cold weather protection.
1.7 APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Work under this Section shall conform to following, except as modified herein:
1. American Concrete Institute, ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), Standard Specifications and
Methods of Testing.
3. Specifications for Structural Concrete, ACI 301.
4. Specifications for hot weather concreting,ACl 305R.
5. Specifications for cold weather concreting, ACI 306R.
Cast In Place Concrete 03300-3
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Portland cement, approved standard brand, ASTM C150, Type 1. Specified cement shall
conform to all tests.
1. All cement for site mixing is to be delivered to the site in sacks bearing name and brand
of the manufacturer.
2, One brand and color of cement is to be used for all concrete work exposed in the
structure.
B. Air entraining admixture,ASTM C 260.
C. Fine aggregate is to be clean, sharp, uncoated grains of natural sand, free from loam, clay,
organic Impurities, frozen material, in compliance with ASTM C 33. After approved, no change
is to be made in source of supply without written approval of Engineer. Grading as follows:
1. Passing 3/8" Sieve 100%
2. Passing No. 4 Sieve 95 to 100%
3. Passing No. 8 Sieve 80 to 100%
4. Passing No. 16 Sieve 50 to 85%
5. Passing No. 30 Sieve 25 to 60%
6. Passing No. 50 Sieve 10 to 30%
7. Passing No. 100 Sieve 2 to 10%
D. Coarse aggregate Is to be hard, clean, crushed limestone, free from adherent coatings, friable
pieces, organic impurities, in compliance with ASTM C 33. After approval, no change in source
of supply without written approval of Engineer. Gravel meeting above specifications is
acceptable. Grading as follows:
Nom.Size 211 1-1/2" 111 31411 1/2%1 3/8" No.4 No.8
1-1/2" 100 95-100 35-70 10-30 0-5
314#1 100 90-100 20-55 0-10 0-5
1/Z' 100 90-100 40-70 0-15 0-6
E. Abrasive aggregate for non-slip finish,A-H Emery Grits of A-H Products, Non-slip Aggregate of
Euclid Chemical Co., Fdctex of Sonnebom-Comtech.
F. Water shall be potable, clean, free from oil, acids, vegetable matter, alkalis, salts or other
injurious substances.
G. Surface hardener and dustproofing compound shall be Lapidolith of Sonneborn,Armortop of A-
H Products, Saniseal of Master Builders.
H. Joint filler shall be premoulded, resilient non-extruding type, 1" thick unless shown otherwise,
full depth of concrete section,in compliance with ASTM D 994.
1. Paper for concrete curing and protection shall comply with ASTM C 171.
J. Curing compound, clear or translucent with fugitive dye, ASTM C 309, Type 1. The compound
of type shall not stain or discolor finish concrete surfaces or make surface unsatisfactory for
paint finish or resilient floor adhesion. Kure-N-Seal of Sonneborn-Comtech, 3-way Sealer of
Anti-Hydro, Masterseal of Master Builders. Contractor shall confirm all curing compounds are
compatable With floor coverings to be applied over the slab surface.
Cast In Place Concrete 03300-4
K. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, three-ply, nylon- or polyester-cord-reinforced, high-
density polyethylene sheet; laminated to a nonwoven geotextile fabric, 30 mils (0.76 mm)thick.
L. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may be incorporated
into the Work includes, but is not limited to, "Gdffolyn T-65G" by Reef Industries Inc.
M. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed, gravel, and
manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75-
mm) sieve and 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve; meeting deleterious
substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.
2.2 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Joint-Filler Strips:ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or
self-expanding cork.
C. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Shore A
hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.
D. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing
and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements, and as follows:
1. Type 11, non-load bearing,for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.
2. Types I and 11, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
3. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
E. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized stall sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch (0.85mm)thick,
with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent Intrusion of
concrete or debris. Provide in Division 4, unit masonry and installed in this section.
2.3 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match
adjacent floor elevations.
1. Cement Binder:ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement
as defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,
and application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as
recommended by undedayment manufacturer. Compressive Strength:Not less than 4100
psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
2.4 PROPORTIONS OF CONCRETE
A. Concrete shall be composed of standard Portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate,
water and approved admixtures.
B. Required specified strength ft) at 28 days as follows:
Cast In Place Concrete 03300-5
Maximum
Class Ang.Size fc
I 1-1/2" 3,000 psi
2 3/400 3.000 psi
3 3/40 4,000 psi
4 1&1 - 3,000 psi
C. Proportions of concrete ingredients shall be established on basis of C1, C2, or C3 as follows:
I Selection of Concrete Proportions by Field Experience. Where the concrete production
facilities has a record, based on at least 30 consecutive strength tests representing
similar materials and conditions to those expected, the strength used as the basis for
selecting proportions shall exceed the required fc by at least:
400 psi if the standard deviation is less than 300 psi
550 psi if the standard deviation is 300 to 400 psi
700 psi if the standard deviation is 400 to 500 psi
900 psi if the standard deviation is 500 to 600 psi
Strength data for determining standard deviation shall be considered to comply with the
foregoing stipulations if they represent either a group of at least 30 consecutive tests or the
statistical average for two groups totaling 30 or more tests.The tests used to establish Stan-
dard deviation shall represent concrete produced to meet a specified strength or strengths
within 1,000 psi of that specified for the proposed work.Changes in materials and propor-
tions within the population of background tests shall not have been more closely restricted
than they Will be for the proposed work. If the standard deviation exceeds 600 psi or if a suit-
able record of strength test performance is not available,proportions shall be selected to
produce an average strength at least 1200 psi greater than the required fc.
2. Selection of Concrete Proportions by Laboratory Trial Batches.
Laboratory trial batches may be used as a basis for selecting concrete proportions
provided a water cement compressive strength curve is established with at least three
points representing batches which produce strengths above and below that required.
Each point on the curve shall represent the average of at least three specimens tested at
28 days or an earlier age when approved by the Engineer. The slump and air content of
the batches shall be the maximums permitted by this specification.
3. Maximum Permissible Water Cement Ratios for Concrete.
(When strength data from trial batches or field experience are not available)
Specified Maximum Permissable Water-Cement Ratio
Compressive
Strength Non-Air Entrained Concrete Air Entrained Concrete
Concrete
fc,psi Absolute Ratio U.S. gal. Absolute U.S.gal.
by Weight per 94 lb. Ratio By per 94 lb.
bag of Weight bag of
cement cement
3000 0.58 n 6.6 0.46 5.2
4000 0.44 5.0 0.35 4.0
4. Cement content, except as specified under paragraph for"Admixtures", as follows:
a. 3,000 psi concrete, not less than 5-1/2 sacks or 517 pounds of cement.
b. 4,000 psi concrete, not less than 6 sacks or 564 pounds of cement.
5. Cement at a temperature in excess of 140 degrees F shall not be used in mixing
concrete.
Cast In Place Concrete 03300-6
6. Slump of concrete mixes as follows:
Slump
Type of Construction Max. Min.
Reinforced foundation walls
and footings 411 2"
Slabs 4" 311
a. For pumped concrete, the specified slumps above are to be measured at the
discharge end.
2.5 TRIAL MIXES
A. Trial mix batches, made by Contractor, all costs at expense of Contractor.
1. Two test cylinders shall be made from each mix and broken at seven days. No concrete
shall be placed on job until tests have shown 70 percent of design strength at seven
days.
2. No changes allowed on received mix design. Resubmittals are required for any changes.
2.6 MIXING CONCRETE
A. Measurements of cement,fine and coarse aggregate, shall be made separated by weight, upon
suitable devices, accurate to 1% of net load being weighed. Weighing equipment shall be
arranged to permit making compensation for changes required due to moisture contained In
aggregate.
1. Water shall be measured by a device, accurate to I% plus or minus, of the total amount
of water required per batch.
2. Water in the aggregate shall be included in quantity specified and subtracted from the
amount added to the mixture. Moisture determinations shall be made on representative
samples at least once each day and when appearance of aggregate or mixed concrete
indicates a change.
3. Volumetric measurement of aggregate is not permitted except for small amount of
concrete.
B. Machine mix all concrete at site, conforming to ASTM C 94.
1. The Contractor Is responsible for production of concrete having the specified slump for
each pour. Concrete failing to conform to this requirement shall be rejected.
2. Concrete showing any evidence of setting up in the mixer or rotating container shall be
rejected.
3. Water used for washing out the truck mixer after unloading, must be discharged and Is
not permitted for use In wetting next batch.
C. Rejected concrete may not be reworked and must be removed from the site.
D. Site mixed concrete by a batch mixer not smaller than one cubic yard capacity, mixed not less
than one minute after all materials are in the drum.
1. Rotation of the drum shall be between 190 and 210 peripheral feet per minute. Speeding
up the rotation of the drum is not acceptable for a reduction In time.
2. Raw materials are not permitted to enter drum until preceding batch has been entirely
discharged.
E. Ready-Mixed Concrete:Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and
ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.
Cast In Place Concrete 03300-7
1 When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg. F (30 and 32 deg. C), reduce mixing
and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg.
F (32 deg. C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
2.7 ADMIXTURES
A. An air entraining admixture shall be included for all concrete used for walls, piers and footings.
All concrete which is exposed to the weather shall also be air entrained including slabs and
stairs. Mix in proportions as recommended by manufacturer.
1 The air entraining admixture, where specified or approved for use, shall.produce a total
entrained air content between 4% and 6% by volume, as determined by direct
measurement or by test method ASTM C 138.
B. Admixtures. for plasticizing and densifying, may be used provided the concrete shall have a
compressive strength at seven and twenty eight days not less than those specified and also
provided it complies with water-cement ratio requirements. If admixtures are used, they shall be
included in the mix design.
1. Admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494. Plastiment of Sika Chemical Corp., Pozzolith of
Master Builders.
2. The cement content of concrete having the admixture, except for integral waterproofed
concrete may be reduced as follows:
a. 3,000 psi concrete, from 5-1/2 to 5 sacks of cement.
b. 4,000 psi concrete,from 6 to 5-1/2 sacks of cement.
3. Submit acceptable documentary data with the material submitted for review, with
evidence that the admixture increases the durability of concrete when subject to freezing,
thawing, and corrosion, and that the admixture has been used in similar work for not less
than five years.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Forms and reinforcing shall be Inspected by the Contractor prior to placing any concrete.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. All equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned before each run. Discharge the wash water outside of
the forms.
B. Before placing any concrete, check the reinforcing, accessories and sleeves, for position. Forms
shall be properly oiled and free of debris and water.
C. Vapor Retarder. Place, protect, and reppir vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643
and manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Cover vapor retarder with fine-graded granular material,
moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm)
or minus 3/4 inch (19 mm).
1. Place-and compact a 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick layer of fine-graded granular material over
granular fill.
Cast In Place Concrete 03300-8
3.3 JOINTS
A. General:Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete..
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not Impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through
sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead forms
with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into
concrete.
3. Locate horizontal joints in walls at underside of floors, slabs, and at the top of footings or
floor slabs.
4. 'Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral With walls,
near comers, and In concealed locations where possible.
5. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
. 6. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-
fourth of concrete thickness, as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each
edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after
applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed :blades. Cut 1/8-Inch- (3-mm-) wide joints into concrete
when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before
concrete develops random contraction cracks.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade:-After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, and other
locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 Inch (12 mm) or more than 1 Inch
(25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants,"are indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.
E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints
where indicated.
1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent
concrete bonding to one side of joint.
3.4 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Convey, transport and place the concrete as rapidly as practical, without segregation or loss of
ingredients and without unnecessary handling, to produce a monolithic structure free from pits,
honeycombed areas and visible lines of juncture.
Cast In Place Concrete 03300-9
1. The formwork is to be free of ice and snow.
2. Deposit the concrete continuously in horizontal lifts not over 18" deep in a manner to
prevent displacement of reinforcing. Avoid accumulating concrete on the reinforcing and
forms above the level of fresh concrete.
3. Place each section of concrete In a single,complete and continuous pour.
4. Use chutes and trunks of sufficient number and variable lengths so that concrete does
not free fall over 4'-0". Keep the surface of the concrete practically level at all times. Flow
the concrete over 4'-0"from the point of deposit.
5. Vibrate concrete for slabs and floors to a solid mass and screed to carefully leveled
grounds using a straight edge. Place concrete in order to allow finishing in daylight.
6. Spade and work coarse aggregate away from forms,work concrete around reinforcing to
avoid air pockets, voids and honeycomb sections.
7. The use of a vibrator is recommended, applied directly to concrete, to cause the concrete
to settle into place. Duration of vibration, not excessive to cause segregation of mix.
Flowing the concrete more than four feet With a vibrator is prohibited. Supplement
vibration by hand spading in comers and angles of forms and along form surfaces.
B. Use Class I concrete for footings and mass concrete, formed and reinforced as shown. Check
the setting of anchor bolts for base plates. The anchor bolts shall be accurately set and held in
place with templates. Hold the top surface of concrete 1" below the bottom of the base plate for
grout.
C. Use Class 2 concrete for walls and slabs on ground. The top surface is to be true, uniform and
level,without pockets, depressions, lumps, ridges or waves.
I Concrete slabs which are supported on steel beams, place and screed to a level and true
finished elevation compensating for dead load deflection of supporting steel members or
forms. Contact Engineer for approximate dead load deflection of the floor system.
2. Pitch slabs evenly to floor drains where indicated.
3. Accurately set screeds and remove before the initial set.
4. Slabs that are to receive ceramic tile, terrazzo or concrete topping shall be screened to
level surface.
5. Slabs which are to receive wood floor finish shall be wood floated to smooth level finish
within tolerance of 1/8" in a 10'-0" radius. All discrepancies in level shall be corrected by
grinding or other methods.
6. Finish concrete floors in spaces and areas indicated on Room Finish Schedule to be
concrete, resilient tile, carpeting or thin set ceramic tile by mechanically floating and
trowelling as specified for Concrete Floor Finishes.
7.- Each pour of slabs on grade shall be limited to approximately 900 square feet and not
more than 35'-0"in the longest dimension.Try to locate joints in slabs under partitions.
B. Do not sprinkle dry cement or a mixture of dry cement and sand on the surface to absorb
moisture and to stiffen the mix.
D. Use Class 3 concrete for outside ramps and platforms,and where indicated on drawings.
E. Use Class 4 concrete for topping of slabs.
1. Clean the stab surfaces thoroughly, of all dust and dirt immediately before placing the
topping. Slush all surfaces with neat Portland cement grout to insure good bond.
2. Tamp and spade topping to a solid mass. Screed the top surface to carefully leveled
grounds, finish as specified for Concrete Floor Finish.
3.5 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
Cast In Place Concrete 03300-10
A. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as
shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations,
complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment,
B. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items.
Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel-finish
concrete surfaces.
3.6 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturers written instructions.
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until
construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joint clean and dry.
C. Install semirigid epoxy joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep
in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filter flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.7 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIR
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove
and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
B. Patching Mortar Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two
and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.2-mm) sieve, using only enough water for
handling and placing.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
112 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than I inch (25mm) in
depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water,
and brush-coat holes and voids With bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching
mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone
plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding
color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match
before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher
than surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 Inch (0.25 mm) wide or
that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
Cast In Place Concrete 03300-11
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair undeflayment.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturers
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather
edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent
floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to
manufacturers written Instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level
surface.
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes I inch (25 mm) or less in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with
clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 314 inch (19 mm)
clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and
apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original
concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with
adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching
mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt,
and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and
patching mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's
approval.
3.8 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES
A. Float all floor slabs which require finishing while the concrete is still green but hardened
sufficiently to bear the finisher's weight using a metal disc power machine.
1. No floating will be permitted while surface is wet,soft or sloppy.
2. Care shall be exercised and the operation of the machine controlled to prevent
overworking the finish and drawing excess mortar and water to surface.
3. The finishing machine shall be used for compaction and elimination of any voids.
Repeated operation over a given area other than to secure the necessary compaction is
to be avoided.
4. For areas of slabs which cannot be mechanically floated, use wood or cork hand float.
5. Finish float surfaces to true uniform plane. Test the surface with a straight edge to detect
high and low spots which shall be eliminated.
B. After floating, steel trowel the concrete to'.�*smooth hard surface.
1. Provide second and subsequent trowellings as required to being the surface to a smooth,
hard, and impervious surface free from marks and blemishes,
C. For exterior slabs, platforms and where indicated, provide a broom finish.
1. Trowel the slab before broom finishing. Draw the broom across slab surface, slightly
overlapping previous passes. Corrugations In concrete shall be uniform and not over-1/8"
deep.
Cast In Place Concrete 03300-12
2. Use a push broom or floor broom, at least 18" wide, with good quality fiber or rattan
bristles at leait 4"long.The broom handle shall be longer than 1/2 width of the slab.
3. Brooming shall be completed before the Initial set of the concrete to prevent tearing or
undue roughening of the surface.
D. Unless horizontal exposed edges and corners are indicated to have a curb bar nosing, finish
them with edging tool'to form smooth rounded surface.
1. After floating and finishing slabs and platforms and before the concrete has reached its
initial set, tool all edges at forms,joints and comers. Finish to smooth true line free from
tool marks.
E. Apply a minimum of three costs of hardener and dustproofing compound specified to exposed-
concrete floors, applied as recommended by the manufacturer of compound used. The
completed application shall be guaranteed to remain hard and dustproof for a period of three
years after application.
F. Finish all concrete floors to a true, smooth and level surface or pitched to drains as required.
Check and level surface plane to tolerances of FF 23/FL 18. All variations below this tolerance
shall be leveled with latex cement as specified, mixed and installed in-strict accordance with
manufacturer's directions.
G. For concrete floors which will receive a waterproofing membrane, float finish to a true and level
orsloped surface as required.
H. Provide non-slip aggregate concrete floor surfaces where indicated. Apply abrasive aggregate
in the amount of 25 pounds per 100 square feet of surface area. Apply as directed by
manufacturer of aggregate.
3.9 CONCRETE FINISHES OTHER THAN FLOOR SLABS
A. Unexposed vertical concrete surfaces shall have all metal ties removed back from the surface at
least 1". Depressions left from removed ties, fins, holes,water and air pockets, and honeycomb,
etc., shall.be pointed and patched with mortar of proportion to match the color of the concrete,
but shall not be richer than one part Portland cement to three parts of sand.
B. Exposed vertical concrete surfaces in occupied areas shall have all metal ties removed.
Depressions shall be pointed and patched as specified above.
1 As soon as pointing and patching has set sufficiently, and not more than 24 hours after
the removal of the forms, exposed exterior surfaces shall be thoroughly wet and rubbed
With No. 16 carborundurn brick or other abrasive to provide smooth, even, uniform
surface. Rub to final finish with No. 30 carborundum brick. No plastering or other coating
will be allowed.
2. Exposed interior surfaces shall be pointed and patched as specified above, no rubbing
required.
3. Concrete slabs other than finish floor slabs shall be screened and floated to a smooth
level or pitched surface as indicated.
3.10 PROTECTION AND CURING
A. Protect'the concrete from injurious action of sun, rain, flowing water, frost, mechanical injury
and premature drying.
Cast In Place Concrete 03300.13
B. Cure all surfaces to prevent early loss of moisture in the mixture and to develop the full
anticipated strength and durability of the concrete.
1. ' The horizontal surfaces of floors, stabs, platforms, etc., covered completely with
waterproof paper, joints lapped and sealed. Apply in strict accordance with directions of
manufacturer of the waterproof paper used. The paper is to remain in place for seven
days minimum.
2. Vertical surfaces shall be completely coated with the curing compound specified.
C. Cold weather protection shall be provided by the Contractor for any concrete placed during
freezing weather.
1. Provide all necessary equipment for heating and protecting the concrete during freezing
and near freezing weather.
2. No frozen materials or materials containing ice or frost will be used.
3. The temperature of the concrete when deposited shall not be less than 50 degrees F nor
'above 70 degrees F.
4. The temperature of the concrete shall be maintained above 50 degrees F for not less
than five days after placing.For slabs, maintain heat for seven days after placing.
5. Keep the housing, covering and other protection in place for twenty four hours after the
heating is discontinued.
6. Salt, chemicals, or other materials shall not be allowed to be mixed with the concrete to
prevent freezing.
7. ' Methods of heating and protection shall conform with ACI 306R.
B. When concrete is placed in severe cold weather, the Engineer may require job stored test
cylinders cured under identical conditions be tested before supporting forms and shores
are remove, in accordance with ACI Standard 306.
D. Hot weather protection which is provided by the Contractor for concrete placed during hot, dry
weather shall be In accordance with ACI Standard 305.
3.11 EXTRA CONCRETE WORK
A. Use Class 4 concrete for bases for lockers. Insert wood nailing screeds as detailed and screed
bases to elevations indicated.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample
materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to
e I
requirem nts specified in this Article.
B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling
and testing for quality control may include those specified In this Article.
C. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM
C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete
mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for
each additional 50 cu.yd. (38 cu. m)or fraction thereof.
2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76cu. m)
or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day.
Cast In Place Concrete 03300-14
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests
for each concrete mix, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
3. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not
less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests
when concrete consistency appears to change.
4. Air Content: ASTM 'C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173,
volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite
sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix.
5. Concrete Temperature:ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
(4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each
composite sample.
6. Unit Weight:ASTM C 567,fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for
each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete
mix.
7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of
four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.
a. Cast and field cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite
sample.
B. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39;test two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days
and two at 28 days.
a. Test two field-cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days.
b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two
specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
D. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory- cured
cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting
and curing in-place concrete.
E. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive
compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no
compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500
psi (3.4 MPa).
F. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and
Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain
Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing
and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28
days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break
for both 7-and 28-day tests. If test does not meet required strength report shall be labeled non-
conforming in bold letters.
G. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted by Architect but Will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
H. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when
test results Indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements
have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests
to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other
methods as directed by Architect.
3.13 CLEAN UP
Cast In Place Concrete 03300-15
A. Upon completion of work under this Section, remove all equipment, tools, excess materials,
rubbish and debris from site.
END OF SECTION 03300
Cast In Place Concrete 03300-16
SECTION 05120—STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section subject to applicable requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Work includes all Structural Steel required by the Contract, and, in general, includes the
following items:
1. Structural steel framing including columns, girders, beams, purlings, struts, trusses
hangers etc., as shown and indicated on the drawings.
2. Furnish, fabricate and deliver anchor bolts and loose leveling plates to be built In under
Section for Concrete Formwork.
3. Fumish, fabricate and deliver all loose lintels for exterior walls as shown and detailed on
structural and architectural drawings,to be built In under Section for Masonry.
4. Shop painting and field touch up.
5. Shear connectors.
6. Submittals.
C. Related Section:The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division I Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures
and administrative requirements.
2. Division 5 Section"Steel Deck"for field installation of shear connectors.
3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels or shelf angles not attached to
structural-steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined
as structural steel.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: submit each Rem in this article according to the conditions of the contract and Division
I specification section.
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.
1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
2. Include embedment drawings.
3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,
and show size, length, and type of each weld.
4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.
D. Welding certificates.
Structural Steel 05120-1
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed structural steel
work similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural steel similar to that
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the Work.
1. Fabricator must participate in the AISC Quality Certification Program and be designated
an AISC-Certified Plant as follows:
a. Category: Category 1, conventional steel structures.
C. Welding standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code—
Steel."
I Present evidence that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for
welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
D. Structural steel designed', detailed and framed in accordance with codes and standards
specified unless otherwise indicated on drawings or herein specified.
1. Base and leveling plate, not less than two anchor bolts each.
2. Provide special beam connections for extraordinary loading conditions.
3. Web connections used as far as possible.
4. Heavy loads carried on top of beams, provide stiffeners attached to web to transmit load,
5. All connections provided with proper horizontal bracing.
6. Typical details shown on drawings used wherever possible.
7. Architectural clearances strictly maintained, check against all other drawings and details.
8. No structural members, connections, bolt heads or nut heads projecting from the walls or
into openings.
9. Responsibility for accuracy of fit rests solely with Contractor.
E. Special Inspection: This project shall be subjected to Special Inspection. All inspection will be
paid for by the owner, contractor shall coordinate with the special inspectors. The contractor
shall give(3)days advance notice to schedule the special inspections.
1. Refer to Division 1 "SPECIAL INSPECTORS"for inspector and report criteria.
2. The following Items shall be inspected continuously:
a. Continuous inspection of slip critical connections, partial penetration welds&multi-
pass fillet welds.
3. The following items shall be inspected periodically:
a. Periodic inspection for materials verification of high-strength bolts, nuts and
washers , inspection of bearing type connections, welding, floor and deck welds,
welding of reinforcing steel and inspection of steel frame joint details with approved
construction documents.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Steel members loaded and unloaded with crane, no dumping from trucks. Protect properly with
dunnage during shipping.
B. Handling at site in sorting and piling done with precautions to prevent abrasion of shop coat and
bending of members. Bent or damaged members returned to shop for proper straightening.
C. Structural members , plain and fabricated, stored on properly drained ground on platforms or
skids.
Structural Steel 05120-2
1. Materials and members,kept free from dust and other foreign material and protected from
corrosion.
2. Girders and beams placed upright and shored.
3. Long members, columns, trusses, ect., placed close together and shored to prevent
deflection.
1.6 SEQUENCING
A. Supply anchorage Items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying
the Work. Provide Settings diagram, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for
installation.
1.7 APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Work under this Section shall conforrn to following, except as modified herein.
1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), Specifications for the Design, Fabrication
and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, Codes of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridge, and Specifications for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel.
2. American Welding Society (AWS), Code or Arc and Gas Welding in Building
Construction.
3. Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 Bolts endorsed by American
Institute of Steel Construction and the Industrial,Fasteners Institute.
4. American Society for Testing of Materials (ASTM), Standard Specifications and Methods
of Testing.
5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI), Standards and Methods of Testing.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel plates and bars, excluding tubes, ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 572, Grade ,50, wide flange
sections,ASTM A992, Grade 50.Second hand material not acceptable.
B. Steel tubes, ASTM A 500, Grade A, Fy=46 KSI.
C. Bolts,threaded standard fasteners,ASTM A 307,Grade A.
D. Anchor bolts, non-headed, straight or bent,for structural anchorage,ASTM A 36.
E. High strength bolts, including nuts and plain hardened washers, ASTM A 325, or ASTM A-490.
All bolts and nuts marked as specified in A 325.
1. Bolt dimensions, conform to requirements for regular semi-finish hexagon bolts of ANSI
Standard BI 8.2.1. No interference-body bolts shall be used.
2. Nut dimensions, conform to requirements for heavy semi-finished hexagon nuts of ANSI
Standard B18.2.2
3. Circular washers, flat, smooth, nominal dimensions not less than given In Table I of
Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 Bolts.
4. Beveled washers, square or rectangular, tapered In thickness and conform to the
dimensions given in Table I mentioned above for Circular washers.
Structural Steel 05120-3
5. Bolts of sizes Indicated on drawings. Length of bolts calculated by adding to the gap(total
thickness of connected material)the values shown below:
Bolt Size Add to Grip
3/411 1"
6. The preceding values are generalized,with due allowances for manufacturing tolerances,
to provide for the use of a heavy hex nut, with a "full nut" when installed. For each
hardened flat washer that is used, add 5/32", and for each beveled washer add 5/16".
The length determined by the use of the Table above should be adjusted to the next
longer 1/4".
F. 'Filler metal for welding, conform'n to AWS requirements for Iron and Steel Arc .Welding
Electrodes. Manufacturer to furnish instructions with each container of electrodes giving
recommended voltage, amperage, polarity of direct current, for all uses and positions for which
electrode is suitable.
2.2 PRIMER
A. Primer. Fast curing, lead and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer with good
resistance to normal atmosphere corrosion, complying with performance requirements of FS
TT-P-664.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds and repair
painting galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 93 percent zinc dust by weight,
and complying with DOD-P-21035A or SSPC-Paint 20.
2.3 GROUT
A. Non-metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining
grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents,
plasticizing and water reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable
for application, and a 30-minute working time.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate structural steel in accordance with AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and
Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, with modifications and additional requirements
specified or indicated on drawings.
B. Shop connections welded by qualified operators in accordance with AWS Code.Welds exposed
in finished rooms and spaces, neat and straight as possible, no grinding required unless of such
objectionable appearance that they will effect adversely finish appearance, in which case grind
welds as directed by Architect at no extra cost to Owner.
C. Bottom of column shafts and compression joints depending on contact bearing, machine
bearing surfaces to common plane after members completed.
D. Leveling plates bearing on concrete and anchor bolts to be built into concrete, shipped loose.
E. Holes for bolts may be punched, sub-punched and reamed, or drilled as required by the
applicable specifications. Diameter of holes not more than 1/16" in excess of the nominal bolt
diameter.
Structural Steel 05120-4
F. Contact surfaces to be bolted, including those adjacent to the washers, when assembled, shall
be de-scaled or carry the normal tight mill scale. Contact surfaces free of dirt, oil, loose scale,
burrs, pits, and other defects that would prevent solid seating of the parts.
1. Contact surfaces of joints subject to stress reversal, impact or vibration, or where stress
redistribution due to joint slippage would be undesirable, shall be free of paint.
2. Contact surfaces of joints where slippage into bearing is acceptable may carry a shop
coat of protective paint.
G. Shear connectors, headed type, of sizes and spacing indicated on drawings, installed by
automatic welding equipment in shop or in field as required. Welding in strict accordance with
Article 4.28, 4.29 and 4.30 of the Structural Welding Code, AWS 131.1-of latest issue, of the
American Welding society and recommendations of shear connector manufacturer.
1. Flash or fillet around the stud,complete, showing no voids or undercuts.
2. Bum off (reduction in length after welding) not more than minimum required, 3/32" for
1/2"diameter studs, 1/8"for 5/8", 3/4"and 7/8"diameter studs.
3. Flash or fillet weld shall not have a cold appearance.
4. Any studs showing these or other questionable defects shall be tested by bending with
hammer blows to at least 15 degrees toward nearest end of beam without weld failure.
H. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Comply with fabrication requirements, including
tolerance limits, of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for
structural steel identified as architecturally exposed structural steel.
1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes including
pitting, rust, scale,seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade-names, and roughness.
2. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning,
treating, and shop priming.
I. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.I.
J. Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall opening
framing to be attached to structural steel. Straighten as required to provide uniform,square, and
true members in completed wall framing.
K. Shop paint all steel prior to shipment. Thoroughly clean and remove all mill scale, rust, spatter,
slag,flux deposit, oil, dirt and other foreign matter and paint one heavy coat 2 mils dry thickness
of paint except as noted:
1. Contact and milled surface, not painted, coated with suitable corrosion preventative.
2. Surfaces to be field welded, not painted.
3. Surfaces of joints to be bolted, not painted, except as specified above under fabrication.
4. Parts inaccessible after assembly,two coats of shop paint.
5. Hot dip galvanize all lintels used at exterior building openings or exposed to weather.
Apply zinc coating by the hot dip process per ASTM A 123.
2.5 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. Shop install and tighten non-high-strength bolts, except where high-strength bolts are indicated.
B. Shop install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C. Shop Install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Load and Resistance Factor
Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
Structural Steel 05120-5
1. Bolts:ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M) high-strength bolts, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Bolts:ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M) high-strength bolts, unless otherwise Indicated.
3. Connection Type: snug tightened, unless Indicated as slip-critical, direct-tension, or
tensioned shear/bearing connection.
4. Connection Type: Slip-critical, direct-tension, or tension shear/bearing connections as
Indicated.
D. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds,
and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes
without warp.
2. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally
exposed structural steel will- limit distortion to allowable tolerances. Prevent surface
bleeding of back-side welding on exposed steel surface. Grind smooth exposed fillet
welds W Inch(I 3mm) and larger. Grind flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds.
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Under the fabricators shop quality control (AISC); as an AISC certified plant the following tests
and inspections will be performed on steel fabrication delivered to the Project Site.
B. Correct deficiencies in or replace structural steel that inspection and test reports indicate do not
comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional testing, at Contractors expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
corrected Work.
D. Shop bolted connection will be tested and Inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM a 325 or A 490'Bolts.0
E. Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSCs "Load and
Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
1. Direct-tension indicator gaps will be verified to comply with ASTM F 959,table 2.
F. In addition to visual inspection,shop-welded connections will be inspected and tested according
to AWS D1.1 and the inspection procedures list below, at testing agency's option.
1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection:ASTM E 165
2. Magnetic Particle Inspection:ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.
Cracks,or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
3. Radiographic Inspection:ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality level"2-2T."
4. Ultrasonic Inspection:ASTM E 164.
G. In Addition to visual inspection, shop welded shear connections will be inspected and tested
according to requirements of AWS 01.1 for stud welding and as Follows: .
1. Bend test will be performed when visual inspection reveals either less than a continuous
360-degree flash or welding repair to any shear connector.
2. Test will be conducted on additional shear connectors when weld fracture occurs on
shear connectors already tested, according to requirements of AWS DI
PART 3-EXECUTION
Structural Steel 05120-6
3.1 ERECTION
A. Structural steel erected by approved methods, using equipment with adequate capacity to
perform all work safely.
1. Floor system of building not used as support for any equipment In this work.
2. Damage to concrete walls or other work during steel erection, repaired or replaced at
Contractor's expense.
3. Before erection proceeds, and with the steel erector present, verify elevations of concrete
and masonry bearing surfaces and location of anchorages for compliance with
requirements.Verify all critical elevations of bearing points for all base columns.
4. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Contractor responsible for checking dimensions and assuring fit of all members before erection
begins.
1. Work erected plumb, level and to dimensions and elevations indicated, using leveling
instruments and plumb-bob.
2. Correct discrepancies in plumb and level.
C. Discrepancies in plumb and level corrected by guy cables and turn-buckles to within a tolerance
of I to 500 and to Within a tolerance of I to 1000 in all exterior structural steel.
1. Beams and girders, check on each elevation.
D. Leveling plates and anchor bolts set and grouted under Section for Concrete Formwork.
1. Structural steel work coordinated With concrete work to assure timely and proper setting
of leveling plates and anchor bolts.
2. Report,any and all discrepancies In elevations and locations.
3. Work under Section for' Structural Steel and Poured in Place Concrete, mutually
responsible for check of elevation and exact location.
E. Field holes, drilled, NO BURNING OF HOLES BY ANYONE FOR ANY PURPOSE WILL BE
ALLOWED, THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL SEE THAT NO ONE IS ALLOWED TO
BURN HOLES IN STEEL MEMBERS.
1. Necessary enlargement of holes done with twist drill and reamer.
2. Light drifting permitted to draw parts together but drift pinning to match unfair holes will
not be permitted.
F. During erection, install steel -cables with tumbuckles In sufficient number to prevent distortion
and damage to framework due to wind or erection forces.
1. Use cables to plumb and line columns before final bolting.
2. Leave cables in place until sufficient masonry has been placed and roof installed to
insure lateral stability of the building.
G. Field connections bolted, drawn up tight,after work plumbed and leveled.
1. Field welding required by drawings made in accordance with requirements of Article for
Fabrication except as provisions apply to shop conditions only.
H. Field connections, bolted with high-strength steel bolts, all parts fitted solidly together when
assembled and without interposition of gaskets or any other flexible material.
1. Bolts assembled in general with a hardened steel washer under the bolt head or under
the nut, whichever is the element turned In tightening. Flat washers may be used if the
abutment surfaces adjacent to the bolt head and nut do not have a slope of more than
1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis, provided that in all cases of
nonparallel abutment surfaces, the nut shall be torqued against a nonsloping surface.
Hardened washers are not required when bolts are tightened by the tum-of-the-nut
method.
Structural Steel 05120-7
2. All fasteners tightened to give at least the required minimum bolt tension values shown in
Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 Bolts on completion of joint.
Tightening shall be done with properly calibrated wrenches or by the turn-of-the-nut
method.
a. All bolts for Type 'PR' Connections to be-tightened to give the required minimum
tension values shown in Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325
Bolts on completion of Joints.
3. Bolts designed for bearing values may be tightened to the snug-tight condition In
connections where,
a. The bolts are not subject to tension loads.
b. The bolts. are not subject to loosening or fatigue due to vibration or load
fluctuations.
4. The snug-tight condition is defined as the tightness attained by a few Impacts of an
impact wrench or the full effort of a man using an ordinary spud wrench. The snug tight
condition must ensure that the plies of the connected material have been brought into
snug contact. The allowable stress values given in Table 1.5.2.1 for bearing-type
connections shall be used for bolts tightened to the snug-tight condition.
5. Splice members only where indicated.
6. Remove erection bolts on welded, architecturally exposed structural steel; fill holes with
plug welds;and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.
7. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally
cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.11.
8. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that
must be enlarged to admit bolts.
3.2 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. Install and tighten non-high-strength bolts, except where high-strength bolts are indicated.
B. Install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C. Install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Load and Resistance Factor Design
Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
1. Bolts:ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M) high-strength bolts, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Bolts:ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M) high-strength bolts, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Connection Type: Snug tighten, unless indicated as slip-critical, direct-tension, or
tensioned shearlbearing connection.
4. Connection Type: slip-critical, direct-tension or tensioned shear/bearing connections as
indicated.
D. Weld Connections: comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of weld, and
methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Comply with Aisc specification referenced in this Section for bearing, adequacy of
temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surface adjacent to field
welds.
2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes
without warp.
3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally
exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent surface
bleeding of back-side welding on exposed steel surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet
welds'/'2inch (13 mm) and larger. Grind flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds.
Structural Steel 05120-8
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency may be retained by the owner for inspection and to perform
tests and prepare test reports. Provide access for testing agency to places where structural
steel work is being fabricated or produced so that required inspection and testing can be
accomplished.
B. The testing agency shall perform the following, as required:
1. Inspect shop bolted connections in accordance with AISC specifications.
2. Inspect and test shop welding during fabrication of structural field assemblies.
3. Inspect field bolted connections in accordance with AISC specifications.
4. Inspect and test field welding during erection of structural steel.
C. Inspection of field assemblies with high strength bolts, in accordance with AISC Specification for
Structural Joints using ASTIVI A 325 bolts. Inspection shall include approval of procedure for
calibration of wrenches and installation of bolts.
D. The high-strength steel bolts other than snug tight bolts shall be checked by a testing agency,
all costs for such testing shall be paid for by the Owner. Bolts shall be checked after their
installation by a procedure of retightening not less than 10 percent and in no case less than two
bolts per joint. The procedure shall be an approved method of testing.
E. To establish that when the nut is retorqued to its original position, the bolt tension is not less
than that required by Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 bolts.
F. Acceptance of any material or finished members by inspector shall not be a bar to their
subsequent rejection If they are found to be defective. Rejected material and workmanship shall
be replaced promptly at no additional cost.
3.4 FIELD PAINTING
A. No field painting of structural steel required under this Section except touch up of field welds,
bolt heads, nuts,washers, and all abrasions in shop paint.
B. Touch up, immediately after erection of steel, with same paint used for shop coat. Provide paint
and be responsible for the necessary touch up work.
I Use galvanized repair paint to repair exposed surfaces on galvanized steel items.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect anchor bolts, leveling plates and base plates and portions of columns below grade and
buried in earth but not encased in concrete with one heavy coat of fibered bituminous coating,
Hydrocide Semi-Mastic of Sonnebom, Semi-Mastic No. 214 of Flintkote Co.
END OF SECTION 05120
Structural Steel 05120-9
Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metals: Page 05500 - 1
DIVISION 6: METAL
05600 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS
PART ONE: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. Scope of Work: All work shown on drawings including, but not necessarily limited to
structural steel beams, columns, lintels, railings, handrails, brackets.
B. Submit shop drawings for all items specified in accordance with requirements of the
General Conditions.
C. Verify, by measurements at the job site, all dimensions affecting this work.
PART'TWO: MATERIALS
2.01 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL:
A. Expansion Shields - Plugs, bolts, and other anchorage devices in masonry and
concrete shall be of approved type. Ferrous types shall be galvanized.
B. Railings, balusters, handrails and other components shall be of the material,
design, section, and gauges shown or required herein.
2.03 SHOP PAINTING:
A. Red lead, iron oxide, zinc chromate, in alkyd resin vehicle, formulated specifically
for metal priming.
PART THREE: EXECUTION
3.01 FABRICATION:
A. All miscellaneous metal work shall be fabricated and installed in a first class
manner by mechanics skilled in the trade.
B. All metal work built-in with concrete or masonry shall be formed for anchorage, or
be provided with suitable anchors, expansion shields, or other anchoring devices.
Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metals: Page 05500 -2
C. All joints shall be as strong and rigid as adjoining sections. Welding shall be
continuous along entire line of contact. Where exposed, welds shall be ground
smooth.
D. All fastening shall be concealed where practicable.
E. Fabrication, assembly and fitting of the Work shall be done in the shop, ready for
installation at the site.
3.02 RAILINGS:
A. Set railings upright in sleeves or as detailed.
B. Wall mounted handrails shall be returned into proper cast fittings at top and bottom
terminals.
C. Fittings shall be flush type, rails and-railings anchored securely. Handrail bracket
spacing shall not exceed 48".
3.03 SHOP PAINTING:
A. Surface of ferrous metal, except for galvanized surfaces and factory finished items,
shall be given a shop coat of the specified paint.
B. Clean surfaces throughout thoroughly with wire brushes, or other proper and
affective means, of loose scales, filings, dirt, and other objectionable matter,
C. After installation, surfaces which have become marred or abraded, and field weld
areas, thoroughly cleaned and given a coat of the same paint.
3.04 CLEANING, ACCEPTANCE & PROTECTION:
A. All work shall be properly protected from defacement or damage.
B. All operative items shall be adjusted to work properly and the work left whole,
clean, and in perfect condition.
(END OF SECTION)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. This section subject to applicable requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Work includes all Rough Carpentry required by the Contract and, in general, includes the
following items:
1 Rough carpentry including plates, blocking, rough bucks, nailing strips, wood
framing, furring, curbs, blocking for sheet metal.
2. Plywood roof sheathing.
3. Plywood wall sheathing.
4. Engineered wood trusses, and Microlam beams.
5. Rough hardware including nails, screws, bolts and fastening devices required to
complete items of rough and finished carpentry.
6. Temporary weather protection as required to enclose the building including doors
and canvas.
7. Exterior wall gypsum board sheathing.
8. Blocking for adjustable wall standards.
9. Plywood backing for cork(and metal) panels.
10. Backing and blocking for sheet metal and flashing.
11. Install roof curbs furnished under other Divisions.
12. Submittals.
C. Related Work:
1. Formwork for concrete under Section for Concrete Formwork.
2. Backpainting of carpentry and millwork to be built-in under Section for Painting.
3. Preservative treatment of wood under Section for Wood Treatment.
1.02 APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Lumber grading rules of following associations apply to materials specified under this
Section.
1. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).
2. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB).
3. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer's Association, Inc. (NELMA)
B. Plywood grading rules:
1. Softwood Plywood - Construction and Industrial, U.S. Product Standard PSI, as
amended to date.
C. Work under this Section shall conform to the requirements of the following, except as
modified herein.
ROUGH CARPENTRY' 06100-1
1. American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC).
2. National Forest Products Association.
3. American Plywood Association(APA).
D. The design and fabrication criteria of all engineered wood trusses shall meet with:
1. National Design Specifications for Stress Grade Lumber and Its fastenings, by
National Forest Products Association.
2. Timber Construction Standards, by American Institute of Timber Construction.
3. Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses, by Truss Plate
Institute(TPI).
1.03 SUBMITTALS FOR ENGINEERED WOOD TRUSSES
A. Design and shop drawings of trusses showing:
1. Detailed diagram of each type of truss.
2. Panel joint or joint details.
3. Stress diagram and calculations.
4. Schedule of lumber used.
5. Connector plate test method and evaluation procedure.
6. Lifting points to be used during erection.
7. Temporary and permanent bracing requirements.
8. Recommended anchorage at supports.
S. Statement of a professional engineer, licensed to practice in the state where the project is
being constructed, thaf the design-meets all requirements for the snow load plus the dead
load shown on drawings, signed and sealed.
1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Place materials in area protected from weather immediately upon delivery to project.
1. Store above ground on blocking and cover with waterproof covering and provide
adequate ventilation.
2. Do not store seasoned materials in damp or wet areas of building.
3. Protect sheet materials from comer breakage and surface damage while handling.
4. Protect treated materials from high humidity and moisture during storage and
erection.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -2
A. Lumber stock shall be new, well-seasoned, surfaced four sides with 19% maximum
moisture content unless specified otherwise.
B. Framing lumber, including joists, studs, plates, beams, posts and headers, shall be Select
Structural Spruce-Pine-Fir or equal or better.
C. The following items shall be locally available grade lumber meeting the grades noted.
1. Grounds, nailing strips, blocking: No. 3 or Standard grade.
2. Interior non-load bearing studs; furring, bucks: Standard or Better grade.
3. Plank: Framing No. 2 and Better grade.
4. Sheathing: No. 3 Common or Standard grade.
D. Plywood roof and wall sheathing shall be C-D INT-APA with exterior glue.
E. Plywood underlayment and backing: Undedayment Grade with exterior glue or C-C Plugged
Exterior Grade.
F. Plywood, for paint finish, soffits and exposed for exterior work, Exterior Grade faced both
sides with phenolic-resin overlay sheet, Weldwood Duraply of Champion Building Products.
G. Exterior wall gypsum board sheathing, 1/2"thick,2'-0"x 8'4'size With V-tongue and groove
on long edges, USG Gypsum Sheathing of U.S. Gypsum, Fire Shield Gypsum Sheathing of
National Gypsum.
H. Hardboard, tempered,Tempered Presswood of Masonite Co.
1. Engineered wood trusses shall be fabricated from materials as determined by truss
designer, based on design loads stated on drawings.
1. All trusses shall be fabricated in a properly equipped manufacturing facility of a
permanent nature. They shall be manufactured by experienced workmen, using
precision cutting and truss fabricating equipment, under the direct supervision of a
qualified foreman. All trusses shall be fabricated under strict rules of inspection and
quality control as the local code may require, open to the inspection of the Engineer
or his representative at all times.
2. All truss members shall be accurately cut to length, angle and be true to line to
assure fight joints for finished truss.
3. All truss members and connector plates shall be properly placed in special jigs and
the members tightly clamped in place, remaining in that position until the connector
plates have been pressed into the lumber simultaneously on both sides of the joints.
4. Camber shall be built into the trusses, as noted on the engineering truss designs, by
properly positioning the members in the fabricating jig.
5. Each truss shall be stamped with the name and address of the truss manufacturer.
2.02 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -3
A. Wood and plywood for following uses, preservative treated as specified under Section for
Wood Treatment
1. Wood
d built on or into masonry and concrete.
2. Wood and plywood backing and blocking for sheet metal, roofing and base flashing.
3. Wood blocking, nailing strips, furring,-bucks, grounds rough framing for openings.
built into or against exterior walls and in contact with foundation walls and partitions
below grade.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that surfaces to receive rough carpentry materials are at proper grades and
dimensions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Members accurately set to lines, elevations and locations required for installation
of finish work, closely fitted and rigidly secured in place.
1. Wood members and plywood built into and in contact with masonry and concrete,
clocking, nailing strips, grounds, furring, bucks, blocking for sheet metal and backing
for sheet metal and flashings shall be preservative sealed.
B. Rough bucks shall be provided at opening indicated to have wood or metal frames, in
general, at doors, recessed cabinets, extinguisher recesses, openings for grilles and
registers.
I Anchor rigidly in place with minimum of three approved type anchors at each jamb.
C. Nailing strips shall be provided for attaching finished work, where required, for hanging
fixtures and where indicated.
1. Nailing strips free from loose knots and sap pockets.
2. 'Place carefully, true to line, plumb and level.
3. Nailing strips may serve as plaster grounds.
4. Secure rigidly with wire ties, nails or toggle bolts as applicable.
D. Grounds shall be provided as required for attaching of trim, finish and other work to be
plastered.
1. Install in lengths as long as practical, butt joints.
2. Secure rigidly in place,wire ties to metal studs with saddle ties.
3. Set true to line, plumb and level as,guide for plaster.
4. Plaster thickness as indicated and specified.
5. Grounds 5/8"thick, minimum 1-3/4"wide where possible.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061004
E. Blocking shall be provided where required for support and backing for setting and installing
other work, in general for case and cabinet work, adjustable wall standards,wood base and
where indicated.
1. Coordinate blocking with others where work is secured to blocking to provide proper
backing and fastening.
2. Install plumb and level, secure rigidly in place.
F. Blocking for -sheet metal work and plywood backing for flashing shall be installed as
indicated to provide firm solid backing.
1. Templates, for blocking provided under Section for Sheet Metal.
2. Secure blocking and backing rigidly in place.
3. Install straight,true to line and level or sloped as required.
G. Furring shall be provided for wood and.other wall finishes as indicated.
1. Install vertically and horizontally and as required at openings, 16" on center unless
shown otherwise.
2. Face of furring plumb, level and in line.
3. Secure rigidly in place with cut nails or power driven fasteners to block, with wire
saddle ties to metal studs.
4. Install in lengths as long as practical, butt joints.
H. Exterior wall gypsum board sheathing shall be applied with long dimensions perpendicular
to supports,with groove edge down,
1. Secure to studs with self tapping screws 6"on center.
2. Nails 1" long, Type 5-12 Bugle Head, Climaseal coated of U.S. Gypsum Co.
3. Ends of sheets butted and secured at supports, made tight to minimize air leakage.
4. Open cracks, sea]with mastic.
1. Plywood roof and wall sheathing shall be laid perpendicular to supports.
1 Nail according to recommendation of plywood manufacturer, unless noted on
drawings.
2. All joints bearing on supports.
3. Leave 1/2"clearance between deck and abutting to supports.
J. Partition and wall framing shall be installed as indicated.
1. Studs spaced 16"on center unless shown otherwise, double studs at openings.
2. Headers at opening, double studs on edge or larger as required by span.
3. Comers and partition intersections constructed of not less than three full studs.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-5
4. Plates resting on masonry or concrete, anchor with expansion bolts or cast in
anchors not over 6-9' on center or with power driven fasteners not over 3'-0' on
center.
5. Bearing walls and partitions, double top plates with members lapped at least 21-011
and spiked together.
6. Continuous horizontal blocking, install at mid-height of partition 8'-0"high and over.
7. Locate blocking for installation of finishing materials, fixtures and trim.
K. Joist framing shall be installed where indicated, crown edge up.
1. Support ends minimum 1-1/2" on wood and metal, minimum 4!' on concrete and
masonry.
2. Install blocking between ends of joist and between joist crossing bearing, 2"thick by
depth of joist.
3. Openings framed with headers and trimmers. Double the headers carrying more
than two tail joist and double the trimmers supporting headers carrying more than
one tail joist unless indicated otherwise.
4. Cross bridging, I"x 3"with beveled ends at mid-span of joist span of 16'-0" or less.
Nail bottom end of cross bridging after subfloodng is installed.
L. Plywood backing for cork(and metal) panels shall be installed as indicated.
1. Plywood as specified to receive paint finish.
2. Install plumb and level, surfaces flat.
M. Cant strips shall be installed as indicated at roof curbs and at vertical surfaces intersecting
roof surfaces.
1. Secure rigidly in place With nails or sheet metal screws as applicable.
N. Wood roof curbs shall be installed as indicated.
1. Curbs for ventilators, skylights and where shown fabricated to sizes indicated.
2. Secure curbs rigidly in place as detailed.
3. Coordinate work with other divisions for proper locations of fixtures requiring curbs.
O. Engineered wood trusses shall be installed where indicated.
1. Trusses shall be erected in such a manner as to prevent damage to truss members
or connections. Damaged trusses removed from site.
2. Install adequate bracing to prevent toppling or dominoing of trusses during erection.
3. Provide means for adequate distribution of concentrated construction loads so that
the trusses are not overloaded.
4. All temporary and permanent bracing shall be in place before applying any
construction loads.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -6
SECTION END
d
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06I00-7
Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Page 06200 - I
DIVISION 6:
06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY
PART ONE: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF Work:
A. The work under this section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services
necessary to complete the carpentry work as shown on the drawings and specified
herein.
B. Specifically, the work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Fixed and adjustable shelving, including wall standard.
2. Interior wood trim items.
3. Fireplace trim and millwork.
4. Trash Enclosure.
5. Wood stair and handrails.
6. Porch columns and railing.
7. Maintenance area work bench.
B. Other items shown or as may be required to complete the Work.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Woodworking Standards:
I Design and Co'nstruction Features: Comply with details and profiles shown.
Where not otherwise shown, comply with applicable AWI Quality Standards,
with alternate details at fabricator's option.
2. All shelving shall be manufactured to meet the quality standards of the
Architectural Woodwork Institute, AW] Section 600, Custom Grade.
3. All wood trim shall be manufactured and installed to meet the quality
standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute, AWi Section 300,
Premium Grade.
a. Comply with details shown for profile and construction wood
trim and millwork items. Where not otherwise shown,-
comply with applicable AWI Quality Standards, with
alternate details at fabricator's option.
4. Installation of Interior Millwork Items: Comply with requirements of the
Architectural Woodwork Institute, AWI Section 1700.
Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Page 06200 -2
B. Grading Standards:
1. Moisture Content: The maximum moisture content of treated or untreated
finish lumber, trim and millwork is not to exceed 10% at the time of delivery.
2. Grading Standards: Softwood framing lumber shall comply with Product
Standard 20 and with the specific grading association standards and
specifications listed below:
a. Southern Pine: Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine
Lumber, published by Southern Pine Inspection Bureau and
trademarked SPIB.
3. All plywood shall be manufactured in accordance with U.S. Product Standard
PS-1 0 and grademarked.
4. All board lumber shall comply with PS 20 and grademarked by either of the
associations listed in paragraph above.
5. Hardwood lumber shall comply with national Hardwood Lumber Association
rules.
C. Wood specified herein for the wood gates shall be in accordance with the following
agencies:
1. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB Grading Rules).
2. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA Grading Rules).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings for the following:
1. Shelving: Show shelving layouts, shelf spacing and standards anchorage as
well as types of anchorages for the substrates involved. Submittals shall
also show shelf construction and materials used in manufacture.
2. Wood gate and fencing construction and required operating and locking
hardware for gate.
3. Samples: Two (2) 2'-1" long samples of interior and exterior wood trim
material, each profile detailed, with finish applied.
B. Submit product data for shelf standards and brackets. Include manufacturer's
suggested anchorage requirements.
C. Samples—Wood Trim and Moldings: 2 Samples of each profile, 24" long, with
finish applies.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING, AND PROTECTION
A. Protect materials during transit, delivery and handling to prevent damage, soiling
and deterioration.
B. Inspect all materials delivered and reject all not qualifying completely with the
requirements, damaged in transit or in handling, or otherwise unsatisfactory.
Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Page 06200 -3
C. Deliver, store and handle all materials in a manner to prevent damage and
deterioration. Defer delivery to job until the installation and storage areas are
complete and dry of all wet-type construction. Relative humidity in storage areas
shall be maintained at and shall not exceed 60 percent.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Do not install finish carpentry until required temperature and relative humidity
conditions have been stabilized and will be maintained in installation areas.
B. Maintain temperature and humidity in installation area as required to maintain
moisture content of the installed finish carpentry within 1.0% tolerance of optimum
moisture content, from date of installation through remainder of construction period.
PART TWO: MATERIALS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Shelving: In areas as detailed, shall be 3/4" thick A-B interior APA plywood with
hardwood nosing in all exposed edges. All shelving shall be painted.
I., For adjustable shelving, provide wall standards for shelf supports, Knap &Volt
#187 Heavy-Duty Brackets with #87 Heavy-Duty Standards, zinc finish.
B. Interior Trim Material, Mantel and Other decorative Wood Trim Items such as chair
rails, door casing, window sills, crown moulds, and wood shoe: First Grade,
Premium Grade, plain sawn Red Oak, manufactured to sizes, patterns and profiles
show.
Hardwood Trim By Cox Interiors, Inc.
Corridor base: BCB 400
Other wood base: BCB 500
Shoe Mould; 127
2-piece chair rail: CR290+50C
2-piece crown mould: CM48+BPG325
Door casing: C352
C. Stair Components: Red Oak stair treads and risers, landings, newel, balustrades
and railings.
By Cox Interiors, Inc.
Balusters and Newels: W-5300 balusters with matching newel design
Handrails: W601 ON
Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Page 06200 - 4
D. Maintenance Area Work Bench:
1. Framing: Comply with requirements of Section 06100. Provide No. 2 SYP for
support framing.
2. Bench Top: Y4" Exterior, B-D, APA certified sheathing. Provide hardwood
nosing on exposed edges and ends, including splash.
E. Trash Enclosure: See drawing for details and materials.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Woodwork:
I.. Interior trim shall be "Premium Grade" manufactured from solid stock meeting
the following requirements:
a. Minor'warp which can be held flat and straight with normal
nailing.
b. Natural and manufacturing defects in excess of those permitted
in the grade specified are permitted if such defects are to be
covered by adjoining members or otherwise concealed.
c. Trim members for application on flat surfaces shall have the
reverse side "backed out", except members with exposed ends.
d. Custom grade pieces shall be smoothly machined with top flat
surfaces machine sanded. Depressed flat surfaces and
molded contours shall be smoothly machined.
2. Carefully fit equipment to be installed into millwork. Provide filler pieces when
. required.
3. Protection: Exposed ends of millwork to be sealed with two coats of spar
varnish.
PART THREE: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Inspect all materials delivered and reject all not qualifying completely with the
requirements, damaged in transit or in handling, or otherwise unsatisfactory.
B. All finish carpentry shall be executed by skilled mechanics in strict accordance with
the details. Protect finish carpentry items against dampness during and after
delivery. Store under cover in well ventilated spaces, not exposed to extreme
changes in temperature and excess humidity. Make field measurements where
required for close fit.
C. Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length material to greatest
extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns;
miter at corners, to produce tight fitting joints with full surface contact throughout
the length of the joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Page 06200 - 5
G. Expansion Joints: Construct to permit sections to expand and contract without
buckling, warping, causing other conditions which will detract from appearance,
durability.
H. Set all nail heads. Counter-sink all screw heads.
1. Gates: Install boards on steel gate frames plumb and level, with gap between
boards as detailed. Remove boards that are split, where split is a result of
installation and all boards that are otherwise damaged.
3.02 CLEANING
A. At the completion of this work, remove from the job site all excess materials and
debris. Leave entire work ready to receive the specified or scheduled finish.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished installations from damage until date of Substantial Completion.
Repair or replace any damage at no additional cost to the Owner as directed by the
Architect.
(END OF SECTION)
Section 06400 - Cabinetry & Millwork: Page 06400 - 1
DIVISION 6:
06400 -CABINETRY& MILLWORK
PART ONE: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF Work:
A. The work under this section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services
necessary to complete the carpentry work as shown on the drawings and specified
herein.
B. Specifically, the work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1 Cabinetry and millwork in Guestrooms.
2. Registration Desk.
3. Cabinetry and millwork in Board Room and Meeting Room.
4. Cabinetry in Administration Areas.
5. Cabinetry in Employee Break room.
6. Prep Area and Service Kitchen cabinetry.
7. Breakfast Serving area cabinetry.
8. Materials and installation of cabinet tops.
9. Other items as indicated on the Drawings.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Woodworking Standards:
1. Design and Construction Features: Comply with details and profiles shown.
Where not otherwise shown, comply with applicable AW1 Quality Standards,
with alternate details at fabricator's option.
2. All shelving shall be manufactured to meet the quality standards of the
Archectural Woodwork Institute, AWI Section 600, Custom Grade.
3. All wood trim shall be manufactured and installed to meet the quality
standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute, AWI Section 300,
Premium Grade.
4. Comply with details shown for profile and construction wood trim and millwork
items. Where not otherwise shown, comply with applicable AWI Quality
Standards, with alternate details at fabricator's option.
5. Installation of Interior Millwork Items: Comply with requirements of the
Architectural Woodwork Institute, AWI Section 1700.
Section 06400 - Cabinetry & Millwork: Page 06400 -2
B. Grading Standards:
1 Moisture Content: The maximum moisture content of treated or untreated
finish lumber, trim and millwork is not to exceed 10% at the time of delivery.
2. Grading Standards: Softwood framing lumber shall comply with Product
Standard 20 and with the specific grading association standards and
specifications listed below:
A. Southern Pine: Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber,
published by Southern Pine Inspection Bureau and trademarked SPIB.
3'. All plywood shall be manufactured in accordance with U.S. Product Standard
PS-1 0 and grademarked.
4. All board lumber shall comply with PS 20 and grademarked by either of the
associations listed in paragraph above.
5. Hardwood lumber shall comply with national Hardwood Lumber Association
rules.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. - Submit shop drawings and samples for all items in this section.
1.04 'PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING, AND PROTECTION
A. Deliver, store and handle cabinetry and millwork items in a manner to prevent
damage and deterioration. Defer delivery to job until the installation and storage
areas are complete and dry of all wet-type construction. Relative humidity in
storage areas shall be maintained at and shall not exceed 60 percent.
PART TWO : MATERIALS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cabinetwork: Custom cabinetry for all items indicated on drawings. All cabinetry and
Tops shall be factory fabricated and delivered to the job site completely finished
with hardware installed. Cabinetry shall be constructed using plain sawn solid Red
Oak with raised panels. Finish as directed by the Owner. The inside surfaces of all
cabinets shall have oak venner finish.
B. Cabinet Tops: High density Particleboard with high pressure plastic laminate finish
and solid oak bullnose edging.
1. Floating end splashes for plastic laminate tops (where splash is indicated)
shall be shipped loose. Back splashes shall be constructed with a scribe
bar for scribing to wall. If indicated on drawings but not detailed, provide 4"
Section 06400 - Cabinetry & Millwork: Page 06400 - 3
high back splash and end splash, top mounted, square butt joint, fully
covered with matching plastic laminate, eased edges.
2. Coordinate the cut-outs for sinks and openings for appliances with the
appropriate sub-contractor and/or vendor. Comply with equipment
manufacturer's requirements, but provide internal corners of 1/8 inch
minimum radius. Smooth saw cut and ease edges.
3. Seal cut edges of counter at openings for sinks and other"wet" equipment,
using waterproofing compound recommended by plastic manufacturer and
compatible with laminating adhesive.
4. Exposed Counter Edges: GP-50 laminate, unless shown otherwise on
drawings.
-0. 'Cabinet Construction:
1. For layout of cabinetwork refer to Drawings for locations of each. For
cabinets with transparent finish, provide plain sliced Red Oak veneer
materials or as selected by the Owner.
2. Cabinet Front Frame: Solid hardwood, 3/4" thick, with plastic laminate
applied to exposed surfaces and edges, except where transparent finish is
required. Refer to Drawings for locations of each type cabinet construction.
3. Backing Sheet: provide backing sheet on inside surface of all doors and
drawer heads.
4. Hardware:
a. Drawer Slide: Knape &Vogt#KV1300 Series.
b. Pulls: Stanley#4483, aluminum
C. Hinges: Stanley#1501 Series, concealed type.
d. Adjustable Standards in Cabinets (Where Indicated): Knape &Vogt
#KV255 pilaster standards (routed in place) with#KV256 support.
D. Particleboard: Comply with the requirements of ASNI A208.1. The following
manufacturers are acceptable for use on this project subject to compliance with
requirements:
1. GP 50: Horizontal Grade.
2. GP28: Vertical Grade.
3. Acceptable Manufacturers of Plastic Laminate, are:
A. Formica Corporation
B. Nevamar Corporation
C. Ralph Wilson Plastics Company
Section 06400 - Cabinetry & Millwork: Page 06400 -4
E. Adhesive for Application of Plastic Laminate: Thermosetting resin type for shop
application and/or contact type for on-site installations. Adhesive shall be
specifically designed for use with high-pressure plastic laminates.
PART THREE: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of all cabinetry and millwork items shall comply with the Quality
Assurance section of this specification.
B. Cabinetry and millwork items shall be mounted and set into place in accordance
with the approved shop drawings. All work shall be straight, plumb, level and in
true alignment. Fit all joints closely and fasten all pieces rigidly in place.
Coordinate installation of cabinetry in Suites with Owner-provided appliance
installations.
C. Attach tops to base units using fasteners and methods indicated on the approved
shop drawings.
D. All hardware shall be demonstrated to operate properly. Drawer units shall slide
freely without bind. Doors shall remain open in any position beyond the closing
mechanism of the hinges.
3.01 CLEANUP
A. At the completion of the installation remove from the site all excess materials,
equipment and debris. Leave ready for inspection.
3.02 PROTECTION-
A. Completed installations shall be protected from damage until date of Substantial
Completion. Cabinet work damaged prior to Substantial Completion shall be
repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner, as directed by the Architect.
END OF SECTION
Section 07100 -Dampproofing & Membrane Waterproofing: Page 07100 - 1
DIVISION 7: THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
07100 - DAMPPROOFING & MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
PART ONE: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. All membrane waterproofing and fabric flashing work as indicated on drawings,
including but not limited to, dampprrofing and membrane waterproofing and
protection at below grade walls.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit samples of waterproofing membrane and fabric flashing, 12" x 12" in size,
specified herein as per"General Conditions".
PART TWO: MATERIALS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. Dampproofing material below the building concrete slab on grade shall be 10 mil
polyethylene film.
B. Dampproofing for application over concrete masonry units used as backup for
masonry veneer shall be W.R. Meadows, Inc. Sealmastic Emulsion Dampproofing,
Type 2, Spray-Applied Grade.
C. Clear sealer for application to all exterior surfaces of masonry veneer shall be
Hydrozo Enviroseal tm Double 7 VOC.
D. Waterproofing Membrane Over All Vertical Walls Below Grade and at Horizontal
Surfaces of Elevator Pit Slab: Bituthene 4000, preformed rubberized asphalt
membrane as manufactured by W. R. Grace and Company of Cambridge,
Massachusetts.
a. Primer for membrane waterproofing shall be Bituthene P-4000 concrete and
masonry primer for application temperature of 40 degrees F and above. For
application temperature range of 25 degrees F to 40 degrees F use
Bituthene System 4000 Surface Conditioner.
E. Mirafi G•Series Drainage System. G I OON.
F. 2" Rigid insulation board compatible with water proofing membrane.
G. Metal termination bars at the top of membrane waterproofing.
Section 07100 -Dampproofing & Membrane Waterproofing: Page 07100 -2
PART THREE: EXECUTION.
3.01 WATERPROOFING AND DRAINAGE SYSTEM:
A. Follow manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Membrane waterproofing shall be applied over concrete foundation walls. Surfaces
to receive waterproofing shall be thoroughly cleaned of loose dirt, grease, and
other objectionable materials. All surfaces shall be completely dry. New concrete
shall be fully cured and dry (minimum of 7 days). Acute angles (90 degrees or less)
should receive a fillet of Bituthene Liquid Membrane LM-3000 before membrane
installation. External corners shall be leveled to avoid cracking of the waterproofing
materials. All corners shall receive Bituthene stripes under the membrane, full
height.
C. All surfaces shall be primed before installing Membrane. Membranes must be rolled
immediately to assure full contact with the substrate and for complete lap sealing.
Membrane sheets must be overlapped 2 1/2 inches. Top of membrane shall be
secured to wall with a metal bar and sealed with mastic,
D. All waterproofing shall be carried down to and over footers forming 1-1/2" cove at
the junction of walls and footer.
E. Limitations:
1. Do not apply when temperature is below 40 degrees F or due to fall below
40 degree F within 24 hours or to frozen or frost-filled,surfaces.
2. Do not dampen walls excessively in fall, winter or spring months for outside
applications. If application is made during exceptionally hot or windy
weather, finished surface should be fog sprayed several times during the
day to prevent too rapid drying.
3.02 MIRAFI G-SERIES DRAINAGE SYSTEM and INSULATION BOARDS:
A. Install drainage system over membrane waterprrofing. Follow manufacturer's
recommendations. Rigid insulation shall be installed over the drainage boards.
Install metal termination bars screwed into concrete walls with sealant bed.
Section 07100 -Dampproofing & Membrane Waterproofing: Page 07100 - 3
3.03 GUARANTEE-.
A. The Contractor must furnish written guarantees that waterproofing in connection
herewith, are watertight and free from all defects, both as to workmanship and
material for five (5) years.
(END OF SECTION)
Section 07200 - Insulation: Page 07200 - 1
DIVISION 7: THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
07200 - INSULATION
PART ONE: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary
to complete the insulation work as shown on the Drawings and Specified herein.
Section includes materials and installation of the insulation materials. Work
includes but is not limited to the following:
• Wall bait insulation.
• Attic insulation.
• Floor/ceiling assembly insulation.
• Rigid board perimeter insulation.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit manufacturer's test data for each type of insulation to be used.
1.03 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS:
A. Store insulation on the job site above ground in weathertight shelter and in
manufacturer's original unopened bundles. Damaged and/or wet insulation and
insulation that has been wet shall be immediately removed from the job site.
Insulation must remain dry at all times.
PART TWO: MATERIALS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers — Extruded Polystyrene Only:
1. Dow Chemical, USA.
2. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. of Toledo, Ohio.
3. The Celotex Corporation of Tampa, Florida
B. Interior Wall Batt Insulation: Sound attenuation unfaced fiberglass, 3 W thickness,
R-1 3. Or as noted on drawings.
C. Attic Insulation: 12" Unfaced batt insulation of thickness as shown on drawings,
D. Exterior wall insulation: 6" Batt insulation of thickness as shown on drawings.
E. Floor-Ceiling Assembly Batt Insulation: 9" Batt insulation between framing
members.
Section 07200 - Insulation: Page 07200 -2
F. Perimeter Insulation: 2" thickness (R-10) of Dow Styrofoam SM Board, as
manufactured by Dow Chemical Company of Midland, Michigan.
PART THREE: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Wall Batt Insulation:
1. Friction fit batt between framing members. Where necessary, secure in
place utilizing wire ties; do not fasten to metal framing. Prevent insulation
from sagging into the cavities.
2. Insulate behind cold side of all electrical outlet boxes, ductwork and piping
at exterior walls. Butt all ends tightly together.
3. Stuff insulation into all cracks around exterior doors and windows and
closely-spaced framing members.
4. At non-standard wide spaces, install insulation horizontally across framing
space. Do not piece two vertical strips of insulation.
5. Hold insulation back a minimum of 3" from item recessed in walls, such as
light fixtures and other heat generating appliances and electrical apparatus.
B. Attic and floor Insulation: Friction fit batt between framing members.
C. Perimeter Insulation: Install at foundation walls and slab edge as detailed after
membrane waterproofing has been installed.
3.02 CLEANUP
A. Upon completion of the,installation of insulation products, remove from the
job site all excess debris, material and equipment.
(END OF SECTION)
Section 07240 - Exterior Insulation & Finish System: Page 07240- 1
DIVISION 7: THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION:
07240: Exterior Insulation And Finish System
PART ONE: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, equipment and services
necessary to complete the Residential MD exterior insulation and finish system
work as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.02 QUALITY CONTROL
A. All materials shall be as manufactured or listed by Dryvit Systems, Inc. or
approved equal as determined by the Architect.
B. Before shipment of any materials*all items shall be inspected to determine that
materials and workmanship conform to the requirements of these Specifications.
C. All finish materials must be ordered and shipped at the same time to insure
sequential batches.
D. All finishes must be installed in sequential batches.
E. Applicator Certification: All bids are to be accompanied by a current copy of
Certified Application Certificate. The applicator shall be authorized by Dryvit for
the application of Residential MD system.
F. Applicator Qualifications: Provide names and locations of at least five (5)
successfully completed projects where scope of work and magnitude is similar to
and comparable to this project.
G. Acceptable Manufacturers: This specification has been prepared using product
criteria and specifications from Dryvit Systems, Inc. Other equivalent products
may be substituted subject to approval by the Architect.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit copies of technical data to the Architect for review. The technical data
shall contain the following:
1 Materials to be used.
2. Construction techniques.
3. Shop drawings showing profiles, configurations and dimensions of
the configurations of the installed system.
B. Sample (mock-up panel), 2'-0" x 2'-0" of colors and texture selected for use on
this project. The sample shall be made by the applicator utilizing tools, materials
and techniques proposed for installation.
Section 07240 - Exterior Insulation & Finish System: Page 07240 -2
1.04 DELIVERY & PROTECTION
A. All materials shall be delivered to the job site in the original, unopened packages
with labels intact.
B. The adhesive and finish materials shall be stored under cover ina cool, dry place
(above 40 degrees F) out of the sun. Materials that have been frozen or stored in
the direct rays of the sun shall not be used.
C. Reinforcing Fabric shall be covered. Wet materials shall not be used.
D. Insulation Board shall be stored flat and protected from sunlight and weather.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Provide a ten (10) year moisture drainage warranty plus ten (10) year warranty
against defective materials and workmanship. Dryvit shall supply replacement
material and application of same if the wall system fails within this period of time,
and at no cost to the Owner.
B. Manufacturer's Inspection: Manufacturer's representative shall inspect and
approve the exterior insulation and finish system installation prior to issuing
warranty.
PART TWO: MATERIALS:
2.01 GENERAL:
A. All components of the Residential MD system shall be supplied by Dryvit or its
authorized distributors.
B. The system consists of
1. Tyvek building wrap applied over substrate sheathing.
2. Dryvit drainage mat with drainage track and weep holes.
3. Expanded polystyrene insulation board adhered to previously installed
substrate with mechanical fasteners.
4. Base coat , woven glass fiber fabric embedded in primer/adhesive veneer
base .
5. Finish coating with integral color and texture.
6. All system components must be supplied by a single manufacturer.
B. Dryvit Systems, Inc. One Energy Way, Warwick, RI 02893 or R-Wall
manufactured by ISPO USA, INC., 729 South Main Street, Mansfield, MA 02048.
2
Section 07240 - Exterior Insulation & Finish System: Page 07240 - 3
2.02 PRIMERIADHESIVE:
A. An acrylic base, Manufacturer's pre-mixed formulation mixed with Portland
Cement, ASTM CA 50, Type 1, meeting ASTM C-1 50, white or gray in color,
fresh and free of lumps.
2.03 INSULATION:
A. Aged expanded polystyrene board, thickness as indicated on drawings.
B. Average density 1.0 lbs/cu. ft.
C. Flame spread less than 25.
D. Edges square to within 1/32" per foot; thickness tolerance plus or minus 1/16".
2.04 REINFORCING FABRIC:
A. Dryvit Reinforcing Fabric:
1. First Floor: Panzer 20 Mesh at first floor.
2. Second Floor: Balanced open weave glass fiber fabric, 4.3
ounces per square yard, made from twisted multi-end stands,
specifically treated for compatibility with Dryvit materials.
3. Corner Mesh: 7.2 Ounce per square yard fiberglass mesh.
Provide at all comers for additional impact resistance.
B. Dryvit Quartzputz Finish: As manufactured by Dryvit System, Inc., with "DPR"
(dirt pickup resistance), more than one (1) color will be selected. Color integral
and consistent throughout.
C. Sheathing Board: 3/4" APA exterior grade Plywood and 5/8" dense gold
sheathing.
1. Fasteners shall be minimum No.6 bugle head corrosion resistant screws.
Minimum penetration at wood 3/4", at steel 3/8".
D. Lamina shall be classified as having a flame spread of less than or equal to 25
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
3
Section 07240 - Exterior Insulation & Finish System: Page 07240 -4
2.05 ADDITIVES:
A. No rapid binders, anti-freeze, accelerators or other additives permitted under any
circumstances.
PART THREE: EXECUTION:
3.01 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
A. Store primer/adhesive and finish materials in ambient temperatures at or above
40 deg. F.
B. Begin application of system in ambient temperatures above 40 deg. F. and rising,
and only on unfrozen surfaces.
C. Maintain a minimum ambient temperature of 40 deg. F. and rising, and only on
unfrozen surfaces.
D. Provide supplementary heat and enclosures as required to maintain the specified
conditions.
3.02 SURFACE CONDITIONS:
A. Prior to executing the work of this Section, carefully inspect the surface to verify
that it is complete and acceptable.
B. The surface should be free of hot spots, release agents, oils or other residue,
and have no planar irregularities of greater than 1/4".
C. Installation of new materials over the substrate shall constitute acceptance by the
Contractor of the substrate as suitable for that application.
3.03 - SHEATHING INSTALLATION
A. Install parallel with framing with joints occurring over framing or installed
perpendicular to framing with end joints staggered.
B. Fasteners, as specified, shall be placed at 8" o.c. at edges and 8" o.c. in field.
Drive fasteners to bear tight against and flush with surface of the sheathing.
4
Section 07240 - Exterior Insulation & Finish System: Page 07240 - 5
3.04 MIXING PRIM ER/ADHESIVE:
A. Mixing: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for mixing and pot life.
3.06 INSULATION APPLICATION:
A. Application of the Insulation Board: The application of Dryvit Insulation Board to
vertical surfaces shall begin at the base from firm, permanent or temporary
support. Adhesion shall be made to clean hard surface. Precut Insulation Board
as required to fit openings, projections, etc. Boards shall be applied within the
long edge oriented horizontally, with its joints offset with respect to the substrate
joints. Stagger vertical joints. By trowel or extrusion, apply a ribbon of mixed
Primus/Adhesive approximately 2" wide by 3/8" thick around the entire perimeter
of each
board. Also, apply dabs of adhesive, as recommended. Apply pressure over
entire surface of abroad to insure uniform contact and high initial grab. Butt all
joints tightly and insure an overall flush level surface. Planar defects in the
insulation board and its installation shall be sanded level. Install utilizing
mechanical fasteners as recommended by the manufacturer for the installation(s)
involved.
1. All areas where the Dryvit System joins other materials or terminates at
roof lines, window iambs, heads and sills, etc., must be protected in order
that no water can penetrate behind the Dryvit Insulation Board.
2. Form recessed aesthetic, rustications, profiles, control joints and
thicknesses detailed.
3. Provide control joints above all door and window corners, at 20' centers
maximum, or as directed by the Architect.
3.06 PRIMER COATING:
A. Coating and Reinforcing Fabric: Apply mixed Dryvit Primus/Adhesive to the
entire surface of the Insulation Board to a uniform thickness of approximately
1/16 inch. Install Corner Mesh prior to installation of the Standard Mesh. Install
the Corner Mesh in its own Primus/Adhesive base coat prior to installation of the
Standard Mesh. Apply additional coat of Primus/Adhesive for the Standard
Mesh, then immediately place the reinforcing fabric against the wet Primus
coating, and, by toweling from the center to the edges, embed the fabric into the
coating. Reinforcing Fabric shall be continuous at corners and lapped not less
than 2 1/2inches at all sides and edges. Avoid wrinkles in embedding the
Reinforcing Fabric. The finished thickness of the Primus Coating shall be such
that the Reinforcing Fabric is fully embedded.
5
Section 07240 - Exterior Insulation & Finish System: Page 07240 -6
B. Intermediate Mesh Application: Install over the Standard Mesh at all walls and
surfaces subject to human contact as well as walls adjacent to .
planted/landscaped areas. Install to a height of 6'-0" at such 'locations, and wrap
around any adjacent corner. Apply mixed Dryvit Primus/Adhesive to the entire
surface of the Insulation Board to a uniform thickness of approximately 3/32 inch.
Install comer bead, plaster stops, etc., as required place the mesh reinforcing
fabric against the wet Primus coating, and, by toweling from.the center to the
edges, embed the fabric into the coating. The mesh shall not be visible beneath
the surface of the Primus/Adhesive mixture. Ends of adjacent pieces of mesh
shall be tightly abutted. The mesh pieces shall be worked into, the
Primes/Adhesive from the center to the edges, while smoothing all
wrinkles. Allow*to cure for 24 hours. Protect from damage and weather while
curing Examine the cured surface for wrinkles and full coverage of materials.
Corrections shall be made to produce a flat surface. Apply a second layer of
Primus/Adhesive and Dryvit Intermediate Mesh on either side of the door and
entrances as referenced hereinbefore. Application of the Intermediate Mesh and
succeeding applications of materials shall be in strict compliance with Dryvit
Systems, Inc.
3.07 FINISH:
A. Thoroughly mix the factory-prepared finish material with a high speed mixer until
a uniform, workable consistency is attained.
B. Using a clean, stainless steel trowel, apply a tight coat of the finish material
directly to the reinforced primer coating.
C. In one operation, apply and level the finish to attain the minimum thickness
consistent with uniform coverage.
D. Apply and texture finish continually over wall surface, providing sufficient
manpower, equipment and staging to insure a continuous surface without cold
joints, scaffold lines or any other deviation from a monolithic appearance.
E. Work to corners or joints, and do not allow the material to set up within a distinct
wall area.
F. Use appropriate motions and trowels or floats to achieve the fine texture of the
approved sample.
G. The final thickness should not be greater than the diameter of the largest
aggregate of the finish material.
6
Section 07240 - Exterior Insulation & Finish System: Page 07240 - 7
H. Cut out, remove and replace any areas which, as determined by the Architect, do
not meet the performance standards of this Section.
3.07 CLEANUP
A. Upon completion of the application of the exterior insulation and finish, remove
from the site all excess materials and debris. Remove spatter, droppings, etc.,
from glazing, wood and other adjacent finishes.
(END OF SECTION)
7
Section 07270—Firestopping: Page 07270 - I
DIVISION 7: THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
07270 - FIRESTOPPING
PART ONE: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary
to complete installation of the firestopping.
B. Code Requirements: The intent and extent of firestopping work is described in
governing Local and State Building Codes and Amendments thereto. Comply with
all requirements of therein, except where more restrictive are described herein.
C. Firestopping is required to prevent the passage of flame and products of
combustion through concealed spaces and openings including, but not limited to,
the following:
1. Openings above fire-rated walls or partitions indicated to extend to
underside of structure above ceilings.
2. Openings in concealed furred spaces behind finished wall surfaces.
3. Openings around Pipes, conduits, ducts, and other construction passing
through wall, floor and roof,construction and fire-rated assemblies.
4. Openings in locations that would permit the free travel of flame and products
of combustion through fire-rated assemblies.
5. Openings related to mechanical and electrical panels and systems, and all
other construction that penetrates or in any other way interrupts fire-rated
wall, floor and roof assemblies.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide products which have been tested in accordance
with ASTM E 119 (or UL 263, ANSI A2.1 or NFPA 251) for fire resistance, and
rated by UL or other industry-recognized agency for required resistances.
B. Surface-Burning Ratings: Provide products which have been tested and listed by
UL for required surface burning characteristics (flame spread, fuel contributed,
smoke developed) in accordance with ASTM E 84.
1 General Rating: Except as otherwise indicated, provide complete
installations with maximum flame spread of 25.
C. Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other,
the substrates forming openings, and the items penetrating the firestopping under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
Section 07270—Firestopping: Page 07270 -2
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications and installation
instructions for each type of material and application method required.
B. Certified Test: For each material, submit certified test reports on performances
including (as applicable) heat resisting and burning characteristics, densities,
compressive strengths, and thermal insulating values.
1.04 SEQUENCING AND COORDINATION
A.. Integrate the scheduling/coordination of work of this section with other units of work
'so that this work will not be damaged, will be installed prior to installation of
enclosing or concealing work, and will be installed as soon as practicable.
PART TWO: MATERIALS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Ceramic-Fiber and Mastic Coating: Ceramic fibers in bulk form formulated for use
with mastic coating, and ceramic fiber manufacturer's mastic coating. Subject to
compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering specified items which may
be incorporated in the work include the following:
1. FireMaster Bulk and FireMaster Mastic, by Thermal. Ceramics; Augusta,
Georgia.
2. Nelson FSB Bulk, by Nelson Firestop products; Tulsa, Oklahoma.
B. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component, elastomeric sheet with aluminum foil
on one side. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
specified items which may be incorporated in the work include the following:
1 Dow corning Fire Stop Intumescent Wrap strip 2002, by Dow Corning
Corporation: Midland, Michigan.
2. CP643/642 Firestop Collar, by Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Tulsa,
Oklahoma.
3. Fire Barrier FS-195 Wrap/Strip, by 3M Fire Projection Products; St. Paul,
Minnesota.
4. Nelson FRS Wrapstrip, by Nelson Firestop Products; Tulsa, Oklahoma.
Section 07270 —Firestopping: Page 07270 -3
C. Silicone Foams: Two-component, silicone-based liquid elastomer that, when
mixed, expands and cures in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering specified items
which may be incorporated in the work include the following:
1. Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam 2001, by Dow Corning Corp.; Midland,
Michigan.
2. Pensil 200 Foam, by General Electric Co.; Waterford, New York.
D. Silicone Sealants — Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering specified items which may be incorporated in the work include the
following: ,
1. Dow Corning Firestop Sealant 2000, by Dow Corning Corp.; Midland,
Michigan.
2. Dow Corning.Firestop Sealant SL 2003, by Dow Corning Corp.; Midland,
Michigan.
3. Pensil 100 Firestop Sealant, by General Electric Co.; Waterford, New York.
4. FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant, by Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc.;
Tulsa, Oklahoma.
5. Metacaulk'835, by the RectorSeal Corporation; Houston, Texas.
6. Fyre-Sil, by Temco Inc.; Beachwood, Ohio.
7. Fyre-S1I S/L, by Tremco Inc.; Beachwood, Ohio.
8. Nelson CLK Non-Sag Sealant, by Nelson Firestop Products; Tulsa,
Oklahoma.
9. Nelson CLK Self-Leveling Sealant, by Nelson Firestop Products, Tulsa,
Oklahoma.
E. Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric
sealant of grade indicated below:
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other
horizontal surfaces and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and
other surfaces requiring a nonslumping / gunnable sealant, unless indicated
firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions.
2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: pourable (self-leveling) grade for openings
in floors and other horizontal surfaces.
3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag grade for openings in vertical and
other surfaces.
Section 07270 —Firestopping: Page 07270 - 4
F. Firestopping Putty: Where an outlet box is installed in a rated assembly (1 and 2
hour)with an outlet box on the opposite side within 24 inches, both boxes shall be
protected with firestopping putty per the manufacturer's instructions. Only the
following firestopping putty pad materials are acceptable:
1. MPP4S by 3M; St. Paul, Minnesota.
2. FSP by Nelson Firestop Products; Tulsa, Oklahoma.
3. SpecSeal by Specified Technologies: Somerville, New Jersey.
4. CP617 Firestop Pad, by Hilt! Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Tulsa, Oklahoma.
G. Mineral Fiber Safing Insulation: Provide manufacturer's standard felted semi-rigid
board of nonabestos mineral fibers plus binders, rated noncombustible (ASTM E
186), listed and labeled by UL, and listed in UL Designs similar to applications
indicated.
1. Acceptable Products/Manufactures: Thermafiber, LLC (United States
Gypsum) "Thermafiber Safing Insulation".
2. Thermal: K-value at 75 F of 0.25.
3. Thickness: 4" unless indicated otherwise, and not less than the thickness
required to obtain required fire-rating.
4. Fire Safing Density: Nominal 4 lb.cu.ft.
H. Mineral Wool: Loose Mineral wood, rated noncombustible (ASTM E 136), free of
asbestos fiber and glass fiber, suitable for stuffing into metal deck flute openings
above steel structural members, to an in-place density of 6 to 12 lbs. Per cu. Ft.
I. Accessories: For each application provide manufacturer's standard board-
anchorage system complying with related UL Design, and as indicated.
PART THREE: EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which work is to be performed, and
correct all unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Architect.
B. Review required firestopping with governing authority (building official). Before
proceeding with installation, obtain approval of thicknesses and installation
methods, including extension of typical details for coverage of non-typical
locations.
Section 07270 —Firestopping* Page 07270 - 5
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of
installation in each case. Consult with manufacturer's technical
representative for conditions not covered by printed instructions.
2. Provide firestopping material and number of layers as required to provide
indicated ratings (hours of fire endurance protection). Where not otherwise
indicated, comply with UL Designs as required by governing regulations. In
multi-layer work, offset joints by 6".
3. Anchor firestopping to substrate with manufacturer's re'commended
anchorage system and in compliance with,UL Designs. Space anchors and
anchor supports (if any) as indicated by applicable.
a. Selection of Anchorage system in Contractor's option
where not otherwise indicated; comply with applicable
UL Designs.
4. Install firestopping without gaps and voids. Do not use damaged materials.
Remove and replace misfitted work.
5. Install fire resistance sealant to seal around penetrations through fire rated
assemblies.
3.03 COORDINATION AND PROTECTION
A. Coordinate installation of firestopping with other work to minimize cutting into or
removal of'installed firestopping by other trades. As trades successively compete
installations which have been damaged or removed. Maintain complete coverage
of full thickness in locations to be protected,
B. Protection: Installer of firestopping shall advise Contractor of protection
requirements for work, which will ensure that his work will be without damage or
deterioration at time of substantial completion of project. Provide protection from
harmful exposures. Repair or replace work which has been damaged.
END OF SECTION
Section 07510 - Shingles Roofing: Page I
DIVISION 7: THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07510: SHINGLES ROOFING
PART ONE: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to
complete shingles roofing work as shown on drawings and specified herein.
1.02 RELATED SECTION:
A. Section 06100 - Carpentry.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this section.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Within 30 calender days after award of Contract submit:
B. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this
Section.
C. Manufacturers' specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with
the specified requirements.
D. Samples of each item, color, and pattern available in the specified products from the
proposed manufacturer.
E. Manufacturers' recommended method of installation.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. Delivery and Storage: Deliver materials to the job site and store in their original
unopened containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use. Store in strict
accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations.
B. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during,
and after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
Section'0751 0 - Shingles Roofing: Page 2
C. Replacement: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect and no additional cost to the Owner.
PART TWO: MATERIALS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. Roofing Shingles: Class A Fiber-glass shingles. Owens Corning, Supreme AR, color -
Chateau Green. 25 year warranty.
B. Sheet material: Eaves protection ice and snow shield. Self adhering rubberized
membrane.
C. Underlayment: 30 lb. asphalt saturated felt.
D. Flashing: Coper 16 oz. per square foot, natural finish.
E. Roofing Accessories: All accessories such as metal drip edge, rake, ridge vents (Alcoa..
Vent-a-Ridge), metal valley and pipe flashings, and Alcoa metal fascia, type C, smootf"
and SVG6V vented soffits, 0.019" thick. Color as selected by the Architect.
PART THREE: EXECUTION:
3.01 INSPECTION:
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which roof work 'is to' be placed. Correct
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Roof deck shall be smooth, dry and free of surface imperfections.
3.02 PREPARATION:
A. Prior to start of laying roofing inspect plywood deck. Start of laying roofing will indicate
acceptance of roof deck conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION:
A. Install eave protection, roofing felt, roof shingles, ridge & soffit vents, and all other
accessories in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Extend eavi,
protection membrane minimum 24 inches up slope beyond interior face of exterior wall.
B. Keep all areas water tight'at all times.
(END OF SECTION)
Section 07520 - Single Ply Roofing: Page 07520 - 1
DIVISION 7: THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
07520 - SINGLE PLY ROOFING
PART ONE: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. All equipment, labor, materials required for the installation of the roof insulation and
fully-adhered membrane roof system. System shall include but not be limited to:
1. Substrate preparation.
2. Insulation.
3. Roof membrane.
4. Membrane flashings.
5. Accessories required for a complete and weather tight installation.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06100 — Rough Carpentry: Installation of roof deck, treated wood blocking and
nailers required for the complete roof system installation. Comply with roof membrane
manufacturer's requirements for type of wood treatment compound
B. Section 07600 — Flashing and Sheet Metal: Coordination of installation of related
metal flashings.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions,
and recommendations for each type of roofing product required. Include data
substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings showing roof configuration and sheet
layout, installation details and special conditions. Submit layout drawings, installation
diagrams and installation instructions and details.
C. Samples:
1. Roof membrane: Submit 12-inch-square samples of finished roofing sheets,
including 7-shaped" side/end lap seams, as applicable.
2. Insulation: Submit 12-inch-square samples.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: This roofing system must be installed by an authorized
applicator.
Section 07520 - Single Ply Roofing: Page 07520 -2
1. Installer certification: Obtain written certification from manufacturer of
primary materials certifying that installer is approved by manufacturer
for installation of specified roof system. Provide copy of certification to
the Architect prior to award of roofing work.
B. Installer Field Supervision: Installer must maintain full-time supervisor/foreman on
project site during times in which roofing work is in progress. Supervisor must have a
minimum of 5 years' experience in roofing work similar in nature and scope to the
specified roofing.
C. Substrate Observation: Once the roof deck has been installed and the deck is ready to
receive the roof insulation (the roof deck exposed), the Architect must be notified in
order for him to visually observe the condition of the substrate prior to installation of
any roof system components. Items/materials installed without such Architect's
observation must be removed.
D. U.L. Listing: Provide roof system and component materials which have been tested for
application and slopes indicated and which are listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
(UL) for Class A external fire exposure.
1. Provide roof covering materials bearing UL Classification marking on
bundle, package, or container indicating that materials have been
produced under UL's Classification and Follow-up Service.
E. Wind Loading (Uplift): Provide roof system conforming with Factory Mutual
Engineering Corporation Roof Assembly Classification, 1-90 Construction.
F. Upon completion of the installation, an inspection shall be conducted by a technical
representative of the roofing manufacturer to ascertain that the roofing system has
been installed according to the manufacturer's most current published specifications
and details and for warranty issuance.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Conditions Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions will permit work.to be performed in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements. *
B. Exposed roof decks shall be protected from rain, ice, frost, contaminants, etc., to allow
the roof insulation and roof membrane to be installed over a solid, dry, uncontaminated
substrate.
1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to project site in original, tightly sealed containers or unopened
packages, with manufacturer's labels intact,
B. Store materials in weather-protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.
1. Protect foam plastic insulation from direct sunlight exposure.
Section 07520 - Single Ply Roofing: Page 07520- 3
1.07 GUARANTEE
A. The General Contractor, in conjunction with the authorized Roofing Contractor and the
manufacturer of materials used, shall provide written warranty, agreeing to
replace/repair defective materials and workmanship as required to maintain completed
roofing system in watertight condition.
B. Warranty shall cover, at no cost to the Owner, all labor and materials required to repair
or replace roofing, flashing, sheet metal, copings, and metal work against leaks or
faulty workmanship. All costs for any of the above shall be absorbed by the General
Contractor primarily, and his Roofing Contractor and materials manufacturer
secondarily.
C. Warranty period is 15 years after date of Substantial Completion for labor and material
with an additional five-year warranty (total of 20 years) on membrane material.
D. System shall be warranted for all requirements specified, including for wind uplift as
required under factory mutual classifications specified,
1.08 INSTALLER'S WARRANTY SIGNS
A. Furnish and install a roof warranty sign, 10" x 12" (minimum) size, made of .040"
aluminum painted gloss white with black lettering.
B. Sign Shall Read: DO NOT MAKE REPAIRS, PENETRATIONS OR ALTERATIONS TO
THIS ROOF without the written approval from the Owner or authorized representative
of the owner. The roof is maintained until (insert month and ten years after date of final
acceptance) by (insert Contractor's name, address and telephone number).
C. Permanently post sign where directed by the Owner's representative, prior to
submission of, and as a condition for, final invoice and subsequent payment.
PART TWO: MATERIALS
2.01 SINGLE PLY ROOFING MEMBRANE
A, Compatibility: Provide products which are recommended by manufacturers to be fully
compatible with indicated substrates, or provide separation materials as required to
eliminate contact between incompatible materials.
B. Fully Adhered System, EPDM Membrane
1 Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work shall be
one of the following:
a. Genflex
b. Firestone
C. Carlisle
Section 07520 - Single Ply Roofing: Page 07520 -4
C. Membrane: EPDM Membrane shall be supplied in .060 mil, black, or standard sizes up
to 40 feet in width and 125 feet in length, or the longest sheet possible, as required by
each installation. The roof membrane shall consist of the following:
1 Flashing: Shall be minimum .060" thickness, EPDM elastomer with factory
applied adhesive backing, or field applied adhesive applied, as recommended
by the manufacturer.
2. Joint Tape: Same material as membrane with adhesive or clean surface for
solvent joint adhesion, as recommended by the membrane manufacturer.
3. Sealant: As recommended by the membrane manufacturer.
4. Bonding Adhesive: Shall be compatible with substrate materials to which the
membrane is to be adhered, as recommended by manufacturer.
5. Lap and Water Stop Sealant: Shall be gun or trowel consistency for use in
sealing flashing edges, as recommended by manufacturer.
6. Pourable Sealer: Compatible with materials with which it is used, as
recommended by manufacturer.
7. Night Sea]: Compatible with materials with which it is used,' as recommended by
manufacturer, to seal work in progress when inclement weather occurs or is
expected.
8. Splice Wash: Material recommended by manufacturer.
9. Other Materials: Furnish other materials not shown or specified required for
complete and proper installation of roof system, as recommended by the roofing
manufacturer. I
10. Sheet Seaming System: Manufacturer's standard materials for sealing lapped
joints, including edge sealer to cover exposed spliced edges as recommended
by manufacturer of roof system.'
11. Tapered Edge Strips and Flashing Accessories: Types recommended by
manufacturer of roof system material, provided at locations indicated and at
locations recommended by manufacturer., including adhesive tapes, flashing
cements, and sealants.
12. Membrane Adhesive: As recommended by membrane manufacturer for
particular substrate and project conditions, formulated to withstand min, 60 psf
uplift force.
13. Molded Pipe Seals: Factory molded pipe seals with stainless steel clamps. Site
as required for all roof pipe penetrations. Color shall be black.
2.02 ROOF MEMBRANE PROPERTIES AND PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
PHYSICAL PROPERTY SPECIFICATION VALUE TEST METHOD
Color Black
Tensile Strength 1305 psi min. ASTM D 412
Elongation 300 % min. ASTM D 412
Tear Resistance 180 lb/in min. ASTM D 624 (Die C)
Brittleness
Temperature Pass @ -40 deg. F. ASTM D 746
Section 07520 - Single Ply Roofing: Page 07520 - 5
Shore A Hardness
(3 second reading) 65 +/- 10 ASTM D 2240
Ozone Resistance No cracks, 7x ASTM D 1149
110mPa/166h
40 deg.C/50%extension
Heat Aging ASTM D 573 166h @ 125deg. C
Tensile Strength 1710 psi min. Elongation 225% min.
Water Absorption +2% max. ASTM D 471
7 days @70deg.
2.03 ROOF INSULATION
I
A. Energy Code requires an average of R-30. Contractor's option : Provide constant ISO
and tapered Oerlite board for drainage OR use flat and tapered ISO with minimum 2" at
drains. Acceptable manufacturers of the rigid polyisocyanurate roof insulation are:
1. "AC Foam-11", by The Atlas Roofing Corporation
2. "Hy-Therm Tapered", by Celotex
3. "Pyrox", by Apache Products Company
4. Approved substitution by EPDM Manufacturer.
B. Taper System, Minor Slopes and Cants: Perlite insulation board (25 psi compressive
strength), shop fabricated or field tapered to provide proper drainage/taper indicated.
Comply with requirements of ASTM C 1289. Provide minimum 1" thickness at roof
drains and other penetrations.
C. Roof Insulation Fastener Plate: Shall be Factory Mutual approved, minimum 3" square
galvalume plate and shall be used as part of the plate/fastener assembly with the
fastener plate to mechanically attach the insulation and membrane to the roof deck.
2.04 ROOF PAVERS WALKWAYS:
A. Compatible roof pads installed over extra layer of roofing membrane.
PART THREE: EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE
A. General: Comply with manufacturers' instructions for preparation of substrate to
receive the roof membrane system.
B. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to the roof membrane
system work. Remove sharp projections. Do not apply sheet roofing to damp, frozen,
dirty, dusty, or deck surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer. Roof surface shall be free
of ponded water, ice, or snow.
C. Install flashings, and accessory items as shown, and as recommended by manufacturer
even though not shown.
D. Prime substrate where recommended by manufacturer of materials being installed.
Section 07520 - Single Ply Roofing: Page 07520 -6
E. Prevent compounds from entering and clogging drains and conductors, and from
spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other work.
3.02 INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a proper substrate to receive the
roofing system. Installation shall not proceed until substrate is inspected and approved
by the Owner's representative.
B. Substrate shall have positive drainage and shall be verified by Contractor prior to
installation of new materials.
C. Surface joints shall be less then.1/4" wide. All joints wider than Y4" must be repaired with
proper materials.
D. Verify that drains, sleeves, and curbs which pass through surfaces to receive roofing
are rigidly installed.
E. Surfaces to receive new materials shall be as required by manufacturer to ensure a
proper bond.
F. Verify that surfaces are free of cracks, depressions, waves, or projections which may
be detrimental to successfully installation. Remove foreign materials.
G. Starting work of this Section means acceptance of substrate and site conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION —GENERAL
A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the roofing materials
manufacturer, except to the extent more stringent require'ments are indicated.
B. Confinement of Materials: Do not allow fluid and plastic materials to spill or migrate
beyond surfaces of intended application, or to flow into drains, conductors, or ceilings
below.
C. Performance: It is required that roofing work be watertight for normal weather
exposures, and not deteriorate in excess of manufacturer's published limitations.
D. Nailers must-be pressure-treated wood with salt preservatives. Creosote and asphaltic
preservatives are not acceptable.
1. Attachment of the wood nailers must be accomplished by using approved
fasteners providing no less than 125 lbs. of pullout resistance and spaced no
greater than 24" o.c. and equal in thickness to the added insulation and no less
than 3 W wide or as required by the roof system manufacturer.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF ROOF INSULATION
A. The insulation shall be installed mechanically-fastened to deck according to the roofinl-,
manufacturer's recommendations. Mechanical fasteners shall penetrate into the
decking as required by Factory Mutual and manufacturer of roofing materials.
Section 07520 - Single Ply Roofing: Page 07520 -7
B. Stagger joints in boards, forming a complete thermal envelope. Butt units tightly
together and against wood blocking and nailers; trip to fit penetrations and
interruptions, so that gaps between units and between insulation and adjacent
construction do not exceed % inch. Fasteners shall be spaced a maximum of 7-0" o.c.
and there shall be one fastener installed at each and every corner of each board, and
in addition, the pattern of fasteners shall conform to specified requirements for wind
uplift.
C. Do not install more insulation each day than can be covered with membrane before
stopping work at end of day or before onset of inclement weather. -
D. Trim insulation or provide pre-shaped units at drains to provide positive slope for 24
inches around drain.
E. Shape insulation or provide preformed units to provide crickets, saddles, and tapered
areas as indicated or as required to provide drainage. Taper insulation around all roof
drains and projections to ensure proper drainage.
F. Tapered Roof Insulation, Tapers and Crickets: Install directly over the thermal
insulation, complying with shop drawings for location and directions of taper. Ends and
sides shall be tightly butted, with butted joints flush and even.
G. All insulation must be independently attached to the prepared substrate using approved
fasteners and insulation plates. Fasten all insulation per manufacturers detailed shop
drawings. All fasteners must pass the requirements established by Factory Mutual
4470 for corrosion resistance.
3.05 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with membrane manufacturer's instructions for handling, laying, seaming, and
securing membrane.
B. Edges of roofing shall be sealed at the end of each day's work and if inclement weather
is expected during the work period.
C. Any wrinkles found greater than 1' high and wrinkles that impede the flow of water,
must be cut laid flat and patched over using the specified roof membrane and standard
welding /seaming procedures.
D. Night Seal: At the completion of each day's work, temporarily seal any loose edge of
membrane with the specified night seal. Care must be used to guarantee that no water
flows beneath any completed sections of roof. Night Seal must be cut out and
discarded prior to resumption of work.
E. Roof Drains
1. Prepare substrate around each roof drain to prevent any distortion or membrane
bridging and to provide a smooth transition from the roof surface to the drain
clamping ring.
2. The surfaces between the clamping ring and the drain must be clean and
smooth.
3. All bolts and/or clamps must be in place to provide constant even compression.
4. Do not run seam through roof drain or sumps.
Section 07520 - Single Ply Roofing: Page 07520 - 8
F. Roof Pads: Install walkway pads over additional layer of roofing membrane per
manufacturer's recommendations.
3.07 PROTECTING ROOFING
A. After completing roofing (including associated work), institute appropriate procedures
for surveillance and protection of roofing during remainder of construction period. At
the end of the construction period, or at a time when remaining construction will in no
way affect or endanger roofing, make a final inspection of roofing and prepare a written
report to Owner, describing nature and extent or deterioration or damage found.
B. Repair or replace (as required) deteriorated or defective work found at the time of final
inspection to a condition free of damage and deterioration at the time of substantial
completion and according to requirements of the specified warranty.
3.08 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Refinish or remove and replace insulation surfaces not acceptable to receive roofing or
where physical properties do not meet specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
Section 07600 - Flashing & Sheetmetal: Page 07600 - I
DIVISION 7: THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTON
07600 FLASHING & SHEETMETAL
PART ONE: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary
to complete the flashing and sheetmetal work as shown on the Drawings and
Specified herein.
B. Includes but is. not limited to the following:
1 Sheet metal work.
2. prefinished flashings.
3. Wall vents at building.
4. Prefinished gutters and downspouts.
5. Soffit vents.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06100— Rough Carpentry: Treated wood nailers and blocking for
attachment of flashing and sheet metal items.
B. Section 07240— Exterior Insulation and Finish System: Coordination of related
flashing installations and wall vent installations with application of the exterior
insulation and finish system.
C. Section 07530— Single Ply Membrane Roof System: Related flashings installed in
conjunction with the roof system.
D. Section 09250— Gypsum Wallboard: Coordinate thru-wall flashing installations
with the installation of the gypsum sheathing.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All flashing shall be installed as indicated on drawings. All flashings, including
flashings not particularly shown, but required for finish work shall be furnished and
installed in strict accordance with Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors
National Association recommendations. Where not otherwise shown, all exposed
(exposed to view) flashing shall be prefinished 24 gauge (minimum) galvanized
steel. Roof area flashing not exposed to view shall be minimum 24 gauge
galvanized steel.
B. Definition: The term "prefinished" shall be interpreted to mean Kynar 500 full
strength Fluoropolymer.
Section 07600 - Flashing & Sheetmetal: Page 07600 - 2
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit detailed shop drawings on items requiring fabrication and manufacturer's
technical data on manufactured products. Submittals shall indicate materials,
finish, installation techniques and required anchoring devices. Comply with
Section 01340. For gutters, show material thickness, profiles, anchorage technique
and gutter bracket size and spacings.
1.05 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee all flashings to remain weathertight for a period of two (2) years.
B. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturers standard 20-year written warranty for
finish applied to sheet metal items.
PART TWO: MATERIALS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Flashing Materials:
1. Flashings, scuppers, etc., exposed to view, etc., shall be MM Systems
Corporation-prefinished 24 gauge (or as required by the girth dimension in
accordance with SMACNA) galvanized steel, smooth surface and Kynar 500
full strength Fluoropolymer finish, color(s) as selected by Architect. Provide
flashing in 10' l lengths minimum. Provide cleats to prevent wind uplift and
peel-off.
2. Roof area flashing and other miscellaneous sheet metal flashing installed in
conjunction with the roof system (not exposed to view) shall be 24 gauge
paint-grip galvanized steel (unless otherwise indicated/specified) fully
cleated to resist wind uplift and peel-off.
a. 24 Gauge is a'minimum requirement. Provide gauges as
recommended by SMACNA for the girth of the installed metal item.
B. Vent Pipe Flashings and Fluid-Bearing Pipe Flashings at Single Ply Membrane
Roof System: Comply with requirements of Section 07530.
C. Wall Vents at Building — at Areas of Exterior Insulation and Finish System: Circular
design with exposed wall flange, insect-proof, weatherproof, prefinished rolled
formed,aluminum, size(s) as shown on the Drawings. Color shall be as selected by
the Architect'from manufacturer's standard selection.
D. Soffit Vent: Continuous design, similar to Vent—A- Strip Model 70, as
manufactured by Alcoa Building Products, Inc. of Sydney, Ohio, color as selected
by the Architect from manufacturer's standard selection.
Section 07800 - Skylights: Page 07800 - 1
DIVISION 7: THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
07800 SKYLIGHTS
PART ONE: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary
to complete the skylight work as shown on the Drawings and Specified herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit shop drawing with complete installation details.
PART TWO: MATERIALS
2.01 SKYLIGHT:
A. All skylights shall be velux fixed skylights Model FS installed at minimum 15 deg.
slope.
B. Glazing: 5/8" dual sealed insulating tempered low E.
C. Exterior surfaces: Exposed exterior wood surfaces to be covered with roo formed
maintenance free cladding of aluminum, Kynar 500 finish.
PART THREE: EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION:
A. Prior to starting installation, the skylight installer shall inspect the support and
adjoining construction to verify that it is properly prepared to receive the work.
Report in writing any deficiencies in the substrate. Work shall not proceed until all
deficiencies are corrected.
3.02 ERECTION:
A. The skylight shall be erected and glazed by an experienced installer familiar with
the manufacturer's systems and installation procedures and installed in strict
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
(END OF SECTION)
Section 07900 - Caulking & Sealants: Page 07900 - 1
DIVISION 7: THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
07900 - CAULKING AND SEALANTS
PART ONE: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary
to complete the caulking work as shown on the Drawings and Specified herein.
B. Provide the specified sealant at all locations calling for sealant or caulk on the
drawings or in these specifications, or as required by field conditions.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Site Concrete: Sealant installed in expansion joints in walks and ramps.
B. Cabinetry and Millwork: Caulking installed between cabinet/countertop splash and
wall.
C. Exterior Insulation and Finish System: Sealant installed in joints in building fagade.
D. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Sealant installed at perimeter of door frames.
E. Aluminum Entrance Doors and Storefront Framing: Sealant installed at perimeter
of storefront framing system.
F. Aluminum Windows: Sealant installed at perimeter of window framing.
G. Tile: Sealant installed in floor control and expansion joints.
H. Man-Made Marble: Sealant installed in control and expansion joints and where
man-made marble butts another material.
I. Painting: Installation of sealant coordinated with painting,
J. Building Louvers: Sealant installed at perimeter of louver framing.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Manufacturers shall be as specified herein. Other
manufacturers are acceptable subject to compliance with project requirements.
Refer to Section 01600.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit copies of complete technical data and physical samples to the Architect.
B. Submit a detailed list of all locations where materials will be used, type of caulking
or sealants which will be used at each location, and names of all manufacturers of
compounds, primers, and fillers which will be used.
C. Submit certification that the sealant to be installed is compatible with and is
approved for installation with the exterior insulation and finish system to be
installed.
Section 07900 - Caulking & Sealants: Page 07900 -2
PART TWO: MATERIALS
1
2.01 MATERIALS
I.-RIALS
A. Sealants for all exterior locations, except horizontal traffic joints, and at interior
I ation oc s where color coordination is required, shall be:
1 Exterior Insulation and Finish System to Exterior Insulation and Finish
System: Dow-Corning 790.
2. Between Other materials and at perimeter of Door and Window Framing:
Dow-Corning 795.
3. Provide primer and bond breaker as recommended by the sealant
manufacturer for the substrates involved.
4. Colors shall be as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's
siandard'coiors.
B. Sealant for horizontal installation over the expansion joints in hard tile and concrete
surfaces, interior and exterior, shall be self-leveling, Dow-Corning S-L traffic
sealant.1 Colors as selected by the Architect.
C. Caulking at the interior of the building for joints where the caulking will be painted
shall belTremco Acrylic Latex#384, white color.
D. Sealant for installation between counter tops and splashes, between walks and
splashes shall be Dow-Corning 786,Mildew Resistant clear silicone sealant. Refer
to Section 09640.
E. Back-up I materials for sealants and caulking shall be closed cell Dow Ethofoam as
manufa ured by Dow-Chemical Company, Inc. Back-up materials shall have a
diameter of approximately 25% to 50% greater than the width of the joint.-
F. Solvents, primers and cleaning agents as recommended by the caulking and
sealant manufacturers.
PART THREE: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Caulking and sealants application shall include, but is not limited to the following:
1. Joints in building fagade.
2. Primeter of door frames.
3. Perimeter of aluminum framing systems and aluminum windows.
4. Control ontrol joints.
5. Joints in walks, slabs, floor the and all other traffic bearing surfaces.
6. C unter tops and splashes at wall.
7. B Btween dissimilar materials.
Section 07900 - Caulking & Sealants: Page 07900 - 3
8. Under thresholds
9. At areas to prevent the entrance of moisture.
10. Other areas as detailed on the drawings.
B. Inspect the work of other trades prior to installation of caulking and sealants.
Install no caulking nor sealant in joints which are not in proper condition to receive
sealant materials until defects are corrected.
C. Apply sealants and caulking when temperatures are as a recommended by the
manufacturers. Storage of all material shall be at room.temperature with material
being used on a first in, first out basis.
D. Prior to the installation of any caulking or sealants, completed clean all surfaces.
All surfaces must be dry. Clean first with brush and dry cloth and then clean with
an air brush using dry, oil-free air. Immediately after cleaning,prime, as required,
the surfaces to be treated with the appropriate primer using a small clean paint
brush reaching all parts of the area to be primed. Allow primer the proper drying
time before applying the caulking or sealant.
E. All caulking and sealants applied to the building will be installed with guns having
the proper size nozzles. Use even pressure, sufficient to fill all voids and joints
solid.
F. A bed of sealant compound shall be spread over the entire seat of thresholds and
41 the thresholds set on the compound.
G. Joints in exterior fagade shall be tooled slightly concave.
H. Joints to be painted shall be even and smooth. Caulking that is to be painted shall
be installed before the last coat of paint is applied.
1. Sealant to be installed over horizontal expansion joints shall be installed after area
is cleaned and primed as outlined above. Pour sealant from container, fill joint to
slightly below the top of the paving. Minimum depth of the joint shall be "/2 !nch.
J. Install backer rods in joints more than 1/2inch deep, of size and type specified. Rod
shall be set for approximately 1/21nch depth of compound.
K. Every caulked and sealed joint shall be watertight.
3.02 CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion of the work, all excess materials shall be removed leaving joints,
neat, clean and straight. Cured material shall be removed by cutting with a sharp
edged tool. Thin films may be removed by abrading, but without damaging the
finish of any other materials.
END OF SECTION
Section 08100 - Metal doors & Frames: Page 08100- 1
DIVISION 8: DOORS & WINDOWS
08100 METAL DOORS & FRAMES
PART ONE: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. SCOPE OF WORK The scope of work includes all labor, materials, equipment and
services necessary to complete the installation of hollow metal doors and frames.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Structural Concrete and Concrete Unit Masonry: Coordination of the hollow metal
installations with the erection of the concrete and concrete unit masonry.
B. Cold Formed Metal Framing: Metal framing for support of the hollow metal work.
C. Rough Carpentry: Treated wood blocking as required for the rigid erection of the
hollow metal work.
D. Finish Carpentry: Coordination of the erection of the hollow metal work with the
installation of finish carpentry items.
E. Sealants and Caulking: Sealant installed at perimeter of door frames.
F. Finish Hardware: Preparation of hollow metal work to receive finish hardware
items.
G. Glass and Glazing: Glass and glazing installed in hollow metal work.
H. Painting: Finish painting of hollow metal work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Hardware locations: The locations of hardware on doors and frames shall be in
accordance with the requirements of The National Association of Architectural
metal Manufacturers (NAAMM), The Steel Door Institute (SDI) and the Americans
with Disabilities Act (ADA).
B. Manufacturer's Standards: Comply with Steel Door Institute SDI 100,
"Recommended Specifications, Standard Steel Doors and Frames".
C. Regulatory Approvals
1. Underwriter Laboratories (U.L.):
a. All labeled fire doors and frames shall be of a type which has been
investigated and tested in accordance with U.L.
b. Underwriters Laboratories labeled doors and frames shall provide
the degree of fire protection heat transmission and panic loading
capability indicated by the opening class.
C. A physical label shall be affixed to all Underwriters' Laboratories
classified fire doors, listed fire door frames and frames as evidence
of compliance with procedures of the labeling agencies,
Section 08100 - Metal doors & Frames: Page 08100 -2
d. Temperature rise of the U.L. labeled stairwell doors shall be 450
degrees F in 30 minutes maximum.
2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. All labeled doors and frames shall be installed in accordance with
"Standard Fire Doors and Windows", NFPA No. 80.
b. Door assemblies shall have been tested in accordance with NFPA
252, "Fire Tests of Door Assemblies".
I
D. Acceptable manufacturers: The following manufacturers are acceptable for use on
this project subject to compliance with project requirements:
1. Ceco Door Division of Oakbrook Terrace, Illinois.
2. Curries company of Mason City, Iowa.
3. F, nestra Corporation of Erie, Pennsylvania.
1.04 SUBMI TALS
A. Submit copies of shop drawings and door and frame schedules to the Architect.
1. The Shop Drawings shall fully describe and locate all items being furnished
and shall include large scale-details of principal construction features.
2. Door and frame schedule shall make reference to door numbers and room
numbers shown and scheduled on the drawings.
3. Fabrication shall not commence until the submittals have been approved in
writing by the Architect.
�
1.05 PRODUCT RY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Doors shall be received at the job site in the manufacturers original, unopened
cartons.I All scratches and disfigurements caused in shipping and handling shall be
properly cleaned and touched up with a rust-inhibitive primer.
B. Doors shall have all wrappings removed. Doors shall be stored in a dry location, in
' a vertical position, spaced by block.ing to permit air circulation between them.
PART TWO: MATERIALS
2.01 HOLLO METAL DOORS
A. General — Design and Construction: Doors shall be flush construction.
1. A I I ,doors shall have interior of the door completely filled with a rigid
in I sulating foam. Foam shall be self-extinguishing.
Section 08100 -Metal doors & Frames: Page 08100- 3
2. U.L. fire-rated doors, rating as scheduled on the drawings, shall have a
mineral fiber board core bonded to both face sheets. Such doors shall bear
the U.L. label.
3. Doors shall have flush, seamless face sheets. Lock rail shall be one piece
full height 14 gauge pressed channel. Hinge rail shall be one-piece full
height 14 gauge pressed channel, formed and tapped for hinges. Top and
bottom of door shall have 16 gauge steel closure channels. Doors shall
have beveled (1/8" in 2") lock edge. Exterior doors (doors swinging out to
the exterior, exposed to weather) shall be closed flush by 16 gauge steel
channels extending the full width of the door and spot welded to both faces.
All doors shall be factory prepared to receive view lites, louvers, finish
hardware, etc. Hinge reinforcements shall be 7 gauge steel, drilled and
tapped by the manufacturer(the specified one-piece 14 gauge channel will
be acceptable in lieu of additional reinforcing). Reinforcing plates for
surface applied hardware shall be as follows. Refer to Section 08710 for
Finish Hardware Requirements.
a. For lock face, flush bolts, concealed holders, concealed or surface-
mounted closers, 12 gauge.
b. For all other surface mounted hardware, 14 gauge.
fr B. Exterior Hollow Metal Doors: Fabricate from 18 gauge galvanized steel sheets,
zinc coated carbon steel of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 526, with
ASTM A 525 A60 galvanized zinc coating, mill phosphatized for paint adhesion.
Door shall be flush construction.
C. Interior Hollow Metal Doors: Fabricate from commercial quality, level, cold rolled
steel confirming to ASTM Designation A 366 and free of scale, pitting or other
surface defects. Face sheets for doors shall be not less than 20 gauge.
D. Pairs of Doors: Pairs of labeled "fire-rated" doors shall have Z-astragal.
E. Glass Moldings and Stops:
1. Where scheduled, doors shall be provided with hollow metal moldings to
secure the specified glazing (refer to Section 08800 for glazing).
2. Fixed moldings shall be welded to the door on the security side. Loose
stops with butt corners shall be provided. Stops shall be either snap-on or
screwed into place with cadmium or zinc coated countersunk screws.
F. Louvers:
1. Non fire-rated doors scheduled to be provided with louvers shall have
sightproof type louvers inserted into the door. Louvers shall be stationary
and shall meet the free air requirements as called for on the drawings.
Louvers shall be non-removable from the outside of exterior doors and the
secure side of interior doors. Insect screens shall be provided on exterior
door louvers and shall be removable type, 18 by 16 mesh aluminum or
bronze cloth. Louvers in exterior doors shall be manufactured from material
as specified for exterior hollow metal door and frames.
2. Fire-rated doors scheduled to be provided with louvers shall be provided
with tightly fitted, spring-loaded, automatic closing louvers with operable
blades, equipped with fusible links, arranged so that metal overlaps metal at
every joint.
Section 08100 - Metal doors & Frames: Page 08100 -4
2.02 HULLO METAL FRAMES
A. Door Frames:
I
1 Exterior frames shall have mitered and welded corners.* Frames shall be
drilled to receive three silencers at single door openings. Welds shall be
ground smooth. Door frames shall be fabricated from galvanized steel
I
sheets, zinc coated carbon steel of commercial quality, complying with
OTMA 526, with ASTM A 525, A60 galvanized coating, mill phosphatized
for paint adhesion. Frames shall be combination buck frame type; free of
scale, pitting and other surface defects. Frames shall be 14 gauge. A
removable spreader bar welded to the bottom of all frames (for rigidity during
transit ansit and handling) shall be provided.
2. Interior frames shall be fabricated of cold rolled furniture steel, combination
b6ck-frame type; free of scale, pitting and other surface defects, 16 gauge.
Widths, depths, and shape of frames shall be shown on drawings. Frames
shall have mitered and welded corners and shall be drilled to receive three
silencers.lenpers. Welds shall be ground smooth. A removable spreader bar
wielded to the bottom of all frames (for rigidity during transit and handling)
shall be provided. Frames used with labeled doors shall bear the U.L. labels
required, as shown on Drawings and/or door schedule.
3. Reinforcement: Proper reinforcement shall be provided for all hardware
wiere required. Reinforcements, drilling and tapping for mortised applied
hardware shall be done at the factory. Surface applied hardware
reinforcements inforcements shall be installed at the factory, drilling,and tapping shall be
I
done in the field by others. Frame reinforcements for finish hardware
o ultlined on the hardware schedule, shall be as follows:
Ia. Hinge: 10 gauge, minimum.
16. Lock: 14 gauge, minimum.
Closer: 12 gauge, minimum.
'd. Flush Bolts: 14 gauge, minimum,
Hold-Open Arm: 12 gauge, minimum.
f. Panic Devices: 14 gauge, minimum.
The top hinge reinforcements of all frames having closers with hold
open arms shall be reinforced with 10 gauge back-up plate welded
to both sides of the frame and to the hinge reinforcement.
B. Frame anchors at jambs shall be designed to match wall system they are joining.
Anchors I�will be of not less than 18 gauge steel, spaced at 24" centers, with a
minimum of three (3) anchors per jamb. Provide 18 gauge floor anchors at bottom
of all do r jambs.
Section 08100 - Metal doors & Frames: Page 08100 -5
PART THREE: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Prior to installation, all frames must be checked and corrected for rack, twist, and
out-of-square.
B. Frames-shall be installed plumb, rigid and in true alignment, with all required
anchors securely fastened to wall construction so that frames will retain their
position and clearance during final partition work. Door silencers shall not be
installed until after the frames have received their final coat of paint.-
C. All doors shall be set true and plumb, with sufficient clearance for free operation,
not to exceed 1/8 inch at jambs and heads and % inch above finish flooring
material at bottom. Lock edges of doors shall be so designed to provide proper
operating clearance. Finish hardware will be attached prior to any glazing work.
3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Prime Coat Touch-Up:
I Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of the
prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air drying primer.
2. Galvanized Door and Frames: Clean abraded areas and apply cold
galvanizing compound to comply with ASTM A 780, except that the paint
shall be brushed on or spray applied in multiple coats until a dry film
thickness of 8 mils minimum has been achieved,
END OF SECTION
Section 08200 -Aluminum Entrance Doors And Storefronts: Page 08200 - I
DIVISION 8: DOORS &WINDOWS
08200 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOORS AND STOREFRONTS
PART ONE: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary
to complete the Aluminum and glass entrance doors and sidelights, and storefronts
work as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Wood stud framing: Wood framing for support of the aluminum framing systems.
B. Metal Fabrications- Miscellaneous metal support items.
C. Rough Carpentry: Treated wood blocking required for the rigid installations of the
aluminum framing systems.
D. Sealant and Caulking: Sealing of perimeter of framing systems.
E. Finish Hardware: Cylinders and electronic access for aluminum entrance doors.
F. Glass and Glazing: Glass installed in aluminum doors and framing systems.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Approvals: The glazed systems for use on this project shall be
approved by the governing building code and amendments thereto, for the type of
installation indicated and specified.
B. Design Criteria:
1. The structural members shall be designed to support all dead loads plus
wind loading as required by the local building code and Amendments
thereto, positive and negative, with wind load acting normal to the plane of
the wall, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330.
2. All structural fasteners shall be of adequate size to provide a 4.1 safety
factor, based on ultimate loading.
3. All assemblies shall provide for thermal movement, based on 100 degrees F
temperature shift, without unduly stressing glazing panels, fasteners or
joinery.
Section 08200 -Aluminum Entrance Doors And Storefronts: Page 08200 -2
C. Performance Requirements: The system shall have been tested in accordance
with the following:
1 Water Infiltration: ASTM E 331.
2. - Air Leakage: ASTM E 283.
3. Normal-to-Wall Deflections: Not exceeding 1/240 of span.
4. 'Air Leakage of Aluminum Entrance Doors:
a. Air infiltration per lineal foot of perimeter crack of not more than 0.5
CFM for single doors per ASTM E 283 at pressure differential of
1.567 psf.
b. Air infiltration per lineal foot of perimeter crack of not more than 1.0
CFM for pairs of doors per ASTM E 283 at pressure differential of
1.567 psf.,
1.04 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Take all necessary field measurements to verify or supplement dimensions shown
on the drawings.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. - Submit copies of technical data and shop drawings to the Architect in accordance
with Section 01340. Submittals shall indicate the type of metal, joinery, field
connections, anchorage, sealing methods, wind loading for each floor level,
performance criteria and all pertinent information. Submit aluminum samples with
finish applied as requested by the Architect.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all materials to be job site, complete and ready for erection, thoroughly
marked for proper usage and erection, and protected against damage.
B. Store all materials inside and protect from the weather; store all materials off the
ground and as required to prevent damage.
C. Reject all defective components prior to installation.
1.07 GUARANTEE
A. Aluminum Framing Warranty: Guarantee this work against defective materials,
workmanship and performance for a period of two (2) years. Components failing to
perform during this warranty period shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner.
Section 08200 Aluminum Entrance Doors And Storefronts: Page 08200 - 3
PART TWO: MATERIALS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Interior Aluminum windows: Exterior installations and interior installations shall be
Kawneer 451T or equivalent (thermally broken), 2" x 41/2"frame, self mullion,
designed to receive 1" glass thickness. All members and reinforcing shall be sized
to develop sufficient strength to limit deflection as specified based upon a live load
required by the governing building code(s) for the installation involved. Submit
manufacturer's certification in writing,
1. All sections shall be extruded from 6063-T5 aluminum alloy.
2. Finish: All aluminum sections shall receive high solid spray coating (Baked
enamel) and shall meet AAMA 2603-98 specifications. Color shall be White.
3. Provide for expansion and contraction of each storefront section as
recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Aluminum and Glass Entrance Doors and sidelights: Doors shall be of tubular
construction,Vistawall Series 375, Medium Stile; or equivalent with bottom rail
height as required by local and State handicapped ordinances and laws. Doors
shall be designed to receive 5/8' thick insulating glass. Doors and sidelights shall
have divided light muntins between glass panes. All door closers shall be
designed for handicapped use, ADA compliant.
1. Aluminum entrance/exit doors shall be furnished with offset pivots, Style V
push/pull, parallel arm overhead closer, Adams-Rite 8600 Series concealed
exit device; Adams-Rite Electric 8400 Series concealed exit device for use
with Adams-Rite 7108 Fail secure electric strike for single acting doors;
Adams-Rite 4603 rectifier; Adams-Rite 4605 transformer; and aluminum
threshold. Refer to Section 08710, Finish Hardware.
2. All doors shall be factory cut, punched and reinforced to receive Finish
Hardware. Job alteration and cutting of finished aluminum surfaces will not
be allowed.
3. Doors shall be weatherstripped on two sides and top. Provide surface
applied bottom rail weatherstripping.
4. Operating hardware and locksets installed in area of the Swimming Pool
shall be stainless steel.
5. Finish: All aluminum sections shall receive a high solid spray coating
(Baked enamel) and shall meet AAMA 2603-98 specifications. Color shall be
Whit4.
Section 08200 -Aluminum Entrance Doors And Storefronts: Page 08200 -4
C. ' Accessories:
1 Furnish all necessary fasteners, clips, fins, anchors and other items
necessary for a complete installation of the entire framing system.
2. All metal accessory items shall be aluminum or non-magnetic stainless steel.
Shims shall be nylon.
3. Metal used as break panels, closures, wrap-arounds, etc., shall be .040
aluminum sheet with fluoropon finish to match the framing system, shape as
required for a complete and weathertight installation.
D. Construct aluminum framing systems to produce results specified, and to assure a
neat appearance. Make permanent joints by welding, or by mechanical fastening.
Joints shall be of sufficient strength to maintain the structural value of member
connected. Welded joints shall be solid, have excess metal removed and dressed
smooth on exposed and contact surfaces. The dressing shall be done so that no
discoloration or roughness shall show after finishing. When welding flux is used, it
shall be completely removed immediately after the welding is completed. All
welding shall be performed in factory prior to application of finish. Joints formed
with mechanical fastenings shall be closely fitted, sealed with mastic and made
permanently watertight.
PART THREE: EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Inspect all installation conditions and correct any conditions which may adversely
affect this work. Commencement of work under this Section shall be considered
approval of surfaces.
3.02 ERECTION
A. Do not erect component parts which are observed to be defective in any way,
including warped, bowed, dented, abraded and broken members, and including
damaged glass. Remove and replace members which have been damaged during
installation, or thereafter, before the time of final acceptance.
B. Do not cut, trim, weld, or braze component parts during erection in any manner
which would damage the strength or finish, or result in a visual imperfection or a
failure in performance of the glazing system. Return component parts which
require alteration to the shop for prefabrication, if possible, or for replacement with
new parts.
C. Apply a heavy coat of zinc chromate or bituminous paint to surfaces of aluminum
members that are in direct contact with masonry, concrete, mortar or steel,
D. Comply with applicable requirements of other sections of these specifications for
the installation of all component parts, including glass, glazing materials, sealants,
gaskets, joint fillers, flashing, masonry and other elements of the wall system.
Section 08200 -Aluminum Entrance Doors And Storefronts: Page 08200 - 5
E. Erection of structural frames and aluminum and glass doors shall be in strict
accordance with material manufacturer's recommendations, approved shop
drawings and erection drawings. All work shall be erected true to line, plumb
straight, level, square, and in proper planes with other work. Anchorage shall be
adequate to resist*,safely all stresses to which normally subjected, and shall be
properly secured.
F. Completed installations shall be watertight, and shall be capable of resisting the
specified loading requirements.
3.03 CLEANING AND CLEANUP
A. Clean completed system, inside and out, promptly after erection and installation of
glass and sealants. Remove excess glazing and joint sealants, dirt and other
substances from aluminum surfaces.
B. Upon completion of the erection, remove from the job site all excess materials and
debris.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Completed installations shall be protected from damage until date of Substantial
Completion. Damaged doors, framing and components shall be repaired or
replaced at no cost to the Owner, as determined by the Architect. Damaged
aluminum finishes shall be repaired as recommended by the manufacturer of the
framing system. Replace components that cannot be repaired and/or refinished.
END OF SECTION
Section 08300 -Wood Doors: Page 08300 - I
DIVISION 8: DOORS &WINDOWS.
08300 -WOOD DOORS
PART ONE: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of Work shall include all labor, materials, equipment and services to
complete the installation of wood doors.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A:- Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Installation of wood doors in hollow metal frames.
B. Finish Hardware: Preparation of doors to receive finish hardware items.
C. Glass and Glazing: View Res installed in doors.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufactures: Qualified to affix each door with a label with the
manufacturers name and certification of compliance with the National Wood and
Window and Door Association (NWWDA). The following manufacturers are
acceptable for use on this project subject to compliance with project requirements:
1 Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. of South Bend, Indiana.
2. Weyerhauser, Inc. of Bridgeville, Pennsylvania.
3. Eggers industries of Two Rivers, Wisconsin.
B. Manufacturer's Standards —Doors Shall Comply With the Following Standards:
I. ANS I/NWWD 1.S 1, "Series for Flush Wood Doors", published by the
National Wood Window and Door Association (NWWDA).
2. AWI Quality Standards — Section 1300 of"Architectural Woodwork Quality
Standards", published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI).
a. Grade: Custom.
C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
1. Doors scheduled to be fire-rated shall meet the requirements of
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL), Fire Doors for fire classification
marking.
Section 08300 - Wood Doors: Page 08300 -2
2. Fire Rated Doors shall conform to the requirements of the National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA), "Standard Fire Doors and Windows", NFPA
No. 80 for their installation.
3. Temperature rise of the U.L. labeled doors shall be in accordance with the
applicable building code.
D. Testing Requirements—Adhesives: NWMAI.L.1
1. Waterproof bond test for Type I exterior doors.
2. Water resistant bond test for Type 11 interior doors.
3. Warp: 1.S.1.
4. Fire Test: Underwriter's Laboratories, Incorporated Standard LIL 10, Fire
Test of Door Assemblies.
E. Allowable tolerances for Fabrication of Doors:
1. Size: Plus or minus 1/16 inch overall dimensions.
2. Warp: % inch maximum.
3. Squareness: Length of diagonal measured on face of door from upper right
corner to lower left corner between length of diagonal measured on upper
left corner to lower right comer. Maximum difference of % inch.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following to the Architect in accordance with Section 01340:
1. Copies of Door schedule indicating opening mark number, sizes, door types
and grade, fire classification, swing, light and louver cut out sizes and
locations and undercuts. For Total Door System, show all hardware,
anchorages, wood-veneer species and cut and complete installation
requirements.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORATE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery:
I Deliver doors to site after building has reached average prevailing relative
humidity.of locality.
2. Deliver in manufacturer's original unopened protective material or container,
clearly marked with manufacturer's name, brand name, size, thickness and
identifying symbol on covering. 'Do not remove doors from wrapping until
ready to hang.
3. Seal all four edges of doors when delivered to project site.
Section 08300 -Wood Doors: Page 08300 -3
B. Storage:
1. Stack flat on 2 x 4 lumber, laid 12 inches from ends and across center.
2. Under bottom door and over top of stack provide plywood or corrugated
cardboard to protect door surface.
3. Store doors in area where there will be no great variations in heat, dryness,
and humidity.
C. Handling: Do not drag doors across on another.
1.06 GUARANTEE
A. Solid Core Doors, 5-Year Warranty: Doors shall be guaranteed against'veneer
delamination or splitting; stile and rail splitting or becoming unglued; and shall also
include the provisions of the "Standard Door Guarantee" of the National Wood
Window and Door Association (NWWDA), ANSI/NWWDA I.S.I.
PART TWO: MATERIALS
✓ 2.01 PREFINISHED SOLID CORE FLUSH DOORS
A. Prefinished, Flush, Solid Core Wood Doors: Lumber particleboard core type, AWI
Custom Grade, Type IVIPC7. Crossbands shall be 1/16"; stiles shall be 2-ply, 1-
1/2"; top and bottom rails shall be 1-1/8" thick. Door facings shall be Oak veneer.
I. Doors'shall be flush, thickness and sizes shown on drawings. Stile edge
bands shall be thoroughly kin-dried hardwood. Outer edge bands shall be
one piece, matching faces. Rail bands, cross bands and facings shall be
laminated to cores with water-resistant adhesive.
B. Prefinished, flush, labeled (fire-rated) solid core wood doors shall carry the
Underwriters laboratories label as scheduled on the Drawings. Sizes shall be
shown on drawings. Cores shall be constructed of incombustible mineral sections.
Top and bottom rails and edges shall be door manufacturer's, standard width and
depth, as approved by U.L. Surrounds shall be cut from fire retardant treated
lumber. Doors shall be reinforced with fire retardant, solid blocking to support
-finish hardware (closers, locksets, latchsets and butts). Door facings shall match
that of the non-fire-rated doors.
Section 08300 -Wood Doors: Page 08300 -4
2.02 RAISED PANEL DOORS
A. Raised panel doors shall have molded hardboard facing with wood grain finish.
2.03 FRENCH DOORS
A. Fench Doors shall be by Weyerhouser Door Division or equivalent. Doors shall
have divided'lights, true or applied.
2.04 FACTORY PREPARATIONS
A. All doors shall be pre-fitted and factory machined to receive finish hardware,
louvers, glazing, etc. Provide complete with moldings and glass stops required for
complete installation. Fire-rated doors shall be factory prefit and premachined in
accordance with applicable codes and ordinances. Doors shall be pre-fitted. All
doors shall have solid wood blocking and reinforcing for receipt of finish hardware
items. Prefinished doors may not be field machined; all fitting and machining must
be performed at the factory.
PART THREE: EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that door frames are of type required for door and are installed as required
for proper installation of doors.
B. Do not install doors in frames which would hinder the operation of the doors.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Fitting and Machining:
1. Primary fitting of doors shall be done in factory. Prefinished doors may not
be machined on site.
a. Maximum of 1/2" from bottom.
b. Maximum of 1/8" maximum from top.
C. Bevel lock and hinge edges 1/8" in 2".
2. Machine doors for hardware to clearance tolerances specified. Perform in
factory to greatest extent possible. Field machining of the prefinished doors
will not be permitted.
3. Cut light openings in door not exceeding maximum sizes as scheduled on
the drawings.
4. Seal all job site cut surfaces with two coats of sealer before final hanging of
doors.
Section 08300 -Wood Doors: Page 08300 - 5
B. Installation of Doors
I Follow door manufacturer's written instructions for all installation work.
Installation methods shall not void the door guarantee.
2. Clearances:
a. Allow maximum of 1/8" at jamb and head for job fit doors and
prefit doors.
b. Allow maximum of 3/16" over threshold or saddle.
C. Allow maximum of 1/2" over decorative floor coverings.
3. Fire Rated Doors: Fit and install in accordance with National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) recommendations. Fire-rated doors must be prefitted at
factory. Field machining of fire-rated doors will not be permitted.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Replace or rehang doors Which are hingebound and do not swing or operate freely.
B. Refinish or replace job finished doors damaged during installation.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. After installation,
of doors is complete and all adjustments have been made, install
protective bags over each door until the area in which the doors have been
installed is free of construction. Install protective covering as the door installation
progresses throughout the project.
3.06 CLEANUP
A. Upon completion of wood door installations, remove from the site all excess
materials, debris and tools.
END OF SECTION
Section 08310 —Access Doors: Page 008310 - 1
DIVISION 8: DOORS &WINDOWS
08310 -ACCESS DOORS
PART ONE: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary
to complete installation of the access doors to permit access to plumbing,
mechanical and electrical apparatus.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Concrete Unit Masonry: Access doors installed in prepared masonry openings.
B. Rough Carpentry: Treated wood blocking required for the installation of the access
doors.
C. Gypsum Wallboard: Access doors installed in conjunction with the gypsum
wallboard systems.
D. Acoustical Tile Ceiling Systems: Access doors installed in lay-in ceiling systems.
E. Painting: Field application of finish paint.
F. Mechanical: Access doors required to provide access to mechanical apparatus.
G. Electrical: Access doors required to provide access to electrical apparatus.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of regulatory agencies having jurisdiction over this
project. Provide Underwriter's Laboratory label on each fire-rated access door.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit copies of technical data and shop drawings to the Architect in accordance
with Section 01340. Submittals shall show materials, fabrication and complete
installation details.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials on the job site, above ground in a weathertight shelter in a manner
to prevent rust and damage.
Section 08310—Access Doors: Page 008310 -2
PART TWO: MATERIALS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Access Doors: As manufactured by Karp Associates, Inc. of Mospeth, New York,
except as otherwise noted. All access doors shall be furnished with key operated
cylinder lock. Furnish with factory primer for field painting.
1 Access doors in non-fire-rated partitions and non-fire-rated gypsum
wallboard ceilings shall be Type DSC-214M, sizes as noted on Drawings.
2. Access doors in fire-rated partitions shall be KRP-1 60FR, UL "B" label for 1-
1/2 hours.
3. Access doors for installation in non-fire-rated lay-in ceiling system shall be
KSTE/CAD, exposed grid.
B. Access cover pates for concealed plumbing cleanouts shall be round and similar to
Wade#W-8470-R, stainless steel.
PART THREE: EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the installation of the access doors with the drywall installations and
mechanical and electrical trades requiring access, as detailed on the Drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Access doors shall be set into place, leveled, plumbed and anchored to the
substrate with the appropriate anchoring devices, as shown on the manufacturer's
shop drawings.
B. Access doors shall be demonstrated to operate freely and without bind. Completed
installations shall be left ready for painting.
END OF SECTION
Section 08460: Automatic Sliding Doors: Page 08460 - 1
DIVISION 8: DOORS &WINDOWS
08460: AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Automatic sliding doors With operator and motion/presence sensor control device.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Aluminum-Framed Doors, Windows& Storefronts.
B. Hardware.
C. Glazing.
D. Electrical.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Doors Powered to Open Position:
1. Doors powered by DC electric motor and mechanical gear assembly transmitted to active
leaves by fiberglass-reinforced tooth drive belt for silent operation. Doors using roller chain,
cable, or hydraulic devices shall not be accepted.
2. Power door to open position by signals received by microprocessor from the actuation
controls.
3. The last portion of the opening cycle shall be controlled by a microprocessor generated
signal that electronically reduces voltage to motor until door is fully open. Door systems that
use micro switches shall not be accepted.
4. To permit safe passage if an obstruction is detected between opening doors and
surrounding walls or interior fittings, the doors shall immediately stop and after a delay go to
the full closed position. Door systems that only monitor the door travel while closing shall
not be acceptable.
B. Doors Powered to Closed Position:
1. The active leafs will only be powered to closed position when all actuating devices are
cleared and after remaining in the open position for a preset time delay (per ANSI standards).
2. The last portion of the closing cycle shall be controlled by a microprocessor generated signal
that electronically reduces voltage to the motor until door is fully closed.
3. To permit safe passage between closing doors, the doors immediately reverse to open
position if an obstruction is detected, then resume their interrupted movement at low speed to
check whether the obstruction has disappeared or not. Door systems that only monitor the
door travel while opening shall not be acceptable.
C. Emergency Breakaway:
1. Full Breakout System: Interior sliding active leaves and sidelites swing out from any
position in sliding mode.
2. Fixed Sidelite System: Exterior sliding active leaves swing out from any position in sliding
mode.
3. Breakaway Pressure: Field adjustable to building code requirements and in accordance
with ANSI/BHMA 156.10 maximum of 50 pounds.
Section 08460: Automatic Sliding Doors: Page 08460 -2
D. Watchdog Monitoring:
1. Microprocessor Software: Constantly monitor drive train system operations.
2. Watchdog Control Circuit: Assume command of system and shut down automatic function
by holding doors open, should door speed, motor function, or drive train operations deviate
from design criteria ranges.
3. Secondary Supervisory Circuit: Monitor main Watchdog control circuit every 255 door
cycles, ready to perform as a backup.
E. Energy Saving Device:
1. Switch: Recessed in interior header cover.
2. Door Opening Settings: Off, exit only, 2-way traffic, partial opening, and hold fully open.
3. Partial Opening Mode: Switch reduces total door opening to reduce conditioned air loss.
A. Microprocessor Programmed Intelligence: Door opening automatically resumes full-
open position whenever traffic flow exceeds preset volumes.
B. Door returns to reduced opening mode when traffic subsides.
4. Heavy Weather Pile: Between doors and sidelites and between emergency breakaway
hardware and door stiles.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide doors that have been designed and fabricated to comply with specified
performance requirements, as demonstrated by testing manufacturers corresponding standard
systems.
B. Compliance:
1. ANSI/BHMA 156.10.
2. ANSI/UL 325 listed.
C. Automatic door equipment accommodates medium to heavy pedestrian traffic.
D. Automatic door equipment accommodates up to following weights for active leaf doors:
1. BI-Part Doors: 220 pounds per active leaf.
2. Single Slide Doors: 440 pounds per active leaf.
E. Operating Temperature Range: -35 degrees F to 122 degrees F.
F. Motion and Presence Detection System: shall use ultrasonic technology that is not affected by
ambient light or microwave frequencies.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with Section 01330- Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including description of materials,
components, fabrication, finishes, and installation.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including elevations, sections, and
details, indicating dimensions, materials, and fabrication of doors, frames, sidelites, operator,
motion/presence.sensor control device, anchors, hardware, finish, options, and accessories.
D. Samples: Submit manufacturer's samples of aluminum finishes.
E. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports from UL, CUL, and ICBO indicating doors comply with
specified performance requirements.
F. Manufacturers Field Reports: Submit manufacturer's field reports from AAADM certified
technician of inspection and approval of doors for compliance with ANSI/BHMA 156.10 after
completion of installation.
G. Operation and Maintenance Manual:
1. Submit manufacturers operation and maintenance manual.
2. Include spare parts list.
H. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty shall be one year from date of installation.
Section 08460: Automatic Sliding Doors: Page 08460 -3
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mandfacturer's Qualifications:
1. Continuously engaged in manufacturing of doors of similar type to that specified,with a
minimum of 10 years successful experience.
2. Member. American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM).
3. Door, frame, operator, and sensor components from same manufacturer.
B. Installer's Qualifications:
1. Minimum of 10 years successful experience in installation of similar doors..
2. Local certified Besam distributor.
3. Approved by manufacturer.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site protected from damage'.
B. Storage: Store" materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions,
C. Handling: Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation.
1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Manufacturer shall provide factory-owned central-dispatch system for maintenance service.
B. The manufacturer shall maintain a company owned dispatch system that shall be available 24
hours per day, 365 days per year to insure proper service capability.
C. A manufacturer's employee, not an answering service, shall obtain malfunction information and
dispatch appropriate service agency to project location.
D. Toll free phone number shall be prominently displayed on header of each operator.
E. Outside contractors or answering services are not acceptable.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Besam Automated Entrance Systems, Inc., 84 Twin Rivers Drive, Hightstown, New Jersey
08520-5213. Toll Free (866) BESAM-US. Phone (609) 443-5800. Fax (609) 443-7597.
2.2 ' AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS
A. Model: Unislide automatic sliding doors.
1. Aluminum doors and frames with sidelite and active door leaves.
2. Overhead-concealed electro-mechanical, microprocessor-controlled, sliding door operator.
3. Operator housing, floor rollers, and door carriers.
B. Dimensions:
1. As indicated on drawing.
2.3 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Doors and Frames: Extruded aluminum, Alloy 6063-T5.
1. Hydraulic dampers (optional): provide 90 degree stop and cushion door upon opening and
closing during-eMfte_-n6V breakout conditions.
Section 08460: Automatic Sliding Doors: Page 08460-4
B. Glass
1. Glazing Material: ANSI Z97.1.
2. Active Leaves: 5/8-inch glass insulating units.
3. Sidelites: 5/8-inch glass insulating units.
4. Field-glazed or preglazed.
C. Door Carriers:
1. Roller Wheels: 2 steel roller wheels, 1-3/4-inch diameter, per active door leaf for operation
,over replaceable Delrin track. Single journal with sealed oil-impregnated bearings.
2. 2 self-aligning anti-risers per leaf.
D. Vertical Jambs: 1-3/4 inches by 4-1/2 inches
E. Header
1. Span: 12 ft.
2. Size: 7-3/4 inches wide by 6-7/8 inches high.
3. Hinge Point: Allows access for adjustments.
4. Design: Closed header.
F. Stiles: Medium —4".
G. Pivots: Top and bottom concealed pivots, extruded aluminum.
H. Hardware: Breakaway.
I. Exterior Glazing Stop Extrusion: Non-removable, security-type glazing bead to prevent
unauthorized entry.
2.4 SLIDING DOOR OPERATOR
A. Operator.
1. Overhead-concealed or surface-applied, electro-mechanical, microprocessor-controlled.
2. Motor: High-efficiency, energy-efficient, DC motor.
3.
Mechanical drive assembly. 1
4. Microprocessor System: Sets opening and closing speeds based on factory-adjusted
configuration settings.
5. Mechanical Limit Switches: Not acceptable.
6. Adjustable Hold Open Time Delay: 0 to 60 seconds.
7. Software: Incorporates self-diagnosing system.
2.5 MOTION AND PRESENCE SENSOR CONTROL DEVICE
A. Model: Uniscan doorway monitoring system.
1. Sensor shall provide motion and presence detection through multiple heads micro
processed using ultrasonic technology to analyze sound waves and echoes that monitor
the environment and learn changes.
2. System shall be compromised of 4 heads (2 on each side) each with a minimum of 5
transducers. Hold opens beams solely shall not be acceptable.
B. Switches and Sensor. Factory-wired,
C. Activating Devices:
1. Control door opening, closing, and hold-open functions using ultrasonic technology.
2. Flush-mounted sensor recessed in cover of both sides of sliding door header.
3. Provide motion and presence detection.
4. Microprocessor Software Controlling Detection: Program to provide learn mode so that
self-adjustment to changes in floor conditions shall be made automatically.
5. System shall not be false impulsed by rain or snow.
6. Adjustable Motion Detection Field: Complete width of doorway, maximum of 60 inches to
120 inches (1,500 mm to 3,000 mm) and maximum of 86 inches (2,200 mm) out from
doorway.
Section 08460: Automatic Sliding Doors: Page 08460 -5
D. Presence Detection:
1. Presence Zone: Complete width of door opening, maximum of 84 inches and extends
maximum of 24 inches on both sides of active leaf.
2. Detect motionless people or equivalent.
3. Detector Shall remain energized and monitor doorway at all times. Sensor systems that
shut down at any point in the door travel shall not be acceptable. Exception: one way traffic
applications per ANSI/BHMA 156.10.
4. System shall not be false Impulsed by rain or snow.
5. Detection'Field Sizes and Function: ANSI/BHMA 156.10.
6. Presence Sensor: Self monitoring unit monitors itself each cycle before closing and if a
fault is detected, the doors will not close.
2.6 ELECTRICAL
A. High-Efficiency DC Motor Maximum of 3 A current draw. Allow for 5 operators to run on one 20
A line.
S. Power Self-detecting line voltage capable control. 120 V through 240V, 50/60 Hz, 3 A incoming
power With solid-earth ground connection for each door system. 5 door systems on one 20 A
circuit.
C. Wiring: Separate channel raceway free from moving parts.
D. Brown outthigh voltage capability: System has capability to operate at full performance well
beyond brown out and high line voltage conditions (85V—265V) sensing changes and adjusting
automatically.
E. Convenience Battery: Shall be concealed in header and capable of full operation with blackout
conditions, including sensor capabilities for typically 100 cycles.
2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Custom: Powder coat painted white.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine and measure areas to receive doors. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely
affect installation or subsequent utilization of doors. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected,
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ensure openings to receive frames are plumb, level, square, and in tolerance.
B. Ensure proper support has been provided at operator header.
C. Ensure floor is level and smooth.
Section 08460: Automatic Sliding Doors: Page 08460 -6
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ANSI1BHMA 156.10.
B. Install doors and beam plumb, level, square, true to line, and without warp or rack.
C. Anchor frames securely in place.
D. Separate aluminum from other metal surfaces with bituminous coatings or other means approved
by Architect.
E. Install exterior doors to be weathertight in closed position.
F. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved
by Architect.
G. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined
by Architect.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services:
1. Manufacturer's representative shall provide technical assistance and guidance for
-installation of doors.
2. Before placing doors in operation, AAADM certified technician shall inspect and approve
doors for compliance with ANSI/BHMA 156.10. Certified technician shall be approved by
manufacturer.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors for proper operation in accordance with manufacturers instructions and
ANSI/BHMA 156.10.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean doors promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage glass or finish.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect-installed doors and finish to ensure that, except for normal weathering, doors and finish
will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
Section 08520 -Metal windows: Page 08520 - I
DIVISION 8: DOORS &WINDOWS
08520 - METAL WINDOWS
PART ONE: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. Scope of Work: The scope of work includes all labor, materials, equipment and
services necessary to complete Aluminum windows as shown on drawings and
specified herein.
1. Double-hung with tilt-in sash, fixed and special round windows.
. 1.02 RELATED.SECTIONS
A. Fixed Windows and Aluminum /Glass entry doors, sidelights and storefronts.
B. Glass and glazing.
C. Sealants and caulking
1.03 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA).
B. American Society for Testing Materials (ANTM).
C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
1.04 TEST AND PERFROMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide aluminum window system designed to accommodate expansion and
contraction due to normal thermal movement and wind loading per manufacturer's
window test reports. Establish basic dimension of units, sight lines, and profiles of
members according to the Performance requirements.
1. In order to designate quality of materials and workmanship required, these
specifications are based upon products from Boyd Aluminum Manufacturing
Co., Inc., Springfield, MO (800-737-2800.
2. Products of other manufacturers equal to or exceeding those specified
herein will be considered upon written authorization by the Architect.
Information, including window sample (size and configuration per Architect's
requirements), must be submitted for consideration a minimum of 10 days
before project bid date.
Section 08520 - Metal windows: Page 08520 -2
B. Test Criteria: Testing shall be performed by an AAMA qualified independent
testing agency and be based on the following criteria:
I Current test reports must be submitted and be AAMA certified to be
accepted.
C. Performance Requirements: Test reports must show compliance with ANSI/AAMA
101/l.S.2-97 for HS-HC65.
1. Air-Infiltration: Shall not exceed 0.15 cfm/ft of sash crack per ASTM E283 at
a differential static pressure of 1.56 psf.
2. Water Infiltration: No uncontrolled leakage per ASTM E331 at a test
pressure of 9.00 psf.
3. Structural'Requirements: Maximum permanent deformation of any
component shall not exceed 0.4 percent at a test pressure of 67.5 psf as
defined per ASTM E330.
4. Condensation Resistance Factor(CRF): Provide windows tested for thermal
performance according to AAMA 1503.1 showing a minimum condensation
resistance factor (CRF) of 50.
5. Thermal Transmittance: Provide windows with a minimum LI-value maximum
of 0.66 when tested according to AAMA 1503.1.
6. Forced-Entry Resistance: Comply with Performance Level 10 requirements
when tested according to ASTM F 588.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for windows.
1 Include information for factory finishes, glass, glazing components,
accessories, and other required components.
2. Include information on hardware and operators.
3. Submit certified test reports from AAMA accredited laboratories verifying all
performance requirements specified herein.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate elevations, detailed design, dimensions, member profiles,
joint locations, arrangement of units, and member connections.
1. Anchorage system.
2. Interfacing with building construction.
3. Full-size details of special and typical shapes.
4. Indicate glazing details and sealant requirements.
5. Show finishes indicating compliance with the specification.
6. Indicate recorded field measurements on final drawings as available.
Section 08520 - Metal windows: Page 08520 - 3
C. Samples: Indicate quality of finish on alloys used, 12 inches long for extrusions
and 6 inches square for sheet materials.
1. Where normal texture or color variations are expected, include additional
samples illustrating range of variation.
D. Samples for Verification: Submit samples of anchors, fasteners, hardware,
assembled corner sections, and other materials and components if requested by
the architect.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Certified in writing that installer has experience on at least
five projects of similar nature in past five years. The installer shall warrant the
satisfactory performance of the window installation which includes, but is not limited
to, installation accessories, (glazing, perimeter sealing) and anchorage as called
for by the specifications and approved shop drawings.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Provide window units manufactured by one
manufacturer.
1. Glass and glazing for window units are required as work of this section for
single source responsibility. Factory glaze units.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver units preglazed with manufacturer's labels intact on interior side of glass.
B. Protect glass and glazing to prevent chipping, cracking, and other similar damages.
C. Store windows in upright position, off ground.
D. Protect finished surfaces to prevent damage.
E. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which become firmly bonded
when exposed to sun.
F. Do not leave coating residue on surfaces.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: The window manufacturer shall provide a-written warranty that window
units are free from defective materials or workmanship within a specified period.
Failures include the following:
Section 08520 - Metal windows: Page 08520 - 4
1 Material defect in manufacture.
2. Faulty operation of sash and hardware.
B. Warranty Period: 2 year after delivery of product.
C. Warranty Period for Glass: 5 years after delivery of product.
PART TWO: MATERIALS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.' - Acceptable Manufacturers:
Energy Savings product, Inc.: Series 110, Grade DH-R35/C35
Quaker Windows: Series 2050 Double Hung, Grade C30.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum extrusions shall comply with ASTM B 221 and tolerances shall be in
accordance with the Aluminum Association's "Drafting Standards for Aluminum
Extruded and Tubular Products". Extrusions shall not be less than a nominal 0.062
inch thick at any location for main frame and sash members with the exception of
main frame sill which shall be no less than a nominal 0.094 inch. Sheet shall
comply with ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer
appropriate for specified finish.
B. Baked Enamel finish, color white. low E Insulating glass, minimum STC rating of
30
C. Fasteners: Provide stainless steel fasteners, corrosion resistant and compatible
with aluminum.
1 Reinforcement: When fasteners screw into aluminum less than a nominal
0.062 inch thick, utilize nuts or washers of design having means to reinforce
interior aluminum surfaces and prevent disengagement.
2. Exposed Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners wherever possible.
D. Shims: Non-staining and non-ferrous type.
E. Weatherstripping: Material shall be compatible with aluminum, resistant to weather
and ultraviolet degradation, and replaceable.
1. Provide woven pile weatherstripping with wool, a center semirigid strip of
polypropylene, and a resin impregnated backing strip complying with AAMA
701.2.
Section 08520- Metal windows: Page 08520 - 5
F. Sealants: The color of the sealant exposed with the window in the closed position
shall be chosen from the manufacturer's standards. If unspecified, the sealant
color shall be compatible with the window framing materials.
1. Non-working joints: Sealant shall comply with AAMA 800.
2. Window Components: Sealant shall be suitable for application specified
and approved by the window manufacturer.
3. Perimeter: Sealant shall comply with AAMA 800 and Section 07900.
G. Insect Screen: Provide 18 by 16 mesh of 0.01 3-inth diameter, coated aluminum
wire, complying with FS RR-W-365.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Insect Screens: Provide insect screens for each operable sash. Insect screens
may be provided, at the request of the architect, to cover both the operable and
fixed sash. Screens shall be exterior mounted. Screens shall be tight-fitting,
removable, and have no exposed fasteners.
I
1 Screen Frames: Frames shall be of extruded tubular shaped aluminum, with
a minimum wall thickness of 0.050 inch, have mitered joints, and corners
secured by concealed corner keys. Finish frames to match windows.
2. Screen frames must rest onto channels extruded on main frame at head and
sill. Screens attached by means of fastening devices are not acceptable.
No part of screen may protrude past the exterior face of main frame.
a. Provide removable extruded vinyl spline at edge of screening.
B. Subsills: Provide subsills with a minimum nominal wall thickness of 0.062 inch.
Provide subsills with means to weep water to the exterior. Finish subsills to match
windows.
C. Trims: Provide extruded aluminum trim of the type and configuration required by
the architect with a minimum nominal wall thickness of.050 inch. Provide extruded
aluminum trim clips, with a minimum nominal wall thickness of .050 inch, to allow
attachment of the trim to the window units and or openings. Finish trim to match
window units.
Section 08520 - Metal windows: Page 08520 -6
2.05 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components in accordance with manufacturer's tested assemblies.
Remove burrs and ease edges. Shop fabricate to greatest extent practicable to
minimize field assembly. Disassemble only to the extent necessary for shipping
and handling limitations.
B. Thermal Break: Manufacturer's standard integral urethane thermal barrier, located
between exterior and interior members to provide thermal separation. Provide
thermal break that has been tested for thermal conductance and has been in use a
minimum of 5 years.
C. Weep System: Drainwater entering joints occurring within-windows by drain holes
and gutters of adequate size to evacuate water.
2.06 FINISHES
A. High Solids Paint Coating: A high solid spray coating shall be applied by a
,licensed applicator and shall meet AAMA 2603-98 specifications.
46
1. Color: White.
PART THREE: EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that openings are dimensionally within allowable tolerances, plumb, level,
and clean. Provide solid anchoring surfaces that are in accordance with approved
shop drawings.
B. Verify that the opening into which the windows will be installed is the correct size to
permit installation of the new windows according to the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
C. Do not install windows until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install windows with skilled tradesperson in exact accordance with approved shop
drawings.
B. Aluminum that is not organically coated shall be insulated from direct contact with
steel, masonry concrete or noncompatible materials by bituminous paint, zinc
chromate primer, or other suitable insulating material.
Section 08520 -Metal windows: Page 08520 -7
C. Install vapor retardant type between window perimeter and adjoining collateral
materials and existing wall barriers to insure continuity.
D. Plumb and align window faces in a single plane for each wall plane. Erect square
and true. Anchor to maintain position when subjected to normal thermal and
building movement (seismic forces), and specified wind loads.
E. Install glass and glazing in accordance with approved shop drawings to provide
satisfactory, leak-free installation.
F. Perimeter Sealing: Seal joints at the perimeters in accordance with approved shop
drawings to provide watertight installation.
1 Joints and surfaces to receive sealants shall be clean, free from loose
material, free of efforescence or mortar leaking, and dry. Sealants shall not
be applied when the temperature is below the sealant manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Clean the joints and surfaces before sealing or priming. Then prime the
joints in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's instructions.
3. Provide joint backing in all joints where a suitable backer to receive sealant
is otherwise not available. Joint depth shall be equal to 1/2of the width.
4. Caulk joint width shall not be less than % inch nor more then 1/2inch
otherwise recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Wipe off the excess
material and leave the exposed surfaces and joints clean and smooth.
103 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, windows and glazing shall be inspected and adjusted to provide
smooth operation and a weathertight window system.
3.04 CLEANING
A. After installation, leave windows clean and free of temporary labels and dirt.
Protect finished installation against damage.
B. Final cleaning of the painted finish shall be in accordance with AAMA 610.1.
(END OF SECTION)
Section 08600 - Glazing: Page 08600 - 1
DIVISION 8: DOORS &WINDOWS
08600 - GLAZING
PART ONE: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary
to complete the glazing work as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
Section includes but is not limited to the materials, fabrication and installation of the
following: -
1. Glass and glazing in aluminum framing and all aluminum entrance doors.
2. Door view liter. 1
3. All accessories required for complete and weathertight glazing.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Glass installed in hollow metal work.
B. Wood Doors: View lites installed in wood doors.
C. Aluminum Entrance Doors and Storefront Framing: Glass installed in
entrance doors and exterior aluminum framing systems.
D. Aluminum Windows: Applicable portions of this Section apply to Section
08500 as if repeated therein.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inspection of Glass Insulating Glass Units During Fabrication: Quality
control shall be established for washing, assembly and packaging stages of
production. Units shall be inspected for primary seal continuity, sight-line
consistency and foreign material sealed in lite.
B. Glass Quality Standards:
1. Tempered glass shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C 1048,
coated and uncoated.
2. Insulating glass shall meet the requirements of the Sealed Insulating
Glass manufacturers Association (SIGMA) for construction and
insulating value and SIGMA "Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass
Units".
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit copies of technical data and shop drawings on items specified
herein. Reference shall be made to room names and numbers and schedule
numbers shown on the drawings.
Section 08600 - Glazing: Page 08600 -2
B. One (1) 12" x 12" sample of each type and thickness of glass shall be
submitted for approval. Submit manufacturer's certification that materials
submitted meet specification requirements.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All glass and related materials shall arrive at the job site properly packed
and crated and marked to agree with the approved shop drawings and
bearing factory labels on each pane. Labels shall not be removed until final
inspection.
B. Store material under cover on wood runners on floors in an upright position
and in a manner that will prevent damage.
1.06 GUARANTEE
A. Provide manufacturer's standard I 0-year warranty protecting insulating
glass against failure of seal. Replace glass (material and labor) units failing
to perform'during this warranty period at no cost to the Owner. Date of
warranty shall commence at the Date of Substantial Completion.
PART TWO: MATERIALS
A. Exterior Aluminum Entrance Doors and Sidelites: Glaze with 5/8" insulating,
tempered glass.
1. Inboard Lite: 3/16" Thickness, clear tempered.
2. Outboard Lite: 3/16" Thickness, clear tempered.
B. Aluminum Entrance Doors —Vestibule to Interior and Interior Doors: Glaze with
5/8" clear insulating, tempered glass.
C. Pool Area Interior Glazing: Same as item A.
D. View Lites — Doors and Hollow Metal
1. Glass in Non-Fire-Rated Assembly: Y4" Clear tempered.
2. Glass in Fire-Rated Assembly: Y4" Thickness woven wire, square pattern,
clear float glass, Underwriter's laboratories labeled.
Section 08600 - Glazing: Page 08600 - 3
E. Accessories:
1. Glazing tape shall be Tremco Polyshim, as manufactured by Tremco of
Cleveland, Ohio
2. Glazing sealant shall be Spectrem 2, as,manufactured by Tremco of
Cleveland, Ohio.
3. Neoprene setting blocks shall have a Shore "A" hardness of 70-90 and be
chemically compatible with any sealant used.
4. Glazing Gaskets for Entrance Doors and Aluminum Framing Systems:
Provided as a component of the framing system. Provide manufacturer's
standard EPDM glazing gaskets for specified system.
PART THREE: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Watertight and airtight installation of each glass product is required, except
changes, wind loading, impact loading (for doors), without failure including loss or
breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight,
deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work.
B. Protect glass from damage during handling and installation, and subsequent
operation of glazed components of the work. During installation, discard units with
significant edge damage or other imperfections.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Glass installation in aluminum entrances and framing systems shall be in
accordance with the printed instructions of the system manufacturer, using glazing
beads, stops, etc., compatible with the framing the system and designed
specifically for this purpose.
B. Interior Channel Glazing: Glaze using polyviny[chloride tape applied to both sides,
all stops. Place tape with butted joints. Compress tape approximately 30%.
Center glazing material in rabbet. Support glass all around with neoprene setting
blocks, with no metal-to-glass or wood-to-glass contact. Draw up glazing beads
with equal pressure all around.
C. Tempered Glass: Position bug or hallmark on unit so final position in framed
opening occurs consistently in lower right hand corner of unit, parallel to floor in
inconspicuous location.
D. Cutting or altering lites of tempered or insulating glass in field is prohibited.
E. Wire Glass: Install in openings in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions to conform to labeling requirements; use special supplied caulking
material.
Section 08600 - Glazing: Page 08600 -4
F. Mirrors shall be installed after wall surfaces have received the prime coat of paint.
Where wallcovering is to be installed, omit wall covering behind mirror to permit
adhesive mounting of the mirrors to the drywall substrate. Install mirrors utilizing a
combination of stainless steel clips and Palmer Mirro-Mastic. Apply mastic to back
side,of mirror in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Mastic
thickness shall permit the use of the mirror mounting clips without putting the mirror
in a bind when the clips are installed. Install mirrors with continuous J-clip at mirror
bottom edge. All installations shall be square, plumb and level.
3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. After all construction has been completed and prior to Substantial Completion
inspection and the possibility of glass breakage has been reduced to a minimum,
remove all labels. Wash and polish glass on both faces, removing all paint, smears
and spots. Glass broken or damaged before the Substantial Completion shall be
replaced with glass of a like kind of quality at no expense.to the Owner.
B. Remove all excess materials and debris from the project site.
END OF SECTION
Section 08710 - Finish Hardware: Large 08710 - 1
M 8: DOORS & WINDOWS Copied from
VV$ IV I FINISH HARDWARE Country Inn & Suites
Standard of Architecture & Construction
June 2004.
PART 1 -GENERAL
LI RELATED IX)CtJMFN*I'S
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
11 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
1, Furnish door hardware(for hollow metal,,wood and aluminum doors) specified herein,listed in the
hardware schedule,and/or required by the drawings,
2. Where items of hardware are not definitely or correctly specified and is required for the intended
service,such omission,error or other discrepancy should be directed to the Architect prior to the
bid date for clarification by addendum. Otherwise furnish such items in the type and quantity
established by this specification for the appropriate service intended.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1, Finish Carpentry: Section 06200
2, Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Section 08110
3, Wood Doors: Section 08210
4, Aluminum Entrances and Store Fronts: Section 08410; All hardware except as noted, including
cylinders to be supplied by 08710. Binges, weatherstrip, thresholds, and sweeps to be supplied
by the aluminum door and frame supplier (supply aluminum door and frame manufacturers
standard hinges,weatherstrip,threshold,and sweeps).
5. Electrical: Division 16
1.3 REFERENCES
A. BMHA-Recommended Locations for Builders'Hardware,
B, NFPA 80-Standards for Fire Doors and Windows.
C. NPPA 101 -Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures,
D. UL-Building Material Directory,
1A SUBMITTALS
A. Submit 5 copies of a detailed hardware schedule tinder the provisions of Division I Section"Submittal
Procedures",
Section 08710 - Finish Hardware: Page
1. The schedule will be prepared under the direct supervision of a registered Architectural
Hardware Consultant (AMC) employed by the hardware distributor. The hardware
schedule to be signed and embossed with the DHI certification seal of the supervising
AHC. The supervising AHC shall attend any meeting related to the project when
requested by the architect.
2. Utilize the vertical format of scheduling and the practices outlined by the Door and Hardware
Institute(DHI).
3. Include documentation for UL 10C or other approved testing agency stating hardware has passed
UBC Standard 7-2.
B. Submit a keying schedule for review based on a approved hardware schedule and a conference with the
owner's representative.
C. Submit samples when requested by the Architect for approval in the specified finish.
D. Templates and approved hardware schedule to be furnished to each door and frame fabricator as
required.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Furnish products of only one manufacturer for each type of hardware unless specified otherwise.
B. All submittals must be submitted in writing prior to bid and include product information along with
reason for changing from the minimum standards set by Carlson Properties. Substitution will be
approved by Robert Ruhland at 651-731-7127,Fax:651-735-1800.
C. Properties not furnished by TCH Co.will be inspected for compliance by a local representative.
D. Provide hardware tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories.
E. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings conforming to UBC Standard 7-2.
F. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings conforming in compliance with NFPA 80 1995 Edition.
1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver,store and handle in accordance with Division I Section"Product Requirements". Mark original
containers to correspond with the approved hardware schedule for the installation location.
B. Receive, inventory and store hardware in a secured and dry environment, protect against loss and
damage.
C. Report shortages to the Architect and hardware supplier immediately after receipt of material at the job
site.
D. General Contractor to contact TCH Co.for Carlson Company volume negotiated pricing.
1. Contact information:
a. Robert Ruhland,AHC 1-800-747-1980 Direct 651-731-7317
Section 08710 - Finish Hardware: Page 08710 -3
PAPT 2 PRODUCTS
2,1 ACCBPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
PRODUCTS SPEC ACCEPTABLE
1. Butt Hinges Ives Hager,PBB,Stanley
2. Flush Bolts Ives DCI,Trimco
3. Exit Devices Von Duprin Donna
4 Looks and Latches schlago Donna
-
S. Electric Strikes Von Duprin Dorma,Folger AdamsIves,Trimco,
6. Pulls,Push Bars Hiawatha Rockwood
Push/Pull Plates
7. Coordinators Ives DCI,.Trimco
8, Closers LCN Dorma
9. Protective Plates Hiawatha Ives,Trimco,
I Rockwood
10. Overhead Stops Glynn-Johnson Dorma,Rixson
11. Wall Stops Ives DON-10,Trimco,DCI
12. Magnetic Hold Opens LCN Dorma,Rixson
13. Thresholds,Sweeps, Reese Pemko,NOP
Weatherstrips,Gaskets Lund MMF,Telkee
14. Key Cabinets
2.2 BUTT HINGES '
A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers:
Ives Haver Stan]21 FPB
1. 5PB1 1279 F179 PB81
2. SBB1 BB1279 FBB179 PB81
3. 5BB1 BB 1191 FBB191 BB21
4. 5BB1HW BB1168 FBB168 4B81
5. 5BBIHW BB1199 FBB199 41121
B. Furnish the following hinge quantities for each door leaf.
1. 3 hinges for doors up to 90 inches.
2. 1 additional hinge for every 30 inch an doors over 90 inches.
3. 4 hinges for Dutch door applications.
C. Weight and Type:
1. Standard weight-plain-bearing hinge 5PB1 for interior openings through 36 inches wide without a
door closer.
2. Standard weight ball bearing hinge 5BB1 for interior opening over 36 through 40 inches wide
without a door closer,and for interior openings through 40 inches wide with a door closer.
3. Standard weight'non-ferrous ball bearing binge 5BB1 for exterior openings and openings in
corrosive areas through 36 inches wide.
4. Heavy weight 4 ball bearing hinge 5BB1HW for interior openings over 40 inches wide.
s. Heavy weight non-ferrous 4 ball bearing hinge 5BBlHW for exterior openings and openings In
corrosive areas over 36 inches wide.
Section 08710 -Finish Hardware: Page 08710 -4
6. Butts for lockable doors opening outward shall have non-removable pin (NRP)-, other butts shall
have non-rising pins.
D. Size: Furnish doors with the following:
1. 1-3/4 inch Doors 4-1/2 inch by 4..1/2"
E. Provide proper butt width to clear trim and allow full IN degree awing.
P. Butts shall have flat bottom tips unless otherwise noted in hardware groups.
2.3 FLUSH DOLTS AND DUST PROOF STRIKES
A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers:
Ivel _DC1 Trimeo
1. FB458 78OF 3917
2. FB31P 842 3810
3. FB41P 942 3815
4. FB51P 845 3820
5. FB61P 945 3825
6. DP2 82 3911
B. Furnish dustproof strike DP2 for bottom bolt.
2.4 EXIT DEVICES
A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers:
Von Dgpd'n Dorma
1. 99 Series 9000 series
B. All types,functions and ratings shall have deadlocking latch bolts.
C. Devices to be equipped with a sound dampening feature to reduce touch pad return noise.
D. Provide thru bolts asirequired.
E. Devices shall be the product of I manufacturer.
F. Exit devices specified 11LBR" are to be supplied with surface vertical rods with "Less Bottom Rod"
(LBR)and no strikes installed on the floor.
G. Hollow metal removable mullions shall be keyed and removed by a standard cylinder.
H. Exit devices that are supplied with levers shall match trim design of-looks and latches.
2.5 LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers:
Schlan Donna
1. A-L series Saturn CL700 series LRC
Section 08710 - Finish Hardware: Page 08710 - 5
B. Furnish look types and functions specified in the hardware schedule,with the following provisions:
1, Backsets: 2-3/4 inch
2. Strikes:
a. ANSI Al 15.2 type for hollow metal or wood doors and frames.
b. Lip length sufficient to protect trim,frame and inactive leaf.
C. Furnish knurled look-lover handles on doors to stairs(exit stairs not included)loading platforms,stages,
boiler rooms,and other hazardous locations. Applied tape is not allowed on lovers.
2.6 ELECTRIC STRIKES
A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers:
VonDur) arms Fol&MAdarns
1. 6000 series ES-1 10 series 600 series
2.7 PULLS,PUSHBARS,PUSH/PULL PLATES
A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers:
Hiawathalye RocAmod,
A 1-jim—co
1. I inch dia.Straight Pull 536H 8103-0 1195-2 111
2. 1 inch dia.Pushbar/Pull 108 ILBP x 536B 9103EZ-0 1731 11147
3. Push/Pull Plate 20OF 8200 4 x 16 1001-3 70C
4. inch dia.Pull 523A 8102-8 1194-2 107
B. Length of push bars shall be sufficient to mount each end on center of stile. Push bars on flush doors
shall be 3 inches less than door width. Mount all push bars and pulls back to back with shoulder bolts
and set screw.Set screw to be on the inside.
2.8 COORDINATORS
A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers:
Ives DO Trimco
1. COR 600 3094
B. Furnish a COR I series coordinator for labeled pairs of doors equipped with automatic flush bolts and
those with vertical rod/mortise took fire exit device combinations with overlapping astragals.
C. Furnish filler ban to fill the complete opening width, closer mounting brackets, carry bars, and special
preparation for top latches where applicable.
2.9 CLOSERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers:
LCN Dorma
1. 4041 8916
2. 1461 8616
3. 1371 7414
Section 08710- Finish Hardware: Page 08710 -6
B. Closers shall utilize a stable fluid withstanding temperature range of+120deg F to -30deg F without
seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door. Closers for fire-rated doors shall be
provided with temperature stabilizing fluid that complies with standards UBC 7-2(1997)and UL1 OC.
C.� Heavy duty closers shall have field adjustable spring power that at the low end is capable of meeting
A.D.A.requirements,and at the high end is capable of controlling a 48 inch exterior door.
D. Furnish complete with mounting brackets, drop plates,special shoes, and thru bolts as may be required
by the door and frame conditions.
E. Provide door closers for labeled doors,whether called far in the hardware groups or not.
F. Install closers on the room side of corridor doors, stair side of stairways and interior side of exterior
doors.
G. Closers shall be the product of I manufacturer.
2.10 KICK PLATES AND MOP PLATES
A. Furnish protective plates as specified in hardware groups.
B. Kick plates shall be 10 inch high and 2 inch LDW(loss door width).Except panel doors shall be 1"less
bottom rail height.
C. Hop plates shall be 4 inch high and 2 inch LDW(less door width).
D. Thickness to be(16 gauge)0.050 inch.
E. Plates shall beveled(all four)edges.
2.11 OVERHEAD STOPS
A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers:
Glynn-Johnson Dorma Big son
1. G190 Series 900 Series 9 Series
2. G1100 Sefies 910 Series 1 Series
3, C71450 Series 700 Series 55 Series
B. Furnish G1450 series overhead stop for doors equipped with regular arm surface type closers that swing
more than 140 degrees before striking a wall, for doors that open against equipment casework,
sidelights, or other objects that would make wall bumpers inappropriate, and as specified in hardware
groups.
C. Furnish sex bolt attachments for wood and mineral core doors unless doors are supplied with proper
reinforcing blocks.
Section 08710 - Finish Hardware: Page 08710 - 7
2.12 WALL STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers:
Ives, Don-Jo DC1 Trimco
1. WS407CCV 1407 32-11T W1247CSS
B. Where wall stops are not applicable,furnish overhead steps.
2.13 MAGNETIC HOLD OPENS
A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers:
LCN Dorma Rlxson
1. SEM 7850 EM-F24120 PM998
2. SEM 7830 EM-S24120 FM906
B. Provide proper voltage and power consumption as required by Division 16.
C. Magnetic holder's housing and armature shall be constructed of a die cast zinc material.
2.14 WEATHERSTRIP,THRESHOLDS,GASKETING
A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers:
Pemko National Guard Reese
1. Thresholds- 171A 425E S205A
2. Weatherstrip: 316V 152V DS75
3. Head&lamb Gasket: S88D 2525 638
4. Drip Cap: 346A 16A R201A
5. Sweeps: 315N 1025V 377
6. Unit Entry Threshold: 173 410 S225
7. Unit Entry Sweep: 18062 C607 964
B. Where specified in the hardware groups,furnish the above products unless otherwise detailed in groups
C. Fdn sh head/jamb gaskets and edge stile astragals for pairs,at fire labeled doors whether listed in group
or not Provide material based on passing UL 10C,UBC test standard 7-2.
D. Coordinate with door manufacturer the intumescent fire and smoke material for fire rated openings as
required by door and frame manufacturer to comply with UL 10C,UBC test 7-2.
2.15 FINISHES AND BASE MATERIALS
A. Except where indicated otherwise in the hardware groups or heroin, hardware finishes shall be applied
over base metals as specified in the finish schedule that follows.
Finish Scheduler
HARDWARE ITEM FINISH AND BASE MATERIAL
1. Butt Hinges
Section 08710 - Finish Hardware: Page 08710 - 8
Exterior US4
Interior US4
2. Flush Botts US4
3. Exit Devices US4
4. Locks and Latches US4
S. Electric Strikes US4
6. Pulls and Push Plates/Bars US4
7. Coordinators Prime painted or mill alum.
8. Closers BHMA 696(painted)
9. 'Protective Plates US4
10. Overhead Stops BHMA 696(painted)
11. Walt Stops and Holders US4
12. Thresholds NO Aluminum
13. Weather-strip,Sweeps Drip Caps Aluminum Anodized Gold
14. Magnetic Holders Brass
1S. Miscellaneous US4
2.16 KEYING
A. Key locksets and cylinders into a new master key system.
B. Furnish 3 change keys each look,furnish 6 master keys each set.
C. Provide keying as required by owner's representative.
2J7 KEY CABINETS
A. Acceptable manufacturers and iespective catalog numbers*
_Lund _MM F Key Gontral Telkee
1. 1200 series 201-8000 series M2000 PLR series RWC-AWC series
2. Furnish 1 key cabinet with a capacity I.S times the number of key sets.
PART 3-EXECtMON
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors, frames, and related items for conditions that would prevent the proper application of
finish hardware. Do not proceed until defects are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install each hardware item in strict compliance with the manufacturers printed instructions and
recommendations,using only fasteners supplied by or called for by manufacturer.
B. Set units level,plumb and true to the line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as
necessary for proper installation and operation,
Section 08710 - Finish Hardware: Page 08710 - 9
C. install hardware on UL,labeled openings in accordance with manufacturer's requirements to maintain the
label.
D. Install per door and/or frame manufacturer's supplemental-S"label instructions on fire rated openings.
E. Mortise and out to close tolerance and conceal evidence of cutting in the finished work.
F. Drill and countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and
anchors in accord with industry standards.
G. Mounting Heights
1. Install hardware at mounting heights confermingto BMHArccommended mounting locations.
2. Install wall stops to engage lavers and pulls.
3. Do not mount wall stops on casework,cabinet work or equipment
H. Deliver to the owner 1 complete got of installation and adjustment instructions, and tools as furnished
with the hardware.
3.3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. At final completion, adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper
operation and function of every unit, Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommended by the
manufacturer.
B. Replace unit that cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the
application made.
C. Instruct owner's personnel in the proper adjustments of the hardware.
D. Clean and restore hardware to the original finish,
3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. Furnish hardware items in the amount indicated unless additional hardware is required for a complete and
operable facility.Ensure completeness,proper function and proper application of hard.ware for,each door.
HW SET:01 Exterior stair dDOTS
HINGES AS REQUIRED
EA E=DEVICE 99NL VON
BA ' CYLINDER
RA ELECTRIC STRIKE 3104 F-A
BA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 CN9 LCN
RES
EA SWEEP
RES
BA THRESHOLD
RES
EA WEATHERSTRIP
Section 08710- Finish Hardware: Page 08710 - 10
CARD READER AND ELECTRIC STRIKEPOWBR BY OWNER
HW SET,02 Exterior from pool
HINGES AS REQUIRED
1 EA EXIT DEVICE 99NL VON
1 EA CYLINDER
L EA E=ALARM EA-500 DETER
1 EA CYLINDER
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 CNS LCN
RES
1 EA SWEEP
REE
I EA THRESHOLD
REE
i EA WEATHERSTRIP
HW SET:03 Stair from corridor
HINGES AS REQUIRED
I EA PASSAGE LATCH ALIO
SCH
LCN
I EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461
IVE
1 EA KICK PLATE
1 EA STOP
PROVIDE GASKETING AT RATED OPENINGS
HW SET:04 Corridor from pantry,Corridor from stomge
HINGES AS REQUIRED
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK
AL70 SCH
I EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 CNS
LCN
IVE
1 EA KICK PLATE
PROVIDE GASKETING AT RATED OPENINGS
Section 08710 - Finish Hardware: Page 08710 - 11
HW SET:05 Breakfast from pantry,Corridor to maintenance,Corridor to laundry Corridor to housekeeping
HINGES AS REQUIRED
I EA CLASSROOM LOCK AL70 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 LCN
I EA KICK PLATE T
I EA STOP
PROVIDE GASKETING AT RATED OPENINGS
HW SET:06 Lobby to workroom,Work room from front desk,Work room to office,Housekeeping to linen,Guest laundry to storage
HINGES AS REQUIRED
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK AL70 SCH
1 EA STOP
HW SET:07 Work room to laundry
HINGES AS REQUIRED
I EA PASSAGE LATCH AL10 SCH
I EA OVERHEAD HOLDER 900H GLY
HW SET:08 Laundry to break room ;
HINGES AS REQUIRED
1 EA PASSAGE LATCH ALTO SCH
1 EA STOP
HW SET:09 Maintenance to mechanical,Laundry from elevator equipment,Corridor to electrical mechanical,Corridor to water heater
HINGES AS REQUIRED
L EA STOREROOMLOCK AL80 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 LCN
1 EA KICKPLATE TVE
1 EA STOP
PROVIDE GASKETING AT RATED OPENINGS
Section 08710 - Finish Hardware: Page 08710 - 12
HW SET:10 Pool Prom pool equipment,Pool from chemical storage
HINGES AS REQUIRED(NON-FERROUS)
I EA STOREROOM LOCK AL80 SCH
I EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 LC'N
1 EA KICKPLATE IVE
1 EA STOP
PROVIDE GASKETING AT RATED OPENINGS
HW SET:I I Corridor from elevator
HINGES AS REQUIRED
I EA PASSAGE LATCH AL10 SCH
I EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 LCN
I EA KICKPLATE NB
i EA MAGNETIC HOLD-OPEN SEM 7850 LC14
PROVIDE GASKETING AT RATED OPENINGS
HW SET:12 Corridor to exercise,Condor to guest laundry
HINGES AS REQUIRED
I EA ACCESS CONTROL LOCK ACCESS CONTROL BY OWNER
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 LCN
IVE
1 EA KICKPLATE
L EA STOP
PROVIDE GASKETING AT RATED OPENINGS
HW SET:13 Corridor from pool
HINGES AS REQUIRED(NON-FERROUS)
I EA ACCESS CONTROL LOCK ACCESS CONTROL BY OWNER
l EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 LCN
1 EA KICKPLATE IVE
1 EA STOP
PROVIDE GASKETING AT RATED OPENINGS
Section 08710 - Finish Hardware: Page 08710 - 13
HW SET,L4 Corridor to men's room,Corridor to women's room
HINGES AS REQUIRED
L EA PRIVACY LOCK ALAO SCH,
I RA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 LCN
I BA KICKPL&TE IVE
I EA STOP
PROVIDE GASKETING AT RATED OPENINGS
NOTE: All bathrooms to have split finish US4 outside and US26D inside.
HW SET:15 Lobby frombrzakfast
HINGES AS REQUIRED
I SET MANUALFLUSHBOLT FB,358 TVE
1 RA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 WE
I EA CLASSROOM LOCK AL70 SCH
2 BA STOPS
HW SET.16 Typical unit entry
HINGES AS REQUIRED
EA ACCESS CONTROL LOCK ACCESS CONTROL BY OWNER
EA SURFACE CLOSER 1371 LCN
EA STOP
SET GASKETING
EA THRESHOLD 410
1 EA SWEEP C607
EA DOOR GUARD 482 IVE
EA DOOR GUARD SHRv
EA DOORBDGE PROTECTOR
EA DOORVIEWER 976U TRIMC
Section 08710 - Finish Hardware: Page 08710 - 14
HW SB1%:17 Typical unit bath,Typical unit bedroom
HINGES AS REQUIRED
1 EA PRIVACY LOCK AtM SCH
1 EA STOP
NOTE: All bathrooms to have split finish US4 outside and US26D inside.
a
Section 09100 - Drywall Construction: Page 09100 - 1
DIVISION 9: FINISHES
09100 - DRYWALL CONSTRUCTION
PART ONE: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, equipment and services to
complete the gypsum wall board work as indicated on drawings and specified
herein.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Wood stud partitions and wood floor framing system.
B. Substrate for support of suspended ceiling systems.
C. Rough Carpentry: Treated wood blocking and nailers installed in conjunction with
the gypsum wallboard.
D. Building Insulation: Insulation installed
alled prior to installing gypsum wallboard.
E. Metal Doors and Frames: Coordination of door frame installations with drywall
work.
F. Access Doors: Installation of access doors in gypsum wallboard.
G. Aluminum Entrance Doors and Storefront Framing: Gypsum wallboard systems
installed in conjunction with and adjacent to the aluminum framing systems.
H. Aluminum Windows: Gypsum wallboard systems installed in conjunction with and
adjacent to the window wall system.
I. Acoustical Treatment: Coordination of installation of acoustical insulation in*
designated partitions.
J. Painting: Painting of gypsum wallboard.
K. Wallcoverings: Substrate for wallcovering.
L. Wall Corner Guards: Substrate for attachment of Corner Guards.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers —The following manufacturers are acceptable for use on
this project subject to compliance with requirements:
1 U.S. Gypsum Company
2. National Gypsum Company
3. The Celotex Corporation
B. Fire-Resistance Rating: Where gypsum drywall systems with fire-resistance
ratings are indicated or are required to comply with governing regulations, provide
materials and installations identical with applicable assemblies which have been
tested and listed by recognized authorities, including UL.
C. Comply with Factory Mutual "Approval Guide" where applicable.
Section 09100 - Drywall Construction: Page 09100 -2
D. Manufacturer: Obtain gypsum board products from a single manufacturer or from
manufacturers recommended by the prime manufacturer of the gypsum boards.
E. References:
1. Gypsum Board Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of
ANSI/ASTM C 840 for application and finishing of gypsum board, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Gypsum Board Terminology: GA-505 by Gypsum Association.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit copies of technical data and laboratory test data, describing all materials, to
the Architect in accordance with Section 01340. Submit samples upon request.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All materials shall be delivered to the job site in original unopened bundles or
cartons bearing manufacturer's label. Store drywall boards on the job site above
ground on level flooring in weathertight shelter and in manufacturers original
unopened containers. Drywall must remain dry at all times.
PART TWO: MATERIALS
2.01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD MATERIALS AND ASSEMBLIES
A. Gypsum Wallboard:
1 Gypsum drywall at non-rated partitions shall be 5/8 inch thick with tapered
edges.
2. Drywall as a back-up for ceramic wall the and marble wall panels or where
indicated on the Drawings, shall be the water-resistant type. Provide water-
resistant Type X gypsum wallboard for installation on fire-rated wall
assemblies scheduled to receive ceramic tile, marble and plumbing fixture
walls.
3. Where fire-rated partitions and ceiling systems are shown on the drawings,
employing gypsum drywall, material shall be U.L. rated U.S.G. Firecode C,
5/8 inch thick.
B. Shaft Wall Materials:
1. Provide.manufacturer's standard gypsum coreboard designed for shaftwall
construction with moisture-resistant paper facings, in maximum lengths
available to eliminate or minimize end4o-end butt joints, the product of a
nationally recognized manufacturer, suitable to receive gypsum drywall by
lamination. Materials shall comply with ASTM C 442.
Section 09100 - Drywall Construction: Page 09100 -3
2. Metal Framing: Provide manufacturer's standard shapes for shaftwall
construction; of profile, size and base metal thickness designed to comply
with ANSI "Specifications for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members" for structural performance characteristics indicated. Fabricate
from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 446, Grade A 525, G60, for hot-
dipped galvanized products; and ASTM A 463 for aluminized products.
3. Gypsum wallboard shall comply with ASTM C 36, type X, -tapered edge, in
maximum lengths to minimize end-to-end butt joints.
4. Joint treatment shall be as specified herein.
C. Gypsum Wallboard Ceiling in Guestroom Bath Ceilings and in Area of the
Swimming Pool and Spa: United States Gypsum Exterior Ceiling Board, 5/8"
thickness with eased edges in Guestroom Baths and 5/8" thickness with eased
edges in area of the Swimming Pool and Spa. Materials shall comply with ASTM C
931.
D. Gypsum Sheathing — EIFS: 5/8" Thickness Dens-Glass Gold Firestop as
manufactured by Georgia-Pacific.
1 Fiberglass Joint Tape for Joint Treatment: 2" Wide, I OxI 0 woven threads
per inch, self-adhering fiberglass joint tape with Borden HPPG Elmers
Silconized Acrylic latex Caulk.
E. Fasteners:
1. Nails and Screws for Drywall Attachment to Wood Framing: Provide 1-1/4"
GWP-54 annular-ring nails. Type W drywall screws, 1" and 1-1/4" lengths,
as required, are also acceptable for use in attachment of gypsum wallboard
to wood framing and blocking construction.
2. Fasteners for fire-rated assemblies shall be as required for that particular
assembly.
3. Fasteners for ceiling board shall be stainless steel.
4. I-pins shall be stainless steel.
5. Fasteners for Gypsum Sheathing: Galvanized, Type "S" screws, 1-1/4" in
length.
F. Metal Trim Products:
1. Control Joint: U.S.G. No. 093, all zinc.
2. Metal Trim: U.S.G. No. 200 Series, all zinc, type as recommended by
manufacturer of use intended.
3. Corner Bead: National Gypsum or U.S.G. No. 100 "Perf-A-Bead" and "Dur-
A-Bead".
Section 09100 - Drywall Construction: Page 09100- 4
G. Joint System:
I "Perf-A-Tape!'joint system utilizing joint compound, tape and topping
compound manufactured by U.S. Gypsum or National Gypsum.
2. Reinforcing Tape: "Perf-A-Tape".
3. Joint Compound: All purpose ready-mixed "Perf-A-Tape" cement.
4. Joint Compound for first and second coats for ceiling board installations
shall be U.S. Gypsum Durabond.
H. Acoustical Sealant: As manufactured by United,States Gypsum Company. The
sealant shall be resilient, permanently flexible, shrink and stain-resistant and have
long life expectancy.
I. For suspended gypsum board ceilings, provide galvanized, 8 gauge galvanized,
annealed hanger wire, 1-1/2" cold-rolled carrying channels, 25 gauge galvanized
metal furring channels and 16 gauge tie. At Contractor's option, provide U.S.G.
Drywall Suspension System, utilizing 1-1/2" wide cross channels, complying with
fire ratings indicated. All carrying channels and furring channels shall be hot-
dipped galvanized.
J. Provide all necessary carriers and framing to receive items built into or recessed in
gypsum wallboard partitions and ceilings.
PART THREE: EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Start of work under this section shall constitute acceptance of surfaces as
satisfactory to receive work.
3.02 ERECTION AND-INSTALLATION
A. Gypsum drywall shall be installed in well-ventilated, totally enclosed areas, with
temperatures uniformly maintained within the range of 55 degrees F to 70 degrees
F. Maintain temperature until building is occupied.
B. Wall Assemblies: Refer to Drawings for wall types and assemblies, including fire-
rated assemblies. Completed assemblies shall conform to Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc., tests or other tests indicated and/or specified. Finish joints as
specified herein where fire-rated assembly will be exposed to view.
C. Wood Stud Walls:
1. See Section 06100 - Rough carpentary
Section 09100 - Drywall Construction: Page 09100 -5
2. Conditions not specifically specified in this section shall be installed as
recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Supplementary Framing:
1. Install framing, furring, blocking and bracing at openings and
terminations in work, and at locations required to support fixtures,
equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings and similar work which
cannot be adequately supported directly upon the gypsum board
alone.
Install framing/furring and gypsum wallboard assembly as required
to conceal piping, conduit, etc. Finish as specified herein.
E. Gypsum Wallboard Over Wood Framing:
1. Apply gypsum wallboard to supports with long dimension parallel to
supports and all abutting ends and edges occurring over framing
member flanges. Wallboard of the maximum practical length shall
be used to minimize end joints. All end joints shall be neatly fitted
and staggered. Joints on opposite sides of the partition shall be so
arranged as to occur on different studs. Wallboard shall be cut
neatly to fit around all outlets and switch boxes.
2. Space Type S drywall screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. in the
field of the board and 8 inch o.c. staggered along the vertical
abutting edges.
3. Items such as fire extinguisher cabinets, etc., recessed in rated
walls shall be backed up with the proper plies of the specified 5/8"
fire-rated gypsum drywall to maintain the integrity of the fire-rated
wall. '
4. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing drywall partitions at structural
abutments. Provide 1/4" to '/"space and trim edge by flat taping.
Seal joints with acoustical sealant. Do not fasten drywall directly to
stud system runner,tracks.
F. Shaft Wall Construction: Comply with manufacturer's installation and with ASTM C
840 and GA 216 for gypsum board application and finishing, and with ASTM C 752
for metal support installation
1. Anchor and fasten materials and components to comply with ratings
and performance requirements and to comply with governing
regulations.
2. Do not bridge building expansion joints with drywall shaft system;
frame both sides of joints with furring and other support as
indicated.
Section 09100 - Drywall Construction: Page 09100 - 6
3. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing to support
fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings and similar
work which cannot be adequately supported directly on the gypsum
shaft wall system,
4. Isolate shaft system from transfer of structural loading to system,
both horizontally and vertically. Provide slip or cushioned type
joints to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading. Comply with
details shown and with manufacturer's instructions.
5. Sea[ perimeter of drywall shaft work where it abuts other work.
Install a second bead of acoustically sealant in a location and
manner which will prevent dislocation by air pressure differential
between'shaft and external spaces. Sea[joints and penetrations in
the work; comply with manufacturer's instructions.
. 6. Finish joints as called for herein.
G. Adhesive Application of Gypsum Wallboard:
1. All surfaces receiving adhesive shall be free of dirt, grease, oil and
other foreign substances. Rub surfaces lightly to remove burrs and
other surface imperfections.
2. Store adhesive at approximately 70 degrees F for 24 hours prior to
application to facilitate ease of flow.
3. Use adhesive only with adequate ventilation. Employ precautions
regarding proximity to fire or smoking.
4. Adhesive shall remain in the original container, except during use,
with container being unopened or covered at all times.
5. Do not apply ad'hesive more than 15"minutes prior to installation of
wallboard. Apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's
printed instructions. Butt joints of drywall tightly, and hold in place
until adhesive takes initial set.
6. Remove excess adhesive without damage to the gypsum wallboard.
H. All cutting of ends and cutouts for switches or outlets, etc., within the field of the
wallboard are by this Subcontractor. Locate all electrical outlets covered by this
work; cutouts are not to be larger than items received and in a manner acceptable
to Architect. All cutouts must be made by knife, not by hammer.
I. Apply corner beads to all external angles. Apply casing beads where indicated on
the drawings.'
J. Built-ins etc., recessed in fire-rated walls shall be backed up with the proper
number of layers of 5/8" type X (Firecode C) gypsum drywall to maintain the
integrity of the'fire-rated wall.
Section 09100 - Drywall Construction: Page 09100 - 7
K. Piping in Walls: Where piping is to run inside stud walls, cut holes in studs (do not
punch tops) to align at proper height for piping. Permit installer of piping to thread
piping through as work progresses.
L. Suspended Gypsum Board Ceilings:
1. I-pins shall be stainless steel. Furnish and install hanger wire at
intervals as required to accommodate suspension system. Firmly
secure No. 8 soft annealed galvanized wire with sufficient length to
level carrying channels into position. Carrying channels (1-1/2" cold
rolled channels) to be installed 48" o.c.
2. Use %" and 1-1/2" cold, rolled channels to frame furred-down
sections. At light fixtures or any opening that interrupts the main
runner or furring channels, reinforce grillage with Y4" cold, rolled
channels 16" o.c. with ties as recommended by manufacturer or use
double strand, 16 gauge tie wire as specified. Frame around
openings such as light fixtures, with additional framing members as
required. -
3. At Contractor's option, install U.S..G. Drywall Suspension System.
Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for installation and
installation requirements for maintaining integrity of the fire-rate
assembly specified. ,
4. Apply gypsum panels of maximum practical length with long
dimension at the right angles of furring channel. Center end joints
over channel web; fit joints neatly and accurately; stagger end joints
from those in adjacent abutting ends. Space screws 5/8" and 2"
from butted side and end joints, respectively. Use 1-1/4" screw
length for 5/8" thick panels.
5. Gypsum wallboard shall be properly supported around all cutouts
and openings in the ceiling.
6.. Finish joints as called for herein.
M. Ceiling Board Installations:
1 Install specified board over the framing/suspension system, with hat
channel spacing not exceeding 16" centers.
2. Install gypsum panels with 1/8" to 1/16" space between butted ends,
with the length of the panel perpendicular to the framing members.
Secure into place using stainless steel Type S drywall screws
spaced at 8" centers at edges and in field. Ends of panels must
occur over framing member.
3. Embed joint tape over all joints and angles with,Durabond joint
compound. Apply a second coat of the Durabond joint compound
over all joints and angles as soon as taping coat has hardened.
After the second coat of Durabond compound has hardened, apply
Section 09100- Drywall Construction: Page 09100 - 8
the finishing coat of the AII.Purpose joint compound, finishing joints
as called for herein. Refer to Section-09900, Painting.
N. Gypsum Sheathing --Install gypsum sheathing vertically over wood framing. Attach
to framing using specified screws spaced at 4" centers at perimeter of board and 8"
centers at intermediate supports and at bracing members. Joint treatment shall be
as follows:
1. Apply fiberglass joint tape to all joints, overlapping at intersections
by the width Of the tape.. Apply approximately a 3/8" bead of the
specified caulking along the joint. Embed the caulk into the entire
surface of the tape with a trowel. Apply enough caulk to each
exposed fastener to cover completely when troweled smooth.
O. Accessories:
1. Joint compound and perforated tape shall be used on all face joints
and internal angles formed by the intersections of walls. Final
application of joint compound shall be sanded smooth. Apply
compound in three coats at screw holes, sanding between coats.
2. Provide metal trim,-corner beads and expansion joints as shown on
the drawings and/or as required, in single lengths. At least two
coats of joint compound shall be applied over beads and each coat
feathered out onto panel faces. Control joints shall be spaced 30
feet o.c. each way, maximum, at door frames where possible.
Control joints shall be installed only in walls/partitions that exceed
the 30' dimension, such as an uninterrupted, continuous wall.
3. Moisture-resistant sealant, as recommended by the drywall
manufacturer shall be applied to all raw cut edges and nail heads of
moisture-resistant gypsum board. Sealant'shall be brush applied as
directly by manufacturer.
3.03 PARTITION PERIMETER CAULKING —WALLS WITH ACOUSTICAL
INSULATION
A. Cut panels for loose fit around partition perimeter. Leave a groove no more than
1/8" wide. Apply a W minimum round bead of sealant each side of runners
including those used at partition intersections with dissimilar wall construction.
Immediately install panels, squeezing
eezing sealant into firm contact with adjacent
surfaces. Fasten panels as specified herein. Gypsum panel joint treatment shall
be as specified herein.
3.04 COMPLETION
A. Leave gypsum wallboard ready to receive finish painting, as scheduled on
drawings
Section 09100 - Drywall Construction: Page 09100- 9
3.05 PARTITION IDENTIFICATION
A. Corridor partitions, smoke stop partitions, horizontal exit partitions, exit enclosures
and fire walls shall be effectively and permanently identified with signs and
stenciling in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Such
identification shall be above a decorative ceiling and in concealed spaces.
Suggested wording: "FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIER— PROTECT ALL OPENINGS".
3.06 CLEANUP I
A. At the completion of this work, remove from the site all excess materials and debris.
Leave entire work ready for the application of scheduled finishes.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for protection gypsum
drywall work from damage and deterioration during remainder of construction
period.
B. Touch Up: Return after application of primer but before application of top coats, to
inspect surface of substrate for smoothness and damage, and repair surface or
touch up joints to satisfaction of the Architect. Coordinate timing of touch up with
work of painting to avoid delays in the work.
1. This does not exclude other repairs or touch up work that may be included or
implied by these Specifications or other parts of these Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION
Section 09200 -Acoustical Tile Ceiling Systems: Page 09200- I
DIVISION 9: FINISHES
09200 -ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING SYSTEMS
PART ONE: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary
to complete the acoustical panel and ceiling the work as shown on the drawings
and specified herein.
1.01 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Substrate for anchorage of suspension systems.
B. Metal Fabrications: Metal framing/ metal fabrications for support of the ceiling
system.
C. Gypsum Wallboard: Completion of drywall partition construction prior to
installation of ceiling systems.
D. Painting: Protection of ceiling system during painting operations.
E. Wallcoverings: Coordination of wallcovering installations with the installation of the
ceiling systems.
F. Mechanical: Coordination of ceiling installation with mechanical apparatus
installed in ceiling. Provide additional supports as required.
G. Electrical: Coordination of ceiling installation with light fixture installation and other
electrical apparatus. Provide additional supports as required.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards —Materials and installation shall comply with the following:
1 Suspension systems shall comply with ASTM C 635, "Standard Specification
for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
2. Installation of ceiling systems shall comply with ASTM C 636,
"Recommended Practice for Installation of Acoustical Tile and Lay-In
Panels".
3, Guidelines for Seismic Restraint— Direct Hung Suspended Ceiling Systems
as published by the Ceilings & Interior Systems Contractors Association,
latest edition. Comply with requirements for the applicable seismic loading.
Section 09200-Acoustical Tile Ceiling Systems: Page 09200 -2
4. ASTM E 580—Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile
and Lay-In Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint.
B. Installer Qualifications: Firms with not less than three (3) years of successful
experience in installation of acoustical ceilings similar to requirements for this
project.
C. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units
and suspension system components with other work supported by or penetrating
through ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition systems.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers: The following manufacturers are acceptable for use on
this project*subject to compliance with project requirements:
1. Armstrong Ceiling Systems.
2. USG Interiors, Inc.
3. The Celotex Corporation.
4. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit copie s of technical data, shop drawings and two (2) 12" x 12" physical
samples of each type ceiling tile proposed for installation. Submit to the Architect
in accordance with Section 01340. .
B. Extra Stock: Furnish one (1) carton/box of each type ceiling the installed.
Cartons/boxes shall be labeled identifying the type ceiling tile. Excess ceiling
materials shall be boxed, labeled and turned over to the Owner.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Care shall be taken in handling all portions of the ceiling during transportation and
at the job site. All material must arrive at the job site packed in heavy, unopened
cartons bearing the manufacturer's labels. Store material under cover, in a dry
location and in a manner to prevent damage. Broken, chipped or cracked panels
shall not be installed.
B. SUBMITTALS: Manufacturers specifications.
Section 09200 -Acoustical Tile Ceiling Systems: Page 09200 - 3
PART TWO: MATERIALS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Ceiling Tile Type I — 24"x24"x 5/8" Armstrong, non-directional Fissured, lay-in
ceiling tile designed for installation with a 9/16" exposed tee suspension system.
Ceiling the shall have an NRC of 0.55; CAC of 35; light reflectance of 0.80; UL
labeled for a flame spread rating of 0-25 tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Suspension System, Intermediate Duty: Mechanical suspension system shall be
exposed grid design, pre-painted low-sheen white.
1.' Suspension system for all ceiling types and luminous ceiling shall be formed
from commercial quality cold-rolled steel electro-galvanized coated.
2. The suspension system shall have the following components:
8. Main tee with a double web design and with a rectangular bulb, with
15/16" exposed flange with rolled cap. The suspension system
shall have integral reversible splice.
b. Cross tee with double web design and with a rectangular bulb; with
web extending to form a positive interlock with main tee; with the
lower flange extended and offset.
C. Wall molding with an angle shape.
d. Hanger wires shall be No. 12 annealed, galvanized.
e. kpins shall be stainless steel.
PART THREE: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Acoustical material shall be installed under conditions as outlined in the current
bulletin of the Acoustical Materials Association. All areas to receive suspended
acoustical ceiling shall be broom cleaned and uninterrupted for free movement of
scaffolding.
B. The suspension system shall support the ceiling assembly with a maximum
deflection of 1/360 of the span. Space main tee suspension members 4'_0" o.c.
Space hanger for main tees not more than 6" from the end, and not more than 4'-0"
o.c., across the length. Provide additional hangers as necessary for support of
fixtures (one wire at each corner of each fixture) and other items so as not to cause
excessive deflection and at each side of suspension system splices. Support main
tees only from hangers. Do not bear on walls or partitions. Do not suspend system
from conduits, pipes, metal roof deck, ducts, etc. . Hang only from structure.
Support cross runners from main runners. Interlock ends of cross runners with
main runners. In all cases, the ceiling assembly shall be level 1/8".
Section 09200 -Acoustical Tile Ceiling Systems: Page 09200 -4
1 Install splay hangers or other means of seismic restraint as required to meet
the requirements of ASTM E 580. Do not attach hangers to piping, conduit,
duct or wood decking. Provide carrying trapeze support where obstruction
cannot be avoided by splaying hanger 45 degrees from vertical or less.
C. Install moldings at walls, partitions, columns, pipes and other obstructions that
extend through and above the ceiling system. Securely attach moldings with
appropriate fastening devices spaced not over 16" o.c.
D. Install panels to rest on flanges of inverted tees with board units fitting neatly
against abutting surfaces and supported by wall angels. Balance border areas to
avoid units less than V2unit width wherever possible.
E. Install hold-down clips in accordance with applicable code requirements.
3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Upon completion of the ceiling installation, remove from the job site all excess '
materials and debris. Clean ceiling tiles prior to final inspection.
B. Protect completed installations until the date of Substantial Completion. Remove
and replace any tiles which are and that have become discolored or damaged, at
,no expense to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Section 09300 - Tile: Page 09300 - I
DIVISION 9: FINISHES
09300 - TILE
PART ONE: GENERAL:
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials equipment and services necessary
to complete the ceramic tile work as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
Section Includes materials and installation of the floors, the bases and tile walls and
shower receptors.
. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Cast-In-Place Gyperete topping.
B. Sealants and Caulking: Sealing expansion and control joints in floors.
C. Gypsum Wallboard: Substrate for wall tile.
D. Toilet and Bath Accessories: Coordination of tile installation with the installation of
the toilet and bath accessories.
E. Entrance Mat: Brass edging strip installed at perimeter of the recess for mat.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable manufacturers —The following manufacturers are acceptable for use on
this project subject to compliance with project requirements:
1 American Olean Tile Company.
2. Dal-Tile Corporation.
3. American Marrazzi Tile, Inc.
4. ' Florida Tile Division of Sikes Corporation.
B. Publications: A copy of the following standards shall be kept on the job by the
Contractor at all times: USAS 137.1, American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
Standard Specifications; Latest Edition of Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation by
the Tile Council of America. These standards shall be referred to for the
installation.
C. Floor tile shall comply with the slip-resistance requirements of the Americans With
Disabilities Act (ADA).
Section 09300 -Tile: Page 09300 -2
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 011340:
1. Copy of Master Grade Certificate bearing certification mark of Tile Council of
America, signed by both the manufacturer and the sub-contractor.
2. Adhesive manufacturer's Certification of Compliance to required standard.
3. Sample panel, approximately 12", square for each color, pattern and type of
tile intended to be used. Samples shall include all tile accessories. Panels
shall be properly labeled on back with names of project, product and
contractor. Samples shall show limit of range to be expected on the tile
installation.
4. Sample marble threshold showing color, markings and finish.
B. Obtain approval of sample submittals before delivering any products to job site.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all products to job site in manufacturer's unopened, original, standard
containers with grade seals unbroken and-labels intact. Keep the cartons dry.
1.06 EXTRA STOCK
A. Supply extra 2% replacement stock of each type tile installed. Deliver to Owner in
manufacturer's original cartons with labels intact. All unused stock shall also be
turned over to the Owner.
PART TWO: MATERIALS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Tile Schedule:
1. Vestibule, breakfast buffet, pantry, guest laundry and vending area:
Dal Tile, Product - Monticito, color MI 21 Alba. 12" x 12". 4" cove base and
matching grout.
2. Public restrooms.
Dal Tile, Product - Monticito, color M121 Alba. 12"x 12". 4" cove base and
matching grout.
3. Guest bathroom:
Dal Tile, Product - ED-02 Edgefield, color Beige. 12"x 12". 4" cove base and
matching grout.
Section 09300 - Tile: Page 09300 - 3
4. Swimming Pool:
Dal Tile, Product- LS-01 Landscape.
Wall Tile color GoIld Rush
Floor Tile color Hydra Textured Surface,
5. Lobby fireplace:
Dal Tile. Product and color to be determined.
B. Provide all miscellaneous shapes, special shapes, including buflnoses, necessary
for a complete installation. All external corners shall be bullnosed (unless
specified/indicated otherwise), internal corners shall be square.
C. Setting Materials for Thin-Set Installation of Tile:
1 Floor Tile:
a. Mortar: Factory prepared mix conforming with ANSI Al 18.1, similar
to Bostik Tile-Mate.
b. Grout: Latex Portland cement, similar to Bostik Sanded Hydroment
Grout for joints wider than 1/8", and Bostik Non-Sanded Hydroment
Dry tile Grout for joint width 1/8" and less, color(s) as selected by
the Architect. Each type of grout shall have Bostick Hydroment
Multi-purpose Acrylic Latex Additive#425 added to the grout mix.
2. Wall Tile:
a. Adhesive: Water-resistant, organic complying with ANSI 136.1,
type 1, similar to Bostik,500 Multi-Purpose Ceramic Tile Adhesive.
Provide primer and sealer as recommended by the adhesive
manufacturer.
b. Grout: Latex Portland cement, color(s) as selected.
D. Materials for Thin-Set Installation — Decorative Floor Tile: Latapoxy 210 Epoxy
Adhesive and Grout System as manufactured by Laticrete International, of
Woodbridge, Connecticut. Color admixture(s) as selected by Architect.
E. Materials for Construction of Tile Shower Receptor:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C-1 50 Type I
2. Sand: ASTIVI C-1 44 P I
3. Mortar: I part Portland cement, 4 parts damp sand by volume. Use an
admixture to make mortar bed water resistant.
4. Reinforcing at Receptor: 2" x 2" 16/16 gauge wire mesh.
5. Shower Pan: "Composeal".
6. Grout: Latex Portland cement
Section 09300 -Tile: Page 09300 -4
F. Sealant for application around perimeter of plumbing fixtures (waterclosets, urinals,
tubs, etc.), between the and another material, shall be white, fungicidal one-part
silicone rubber sealant comparable to Dow Corning 782or 784.
G. Refer to Section 07920 for sealant for use in floor tile control/expansion joints.
H. Thresholds shall be Grade A Georgia Marble, thickness required to make transition
between tile and adjoining surfaces, and shall comply with ASTM C-503, for
exterior use and abrasion resistance. Thresholds shall be free from cracks, chips,
stains and other defects, uniform to tone and coloring. Color(s) as selected.
PART THREE: EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. All surfaces receiving tile shall be dry, clean, free from oily or waxy films., Do not
start work until all grounds, anchors, hangers, electrical and mechanical work in or
behind the tile have been installed. Inspect subfloors which are to receive the
covering. Correct defects or conditions that will interfere With or prevent a
satisfactory tile installation. Do not proceed with installation until such defects or
conditions have been corrected. The starting of installation work in a room or
space shall imply acceptance of the surfaces to receive the the in that space.
J
B. Do not install any materials until temperature of materials and substructures have
been maintained at or above 50 degrees F minimum for a period of 24 hours.
3.02 INSTALLATION —GENERAL
A. Where possible, lay out work so that no the less than half-size occurs. For heights
stated in feet and inches, maintain full courses to produce nearest attainable
heights without cutting tile. Obtain exact locations of expansion joints and
accessories before installing tile.
B. Marble thresholds shall be installed at each door opening where the begins. Install
each threshold in a bed of mortar and set as indicated on the Drawings. One piece
of marble will be used for each threshold. Notch thresholds at door jambs to follow
profile of door frame.
C. After tile work and grout is dry, apply continuous sealant in the control joints, where
the butts tubs, perimeter of waterclosets, perimeter of urinals, where the buts
ceilings and where the butts other materials.
Section 09300 -Tile: Page 09300 - 5
D. As the work progresses, all surfaces shall be cleaned with burlap. Upon
completion scrub the entire installation with fiber brushes and water. Do not use
acid or metal scrapers. Before traffic is permitted over finished the work, cover the
floors with untreated building paper or board walkways. Cracked, broken or
damaged tiles shall be removed and replaced prior to final inspection.
3.03 TILE INSTALLATION
A. Thin'set floor tile installations, including decorative tile, shall be cement mortar
bonded application similar to number F1 13, Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation,
Tile Council of America. Install the using materials specified herein for the
particular tile. Comply with setting materials manufacturer's recommendations for
preparation of substrate, mixing and application/installation.
B. Thin set wall tile installation shall be organic adhesive application similar to number
W223, Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation Tile Council of America.
C. Mud-Set Shower Receptor Construction: Cement mortar tile installation at showers
shall comply with number B416, Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, Tile
Council of America.
3.04 FLOOR CONTROUEXPANSION JOINTS
A. Floor the shall be aligned to show uniform joints and then allowed to set until firm.
Tile shall be set with all joints in alignment and shall be uniform and true,
maintained straight from wall to wall, uniform in width for entire length of wall in
either direction.
B. Provide expansion and control joints over control and expansion joints in substrate
(floors). Provide expansion joint at the perimeter abutting walls. Consult with
Architect before constructing any control and expansions joints for location
verification. Expansion or control joints shall be % inch wide, through the the and
bed, shall be provided and constructed as recommended by the Tile Council of
America, Inc.
1. Joints shall be sealed with sealant not less than % inch deep.
3.05 REPAIR
A. Any loose, uneven or misaligned tile shall be removed and reinstalled at no
additional expense to the Owner.
3.06 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. Remove all excess materials and debris from the job site. Leave entire work
in a neat condition ready for final inspection.
Section 09300 -Tile: Page 09300 - 6
B. Protect the completed installations of the the from damage until the date of
Substantial Completion. Any the damaged during this period of time shall be
replaced at no expense to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Section 09530 -Acoustical Treatment: Page 09530 - 1
DIVISION 9: FINISHES
09630 -ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT .
PART ONE: GENERAL:
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials equipment and services necessary
to complete the acoustical treatment as shown on the drawings and specified
herein. Section Includes materials and installation of acoustical blanket type
insulation in wall assemblies.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Gypsum Wallboard: Sound attenuation blankets installed in conjunction with the
gypsum wallboard system.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance, flammability and insurance ratings
indicated, and comply with regulations as interpreted by governing authorities. A
flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 25 shall not be exceeded when tested
in accordance with ASTM-E 84.
B. Sound Transmission Ratings: Install acoustical insulation to provide indicated STC
ratings when tested per ASTM E 90.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit copies of technical data to the Architect.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
PART TWO: MATERIALS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Thermifiber, LLC (United States Gypsum)
"Thermafiber Fire Attenuation Fire Blanket", paperless, 3" thickness, 2.5 pounds
per cubic foot density, thickness as shown on Drawings. Provide widths for tight fit
between framing members.
Section 09530 -Acoustical Treatment: Page 09530 -2
PART THREE: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Partitions: Install blankets in full height in stud cavities in all assemblies as
indicated. Batts shall be friction fit between the framing. Install Batts full height of
partitions leaving no voids or spaces exposed. Fit batts behind electrical outlet
boxes, pipes and other items placed in walls. Butt ends of blankets together, and
fill all voids. Stuff insulation into all cracks and joints to provide a full layer of
material.
B. Where friction fitting in wall assemblies is impractical, use a pistol type hand
stapler and attach blanket to back of gypsum panel at each corner at least 2" from
edges and in center of blanket. Use paper washer or staple over a 6d nail laid flat
on the blanket to prevent the staple from pulling through the blanket.
C. Hold Insulation back a minimum of 3"from recessed light fixtures and/or other heat
generating apparatus which are built into the wall systems.
3.02 CLEANUP
A. Upon completion of the installation of the insulation, remove from the site all excess
materials and debris and leave ready for the next sequence of work to be
performed.
End of Section
Section 09640 - Stone Fabrications: Page 09640- 1
DIVISION 9: FINISHES
09640 •STONE FABRICATIONS
PART ONE: GENERAL:
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary
for the installation of : '
1. Granite vanity tops with underslung lavatory at each top assembly.
2. Marble tub/shower surrounds.
- 3. -Introsul roll-in shower base and surround.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Sealants and Caulking: Caulking installed between wall and splash and between
splash and top.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: Substrate for marble items.
C. Painting: Protection of marble surfa6es during painting operations.
D. Toilet and Bath Accessories: Coordination of toilet and bath accessories with the
marble installation.
E. Plumbing: Coordination of shower surround installations and vanity top
installations with plumbing trim installations. Underslung lavatory bowl is specified
under Section 15400. Plumbing trim provided and installed under Section 15400.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Shop Drawings. Show panel layouts for each specific area. Show all
required trim pieces and complete installation details. Submit manufacturer data
on lavatory bowl.
B. Samples: Submit samples for color selection.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE.
A. Vanity tops with cut-out for lavatory bowl shall meet or exceed ANSI standards for
plastic plumbing fixtures, ASNI Z 124.3 for lavatories.
Section 09840 - Stone Fabrications: Page 09640 -2
B. Provide complete installation of vanity top, underslung lavatory bowl and tub
surround in a sample Guest room for Architect's review prior to installation in any
other areas. This installed and approved surround and vanity shall establish the
standard of workmanship in all other Guest Rooms.
C. Acceptable manufacturers: The following manufacturers are acceptable for use on
this project subject to compliance with project requirements.
1. Tub surrounds - Introsul, P.O. Box 1393, Perry, Georgia 31069.
2. Vanity tops - Belstone.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Ship, receive and store materials in manufacturer's original crates. Store in
weathertight area, above grade and in a manner to prevent damage, discoloration
and intrusion of foreign matter,
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Install materials in areas that have had temperatures of materials and substrates
maintained at or above 50 degrees F minimum for a period or 24 hours.
PART TWO: MATERIALS
A. Man-Made Marble: Homogeneous, molded reconstituted marble. Material shall
not be coated (gelcoat), laminated or of composite construction. Finish for all
exposed surfaces and edges shall be "satin". Color(s) shall be as selected by the
Architect from manufacturer's standard selection.
1. Tub/ Shower Surround: Sultrex as manufactured by Introsul, 103 Industrial
Park Drive, P.O. Box 1393, Georgia 31069. Provide Y4" thickness material
with all exposed surfaces and edges finished. 5 panel assembly . Provide
trim pieces as required for complete and watertight installations. Provide
two (2) soap dishes at each tub and one (1) at each shower. Soap dishes of
the same material to match the wall panels. Soap dishes at tubs shall be 6-
11/16"x3-5/8", without washcloth holder. Soap dish at showers shall be 3-
5/8" corner design. Refer to Drawings for locations of soap dishes at tubs
and showers. Match color of wall panels.
B. Adhesiveand Sealant for Tub/Shower Surrounds: Adhesives shall be approved by
tub surround manufacturer.
Section 09640 - Stone Fabrications: Page 09640 - 3
C. Granite:
I Vanity/Counter Tops: Granite lavatory and vanity countertops. 3/4" thick.
Belstone color"Tunas fahtastico". Provide one-piece vanity tops with cut-
out for lavatory bowl and granite apron. Vanity top shall.have a "no-drip"
edge. Loose end splashes shall be provided for field installation.
PART THREE: EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. All surfaces scheduled to receive the marble shall be dry, clean and free of foreign
substances that would be detrimental to the marble installation. Masonry surfaces
shall have all joints struck flush. Correct irregularities prior to installation of any
marble. Commencement of installation indicated acceptance of substrate.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Cutting of panels shall be from the back side to prevent damage to the surface of
the panel. Firmly support panels while cuffing, drilling, or sawing to prevent
breaking or cracking.
B. Fit panels into place. Mark locations of any and all penetrations. Make all
necessary cuts, and check panel for proper fit.
I
C. Apply a Y4" bead of the specified adhesive to the back side of the panel,
approximately 2' from the outside edges, then make an "X" with the adhesive in the
middle of the panel. Set the panels in place, plumb and level, and brace for a 24
hour period. Install all required trim pieces for a complete installation.
D. Vanity Top Installations: Attach tops to supports/bases units using corrosion-
resistant fasteners, compression clamps and waterproof adhesives, utilizing means
and methods indicated on the manufacturer's shop drawings. Coordinate
installations with plumbing trim installations.
E. Seal all joints using the specified sealant. Seal joints where marble panels buff
another material.
3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Cleaning: Clean all panels, removing all excess sealant, dirt, dust and all other
foreign matter.
B. Protection: Protect completed installations until date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Section 09660 - Resilient Flooring: Page 09660 - 1
DIVISION 9: FINISHES
09660 - RESILIENT FLOORING
PART ONE: GENERAL:
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work includes all labor, material, equipment and services necessary
for the installation of
1. Resilient floor tile.
2. Resilient base.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Cast-In-Place Gyperete topping.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: Completion of gypsum wallboard partitions prior to installing
flooring and base.
C. Carpeting: Coordination of the carpet installation with the installation of the
resilient base.
D. Painting: Coordination of painting operations with resilient flooring and base
installations. Protection of resilient flooring and base during painting operations.
E. Wallcoverings: Coordination of wallcoverings installations with installation of
resilient base material. Hold wallcovering up from floor slab a minimum of 3".
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Tile and base samples of each color selected, samples of accessory items, and
manufacturer's product data for adhesive(s) shall be submitted to the Architect
B. Submit bound copies of maintenance manuals describing the care of installed
materials.
C. Extra Stock: Furnish not less than 200 square feet of each type, size, pattern and
color installed. Materials shall be from the same run as the installed tile. Provide a
minimum of 20 linear feet of base, roll stock only. Such items shall be provided in
unopened cartons for Owner's maintenance requirements.
Section 09660 - Resilient Flooring: Page 09660 - 2
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturer— Floor Tile: The following manufacturer is for
establishing quality and performance.
1. Armstrong World Industries, Standard Excelon, Imperial finish.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store materials in manufacturer's original, unopened packaging.
Containers shall indicate manufacturer's brand name, color and pattern and
production run color code. Protect materials against damage and freezing. Store
resilient flooring materials in spaces where they will be installed for at least 48
hours before beginning installation.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIRE M ENTS/JO B CONDITIONS
A. Maintain minimum temperature of 65 degrees F in spaces to receive the
resilient flooring, for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation
and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Subsequently, maintain
minimum temperature of 55 degrees F in areas where work is completed.
B. Moisture content of floor slabs at time of installation shall be 5% or lower.
PART TWO: MATERIALS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. - Resilient Floor Tile: 12"x12"x1/8" thick vinyl composition.
B. Base: Rubber, 4" high, coved at resilient flooring and straight at areas of carpet
installation, roll stock only. Provide premolded interior and exterior corners,
C. Resilient edging strips required, shall be the beveled type and shall match flooring.
Provide the following as manufactured by Mercer Plastics Company.
1 Resilient Flooring to Concrete: #633 "Tile Reducer".
2. Resilient Flooring to Carpet: #400 "Custom Edge".
3. Carpet Edge Reducer: #160 "Universal Reducer".
D. Adhesives: As recommended by the base, flooring and stair tread manufacturers.
E. Primer, Crack Fill and latex leveling compound as recommended by the tile and
manufacturers for the material and substrate involved.
Section 09660 - Resilient Flooring: Page 09660 - 3
F. Cleaner and wax shall be as recommended by the resilient flooring manufacturer.
PART THREE: EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A. Installations shall not begin until the work of all other trades, including painting, has
been completed or near completion.
3.02 EXAMINATION OF SURFACE
A. Examine the substrates for the purpose of determining their fitness to receive the
floor tile and base. If the substrate is found to be not in proper condition, notify the
General-Contractor before proceeding with the laying of the floors. No flooring or
base shall be installed until all defects in the substrates have been corrected. No
floors shall be installed over areas that have been treated with chemical
compounds without approval of the adhesive manufacturer.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Preparation: After the floors have been thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter,
apply a thin film of adhesive and spread evenly with a cement finisher's trowel with
notched edges as recommended by the tile manufacturer. Prime concrete floor
areas as recommended by the floor tile manufacturer.
B. Floor Tile: Tile shall be laid, starting in the center of the rooms/areas, worked
towards the wall with no borders, except at doors where tile color changes. The tile
shall be laid in pattern as indicated/scheduled, with each the laid tightly abutting
the adjacent tile. Install tile flooring in checkerboard pattern where no special
pattern is indicated or scheduled. Do not use less than 1/2t!le in either direction.
Each the shall be thoroughly cemented in place.
C. Edging Strips: At all door openings having floors of other material and where no
threshold is provided, install the specified edging strip.
D. Resilient Base: The resilient base shall be applied, making certain that all parts
are neatly secured to the wall. Butt joints shall be tight, flush and even.
3.04 CLEANING/FINISHING
A. Cleaning of the resilient flooring materials and base shall be done in accordance
with the flooring manufacturers' recommendations.
Section 09660 - Resilient Flooring- Page 09660 - 4
B. After cleaning of the resilient flooring, apply two (2) coats of plastic floor finish or
wax, as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Each coat shall be buffed to a
lustrous finish.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect newly installed flooring with layers of undyed and untreated building paper.
Do not allow traffic across the newly installed flooring. Protect installations until the
Date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Section 09680 - Carpeting: Page 09680 - I
DIVISION 9: FINISHES
09680 -CARPETING
PART ONE: GENERAL:
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work includes all labor, material, equipment and services necessary
for the installation of :
I Owner-furnished carpeting and carpet cushion. Installations will include
direct glue-down and over carpet cushion.
2. Provide installation of carpet base in areas scheduled, including the binding
of the tope edge of the carpet base.
3. Provide and install carpet markers for floor cleanout locations.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Cast-In-Place Gyp-crete topping over wood subfloor.
B. Finish Carpentry: Coordination of installation of wood base with carpet
installations.
C. Resilient Flooring: Coordination of resilient flooring and resilient base installations
with the carpet installations.
D. Painting: Coordination of painting with carpet installation.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The entire carpet installation is to be performed by personnel experienced in carpet
installation and whose primary occupation is carpet installation. The practice of
employing men trained in other trades or common laborers to install carpet will not
be acceptable.
B. The installation contractor shall be totally responsible for the accuracy of his
measurements on total yardage requirements, individual floor yardage
requirements, dye log yardage requirements. No requests for carpet or installation
extras will be considered due to measurement or take-off errors by the installation
contractor.
Section 09680 - Carpeting: Page 09680 - 2
C. Prior to installation, the carpet manufacturer shall provide a letter to the Owner,
signed by an officer of the firm, certifying all specifications of samples submitted for
approval have been met or exceeded in the manufacture of the carpet.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The following shall be submitted to the Contractor from the Owner for coordination
and bidding purposes.
I One 24"x1 8" quality1color sample of each coloration and carpet type shall be
submitted. Sample must be labeled with manufacturers and suppliers'
names. Samples submitted will be assumed to be the type, quality, color
and weight to be installed.
2. A copy of a printed installation manual written by the carpet manufacturers
technical services department shall be submitted.
3. Copies of manufacturers maintenance data; refer to Section 01700.
4. After carpet order is placed, submit roll register lists. Such lists to remain on
job site until after all carpet has been delivered and installed.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Care shall be taken in the handling of all carpet during transportation and at the job
site. The manufacturer's label, original mill wrappings must be on all carpet when it
arrives at the job site. Each roll shall have its register number properly attached.
Store material under cover in a dry location and in a manner to prevent damage.
For a period of seven days prior to installation and at all times after installation the
temperature in all areas receiving carpet shall be maintained at a minimum of 68
degrees F.
1,06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Installer: Installation contractor shall coordinate all his activities with those
of the General Contractor.
B. Environmental: The carpet substrate temperature shall remain at 65
degrees F for 24 hours before installation and 40 hours after the installation.
Take the reading from a thermometer placed directly on the substrate.
1.07 GUARANTEE
A. Installer shall be required to relay any carpet that does not provide an
attractive, wrinkle free appearance, and shall correct any condition due to
faulty installation which may appear for a period of one year from the date of
the complete installation.
Section 09680 - Carpeting: Page 09680 - 3
PART TWO: MATERIALS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Carpet and Carpet Cushion: Provided by Owner, Installed by Contractor.
B. Tack Strips: Water-resistant plywood strips as required to match pad thickness
and in compliance with CRI 104, Section 11.3. Provide commercial type with three
(3) rows of pins. Strips shall be prenalled for anchoring into concrete,
C. Carpet Transitions: Refer to Section 09660.
D. Carpet Adhesive for Gluing Carpet to Floor: Non-staining, low odor, solvent free,
with no alcohol, glycol or ammonia, waterproof and strippable, and as
recommended by the carpet manufacturer for the installations involved. Adhesive
shall comply with OSHA Regulation 29 CFG 1910-1200. All containers shall
contain safety date sheets and be available at the job site for inspection.
PART THREE: EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Floor surfaces to receive carpeting shall be inspected by the Carpet Contractor,
and he shall promptly notify the General Contractor of any and all defects in the
floor which affects this work in order that they may be corrected before start of this
work.
B. Proceeding with this work shall be deemed as acceptance by the Carpet Contractor
of the pertinent floor areas, and he shall be held responsible thereafter for
installation of this work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Thoroughly broom or vacuum clean surfaces to receive carpet free of dirt, moisture,
oil and grease and any substance that will prevent the adhesive from bonding to
the concrete surfaces.
3.03 INSTALLATION —GLUE DOWN
A. Carpet shall be installed in accordance with carpet manufacturers
recommendations for seaming techniques and seaming cement. Installation shall
be direct glue-down method employing waterproof, strippable adhesive as
recommended by the carpet manufacturer. Seaming techniques shall be as
recommended by the carpet manufacturer.
Section 09680 - Carpeting: Page 09680 - 4
B. Carpet shall be installed stringer to stringer, using continuous lengths and as broad
widths as possible-cut edges shall be trued and appropriately treated to form non-
raveling joints where exposed. The substrate temperature should remain at 65
degrees F for 24 hours before installation and 40 hours after the installation. Take
the reading form a thermometer placed directly on the substrate.
C. Carpet seams shall be held to a minimum.
D. Metal binder bars shall be installed at all areas where floor covering material or a
carpet edge that does not abut a vertical surface.
E. Installed carpet shall be free of spots, dirt, or soil, and shall be without tears, frays,
or pulls.
3.04 INSTALLATION —OVER CUSHION
A. Carpet and carpet cushion shall be installed in accordance with carpet
manufacturer's.recommendations for seaming techniques and seaming cement.
Installation shall be stretch-in tackless method.
-.13. Carpet cushion (pad) shall be spot glued to the concrete floor slabs. The lay of the
cushion shall be at right angles to the run of the carpet. All cushion seams shall be
taped with cushion manufacturer's approved cushion tape. Install additional
cushion, for sound seal, under rental unit corridor doors and rental unit connecting
doors.
C. The specified tack strips shall be used to attach the carpet to the floors. The
gripper shall be contacted and/or nailed to the floors for a minimum of 300 pound
test. Gripper shall be continuous around the area to be carpeted, and shall be
placed no more than Y4" from the outer edge of the carpet.
D. Carpet shall be cut in the longest lengths possible to eliminate unnecessary cross
seams. All seams shall be heat seamed and shall not separate under a minimum
of 300 pound test. After carpet has been seamed together, it shall be power
stretched in place. This stretching shall be in three (3) directions to give a tight,
wrinkle free surface. The use of a "knee kicker" will not be permitted for anything
other than the positioning of the carpet. All edges of the carpet that meet another
floor surface shall be secured with the specified edging strips.
E. Power Stretching:
1 Stretch-in installations must be power stretched uniformly length and width
1% to 1.5% using a power stretcher; refer to attachments at the end of this
Specification Section.
Section 09680 - Carpeting: Page 09680 - 5
2. When Graphic Action Bac Carpet is provided, a uniform length and width
power stretch of .75% to 1% is acceptable.
3. A carpet covered 4" x 4" buffer block measuring at least 48", in length must
be used between power stretcher and wall. The carpet contractor is
responsible for any wall damage.
4. A wall trimmer must be used to trip carpet along walls and abutments. Any
wall finishes cut or damaged will warrant a back charge.
5. Trimmer must be adjusted to leave sufficient excess carpet to tuck into
gullies.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Upon completion of the carpeting, the installation shall be reviewed by the
Architect, installer, and Contractor prior to Substantial Completion Inspection.
3.06 CLEANING/CLEANUP
A. On completion of the carpet installation, all dirt, carpet scraps, etc., must be
removed from the surface of the carpet. Any soiled spots or excessive adhesive on
the carpet shall be removed with a cleaner recommended by the carpet
manufacturer. All loose pieces of face yarn must be removed with sharp scissors.
All carpet scraps and excess pieces shall be retained at the job site and rolled into
a neat bundle for delivery to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Section 09900- Painting: Page 09900 - I
DIVISION 9: FINISHES
09900 - PAINTING
PART ONE: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary
to complete the painting work as shown on the Drawings and Specified herein
including.
I. Surface preparation of surfaces to be painted.
2. Touching up of prime coats and other preparation necessary prior to finish
painting.
3. Painting, staining and otherwise finishing of new surfaces as
indicated/scheduled on the Drawings and specified in this and other
Sections of this project Manual.
A. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials including primers,
emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether
used as prime, intermediate or finish coats.
B. Surfaces to be Painted: Except where natural finish of material is specifically noted
as a surface not to be painted, paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors or
materials are designated in "schedules". Where items or surfaces are not
specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or areas. If
color or finish is not designated, Architect will select these colors from standard
colors finishes available.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Structural Steel: Painting of exposed steel members.
B. Metal Fabrications: Painting of exposed metal items.
C. Finish Carpentry: Painting, staining and otherwise finishing of finish carpentry
items.
D. Cabinetry and Millwork: Painting, staining and otherwise finishing of the cabinetry
and millwork items.
E. Sealants and Caulking: Coordination of sealant and caulking installation with
application of paint.
F. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Painting of all hollow metal work.
Section 09900 - Painting: Page 09900 - 2
G. Finish Hardware: Installation of hardware items after finish painting is complete.
H. Gypsum Wallboard: Surface preparation and printing of gypsum wallboard
systems.
I. Mechanical: Painting of mechanical equipment exposed to view and exposed to
weather.
J. Electrical: Painting of electrical equipment exposed to view and exposed to the
weather.
11.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers— Benjamin Moore & Company of Montvale, New Jersey,
or equivalent.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced
by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thihners approved by paint
manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.
C. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections of these specifications in which prime
paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings systems for
various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information or
characteristics of finish materials provided for use, to ensure compatible prime coats
are used.
D. Sample Area: A sample area of block filler shall be applied on a designated interior
wall of the project as well as a sample area of the "final appearance". Such sample
walls must be reviewed and accepted by the Owner and the Architect prior to
proceeding with any other paint application.
E. Acceptable Surfaces: The paint contractor and General Contractor shall be solely
responsible for determining that the wall is ready and suitable to be painted.
F. Acceptance of Paint Application: Each coat of paint must be reviewed and
accepted by the Architect before the succeeding coat of paint can be applied. Any
coat of paint applied without this review will not be considered as painted.
G. Spray Equipment: Block filler and paint for masonry walls must be roller or brush
applied. Spray equipment will not be permitted for this work.
Section 09900 - Painting: Page 09900 - 3
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit'color chips and manufacturers product data to the Architect for color
selection and product review. Submittals shall include spread and coverage rate
per coat.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products and materials in original unbroken containers.with legible labels
intact bearing manufacturer's brand and name with application instructions printed,
thereon. Paint shall arrive on the job ready mixed, except for tinting of undercoats
and possible thinning as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Environmental Requirements: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations as to
environmental conditions under which coatings and coating systems can be
applied. Do not apply finish in areas where dust is being generated.
C. Protection: All materials used on the job shall be stored in a single place
designated by the Contractor. Such storage place shall be kept neat and clean.
All damage to the storage area and its surroundings shall be repaired. Any soiled
or used rags, waste and trash must be removed from the building every night, and
every precaution taken to avoid the danger of fire.
D. Protect surfaces and objects inside and outside the building, as well as the
grounds, lawns, shrubbery, and adjacent properties against damage. The painting
contractor shall h old himself responsible for damage to adjacent furnishings.
PART TWO: MATERIALS
3.1 MATERIALS
A. All products shall be premium grade selected for the substrate. All paint and primer
applied in the field shall be the products of a single manufacturer.
B. Textures- Kockdown, Orange peel, "popcorn'
C. Extra Stock: Supply an extra 2% of the total quantity of each paint used with a
minimum of three (3) gallons of each paint. Furnish in manufacturer's unopened,
labeled containers for Owner's use.
3.2 PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Color Schedule as prepared by the interior designer.
Section 09900 - Painting: Page 09900 -4
B. Finishes:
a. Interior walls - eggshell.
b. Interior ceilings -flat.
C. Interior or exterior steel - semi-gloss or gloss.
d. Exterior wood - medium gloss.
e. Interior wood stain - low lustre.
C. Exterior Painting Schedule:
1. Galvanized Metal, Including Weather Exposed HVAC and Electrical
Equipment:
a. First coat: SW Galvite B50W3 Series, DFT mils: 2. Omit first coat
on items where compatible factory primer has been applied.
b. Second and third coats: SW Industrial Enamel B54 Series, DFT
mils: 2.5, each coat.
2. Ferrous Metals, Including Weather Exposed HVAC and Electrical
Equipment:
a. First Coat: SW Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50 Series, DFT mils: 3.
Omit first coat on items Where compatible factory primer has been
applied.
b. Second and third coats: SW Industrial Enamel B54 Series, DFT
mils: 2.5, each coat.
3. Copper/Aluminum, Including Weather Exposed HVAC and Electrical
Equipment:
a. First coat: SW Zinc Chromate Primer B50YI Series, DFT mils: 3.
b. Second and Third Coats: SW Industrial Enamel B54 Series, DFT
mils: 2.5, each coat.
4. Weather Exposed Ferrous Piping:
a. First coat: SW Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50W1 Series, DFT mils:
3.
b. Second and Third Coats: SW Silver-Brite Aluminum B59SI 1
Series, DFT mils: I per coat.
5. Wood Gates:
a. Two (2) coats Olympic Semi-Transparent Linseed Oil Stain.
Section 09900 - Painting: Page 09900 -5
6. Masonry/Concrete:
a. First coat: SW Heavy Duty Block Filler B42W46 Series, DFT mils:
10.
b. Second and Third coats: SW A-1 00 Gloss, Latex House Paint AB
Series, DFT mils: 1.4, each coat.
D. Interior Painting Schedule:
1 Galvanized Metal:
a. First coat: SW Galvite B50W3 Series, DFT mils:,2. Omit first coat
on items where compatible factory primer has been applied.
b. Second and third coats: . SW Industrial Enamel B54 Series, DT mils:
2, each coat.
2. Ferrous Metals:
a. First coat: SW Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50 Series, DFT mils: 3.
Omit first coat on items where compatible factory primer has been
applied.
b. Second and third coats:. SW Industrial Enamel B54 Series, DFT
mils: 2, each coat.
3. Gypsum Drywall —Semi-Gloss Enamel Finish:
a. First coat— SW ProMar 200 latex Wall Primer B28 Series, DFT
mils: 1.5.
b. Second and Third coats — SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss
Enamel B34 Series, DFT mils: 2, each coat.
4. Gypsum Wallboard — Flat Finish:
a. First coat— SW ProMar 400 Latex Wall Primer, B28 Series, DFT
mils: 1.1.
b. Second and Third coats — SW ProMar 200 Latex Flat Wall Paint,
B30 Series, DFT mils: 1.4
5. Gypsum Wallboard — Egg Shell Enamel Finish:
a. First coat—SW ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28 Series, DFT
mils: 1.4.
b. Second and Third coats— SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Eg-Shel Enamel
B20 Series, DFT mils: 1.8, each coat.
Section 09900 - Painting: Page 09900 -6
6. Gypsum Wallboard — Gloss Epoxy Finish:
8. First coat—SW ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28 Series, DFT
mils: 1.4.
b. Second and Third coats — SW Tile-Clad 11 Enamel, B62
Series/B60V70 @ 4 Mils DFT per coat, total.'DFT mils: 8.
7. Wood—Semi-Gloss Enamel Finish:
a. First coat— SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200
Series, DFT mils: 2.
b. Second and Third coats — SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss
Enamel B34 Se(riesblFT mils: 2, each coat.
B. Wood—Open Grain and Close Grain—Stained —Satin Finish:
a. First coat— SW Interior Oil Stain.
b. Second coat— SW Oil Base Varnish —Thin one pint mineral spirits
to one gallon of varnish.
C. Third coat—SW Oil Base Varnish A661790.
9. Wood—Open Grain and Close Grain — Natural — Satin Finish:
a. First coat— SW Oil Base Varnish, B25 Series, DFT mils: 1.0.
b. Second coat— SW Oil Base Varnish, B25 Series. Thin one pint
mineral spirits to one gallon of varnish, DFT mils 1.0.
0. Third coat— SW Oil Base Varnish A66F90.
10. Concrete and Concrete Block—Semi-Gloss Enamel Finish:
a. First coat: SW Heavy Duty Block Filler B42W46 Series, DFT mils:
10.
b. Second and Third coats— SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss
enamel B34 Series, DFT mils: 2, each-coat.
11. Textured Wall Coating — Plexture Textured Coating with Eg-Shel Enamel
Finish:
a. Provide color pigmented Plexture products as manufactured by
Triarch Industries, Inc,,-of Houston, Texas and applied by as
manufactured certified applicator. Textured finish shall be as
selected by the'Architect from manufacturer's selections. Provide
manufacturers standard 5-year warranty.
b. Paint— First coat— SW ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200
Series.
Section 09900 - Painting: Page 09900 -7
C. Paint—Second and Third coats— SW ProMar 400 Latex Eg-Shel
Enamel B20 Series.
12. Textured Ceiling Coating: One (1) coat spray-Applied United States
Gypsum Imperial QT Spray Texture Finish, medlurri texture.
a. First coat,— SW ProMar Interior Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series.
b. Second coat—Apply texture coating in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations to achieve the desired
finish/texture.
PART THREE: EXECUTION,
3.1 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES.
A. This work shall be scheduled and coordinated with other trades and shall not
proceed until other work and job conditions are as required to achieve satisfactory
results.
3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Before starting any work, surfaces to receive paint finishes shall be examined
carefully for defects which cannot be corrected by the procedures specified herein
and which might prevent satisfactory painting results. Work shall not proceed until
such damages are corrected.
B. Secure approval of color samples before applying any paint or finish. All priming
coats and undercoats shall be tinted to the approximate shad of the final coat.
C. Start of painting shall be construed as acceptance of the surfaces to receive paint
or other finish.
D. Maintain temperature in building at constant 65 degrees F, or above, during drying
of plaster and masonry, and provide adequate ventilation for escape of moisture
from building in order to prevent mildew, damage to other work and improper drying
of paint. Once painting has commenced, provide constant temperature of 65
degrees F, or above, and prevent wide variation in temperature which might result
in condensation on freshly painted surfaces.
E. Surfaces to receive work described in this section shall be smooth, even, sound,
thoroughly clean and dry and free of defects which would adversely affect
application of this work. Surfaces which do not meet the tolerances or quality
requirements imposed within the specifications governing substrate construction,
shall be repaired or replaced prior to initiating this work.
Section 09900 - Painting: Page 09900 - 8
F. All materials shall be mixed, thinned, modified, and applied only as specified by the
manufacturer's direction an the container.
G. Application shall be sufficiently heavy to achieve pleasingly uniform color and lucid
effect; matching approved sample.
H. All coats shall be thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coats.
I. Inspection of Coats: Notify the Architect for inspection between coats at least 24
hours in advance. The number of coats specified are intended to provide full
coverage. Satisfactory coverage subject to the approval of the Architect.
Additional coat or coats will be required by the Architect if these coats do not give
sufficient coverage. Final coat shall match approved sample panel.
3.3 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. General:
1. Surfaces shall be clean, dry and adequately protected from dampness.
2. Surfaces shall be smooth, even and true to plane.
3. Surface shall be free of any foreign material which will adversely affect
adhesion or appearance of applied coating.
4. Remove all loose, spalling paint from previously painted surfaces utilizing
wire brushes, pressure washing or mechanical means, as required to
provide a smooth and sound substrate for the application of new paint.
5. Mildew shall be removed and neutralized by scrubbing affected areas
thoroughly with a solution made by adding two ounces of Tri-Sodium
Phosphate and eight ounces of Sodium Hypochloride (Clorox) to one
gallon warm water. Use a scouring powder if necessary to remove
mildew spores. Rinse with clear water and allow to dry before painting.
6. Efflorescence on any area that is scheduled to be painted shall be
treated as herein specified provided that the structural defects allowing
the entrance of moisture are corrected before painting.
7. Scrub off efflorescence with a commercial lime solution or one (1) part
commercial muriatic acid to five (5) parts water, then rinse with clear
water and allow surface to thoroughly dry before painting.
B. Gypsum Wallboard:
1 Fill narrow, shallow cracks and small holes with spackling compound.
'Rake deep, wide cracks and deep holes.
a. Dampen with clear water.
b. Fill with thin layers of drywall joint cement.
2. Allow to thoroughly dry.
3. Sand smooth. Do not raise nap of paper on wallboard.
Section 09900 - Painting: Page 09900 - 9
C. Wood:
1. Clean soiled surfaces with alcohol wash.
2. Except where rough exterior surface is specified, sand to smooth and even
surface, then dust or vacuum.
3. Apply shellac to all knots, pitch and resinous sapwood before priming coat is
applied.
4. Fill nail holes, cracks, open joints and other defects with wood filler or lead
putty as-required after priming coat has dried. Filler material must be
compatible with finish being applied. Color to match finish color.
D. Preparation of Ferrous Metal Surfaces:
I. Remove rust, mill scale and defective paint down to sound surface or bare
metal, using scraper, sandpaper, or wire brush as necessary. Grind if
necessary to remove shoulders at edge of sound paint to prevent flaws from
photographing through finish coats.
2. Remove dirt and grease with mineral spirits and wipe dry with clean cloths.
3. Touch-up all bare metal and damaged shop coats with specified rust-
inhibitive primer.
4. Necessary touching up of shop primer shall be done on ferrous metal
surfaces of all items installed adjacent to concrete and/or masonry prior to
any openings between metal surface and adjacent surfaces being filled in or
caulked.
E. Preparation of Galvanized Metal Surfaces:
I Remove dirt and grease with mineral spirits and wipe dry with clean cloths.
2. All galvanized steel surfaces shall be pre-treated with proprietary acid-
bound resinous or crystalline zinc phosphate preparations used according to
the manufacturer's directions prior to painting.
F. Preparation of Masonry and Concrete Surfaces:
1. Masonry surfaces must be free from dirt, loose or excess mortar and be
thoroughly dry. Perform moisture test prior to application of paint over any
masonry surface. Moisture content must be within range recommended by
paint manufacturer for the application involved.
2. Point all open mortar joints; fill all holes with mortar.
3. Comply with requirements set forth in Section 03300 for patching and
repairing of concrete surface irregularities prior to application of any paint
materials.
G. Preparation of Aluminum Surfaces: Remove dirt and grease with mineral spirits,
and wipe dry with clean cloths.
Section 09900 - Painting: Page 09900 - 10
H. Preparation of Copper Surfaces:
1. Buff or polish surfaces to bright color.
2. Remove dirt and grease from surface with a mild phosphoric acid. Wipe dry
with clean cloths.
3. Apply'finish while surface is clean and bright.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. General:
1. Protection of Adjacent Surfaces and Mixed Items:
a. The Contractor not only shall protect his work at all times, but shall also
protect all adjacent work and materials by drop cloth, covering or other
methods during progress of his work.
b. Remove and protect hardware, accessories, device plates, lighting
fixtures, factory finished work, and similar items, or provide ample in-
place protection. Upon completion of each space, carefully replace all
removed items. This work shall be done only by skilled mechanics.
c. Remove electrical panel box covers and doors before painting wall.
Paint separately and reinstall after paint is dry.
2. The undercoats of paint and enamel shall be of approximate shade of the
final coat. All metal surfaces calling for enamel or varnished finish shall first
have priming coat well sanded, and shall be sanded between coats with fine
sandpaper or steel wood that will produce an even, smooth finish. Each
coat shall be perfectly dry before applying succeeding coats.
3. Do not apply initial coating until moisture content of surface is within
limitations recommended by paint manufacturer. Test with moisture meter.
Exterior surfaces shall not be painted in damp, frosty, or cold weather. Latex
paints shall not be applied when surface or air temperature is below 50
degrees F.
4. Surfaces shall be finished the same as nearest or adjoining surfaces unless
otherwise show.
5. Exposed access doors or panels, exposed electric panelboard covers,
exposed pipes, ducts and raceways shall be painted the same color as
adjacent surfaces. All piping exposed in finished areas shall be painted as
required for interior ferrous metal. Where galvanized pipe occurs, prime
galvanized surface as specified.
6. Hardware and accessories, fixtures and similar items placed prior to painting
shall be removed or protected during painting, replaced on completion of
painting.
7. Remove silencers from metal door frames prior to.painting. Afterwards,
replace silencers.
Section 09900 - Painting: Page 09900 - 11
8. The tops, bottoms and edges of all doors to be painted shall be finished to
match the surface of the doors after the hardware has been attached. Any
door found unpainted upon the completion of the painting work shall be
taken down and painted.
9. All suction spots in concrete which are noticeable after application of the first
coat shall be touched up before applying the second coat.
10. Any exposed metal such as chairs, nails or the tie wires in reinforced
concrete slabs shall be covered with a rust inhibitive material.
11. All weather exposed HVAC and electrical equipment shall be painted.
3.6 TEXTURED WALL COATING
A. Prepare/prime substrate as'recoMmended by the manufacturer for the,
installation(s) involved.
B. Prepare and apply coating materials in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions to provide the finished texture selected by the Architect.
3.6 APPLICATION OF TEXTURED CEILING FINISH
A. Remove all foreign matter from ceilings, and provide smooth surface for finish work.
Patch low points and rough places. Prime ceiling per manufacturer's
recommendations. Mix Aristex so that material will stay in suspension while
machine is pumping. Apply evenly and with proper coverage so that no seams will
show, to a minimum thickness of 1/16". Protect all walls and adjacent areas with
masking paper.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The first finished area or item of each color scheme required shall be reviewed by
the Architect for color, texture, and workmanship.
B. First acceptable area or items shall be used as project standard for each color
scheme.
3.8 CLEANUP
A. During progress of the work, keep areas free from any unnecessary accumulation
of tools, equipment and surplus materials and debris.
B. At completion of work, the painting contractor shall remove from the premises all
surplus painting materials and all debris created by him, he shall remove all
spatters and leave his part of the work in a clean and finished condition.
END OF SECTION
Section 09952 - Wallcoverings: Page 09952 - 1
DIVISION 9: FINISHES
09952 -WALLCOVERINGS
PART ONE: GENERAL:
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work includes all labor, equipment and services necessary for the
installation of Owner furnished wallcoverings.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Gypsum Wallboard: Substrate for wallcoverings.
B. Acoustical Tile Ceiling Systems: Coordination of coiling installations with
wallcovering applications:
C. Resilient Flooring: Coordination of installation of resilient base. Hold
wallcoverings up from floor 3" to permit bonding of the resilient base to the wall
substrate.
D. Painting: Completion of painting prior to installing wallcoverings. Priming of wall
surfaces to receive wallcoverings.
E. Wall Corner Guards: Installation of wall corner guards after wallcovering
applications are complete.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Code Requirements: Fire hazard classification for all materials furnished under
this Section shall have a U.L. Class A fire rating and shall bear such U.L. label.
B. Product Features: Wallcoverings shall contain bactericidal additives to inhibit
bacteria growth and shall be mildew resistant.
C. Certification: Furnish an affidavit that all material comply with these specification
requirements.
D. Applicator Qualifications: Installation shall be by an experienced applicator
approved by the manufacturer of the material supplied.
Section 09952 - Wallcoverings: Page 09952 - 2
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Copies of manufacturer's technical and application data shall be submitted to the
Contractor by the Owner for Contractor's use in surface preparation and knowledge
of the materials to be installed.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Take care to prevent damage during delivery and handling. Store all wallcoverings
and adhesive materials in manufacturer's original containers, with manufacturer's
seals and labels intact. Store all materials in a clean, dry storage area. Storage
area temperature shall be maintained above 40 degrees F, with normal humidity.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONING
A. Wallcoverings shall be installed only when normal temperature and humidity
conditions approximate the same conditions that will exist when building is
occupied.
B. Area to receive coverings shall be a constant temperature of 55 degrees F
measured at base elevation, maintained a minimum of 72 hours prior to installation
and 48 hours after completion of installation.
C. Remove wallcovering fabric from its packaging and allow to acclimatize to the area
of installation 24 hours before application.
1.07 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Schedule installation of the wallcovering materials so as to prevent damage during
construction operations and damage as a result of movement of materials and
equipment.
PART TWO: MATERIALS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Wallcovering: Provided by Owner, installed by Contractor. The fire hazard
classification of wallcovering material shall be equal to or lower than Flame Spread
15; Smoke Developed 10, all in accordance with ASTM E 84.
B. Adhesives for wallcoverings shall be waterproof and strippable. Provide strippable
and waterproof adhesive. Adhesive shall contain a mildew and fungus inhibitor,
non-bleeding, non-staining, and shall have an equal or lower fire hazard
classification than the classification for the wallcovering fabric. Primer and
adhesive shall be produced by the same manufacturer. Provide primer and
adhesive systems from one (1) of the following manufacturers:
Section 09952 -Wallcoverings: Page 09952 - 3
1. Roman Adhesives, Inc., of Calumet City, Illinois.
a. Primer: Ultra Prime 977.
b. Adhesive: Ultra Pro 880, or, if pasting machine is used, provide
Clear Strippable Pro 880. Proof Tinted Strippable 11605.
PART THREE: EXECUTION
3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACE
A. Verify that all nails and screws are properly set and mudded. Surfaces shall show
no arises or depressions. Ensure that wall surface flatness tolerance does not
exceed 1/8" in 10', nor vary at a rate greater than 1/16" per running foot. Wall
surfaces shall be dry, free from dirt, grease, loose paint, scale, etc. Following
adhesive manufacturers instructions and contact cement manufacturer's
instructions for surface preparation.
1. Prime/ size all walls to receive wallcovering. Size substrates in accordance
with wallcovering
ring manufacturers recommendations for type of substrate.
Apply sizing material to gypsum wallboard which will permit subsequent
removal of wallcovering without damage to the gypsum wallboard paper
facing.
B. Surfaces that have been painted which are scheduled to receive wallcovering shall
be in sound condition, free of loose paint or scale. Surface shall not contain water-
sensitive materials or pigments that bleed in water or oil. Dull the surface of
enamel or gloss paint and rinse with clear water.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Examine all substrate surfaces and correct defects before beginning work.
B. Complete all other trade work that penetrates the substrate before beginning
wallcovering installation.
C. Starting work shall indicate acceptance of a suitable substrate surface.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Wallcoverihg installation sequence:
1 Install wallcoverings prior to installation of plumbing fixtures, casings, wall
plates, cabinets and millwork items, etc. Notify the Architect of variations in
color or pattern match. Do not proceed with the work until instructed by the
Architect.
Section 09952 -Wallcoverings: Page 09952 - 4
2. Use wallcovering fabric rolls in consecutive numerical sequence of
manufacture.
3. Place fabric panels consecutively in exact order they are cut from the roll
including filling all spaces above or below windows, doors or similar
penetrations.
4. Hang fabric by reversing alternate strips except on match patterns.
5. Cut or butt each panel as recommended by wallcovering manufacturer for
the type of wallcovering installed.
6. Double cutting shall be performed with a Double Cutting Tool specifically
designed for the purpose to prevent cutting substrate.
7. Trim deeply textured strip matched patterns on a work table with a metal
straight edge and an industrial razor blade.
8. Fill over doors and windows as work progresses with panels cut from
consecutive order from the roll.
9. Smooth wallcovering to surfaces with still bristle brush or a flexible broad-
knife to eliminate air bubbles and to ensure full adhesion.
3.04 EXTRA STOCK
A. Extra stock shall be rolled, bound and tagged. Identifying tag shall list
manufacturer, pattern and pattern number, quantity remaining and room number
where applied.
3.05 CLEANING AND REPAIRS
A. Clean wallcoverings of adhesives, dust, dirt and other foreign matter. Remove all
excess adhesive from surfaces.
B. Wallcoverings damaged prior to Date of Substantial Completion must be replaced
at no cost to the Owner.
C. Replace wall plates and accessories.
D. Remove all excess materials and debris from the project site. Dispose of same in a
legal manner.
END OF SECTION
Section 10165 - Laminated Plastic Toilet Partitions: Page 10165 - 1
DIVISION 10:
10165: LAMINATED PLASTIC TOILET PARTITIONS
PART ONE -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Toilet Compartments
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Support for overhead bracing.
B. Toilet Room Accessories.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers:
Model numbers for compartments manufactured by Bobrick Washroom
Equipment, Inc. are listed to establish a standard of quality for design, function,
materials, workmanship, and appearance. Other manufacturers may be submitted
for evaluation by the architect by following the conditions of the substitutions
clause. Unless approval is obtained ten days prior to the bid date, all bids shall be
based on the standard of quality. The architect shall be the sole judge as to the
acceptability of all products submitted for substitution.
B. All Components shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with requirements of Section regarding submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Data
1. Provide required number copies of.
a. Product data sheets.
b. Installation instructions.
c. Replacement parts information.
C. Shop Drawings
1. Provide required number of copies of all shop drawings.
2. Show fabrication and erection of compartment assemblies, to extent not
fully described by manufacturer's data sheets.
Section 10165 - Laminated Plastic Toilet Partitions: Page 10165 -2
3. Show anchorage, accessory items and finishes.
4. Provide location drawings for bolt hole locations in supporting members
for attachment of compartments.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver items in manufacturer's original unopened protective packaging.
B. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent physical damage or
wetting.
C. Handle so as to prevent damage to finished surfaces.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Furnish one year guarantee against defects in material and workmanship.
PART 2— PRODUCTS
2.01 CONFIGURATIONS
t.
A. Toilet Compartments shall be: Overhead-Braced. Series 1040.
2.02 COMPONENTS / MATERIALS
A. Stiles, Panels, Doors.
1. All surfaces shall be high-pressure laminated plastic NEMA
LDS-1 985 minimum thickness 0.050"with matte finish.
Color and pattern as selected by architect from Bobrick standard
colors.
2. Core
a. Stiles: 45-lb density, industrial grade, resin-impregnated,
particle board bonded to each side of an 11-gauge steel reinforcing core.
b. Panels, doors, screens, and benches: 45-lb density, industrial
grade, resin-impregnated, particle board.
B. Hardware
1. All hardware to be 18-8, type-304 stainless steel with satin finish.
Section 10165 - Laminated Plastic Toilet Partitions: Page 10165 -3
2. All hardware shall be concealed inside compartments with the exception
of out-swinging doors.
3. Hardware of chrome-plated "Zamac!' is unacceptable.
C. Latch
1. Sliding door latch shall be 16 gauge (1.6 mm).
2. Sliding door latch shall require less than 5-lb force to operate. Twisting
latch operation will not be acceptable.
3. Latch track shall be attached to door by flathead machine screws into
factory-installed T-nuts.
4. Latch handle shall have rubber bumper to act as door stop.
5. Latch shall allow door to be lifted over 16-gauge keeper for emergency access.
6. Metal-to-metal connection shall withstand a direct pull of over 940
lb, per screw.
D. Hinges
1. Cam shall be adjustable in the field to permit door to be fully closed or
partially open when compartment is unoccupied.
2. Hinges shall be attached to door and stile by theft-resistant, one-way
stainless steel machine screws into factory-installed metal inserts.
Fasteners secured directly into the core are not acceptable.
3. Metal-to-metal connection shall withstand a direct pull of over 540
lb, per screw.
E. Coat Hook
Hook shall be constructed of stainless steel and shall project no more than 1-1/8"
from face of door. Coat hook shall be secured by theft-resistant, one-way stainless
steel screws.
Section 10165 - Laminated Plastic Toilet Partitions: Page 10165 -4
F. Mounting Brackets
Brackets shall be constructed of stainless steel and shall be mounted inside
compartment. Mounting brackets exposed on the exterior of the compartment will
not be acceptable. .
G. Leveling Device
It shall be 3/8" x 7/8" steel bar welded to 11-gauge steel-reinforcing core. Leveling
device shall be chromate-treated and double zinc-plated.
H. Stile Shoe
It shall be one-piece, 4" high, type-304, 22-gauge stainless steel with satin finish.
Top shall have 90* return to stile. Patented one-piece shoe capable of adapting to
3/4" or 1" stile thickness and capable of being fastened (by clip) to stiles starting at
wall line.
I. Headrail
Headrail for Overhead Braced partitions shall be extruded, satin finish, anodized
aluminum with anti-grip profile.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Stiles, Panels, Doors, and Screens:
1. Bond high-pressure plastic laminate to core material with adhesive
specially formulated to prevent delamination. Bond edges prior to bonding face
sheets. No splices or joints in faces or edges shall be acceptable unless there are
laminate material limitations.
2. Finish thickness: 1"for uniform flush front.
PART THREE:EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Check areas scheduled to receive compartments for correct dimensions,
plumbness of walls and soundness of surfaces that would affect installation of
mounting brackets.
B. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures to assure compatibility with installation of
compartments.
Section 10165 - Laminated Plastic Toilet Partitions: Page 10165 -5
C. Do not begin installation of compartments until conditions are satisfactory,
3.02 ERECTION
A. Install compartments rigidly, straight, plumb, and level and in accordance with
manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Installation methods shall conform to manufacturer's recommendations for,backing
and proper support.
C. Conceal evidence of drilling, cutting, and fitting to room finish.
D. Maintain uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors.
3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Adjust hardware for proper operation after installation.
B. Set hinge cam on in-swinging doors to hold doors open when unlatched.
C. Set hinge cam on out-swinging doors to hold unlatched doors in closed position.
D. Clean exposed surfaces of compartments, hardware, and fittings.
End of Section
Section 10201 - Building Louvers: Page 10201 - 1
DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES
10201 - BUILDING LOUVERS
PART ONE : GENERAL.
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to
furnish and install the aluminum building louvers.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Wood stud wall framing.
B. Exterior Insulation and Finish System: Coordination of louver installation with the
application of the exterior insulation and finish system.
C. Flashings and Sheet Metal: Installation of required flashings for weather tight louver
installations.
D. Sealants and Caulking: Sealing of perimeter of louvers.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: The louver manufacturer shall be a member of the "Air Moving and
Conditioning Association, Inc."
B. Performance Requirements: Where louvers are indicated to comply with specific
performance requirements, provide units whose performance ratings have been
determined in compliance with Air Movements and Control Association (AMCA)
Standard 500.
C. Comply with SMACNN' Architectural Sheet Metal Material" recommendations for
fabrications construction details and installation procedures except as otherwise
indicated.
D. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual"for finish designations and applications
recommendations.
E. Field Measurements: Verify size, location and placement of louver units prior to
fabrication, wherever possible.
Section 10201 - Building Louvers: Page 10201 -2
F. Shop Assembly: Coordinate field measurements and shop drawings with fabrication
and shop assembly to minimize field adjustments, splicing, mechanical joints and field
assembly of units. Preassemble units in shop to greatest extent possible and
disassemble as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit copies of shop drawings and technical data to the Architect in accordance with
Section 01340. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections to
adjoining work. Indicate materials, finishes, fasteners, joinery and other information to
determine compliance with specified requirements.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store louvers and accessories on the job site, above grade, in weathertight shelter, in
manufacturer's original cartons until ready for installation.
PART TWO : MATERIALS
3.1 MATERIALS
A. Fixed Blade Louvers: Model 1322-A, extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T52, as
manufactured by the Construction Specialties of Muncy, Pennsylvania.
B. Fixed Fresh Air Intake Louvers: Model 0292-A(50%free air), extruded aluminum alloy
6063-T52, as manufactured by the Construction Specialties of Muncy, Pennsylvania.
C. The louvers shall be in shapes and dimensions as shown on the Drawings:
1 Finish' louvers with aluminum frame, extended sill piece and holes in head, jamb
and extended sill piece for fastening, as required by project conditions. Furnish
complete with 16x1 8 mesh aluminum insect screens with frames to match
louvers. Splines shall be extruded vinyl and removable to permit rescreening.
Provide all necessary anchorage devices, bolts, etc., of aluminum or stainless
steel.
2. All louvers, frames, etc., shall be given a Kynar 500 finish, color as selected by
the Architect from manufacturer's standard selections.
3. Mullion spacing shall be as required by the manufacturer, and shall be installed
on the rear side of the louver, out of view.
Section 10201 - Building Louvers: Page 10201 - 3
PART THREE - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Check all openings which are to receive the louvers. Verify that dimensions are in
agreement with the approved shop drawings. Verify that all openings are free from
irregularities which would interfere with the louver installation. Do not install the
louvers until all defects have been corrected.
B. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for
installation of anchorages which are to be embedded or set in surrounding substrate.
C. Coordinate installation of louvers with the installation of the flashing and sheet metal
work (Section 07600) and the wall assembly in which the louver is being installed.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louver units plumb, level and in proper alignment with adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages wherever possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to
screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make weathertight connection.
C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals
and openings for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.
D. Protect non-ferrous metal surfaces from corrosion by application of heavy coating of
bituminous paint on surfaces which will be in contact with dissimilar materials.
E. Provide concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers and insulations, integral to louver
system and install as work progresses to make installations weathertight.
F. Provide suitable, compatible gasket where dissimilar metals are joined.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Cleaning: .Surfaces of all louvers and frames shall be cleaned on both inside .
and outside of all foreign matter, to present a neat, clean appearance. Where
finish has become stained or discolored it shall be cleaned and have finish
restored in accordance with the louver manufacturer's recommendations.
Stained, discolored or abraded louvers and frames that cannot be satisfactorily
repaired, shall be replaced.
B. Protection: Completed installation shall be protected from damage caused by
work being performed in the surrounding area until the date of Substantial
Completion.
Section 10201 - Building Louvers: Page 10201 -4
3.4 CLEANUP
A. Upon completion of the installations, remove from the job site all unnecessary
equipment, excess materials and debris and leave ready for the next sequence of work
to be performed.
END OF SECTION
Section 10260 -Wall Corner Guards: Page 10260 - 1
DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES
10260 - WALL CORNER GUARDS
PART ONE : GENERAL.
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to
furnish and install wall corner guards at all exterior corners of the building interior.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Gypsum Wallboard: Substrate for securing corner guards.
B. Painting: Completion of painting operations prior to installation of corner guards.
C. Wallcoverings: Completion of wallcovering installations prior to installation of corner
guards.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product date and one (1) 12" long sample of the corner
guard to be.installed. Data shall include complete installation instructions,
attachment hardware and finish. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section
01340.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: The following manufacturers are acceptable for use on this
project subject to compliance with project requirements:
1. CIS Acrovyn or equivalent.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Receive and store materials on the job site in a climatized area; prevent vinyl
composition products from freezing. Store in manufacturer's original cartons, above
grade and in a manner to prevent any form of contamination or staining.
Section 10260 -Wall Comer Guards: Page 10260 -2
PART TWO : MATERIALS
3.1 MATERIALS
A. Wall Corner Guards:
Required at these locations: Guest corridors, exit stairs, guest rooms and suites,
meeting and conference areas, breakfast and pantry, lobby, vending and guest laundry.
B. Clear or colored as scheduled by interior designer.
Color: - Model VA-200. 1 1/2" x 1 1/2"x 4' long.
Clear: - Model LGA 18. 1 1/8" x 1 1/8" x 4- long.
PART THREE - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect all wall surfaces to verify that surfaces are ready to receive the corner guards.
Verify that required blocking has been installed. All painting and wallcovering shall be
complete before installing the corner guards.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install corner guards at locations listed above: Installations shall be plumb, level and
square.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect corner guards from damage until the date of Substantial Completion. Damaged
.materials shall be replaced with new materials at no expense to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Section 10300 -Prefabricated Fireplace: Page 10300 - I
DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES
10300 - PREFABRICATED FIREPLACE
PART ONE : GENERAL.
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to
furnish and install prefabricated fireplace, complete with components required for a
complete installation.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Rough Carpentry: Treated wood blocking for support of fireplace.
B. Finish Carpentry: Finish carpentry items installed in conjunction with the fireplace
installation.
C. Gypsum Wallboard: Gypsum wallboard and wallboard assemblies installed in
conjunction with the fireplace installation.
D. Mechanical: Gas piping for fireplace.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable building codes and ordinances for materials
and installation. Provide proper clearances around firebox.
B. Products provided under this section must be:
1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., tested in accordance with U.L. 127.
2. AGA listed.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data and complete installation details. Show
relationship between fireplace and building components, including methods of support
and clearances. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01340.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Ship, receive and store fireplace and accessories in manufacturers original
cartons/crates, with labels intact. All damaged items must be returned for replacement
with new materials. Damaged items must not be installed.
Section 10300 - Prefabricated Fireplace: Page 10300 -2
1.06 GUARANTEE
A. Provide manufacturer's standard 20-year warranty for materials and workmanship.
Provide 1-year warranty for installation, covering materials and installation.
PART TWO : MATERIALS
3.1 MATERIALS
A. Direct-vent fireplace, by Heat-N-Glo, Model 6000DVTFL Gas.
1. Steel fiber reinforced factory liner.
2. Mesh screen on each opening.
3. Exposed surfaces, Flat black baked enamel exposed face surfaces.
4. Full width standard firebox wire screen with pulls and gas log lighter.
5. Vent free gas logs (I.I.L. listed).
6. Key-operated, polished brass finish gas valve, located as directed by the
Architect.
7. Electrically operated timer and remote located wall switch "ON" — "OFF".
PART THREE - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installation with adjacent materials and finishes.
B. Locate keyed gas valve as required by local and State codes and ordinances.
C. Install fireplace unit in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Maintain
clearances between framing and fireplace components as required by local building
code.
END OF SECTION
Section 10350 - Flagpole: Page 10350 - I
DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES
10350: FLAGPOLE
PART ONE : GENERAL.
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to
furnish and install a flagpole.
B. Flag will be provided by the Owner.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Earthwork: Excavation and backfill for flagpole foundation.
B. Site Concrete: Concrete foundation for flagpole.
C. Cast-In-Place Concrete: Comply with applicable requirements of Section 03300.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design Criteria: The flagpole, base and all anchorage devices shall be designed to
withstand 110 mph wind speed when flying a polyester flag of 5'xB'.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit copies of shop drawings to the Architect. Shop drawings shall show materials,
finishes, accessories, wind resistance (flagged) and installation details.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Ship, receive and store the flagpole in the manufacturer's original protective wrapping.
Store flagpole in area protected from weather and moisture so as to prevent damage or
soiling.
PART TWO : MATERIALS
2.01 FLAGPOLE
A. Flagpole: Fabricated from all new seamless 6063-T6 aluminum tubing, with a
combination cone tapered and straight shaft, one piece. Flagpole shall have a total
length of 33'-0" and an exposed height of 30'-0". Model Guardian 11 by Adams Flagpole.
Section 10350 - Flagpole: Page 10350 - 2
2.02 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Ball shall be fabricated from#14 gauge aluminum with flush seam, dark bronze
anodized finish, 0.7 mil thickness.
B. Truck shall be cast aluminum, double halyard, revolving, non-fouling type, complete
with stainless steel ball bearings and two 2-3/8" minimum diameter cast nylon sheaves.
C. Two sets of#10, 5/6" minimum with waterproof polypropylene halyards shall be
provided, each equipped with two chrome swivel snaps to secure flag.
D. Two cast aluminum cleats complete with tamperproof stainless steel-socket head bolts
shall be included. Provide each cleat with cleat cover with pad lock. Finish to match
color of flagpole.
E. Base or flash collar, shall be spun aluminum, finished to match flagpole. Diameter of
collar shall be V minimum larger than diameter of foundation sleeve.
2.03 FINISH
A. After fabrication all exposed aluminum surfaces shall receive a dark bronze anodized
aluminum finish, 0.7 mil thickness. The portion of shaft below grade shall receive
heavy coat of asphaltum paint.
PART THREE - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install flagpole so that it is fixed firmly within its base and bracing system at the setting
depth indicated on Drawings and forms an angle of 90 degrees to the horizon in a
vertical plane.
B. Install lightning protection in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as
per approved shop drawings and local code requirements.
C. Excavation width and depth shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Set the flagpole manufacturer-provided foundation tube into the excavated hole as per
detail on approved shop drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. Make certaii,
that the grounding spike is properly grounded.
E. Fill the excavation in one pour with 1-2-4 concrete to the elevation indicated on the
Drawings.
Section 10350 - Flagpole: Page 10350 -3
F. After the concrete has cured, at least 14 days, erect the flagpoles. The poles shall be
centered plumb and true in the tube with temporary wood wedges and then the tube
shall be filled with screened dry sand and thoroughly tamped at 6" intervals. The
tamped sand shall be thoroughly moisture sealed with 2" of sealant. After the
installation has been observed by the Architect, the base shall be lowered into place.
G. Install all accessories according to the recommendations of the manufacturer.
H. Replace any part that has been damaged during installation or that has not been
properly installed. Where the aluminum finish has become stained or discolored it shall
be cleaned or have finish restored in accordance with recommendations of the
American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA).
END OF SECTION
Section 10520 - Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets &Accessories: Page 10520- 1
DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES
10520: FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS & ACCESSORIES
PART ONE : GENERAL.
3.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to
furnish and install fire extinguishers, fire extinguisher cabinets and fire extinguisher
mounting hardware.
3.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Rough Carpentry: Treated wood blocking for rigid attachment of wall brackets.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: Installation of gypsum wallboard prior to attachment of wall
brackets. Coordination of the wallboard system installations with the cabinet
installations.
C. Painting: Protection of installed cabinets during painting operations.
D. Wallcovering: Coordination of wallcovering installations with installation of cabinets.
3.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide fire extinguishers, cabinets and accessories by one (1) manufacturer, unless
otherwise acceptable to the Architect.
B. UL-Listed Products: Provide new fire extinguishers which are UL Listed and bearing
UL Listing Mark for type, rating and classification of extinguisher indicated.
3.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit copies of technical data to the Architect in accordance with Section 01340.
PART TWO : MATERIALS
3.1 MATERIALS
A. Fire extinguishers installed in general building areas shall be multi-purpose, 10 pound,
dry chemical type rated for Class A, B and C fires, and shall have a U.L. 4A-60BC
rating. Model: Cosmic 10E by J.L. Industries of Bloomington, Minnesota.
Section 10520 - Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets &Accessories: Page 10520 -2
B. Cabinets: As manufactured by J.L. Industries of Bloomington, Minnesota. Model
Ambassador 1017 F 10. ;
1. Non-Fire-Rated Extinguisher Cabinets: Model #10171710 with 2-1/2" return trim.
2. 1-Hour Fire-Rated Extinguisher Cabinets: Model #10171710 FX Option, with 2-
1/2" return trim.
A. Wall Brackets: Wall brackets and mounting hardware shall be furnished for wall hung
extinguishers. Provide J.L. Industries MB 846 wall bracket for 10 pound extinguisher.
Coordinate bracket type with extinguisher purchased.
PART THREE - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Wall Mounted (Bracket Supported) Fire Extinguishers: Install fire extinguishers in
areas and quantity as required by local codes and ordinances. Wall brackets shall be
anchored solidly to wall. Block walls where required in order to obtain a rigid
installation. Mount so that fire extinguisher handle is no higher than 4'-0" above finish:
floor. Install bracket-mounted fire extinguishers in the following locations:
1. Mechanical Rooms.
2. Electrical Rooms.
3. Boiler Rooms.
4. Storage Rooms.
5. Laundry.
6. Elevator Equipment Room.
7. Administrative Work Area.
A. Cabinet Installation:
1. Install cabinets to permit floor to extinguisher handle to be 48".
2. Install cabinets in areas indicated on the Drawings.
3. Cabinets shall be rigidly anchored to solid wood framing or blocking.
END OF SECTION
Section 10800 -Toilet & Bath Accessories: Page 10800- 1
DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES
10800: TOILET& BATH ACCESSORIES
PART ONE : GENERAL.
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Includes materials and installation of toilet and bath accessories.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Rough Carpentry: Treated wood blocking for the rigid installation of grab bars and
other accessories.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: Completion of gypsum wallboard installations prior to accessory
installations.
C. Tile: Completion of the tile installations prior to accessory installations.
D. Man-Made Marble: Completion of the tub and shower surround installations prior to
accessory installations.
E. Painting: Installation of mirrors and utility shelves after painting operations are
complete.
F. Wallcovering: Completion of wallcovering application prior to installation of toilet and
-bath accessories.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers for Toilet and Bath Accessories —The following
manufacturers are acceptable for use on this project subject to compliance with these
specifications:
1. Franklin Brass.
2. American Specialties Inc.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
4. A & J Washroom Accessories
5. Bradley Corporation.
6. GAMCO.
7. Hotel Resources Group.
B. Design Requirements: Comply with ANSI Al 17.1 grab bar loading requirements.
Section 10800 -Toilet & Bath Accessories: Page 10800 -2
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit copies of technical data and shop drawings for Architect's review, in
accordance with Section 01,340. Submit samples at the request of the Architect.
I
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Products shall be shipped and stored in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons.
Store items in.locked area prior to installation. Items not being installed shall remain
under lock at all times.
1.06 SPECIAL WARRANTY
A. Warrant mirror glass units for ten years against silver spoilage; begin warranty at date
of Substantial Completion.
PART TWO : MATERIALS.
2.01 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
A. All toilet accessories shall be of matching design and all from a.single manufacturer.
All grab bars shall be concealed mounting type. All grab bars shall be provided with
manufacturer's standard, galvanized steel concealed anchor plates.
B. Materials: Use AISI Type 304 stainless steel, (non-austenitic), for all parts except
mounting kits for grab bars or specific items noted otherwise. Polished stainless steel
or chrome-zamac in guest bath rooms. Satin stainless steel in public bath rooms.
C. Fasteners: Toilet and bath accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners for
substrate encountered. Concealed fasteners wherever possible.
2.02 ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
A. Refer to Drawings for locations and quantities.
B. The following list of items shall be provided and installed: Delete items not shown on
drawings or not required.
I TA-1 — Recessed toilet paper holder with,spare roll: Franklin Brass #970SF.
2. TA-1.1 —Recessed toilet paper holder, double design: Franklin Brass #977.
3. TA-2 — Recessed vanity tissue box: Franklin Brass 935.
4. TA-3 — Shower curtain rod: Franklin Brass.#161CS.
5. TA-4—Towel bar with shelf. Franklin Brass #2780SS, 24".
6. TA-5 —Vertical grab bar: Franklin Brass#524SS (non-handicapped Guest
Room baths).
Section 10800 -Toilet & Bath Accessories: Page 10800 - 3
7. TA-6 -42" and 36" Horizontal grab bars: Franklin Brass 5642 and 5636,
respectively.
8. TA-7 -30" Horizontal grab bar at tub: Franklin Brass#5630.
9. TA-7.1 -24" Horizontal grab bar at tub: Franklin Brass #5624.
10. TA-7.2-30" x 36" Two-Way Horizontal grab bar: Similar to Franklin Brass
#5660.
11. TA-8 -Double robe hooks: Franklin Brass#1302.
12. TA-9-Surface Mounted Paper Towel Dispenser: ASI #210.
13. TA-1 0-Towel Ring: Franklin Brass#5516SF.
14. TA-1 1 - Framed Mirror: Provided by Owner, installed by Contractor.
15. TA-12 -Recessed sanitary napkin dispenser: ASI #0464 (Womens' Toilet
Only).
16. TA-13 -Recessed towel dispenser and waste receptacle, Franklin 1983.
17. TA-14 -Sanitary napkirl disposal units:
Double (Back-to-Back): Franklin 1985
Single (For Wall Mounting, Recessed): ASI #0473.
18. TA-15 -Utility shelf with mop and broom holders: ASI #1315.
19. TA-1 6 -Amenity Shelf with Towel Bar: HR-1 801.
20. TA-1 7 -Folding shower seat: Bradley 956.
TA- 17.1 Removable bathtub seat, Franklin SF560
21. TA-1 8- Framed mirror, 24" x 36": Bradley#781 (Employee Toilet).
22. TA-1 9- Multi-purpose unit (soap dispenser, mirror, shelf): Bradley#133.
23. TA-20 - Soap Dispenser, surface mount. Franklin 1920
24. TA-21 -Tub Seat: AS[ #8358.
25. Surface mounted twin roll toilet paper holder: Franklin Brass #977SF.
PART THREE - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION'
A. General:
1. Each accessory shall be fastened rigidly in place, in perfect plumb, level, and
alignment. Where an accessory is mounted on or in surface having joint pattern,
it shall be mounted symmetrically within pattern. Surfaces of fastening devices
exposed after installations shall have same finish as attached accessory.
2. Consult with Architect at Project site for exact locations of accessories where
locations are not indicated on drawings, or where indicated or proposed
locations will interfere with other construction, door swings, light switches, etc.
3. Exposed surfaces of accessories shall be protected with strippable plastic or
other approved means until installation is accepted.
Section 10800 -Toilet & Bath Accessories: Page 10800 -4
B. Accessory manufacturers mounting details shall be coordinated with other trades as
work progresses. Locations of all accessories shall be shown on drawings and/or
scheduled herein.
�C. Accessories shall be installed with fasteners recommended by manufacturers in
manners to produce totally rigid installations.
D. Grab Bars: Shall be mounted with devices and fastenings as required by mounting
conditions to develop capacity to resist a downward pull of 350 pounds minimum.
3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Adjacent wall surfaces and materials shall be protected during installation of
accessories. Any damaged adjacent materials or accessories shall be repaired or
replaced at no cost to Owner. Protect installed accessories until date of Substantial
Completion.
3.03 CLEANUP
A. Upon completion of the accessory installation, remove from the job site all excess
materials and debris.
END OF SECTION
Section 10900 - Wardrobe Specialties: Page 10900 - 1
DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES
10900: WARDROBE SPECIALTIES
PART ONE : GENERAL.
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. The scope of work includes all material, labor, equipment and services necessary for
furnishing materials and installation of the Guest Room coat rack and closet shelves.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Rough Carpentry: Treated wood blocking for permanent and rigid installation of the
closet shelves.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: Completion of the gypsum wallboard work prior to the installation
of the closet shelves.
C. Wallcovering: Completion of wallcovering installation prior to installing closet shelves.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers —The following manufacturers are acceptable for use on this
project subject to compliance with requirements:
1. Clairson International.
2. Schulte Corporation.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit copies of manufacturer's product data and shop drawings to the Architect in
accordance with Section 01340. Submittals shall show materials, finishes,
closet/shelving layouts and complete installation details.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Store all shelving on the job site in a manner to prevent any damage. Any bent or
damaged shelving will not be acceptable.
Section 10900 -Wardrobe Specialties: Page 10900 -2
PART TWO : MATERIALS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Guest Room Coat Rack and shelving shall be Oak end support panels with chrome-
plated steel tubing or wood slats by Magnuson Group, Product MC-HWA, or equivalent.
Provide mini-hook hanger bar. Color Medium Hardwood stain.
PART THREE - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Coat racks and shelves shall be installed and anchored in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Field cut to required length and caps installed over
the cut ends.
B. Support braces shall be installed so that spans in do not exceed spans recommended
by shelving manufacturer.
C: Mounting heights shall be as indicated on the drawings.
D. Protect completed installations until the date of Substantial Completion. Replace
damaged items at no additional expense to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Section 11175 - Laundry Chute: Page '11175- 1
DIVISION 11: EQUIPMENT
11176: LAUNDRY CHUTE
PART ONE : GENERAL.
3.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Includes materials and installation of the linen chute, complete.
3.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Prepared openings in wood framing to permit passage of the chute and chute vent.
B. Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous metal support items required for the complete
installation of the chute. Floor frames at each floor penetration.
C. Firestopping: Installation of firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated assemblies.
D. Asphalt shingles roofing: Penetration of roof system. Flash and make weathertight.
E. Gypsum Wallboard: Coordination of construction of gypsum wallboard systems with
erection of chute.
F. Automatic Fire Sprinkler System: Fire protection system installed in conjunction with
the linen chute.
3.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers —The following manufacturers are acceptable for use on this
project subject to compliance with these specifications:
I Wilkinson Chutes, Inc.
2. U.S. Chutes Corporation.
3. Cutler Manufacturing Corporation.
3.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit copies of technical data and shop drawings of the chute in accordance with
Section 01340. Shop drawings shall indicate factory fabricated items and field
fabricated items, connections for sprinkler and sanitizers and required writing
connections and conduit runs for wiring, including door interlocks.
Section 11175 - Laundry Chute: Page 11175 -2
PART 2— PRODUCTS
3.1 MATERIALS
A. Chute: The chute shall be made of 16 gauge aluminized steel, 24 inches in diameter
and shall have the following features and accessories.
1. Intakes: 21" x 21" stainless steel, full opening, self-closing, side-hinged, hand-
operated doors bearing 1-1/2 hour 650 degree F U.L. "B" Label. Provide
cylinder lock on each intake door. The words "SOILED LINEN" shall be
embossed in each intake door.
2. Discharge—Laundry Chute: 24" x 30" Top-hihged stainless steel door held
open with U.L. approved 165 fusible.link, 1-112 hour "B" label construction with
steel angle frame assembly, drain panel and adjustable support pedestal.
3. Vent: Chute shall extend full diameter through roof to metal top vent cap 4'-0"
above roof level.
4. Accessories: 1/2" IPS sprinkler head above top intake. Provide additional 1/2"
sprinkler heads at every second intake.
5. Construction: The cute shall be fully factory assembled and all joints except
those required to separate the sections for shipment and installation shall be
welded or lock-seamed tight. The intake doors shall be bolted in place on
throats formed into the cute tube. All chute sections shall flash inside the
sections below and there shall be no bolts, clips, or other projections inside the
chute to snag the flow o'f material. Prepositioned support frames shall assure
proper intake levels and there shall be an expansion joint in the chute between
all support points. Discharge hoppers and offsets where required shall be
reinforced and separately supported in the impact area.
A. Firestopping Material: For firestopping at each penetration of floor deck, provide loose
mineral fiber insulation, such as, United States Gypsum Company "Thermafiber" Safing
Insulation. Refer to Section 07270. Provide 16 gauge zinc-coated steel sheet with
flange under deck at each penetration for retainage of firestopping material. Omit
firestopping where chute is enclosed in fire-rated chase.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION
A. Sheet metal workers shall assemble the chute in place, align and anchor as required.
B. Plumbers shall run water supplies to the sprinkler heads.
C. Electricians shall run conduit and wiring to electrical equipment such as interlocks or
heat/smoke detectors.
Section 11175 - Laundry Chute: Page 11175 - 3
D. Firestopping: Fill annular space between chute wall and each floor construction with
mineral fiber insulation, moderately packed to 10 lbs. To 20 lbs. Per cubic foot density.
Secure insulation in its space by close-fitting sheet metal flanges anchored to bottom of
each deck. Chute expansion movement shall not be obstructed. Install firestopping
prior to erection of chute enclosure walls.
E. Erect walls around the cute after all other work is completed. Cute intake door frames
shall be set square and flush with.the finish wall face as the walls are erected.
F. Flash around roof vents as required by Sections 07530 and 07600.
3.2 CLEANUP
A. Upon completion of the erection and installation of the linen chute, remove from the site
excess materials and debris.
END OF SECTION
Section 11451 -Appliances: Page 11451 - I
DIVISION 11: EQUIPMENT
11451: APPLIANCES
PART ONE : GENERAL.
2.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Includes installation and final connection of all Owner-furnished appliances. All
appliances and FFE items are to be supplied by the Owner and installed by the
Contractor.
2.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Cabinetry and Millwork: Coordination of the installation of the cabinet tops with the
appliances. Coordination of cut-outs for appliances.
B. Mechanical: Roughins and final connections.
C. Electrical: Roughins and final connections.
2.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All electrical equipment shall have U.L. labels. All gas fired equipment shall be AGA
listed.
2.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Shipment of appliances shall be scheduled so that it does not arrive at the job site
before adequate storage facilities have been prepared. All items shall arrive at the job
site in manufacturer's original crates. All items shall be examined for shipping damage
at this time in the presence of Owner's Representative. Any damages shall be reported
immediately to the Architect. The General Contractor shall be responsible for
unloading, inspecting and providing adequate storage for this equipment.
PART TWO : MATERIALS
2.1 APPLIANCES
A. Appliances: Refer to Drawings and Country Inn guidelines for all appliances and their
locations.
Section 11451 -Appliances: Page 11451 - 2
PART THREE - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Verify that roughin requirements have been completed and are of the correct capacity,
voltage, etc., prior to installation and connection of any appliance item.
B. Set into place each piece of equipment. Respective Sub-Contractors (Plumbing,
Ventilating and Electrical), shall properly connect each ritem of appliance and put same
into operation. Vendor shall verify that each piece of equipment has been properly
installed and connected and is ready for operation.
C. Final installation and connection of the appliances shall meet all local health code
requirements and the requirements of the "National Sanitation Foundation".
D. The equipment vendor shall return to the job site after installation is complete to verify
proper installation and to perform "startup" and "test" of each piece of equipment.
End of section
Section 12675 - Entry Mat: Page 12675 - I
DIVISION 12: FURNISHINGS
12675: ENTRY MAT
PART ONE : GENERAL.
3.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Includes materials and installation of the recessed walk-off mat in Vestibule.
3.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Cast-In-Place Concrete: Substrate for recessed mat.
B. Tile: Tile at perimeter of mat forming recess for mat.
3.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Copies of complete technical data and shop drawings describing the material specified
and its installation shall be submitted for review. Submit data in accordance with
Section 01340.
3.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Mats and frame shall arrive at job site in unopened crates with manufacturers label
intact. Store mat under cover and above ground in a manner that will prevent damage
and intrusion of foreign matter.
&6 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING
A. Until the recessed entrance mat is to be installed, provide temporary filler of plywood or
fiberboard in mat recesses. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and
project is near time of project completion.
PART TWO : MATERIALS
3.1 MATERIALS
A. Entrance mats shall be Bronze anodized aluminum hinges with vinyl/acrylic tread rails
with carpet inserts, Group Pedimat 11, as manufactured by Construction Specialties,
Inc., of Muncy, Pennsylvania. Color as selected by interior designer.
Section 12675 - Entry Mat: Page 12675 - 2
PART THREE - EXECUTION
3.1 MAT INSTALLATION
A. Mat Frame: Mat frame shall be assembled at the job site and installed so that the
upper edge will be level with the surrounding finished floor surface. A concrete base
Y4" below the floor surface shall be screeded inside the mate frame recess, using the
edge provided by the frame as a guide. Install latex screed for recess leveling and mat
substrate. The frame shall be anchored into the concrete with anchors provided by the
frame manufacturer at spacings indicated on the approved shop drawings.
B. Mat Installation: After all surrounding work is complete and project is ready for
Substantial Completion inspection, install mat in recess provided. .Coordinate top of
mat surfaces with doors that swing across mats, to provide underdoor clearance. Mats
shall be left clean, level and square in opening.
END OF SECTION
I
., Section 13150 - Swimming Pool & Spa: Page 13150 - 1
DIVISION 13: SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13150: SWIMMING POOL & SPA
PART ONE : GENERAL.
3.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Includes furnishing materials, labor and equipment required for the construction of the
swimming pool and spa, the furnishing and installation of all pool related requipment.
Also, includes swimming pool and spa initial chemical supply required for startup.
B. Construction to be provided by the Pool Contractor:
Building Permit for all pool work. Complete engineering design to the approval of
the Architect and The New York State Health Department.
2. Excavation for pool and spa area and concrete foundation work by General
Contractor.
3. Reinforced concrete pool and spa foundation walls and base slab by General
Contractor. Pneumatically-applied (gunite) concrete walls and floor by Pool
Contractor.
4. Marcite white plaster interior pool finish.
5. One row of 6" wide frostproof ceramic tile at waterline and on the deck of the
pool. Depth markers shall indicate 3 FT, 4 FT, 5 FT, etc.
6. Non-slip coping, profile as detailed.
7. Non-slip concrete steps where indicated.
8. Pool recirculation systems, piping of Schedule 40, NSF approved PVC with
solvent weld fittings, brass ball valves.
9. Heaters for swimming pool and spa.
10. All safety equipment required by the State and local Health Department.
11. Pressure relief equipment for groundwater hydrostatic pressure.
A. Preparatory work and work performed by other trades in conjunction with the swimming
pool construction shall be performed as specified in other sections of this Project
Manual, shall conform to health department requirements and the requirements of other
governing agencies, and shall consist of the following: '
1. Concrete deck with non-slip finish sloped Y4" per foot to deck drains or as
required by local codes and ordinances; refer to Section 03300.
2. Expansion joints with sealant at pool coping and deck.
3. All site grading,'clearing, leveling, filling, compacting.
4. Removal of all existing underground appurtenances in pool area.
5. Coordination of setting of deck equipment in deck.
6. Pool equipment enclosure.
7. Plumbing:
Section 13150- Swimming Pool & Spa: Page 13150 -2
a. Pool catch basin construction, as required by local codes and
ordinances.
b. 4" pipe opening in filter extended to catch basin for backwash disposal.
a. Sewer work for backwash, deck drainage, etc.
b. Water to and connection to fillspout with shut off and winterizing valve
with access boxes as required.
C. Backflow prevention on all connections to pools from domestic water
system.
d. Deck drainage system.
1. Electrical: All wiring, switching, controls, disconnects, starters, as required for
pump motors, underwater lighting, grounding of pool and accessories as per
code. Pool contractor shall furnish underwater lighting, two (2) 300 watt at pool
and one (1) 200 watt at spa, 12 volt, each with a one-piece cord and PVC
conduit stub-out and weatherproof transformer; installation of transformer by
electrical contractor. Room equipment exhaust shall be in General Contract.
2. Water and electricity in pool area for construction purposes.
3. Access to the pool area to allow operation of normal construction equipment.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The pool contractor shall have been in the concrete (gunite) pool construction business
for a minimum of five (5) years. This contractor shall show evidence of at least three
(3) completed and operating swimming pools of the size and scope as indicated on the
drawings and specified herein.
B. Tests: This contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, instruments or other services
required for the complete and satisfactory test and adjustment of all pool equipment.
Test all piping with water pressure of 50 PSIG except main drain and vacuum lines,
which shall be tested with water pressure of 25 PSIG. Hold the test pressure 24 hours,
repair any leaks. Test again before burial or concealment.
C. Certificate of Inspection: The Contractor shall deliver to the Architect a certificate of
inspection and acceptance of the work by the appropriate authorities for the system
involved.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
D. Submit copies of technical data relating to equipment and accessories and shop
drawings as required for the construction of the pool to the Architect for review. Submit
health department approved shop drawings sowing pool and spa construction, piping
diagrams, all materials and electrical requirements. Submit in accordance with Section
01340.
E. Instruction Manuals: The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner copies of printed
operation and maintenance instructions as called for in Section 01700 and 01720.
Section 13150 Swimming Pool & Spa: Page 13150 - 3
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
F. Protection: Protect adjacent areas and construction from damage due to his
construction means, methods and.workmen. All patching.and repairing to adjacent
surfaces or areas shall be performed by the trade who originally installed the work with
costs of same being borne by the pool contractor.
1.05 GUARANTEE
G. Guarantee to the Owner all work performed under this contract to be free from defects
in�workmanship and materials for a period of one year from date of Substantial
Completion. Defects arising in the pool structure, circulating system, etc., during this
period shall be promptly remedied by th6 Contractor upon notice by the Owner, without
additional cost to the Owner.
PART TWO : MATERIALS
3.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. All materials and equipment shall be new, free from defects, of first quality and entirely
suitable for the intended service. Materials and equipment used in this work which are
subject to approval by such agencies as UL, AGA, ASME, NSF, etc., shall bear the
appropriate label or stamp of approval.
B. Schedule of Pool Equipment, Pool Fittings and Deck Equipment:
1. The pool shall have filtratiori and piping systems. Pressure type filtration plants,
NSF approved, with self-priming pump, integral hair and lint strainer, extra
strainer basket. Provide pump and filter with capacity to meet local code
requirements for a 6-hour swimming pool turnover or as required by local health
department if more stringent. Diaphragm type pumps will not be acceptable. All
valves shall be bronze- ball valves. Piping used in vacuum lines, recirculating
lines and drain lines shall be PVC-1 High-impact, Schedule 40
with PVC solvent weld fittings. Face piping shall be Schedule 40 PVC. Face
piping shall include all piping between the discharge side of the circulating water
pump and the discharge point of the backwash line and-the connection of the
return line to the pool.
2. The pool shall have chlorinator systems. Chlorinator— liquid chlorination or
brominator. Provide "Soaker Type" chemical feeders approved by National
Sanitation Foundation. Hypochlorinators,will not be acceptable. Acceptable
manufacturer are Bio-Lab or as approved by the Architect.
3. Water testing kit for chlorine and pH readings, Guardex 4 in I set.
4. Thermometer, 6- with lanyard.
5. Automatic Surface Skimmers, NSF approved.
Section 13150 - Swimming Pool & Spa: Page 13150 - 4
6. Pool Fittings:
a. Pool Wall Inlet: Swimquip #8429.
b. Auto Water Level Control: Rec-Reonics #32-550.
C. 1-1/2" Hydrostat Calve: Frost#A41452.
d. 1-1/2" Hydrostat Tube: Swimquip 7017-157.
e. 1-1/2" Skimmer: American products#844201.
f. I" Fill Spout: Frost#A41240.
g. Pool Main Sump: Sta-rite #7017-0103.
h. Pool Main Drain: Sta-rite #7017-0741.
7. Underwater Lights:
a. 200W/12V and 300W112V Lights: Hayward 64 Series with required
transformer(s).
b. Deck Junction Box— 3H: American Products#783102.
8. Deck Equipment:
a. Grab Rail: Swan Manufacturing #DMS-1 0013.
b. Deck Anchor: Swan Manufacturing IAS-1 00.
C. Escutcheon Plate: Swan Manufacturing #IEP-1 00.
d.* Ladder, 3 Tread: Swan Manufacturing #LFB-24-3B.
e. Handicapped Lift— Econo-Lift No. ECI OOA: Unit shall be hydraulic
powered with a self-contained nitro-tech plated arm. Provide with a 62"
lifting/lowering range and a 360 degree rotation. The mast arm, boom
arm and connecting arm shall be stainless steel. Provide with deck
sleeve.
9. Maintenance Equipment:
a. Vacuum Cleaner Head: Rainbow Flex-A-Vacuum, Swivel Wheel.
b. Vacuum Hose: Spiralock 1-1/2"05', heavy-duty.
C. Vacuum Pole: Rainbow#812-16, 8'-16'.
d. Utility Pole: Frost#A-40177-2.
e. 18" Wall Curved Brush: A & B Brush #6001900.
f. Algae Brush: A & B Brush #5121912.
9. Pole Adapter: Frost#A-41420 with brass bolts and wing nuts.
h. Leaf Net: Recreonics #10-105 with 12' long aluminum handle.
10. Safety Equipment:
a. Life Buoy: Cal-June, Inc. #U.S.C.G. Provide two (2).
b. Throw Line (40' minimum): Berkley Manufacturing #B&W, Y4".
C. Life Hook: Rainbow#153, double arm.
d. Life Hook Pole: Rainbow#820-16.
e. Life Hook Pole Adapter: Frost#A-41420 with brass bolts and wing nuts.
Section 13150 - Swimming Pool & Spa: Page 13150 -5
11. Other Materials:
a. Spine board with ties.
b. 16 Unit first aid kit.
C. Vacuum Gauge for Pump Suction.
d. Pressure Gauge at Filter.
e. Vacuum wall fitting with plug.
f. Fill water for pool to be added to pool at face piping in Mechanical Room
via backflow preventer and taps to face piping. Backfiow preventer and
water to same by Plumbing Contractor.
g. Main Drain Frame and Grate, Cycolac, 12" x 12" size.
h. Hydrostatic Relief Valve assembly, 2" size.
L Depth Marking Tiles (numbered tiles) at waterline and set in coping in the
plane of the deck; show 3 FT, 4 FT, 5 FT, etc. Provide "No-Diving' and
step marker tiles. Step marker tiles shall be 2" x 2" unglazed ceramic
mosaic, color as selected by the Interior Designer.
j. Valve Tags.
k. Provide a sign as directed by the Architect, with all pool rules and code
requirements which are required to be displayed to swimmers. The design
and wording shall be as directed by the Owner.
I. Start up chemicals and start up of pool and spa systems.
C. Swimming Pool Heater: A.S.M.E. coded and labeled. Design of the heater shall be
based on maintaining a temperature of 80 degrees F. Acceptable manufacturer is
Raypak. Dehumidifier will provide supplemental heat for the swimming pool.
a. Furnish in-line thermostat with 2 degree F intervals and a minimum
range of 60 to 120 degrees F.
D. Provide an adequate quantity of chlorine for swimming pool startup.
E. Concrete and reinforcing steel shall be as called for in Section 03300.
F. Waterproofing Admix: 1ponex, as manufactured by IPA Systems of Philadelphia,
Pennsylvania. Refer to Section 03300 for requirements. The swimming pool structure
shall contain this waterproofing admix.
G. Provide all steel frame supports, inserts, anchor bolts, sleeves, hanger materials, etc.,
for the adequate and safe support of piping and equipment. Concrete pads will be
provided by the General Contractor.
H. Provide vibration isolation bases, housekeeping pads and elements for all equipment.
Section 13150- Swimming Pool & Spa: Page 13150 - 6
PART THREE - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. Excavation & Backfill by General Contractor. See appropriate Sections.
3.02 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Concrete placement and operations shall be in accordance with Section 03300, "Cast-
In-Place Concrete". Concrete foundations and base slab by General Contractor. Pool
walls and floor slab shall be pneumatically-applied (gunite) concrete. The floor slabs of
the pool shall be gunite of the thickness and strength as required. In no case shall the
slab be less than 6" thick not less than 3,000 psi in 28 days. The finish shall be such
as necessary to accept the plaster finish with maximum adhesion.
B. Gunite: Provide necessary application, 3,000 psi compressive strength, dimensions,
removal of rebound, cleanup and protection of surrounding surfaces and areas. All
tests required to determine the strength of the gunite shall be at the Contractors
expense.
3.03 INTERIOR FINISH
A. Plaster contractor shall approve the pool substrates in writing prior to commencing with
the plastering work.
B.. The pool area shall be enclosed and temperature tempered at 70 degrees F prior to
application of any plaster coats. No plaster coats shall be applied during rain, or high
wind and any such material that has been newly placed shall be protected by canvas or
other covering until the surface has set.
C. Clean interior surfaces of the pool of dust, oil, paint or other loose material before
application of finish coats.
D. Apply % inch to 3/8 inch finish coat, consisting of white cement and marble dust. Float
to a uniform plane and trowel to a smooth, dense, impervious surface. There shall be
no trowel "burn" marks in the finished surface. Do not stain the finish coat. In the event
the application of the final plaster coat must, of necessity, be delayed to a future date,
the pool shall be filled with water and shall be kept filled until conditions permit the
application of the finish coat.
E. After the finish coat has dried sufficiently, the pool shall be gradually filled with water,
flowing continuously to eliminate dirt rings. During extremely hot weather, the pool
walls shall be kept continuously wet while the pool are filling.
Section 13150 - Swimming Pool & Spa: Page 13150 -7
3.04 INSTALLATION OF DECK EQUIPMENT
A. The pool contractor shall install all deck equipment. Where the anchoring or setting of
mounting equipment is integral with another contractor's work, the pool contractor shall
be responsible for furnishing the anchors, mounts, etc., in a timely manner (not to
interfere with the other contractors schedule) as well as detailed instructions with any
necessary dimensions, cutouts, etc. It shall then be the responsibility of the other
contractor to install these items in accordance with the instructions.
B. Handicapped Lift: Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Install
a fully grouted stainless steel socket recessed into deck with poly-olefin sleeve and
tamper-resistant lid. Installation shall be plumb, level and square and totally rigid.
3.05 ELECTRICAL
A. The pool contractor shall furnish and install (but not connect) all necessary pumps,
chemical feeders, control equipment, etc., for complete operation of the pool.
B. General Contractor will' provide all pool grounding, connecting all equipment, lighting
(other than pool lights), pool light conduits, junction boxes, wall outlets, etc.
3.06 PLUMBING
A. City Water Plumbing: The pool contractor shall not be responsible for any city water
plumbing. All pool fill lines with necessary valves, boxes, etc., shall be provided by
General Contractor.
B. Pool Waste Water Discharge: It shall be the responsibility of the pool contractor to
connect to the water line (provided by General Contractor) in the equipment room and
provide and install those items, if any, required by the Health Department for disposal
of swimming pool water to waste (e.g., separation tanks, sight glass, etc.).
C. Pool Plumbing: The pool contractor shall be responsible for all pool plumbing
associated with the pool recirculation and treatment equipment.
3.07 POOL FILTRATION AND RECIRCULATION EQUIPMENT
A. Install all filtration equipment necessary for proper pool operation, including all valves.
3.08 CLEANUP
A. Upon completion of the pool construction, remove from the site all excess materials and
debris. Leave the pool and equipment room ready for final inspection.
Section 13150 - Swimming Pool & Spa: Page 13150 - 8
3.09 INITIAL WATER TREATMENT AND TEST KIT
A. The contractor shall obtain samples of the water used to fill the pool, and is responsible
for instructing the Owner as to any necessary treatment which may be required prior to
introduction of the water into the pool. During the filling operation and upon starting the
recirculation system, the pool contractor shall furnish adequate quantity of sodium
hypoclorite and muriatic acid to establish a free chlorine residual of 2.0 ppm, minimum
and a pH of 7.2 to 7.6. After filling, the pool contractor shall balance the water to
optimum conditions which shall protect the pool finish and equipment from etching or
plating tendencies of the water. The pool contractor shall furnish a test kit as called for
herein.
3.10 INSTRUCTION ON POOL EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
A. A qualified representative of the pool contractor shall visit the site of the work after
installation has been completed and shall put all equipment into operation, and shall
assist and instruct the Owner-Operator in the operation of all such equipment, for a
minimum of 5 days or as long as necessary.
B. Provide operating and maintenance manuals as called for in Section 01700, "Contract,
Closeout'.
3.11 INSPECTION
A. Work considered by the Architect to be of unsatisfactory quality or appearance
or not conforming with intent of the plans and specifications shall be corrected'
by the Contractor at his expense.
(END OF SECTION)
Section 14200 - Hydraulic Elevators: Page 14200 - 1
)N 14: CONVEYING SYSTEMS
.. ..Vv: HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
PART ONE : GENERAL.
2.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Includes the complete installation of one (1) passenger Holed Hydraulic elevators with
Class A loading.
B. Preparatory work and work performed in conjunction with the installation of the
elevators shall be performed as specified in other Sections of this Project Manual, and
shall conform to the requirements of the elevator manufacturer for the installations
involved and equipment furnished as well as requirements of governing agencies, and
shall consist of the following:
1. Legal hoistway properly framed and enclosed with a pit of proper depth, guarded
and protected with drains and waterproofing for the pit. Hoistway structure
required to withstand the forces and loads resulting from use of the elevators.
Sill supports and grouting as necessary under the hoistway entrance sill,
2. An underwriters approved light outlet in the center of the side of the hoistway as
shown on elevator drawings, also, a light and convenience outlet in the pit and
at machine location, and venting of hoistway as required by code.
3. Extend the electrical service form the power main through a fused safety switch
of ample capacity to the terminals of power unit controller, including wiring for
emergency bell and light, etc.
4. Ladder to pit floor from lower landing.
5. Electric current during erection and testing of equipment.
6. Necessary recesses to accommodate doors, sills and signal equipment such as
indicators, push buttons, hall lanterns, etc.
7. Telephone connections,
8. Grouting between door frames and walls.
9. Installation of guide rail anchors. Locations of anchors will be as shown on
elevator shop drawings. Inserts needed for anchorage and support of guide rails
will be furnished by elevator manufacturer.
10. All cutting of walls, floors or partitions together with any repairs made necessary
thereby and grouting under thresholds,
2.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes: All material and work shall be performed in accordance with the latest edition
of the American National Standard Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators
and Moving Walks; the National Electrical Code; and all applicable State and Local
codes and Factory Manual Elevator Codes. All terms in this Specification shall have
the meaning defined in the Al 7.1 Safety Code as approved by the American National
Section 14200 - Hydraulic Elevators: Page
Standards Institute, and hereinafter referred to as the ANSI Code including all revisions
and authorized changes to date.
B. Eligibility: Work and equipment specified in the Section shall be provided by a
company regularly engaged in the business of manufacturing, installing and servicing
elevators of the type required by these specifications. All items furnished by the
manufacturer shall be erected, and installed, adjusted, tested, and placed in operation
by competent personnel under the supervision and direct employ of the elevator
company.
C. The completed installation shall result in one (1) complete and properly functioning
elevator. These Specifications cover and include the furnishing and installing of
elevator equipment as hereinafter specified. It is the intention of this Section to outline
broadly the equipment required but not to cover the details of design and construction.
D. All equipment included in the elevator installations shall have repair and replacement
parts readily accessible. Provide 24 hour, 7-day per week response to emergency
situations.
2.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit copies of shop drawings and complete technical data of all work covered under
this Section to the Architect for approval; this shall include, but not limited to, all
operating schematics, all wiring diagrams, itemized parts listing, troubleshooting
manuals and manufacturer's product literature, Submit in accordance with Section
01340. All of these requirements shall be met prior to the start of any work. Failure to
provide any of the above mentioned submittal requirements shall be cause for rejection
of the contractor for nonperformance at no expense to the Owner.
2.4 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. The Contractor shall furnish maintenance and call-back service on the elevators and
related equipment for a period of twelve (12) months from date of Substantial
Completion. This service shall consist of periodic examinations of the equipment,
adjustments, lubrications, cleaning, parts or repairs to keep the equipment in proper
operation, except such adjustment, parts or repairs made necessary by abuse, misuse
or any other causes beyond the control of the Elevator Contractor. All work shall be
performed by trained employees of the Elevator Contractor during regular working
hours of the trade.
Section 14200 - Hydraulic Elevators* Page 14.200-3
PART TWO : MATERIALS
2.1 DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT
I
A. Elevator Type Holed Hydraulic- Otis LVM2500 or
ThyssenKrupp Marquis 25 Oildraulic
B. Capacity 2500 lbs.
C. Speed 150 fpm up, 175 fpm down.
D. Operation DMC 1.
E. Car Size 6'-8" wide x 4'-3" deep.
F. Travel Per Plans.
G. Power Supply Per Plans.
H. Machine Location Per Plans.
I. Stops Per Plans.
J. Openings Per Plans.
K. Hoistway Doors 3'-6"x 7'-0".
Size and Type Single Slide.
L. Door Operation Direct current powered; microprocessor
controlled.
2.2 SIGNALS
A. "Impulses" Signal Fixtures with #4 stainless steel face plate; Dot Matrix Car Position
Indicators; Light-Up Operating Buttons Mounted at 20 degree Angle.
2.3 SPECIAL FEATURES
A. Oil Viscosity Control: All Handicapped Features per ANSI A71.1 and NEII; Emergency
Service Phase I and 11 per ANSI 17.1; Reverse Phase Relay, Emergency Light Above
Car Station; Infrared Door, Solid State Protection System; Solid State Starting; Battery
operated emergency lowering; integrated fire service signage. Serial connection link
between the main microprocessor door operator and microprocessor selector.
Section 14200- Hydraulic Elevators: Page 14200-4
B. Operating Panel and Indicators:
I Modular Design.
2. Totally Inter ..
'changeable Signage
3. Car Stations mounted at 20 degree angle.
A. Any diagnostic or service equipment required to maintain or troubleshoot elevator
controls shall be Contractor furnished equipment.to the Owner. This equipment shall
have unlimited usage, and leasing agreements will not be acceptable.
2.4 CAR ENCLOSURE
A. Car Enclosures: Design # Cab shall contain all Class B components per
ASTM.E84 test and,AN S I/ASTM A17.1, 1985.
1. Walls: Wood core, particleboard faced on both sides with 1/16" high pressure
plastic.laminate, flush design, colors as selected by the Architect.
2. Canopy: Unitized steel construction with baked enamel finish, reinforced for car
top inspection.
3. Front, Return and Transom: Stainless steel integral swing return with ct
operating devices.
4. Doors: Hollow metal construction of minimum 16 gauge cold rolled steel. Door
and frame on the inside and outside of the cab shall have No. 4 stainless steel
finish.
5. Ceiling: Suspended ceiling with white translucent diffuser mounted in a baked
enamel frame with fluorescent lighting.
6. Sill: Extruded aluminum single grooved.
7. Handrails: Provide on each side and back wall, #4 finish stainless steel, type
and profile as selected by the Owner from manufacturer's standard selections.
Mount handrails so that to of rail.is 34" above the finished floor of the cab.
8. Accessories: Exhaust fan; Emergency light; Baked enamel steel pad buttons on
the side walls and #4 stainless steel pad buttons on the front and rear return
walls; ADA Compliant HelpLink@ Telephone; Certificate frame; Modular capacity
plate.
9. Floor: As scheduled.
2.5 GENERAL INFORMATION
A. Platform and Sling:
1. The Platform shall have a fabricated frame of structural steel shapes, gussie,,-,
and rigidly welded. Flooring shall be wood subfloor. The underside of th,-.
platform shall be fireproof.
Section 14200 - Hydraulic Elevators: Page 14200 -5
2. The sling shall consist of heavy steel stiles properly affixed to a steel crosshead
and bolster, with .adequate bracing members, to remove all strain from the car
enclosure.
3. Steel bumper plates shall be affixed to bottom of bolster channels, and a platen
plate with clamps and cap screws shall be furnished for fastening sling to
plunger.
A. Car Doors: The car entrance shall be provided with single slide doors. Panel rigidity to
be obtained by suitable steel reinforcements. Door shall be hung on sheave hangers
with polyurethane tires and sheaves running on a polished steel track, and guided at
the bottom by non-metallic shoes siding in an extruded aluminum threshold groove.
Doors shall have finishes as specified hereinbefore.
B. Alarm Bell; An emergency alarm bell shall be located in conformance with ANSI A-17.1
Code requirements, and connected to a,plainly marked pushbutton in the car.
C. Guide and Guide Shoes: Guides for the elevator cars shall be planed steel elevator
guide rails, properly fastened to the building structure with steel brackets. The cars tile
shall be fitted at top and bottom with guide shoes of the self-aligning, swivel type, with
metal body and removable non-metallic liners.
D. Automatic Guide Rail Lubricators: Lubricators shall be provided and mounted on top of
upper guide shoes. Wood felt wiper shall apply and even, uniform flow of oil which
shall thoroughly lubricate face of guide rail from a leakproof oil reservoir.
E. Power Unit: (Oil Pumping and Control Mechanism)A self-contained unit consisting of
the following items:
1. Oil reservoir with tank cover and controller compartment with cover.
2. An oil hydraulic pump.
3. An electric motor.
4. Oil control unit with the following components built into a single housing; high
pressure relief valve, check valve, automatic uploading up start valve, lowering
and leveling valve and magnetic controller.
A. Pump: Positive displacement type pump specifically manufactured for oil-hydraul ic
elevator service. Pump shall be designed for steady discharge with minimum
pulsations to give smooth and, 'quiet operation. Output of the pump shall not vary more
than 10 percent between no load and full load on the elevator cars.
B. Drive: Drive shall be by direct coupling with the pump and motor submerged in the oil
reservoir or by multiple v-belts and sheaves of number and size to ensure maximum
factor of safety. Drive type shall be determined based primarily on the load on the car,
travel and speed.
Section 1420.0 Hydraulic Elevators: Page 14200- 6
C. Motor: Standard manufacture motor specifically designed for oil,-hydraulic elevator
service. Duty rating shall comply with specified speeds and loads.
D. Oil Control Unit: Oil Control Unit shall consist of the following components, all built into
a single housing. Welded manifolds with separate valves to accomplish each function
shall not be acceptable under this specification. All adjustments shall be accessible
and shall be made without removing the assembly from the oil line:
1. Relief Valve shall be externally adjustable, and shall be capable of bypassing
the total oil flow without increasing back pressure more than 10% above that
required to barely open the valve.
2. Up Start and Stop Valve shall be externally adjustable,
e, and designed to bypass
oil flow during start and stop of motor pump assembly. Valve shall close slowly,
gradually diverting oil to or from the Jack Unit, ensuring smooth up starts and up
stops.
3. Check,valve shall be designed to close quietly without permitting any perceptible
reverse flow.
4. Lowering Valve and Leveling Valve shall be externally adjustable for drop-away
speed, lowering speed, leveling speed and stopping speed to.i insure smooth
"Down" starts and stops. The leveling valve shall be designed to level the car V
the floor in the direction the car is traveling when slowdown is initiated.
A. Power controller shall contain all necessary electrical contractors, electro-mechanical
switches and thermal overload relays. All components shall be mounted in a NEMA 1,
enclosure. Logic control system shall be microprocessor based, integrated solid state
circuity or electro-mechanical. If microprocessor base system is used, it must be
protected from environmental extremes and excessive vibrations.
B. Reduced Voltage Starting: Provide a solid state starter to limit current inrush during
starting and to provide gradual acceleration of the motor. Motor starting shall not be
initiated by mechanical contacts. Starter shall include a current limit adjustment range
of 200 percent to 450 percent of the overload adjustment range. Provide an integral
fault detection and diagnostic system.
2.6 JACK UNIT
A. The jack unit,shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the applicable
requirements of the ANSI A17.1 Code. It shall be of sufficient size to lift the gross load
the height specified and shall be factory tested to insure adequate strength and
freedom from leakage. No brittle material, such as grey cast iron, shall be used in the
jack construction.
B. The Jack Unit Shall Consist of the Following Parts: A plunger of heavy seamless steel
tubing accurately turned and polished; A stop ring shall be electrically welded to the
plunger to positively prevent plunger leaving the casing; an internal guide bearing;
packing or seal of suitable design and quality; a drop ring around cylinder made of
Section 14200 - Hydraulic Elevators: Page 14200-7
steel pipe and provide with a pipe connection and air bleeder. Brackets shall be
t.
welded to the jack cylinder for,supporting the elevators on pichannels.
C. Mainline Strainer: A mainline strainer of the self-cleaning type, equipped with a 40
mesh element shall be furnished and installed in the oil line.
D. Failure Protection: The electrical control circuit shall be designed so that if a
malfunction should occur, due to motor starter failure, oil becoming low in the system,
or the car filing to reach a1anding in the up direction within a pre-determined time, the
elevator cars will automatically descend to the lowest terminal landing. The power
operated'doors shall automatically close and all control buttons, except the "door open"
button in the car station, shall be made inoperative.
E. Oil-Hydraulic Silencer (Bladder Type Muffler Device) shall be installed in.oil line near
power unit. It shall contain pulsation absorbing material inserted in a blowout proof
housing arranged for inspecting interior parts without removing unit from oil line.
Rubber hose without blowout proof features will not be acceptable.
F. Vibration Pads shall be mounted under the power unit assembly to isolate the unit from
the building structure.
G. Jack Cylinder Protection: The jack cylinder and any underground piping shall be
wrapped with a medium density polyethylene primer activated line roll tape with a butyl
rubber adhesive system and a polyethylene-backed, pressure sensitive adhesive
outerwrap designed to provide permanent mechanical protection when machine applied
in conjunction with the inner primary coating. Provide the jack cylinder with a fiberglass
liner.
2.7 EMERGENCY TERMINAL STOPPING DEVICE
A. An emergency terminal stopping device for over 100 FPM shall be provided
which shall operate independently or the normal terminal stopping device should
it fail to slow down the car at the terminal. as intended. They shall be so
designed and installed that a single short circuit caused by a combination of
ground, or by other conditions, shall not prevent their functioning.
B. The normal and emergency terminal stopping devices shall not control the same
controller switches unless two or more separate and independent switches are
furnished, two of which shall be closed in either direction of travel to complete
the circuit to the control valve solenoids in the down direction and to complete
the circuit to the pump motor fro the up direction of travel.
Section 14200 - Hydraulic Elevators: Page 14200-8
2.8 FEATURES
A. Automatic Terminal Limits: Electric limit switches shall be placed in the hatchway near
the terminal landings and be designed to cut off the electric current and stop the car
should it run beyondelther terminal landing.
B. Automatic Self-Leveling': The elevators shall be provided with a self-leveling feature
that will automatically bring the car to the floor land,in,gs:. This self-leveling shall, within
its zone, be entirely automatic and independent of the operating device and shall"
correct for over travel or under travel. The car shall also be maintained approximately
level with.the landing irrespective of the load.
C. Buffers: Substantial buffers under car shall be furnished and installed in the elevator
pits. They shall be mounted on continuous channels fastened to the elevator guide rail
or securely anchored to the pit floor and substantial extensions will be provided, if
required. Buffers shall comply with ANSI A17.1 Code requirements.
D. Care Top Inspection Station: A car top,inspection station with an "emergency stop"
switch and with,constant pressure "up-down" direction buttons shall make the normal
operating devices inoperative and give the inspector complete control of the elevators.,
E. Interlocks: Each hoistway entrance shall be equipped with an approved type interlock
tested as required by Code. The interlock shall be designed to prevent operation of the
car away from the landing until the doors are locked in-the closed position as defined
by Code and shall prevent opening the doors at any landing from the corridor side
unless the car is at rest at the landing or is in the leveling zone and stopping at the
landing. Interlocks shall bear Underwriters' Laboratories "B" label of approval.
F. Hoistway Door Unlocking Device: Hoistway door unlocking devices as specified by the
ANSI A-17.1 Code shall be provided to permit authorized persons to gain access to
hoistway when elevator car is away from the landing.
G. Door Hangers and Tracks: For each hoistway sliding door, furnish and install sheave
type two point suspension hangers and tracks complete. Sheaves shall have
polyurethane tires with ball bearings properly sealed to retain grease. Hangers shall
be provided with an adjustable slide to take the up-thrust of the doors. Tracks are to be
drawn steel shapes, smooth surface and shaped to conform to the hanger sheaves.
I
H. Photoelectric Door Protection: Photoelectric door protection shall be provided to
reopen the doors when either of the two infrared light beams is interrupted when door is
closing.
2.9 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
A. Hoistway entrances of the hollow metal, type as called for herein, furnished installed
complete at each of the-hoistway openings.
Section 14200 - Hydraulic Elevators: Page 14200 -9
B. Entrances shall be manufacturer's standard design and shall bear Underwriters'
Laboratories "B" label. The shall consist of frames, sills,
doors, hangers, hanger supports, hanger covets, fascia plates, and all necessary
hardware. Finish for doors and frames shall be as called for hereinbefore.
C. The entire front wall of the hoistway shall be left open or a rough opening provided
which is I'2" greater in width and 6" greater in height than the finished opening, until
after entrances are installed. After guide rails are set and lined, the entrance frames
shall be installed in perfect alignment with guide rails. Finished walls shall then be
completed.
D. The interface of the elevator wall with the hoistway entrance assembly shall-be in strict
compliance with the elevator manufacturer's requirements.
2.10 DIVIC-1 AUTOMATIC PUSHBUTTON OPERATION
A. The elevator's control shall be a distributed control system, microprocessor based and
software oriented. The main microprocessor and car controller shall be located behind
the elevator swing return panel. The microprocessor selector, situated on the car top
and the microprocessor door operator, residing in the door operator shall be linked
together with the main processor'by a series communications link.
B. When the car has responded to its highest or lowest stop, the stops are registered for
the opposite directing, its travel shall reverse automatically and it shall then clear the
calls registered for that direction.
C. Should both up and down calls be registered at an intermediate floor, only the call
corresponding to the direction in which the car is traveling shall be cancelled upon the
stopping of the car at the landing.
D. The control shall be arranged so that, normally, one car shall be parked at the main
floor, and the other, a "free" car, to answer the landing calls. Should both cars happen
to finish their calls at the main floor, the car which arrived first shall answer any landing
call either above or below where it may be standing except main floor calls and
basement landing calls if a basement is served. When the "free" car is clearing calls,
the other car parked at the main floor shall automatically start to answer landing calls
under the following conditions: Should an up call be registered from landing below the
"free" car when it is traveling up or, should an up or down call be registered from-a
landing above the "free" car when it is traveling down; or inability of the "free" car to
move in response to registered landing calls within approximately 46 seconds. Either
car shall always respond to it's own car buttons regardless of the direction of the
landing calls. When either car is taken to of service for any reason, the other car call
automatically answers all calls from the landings and its own car buttons.
Section 14200'- Hydraulic Elevators: Page 14200 - 10
2.11 CAR OPERATING STATION
A. A main car operating panel shall be provided in each car and shall contain the devices
required for the specified operation. The panel consists of a series of modules all
inclined 20 degrees from vertical for optimum viewing and accessibility. The lowest
module shall contain "door open", "door close", "keyed emergency stop switch", and
alarm button. Intermediate modules shall contain illuminated floor buttons which Will
illuminate when a call is registered and shall remain illuminated until the call is
answered. The top module shall contain the required switches. All raised floor
indications and handicapped symbols shall be located immediately adjacent to the floor
buttons and fully integrated in the module design. No applied symbols shall be
allowed. There shall be no floor indications or symbols of the buttons.
B. Car Independent Service Operation — One (1) Car: Car independent service operation
shall be activated by placing the car independent service switch (keyed and located on
the operating panel) to the "on" position. When on car independent operation, the car
shall be removed from the selective collective automatic operation and the car shall
respond to car calls only. Door closing shall require constant pressure on the door
close button or constant pressure on a car call button for some destination floors. If th!'.
door close button is released before the door is fully closed, the door shall reopen. Car
calls shall be registered only when the doors are fully closed. The doors shall open
automatically when stopping at a landing and shall hold open until closed. All calls
shall be cancelled when the doors are open.
2.12 LANDING BUTTONS
A. A riser of landing pushbutton stations shall be provided. Each intermediate station
shall consist of two.illuminated pushbuttons with raised direction arrow, one for the up
direction and the other for the down direction. Each terminal station shall contain an
illuminated pushbutton with raised direction arrow. The buttons shall be illuminated to
indicate that a call has been registered at that floor for the indicated direction.
2.13 CAR POSITION INDICATOR
A. An electronic Dot Matrix position indicator shall be provided. The position indicator
shall be included 20 degrees from vertical and mounted in a module matching the
control panel for optimum viewing. As the car travels, its position in the holstway shall
be indicated by the illumination of the Alpha/Numeric character corresponding to the
landing which the elevator is stopped or passing.
Section 14200 - Hydraulic Elevators: Page 14200 - 11
PART THREE - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION:
B. Take field.dimensions and examine,conditions of substrates, supports, and other
conditions under which work is to be performed. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
D. Guide Rails
1. These guides shall be erected plumb within 1/8" and in the strong substantial
manner. They shall be strongly and properly supported and placed so as not to
become distorted by eccentric loading or by application of safety devices.
2. Rails shall be suitably bottomed in the pit and shall extend to the underside of
the overhead slab.
A. Unusual Soil Conditions: If unusual soil conditions are encountered in drilling for the
jack, notify the Architect before proceeding further with the drilling.
B. Hole for Jack Unit: Elevator Contractor shall sinkhole to receive jack and shall-coat
jack with adequate wrapping material such as Tapecoat, etc. Provide auxiliary casing if
required. Contractor shall familiarize himself with the project soils investigation report
and allow for installation accordingly. Jack installation shall be waterproof, thus
preventing groundwater from rising in to the elevator pits through the jack unit or it's
method of installation.
C. All necessary wiring shall be furnished and installed in the hoistways in accord with the
National Electrical Code. All necessary pipe and fittings to connect the power units to
the jack units and oil of the proper grade shall be furnished. All ducts or conduits in the
elevator hatch or in the floors shall be installed in an orderly manner. Trail cables shall
be of the best grade for the service. They shall be hung so that the proper size loop
may be obtained. They shall have afire resistant outer braid which shall meet the
Underwriter's standard test. Steel supporting strands shall be used where necessary.
The entire wiring system shall be tested for insulation to ground.
3.03 NOISEMBRATION CONTROL
A. All motors, pumps, equipment, etc., shall be mounted in a manner to permit isolation
from building structure and to prevent transfer of pump/motor/equipment noises and
vibration to the building structure.
B. All conduit, electrical and otherwise, shall be isolated from the building structure by
utilization of vibration isolation hangers, neoprene gaskets, pads, mounting devices,
etc. Conduit in Elevator Equipment Rooms shall be flexible type.
Section 14200 - Hydraulic Elevators: Page 14200 - 12
C. All hydraulic lines shall be isolated from the building structure by utilization of vibration
isolation hangers, pads, mounting devices, etc.
3.04 SIGNAGE
A. A permanent sign, an integral part of the hall station, shall be installed immediately
above each hall push button station of each floor landing; "IN'FIRE EMERGENCY DO
NOT USE ELEVATOR. USE EXIT STAIRS". Face plate size shall be coordinated with
the masonry construction. Consult the Architect for exact size of hall station face plate.
3.05 COMPLETION
A. Upon completion of the installation the Contractor shall have the elevator consultant
arrange a meeting with the Architect to explain complete elevator operations and
maintenance. The Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner complete bound copies of
all service manuals, wiring diagrams, etc., concerning the elevators. Refer to Section
01700, "Contract Closeout".
END OF SECTION
LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL
Brian E. Seley
ARSSJURIM Engineering
Mechanical&Electrical Consufflng
PO BOX 4809 Phone: 843-235-8280
Pawleys Island, SC 29585 Fax:: 775 908 4747
Sent to:. Jagat Sharma Date: September 30, 2005
Company: Jagat Sharma Architect Re: Country Inn
SPEC. SEC. DESCRIPTION
15050 Basic Materials & Methods
15190 Natural Gas Systems
15250 Mechanical Insulation
15300 Fire Protection
15400 Plumbing
15530 Refrigerant Piping
15531 Refrigerant Specialties
15670 Remote Air Cooled Heat Pump Unit
15800 Heating, Ventilation &Air Conditioning
15880 Ductwork
15950 Automatic Temperature Control
15990 Testing, Adjusting, & Balancing
16050 Basic Materials & Methods
1.6110 Raceway Systems
16119 Wiring Systems
16400 Service & Distribution
16500 Lighting
16622 Elevator Equipment Wiring
16660 Lightning Protection
16721 Fire Alarm
16740 Empty Conduit System For Telephone Wiring
16780 Empty Conduit System For Television Antenna
By: Brian E. Seley
SECTION 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART I GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Mechanical basic requirements.
B. Electric Motors
C. Identification.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide complete and fully operational systems with facilities and services to meet
requirements indicated and in accord with applicable codes and ordinances.
1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Obtain permits, plan review, and inspections from authority having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with all Federal, State and Municipal laws and codes, ordinances, rules and
regulations of health, public or other authorities controlling or limiting the methods,
materials to be used or actions of those employed.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of
related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal.
C. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.
D. Submit detailed working drawings showing the exact locations of proposed Work after
consulting mechanical, architectural, structural, and electrical drawings. All Work shall
be coordinated with all architectural, structural, electrical, and mechanical features of the
building.
E. No item shall be installed without prior approval of the Engineer.
F. All operating equipment or components supplied under this Division require maintenance
manuals and operating instructions to be supplied.
G. Provide submittals for the following items:
1. Water hammer arresters.
2. Mechanical Insulation
3. Pipe hangers and supports.
4. Plumbing fixtures.
15050- 1
5. Motor controllers.
6. Pumps and circulators.
7. Duct fabrication drawings.
8. HVAC units.
9. Diffusers.
10. Fans.
11. Control systems
12. Water heaters.
13. PTHO units
14. Pool Dehumidification system
15. Refrigeration Piping
1.05 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. The arrangement, position and connection of pipes, equipment, and apparatus shown on
the Contract Drawings may be diagrammatic, but should be followed as closely as
possible.
B. The responsibility of accurately laying out the work to best fit with details of job conditions
rests with the Contractor and he shall conform to any reasonable variation and change
that may be required, without extra or additional cost to the Owner.
C. Before installing any materials, insure that they do not interfere with clearance required in
finished rooms or with other work.
D. All mechanical equipment for any one system shall be the product of the same
manufacturer, wherever possible.
E. All electrical products used on this project shall conform, unless otherwise specifically
noted, to applicable standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers'Association and
shall also be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and/or other agencies, as
approved.
F. Materials and workmanship shall comply with latest revisions of applicable State Codes,
City Codes, and utility company regulations.
G. Should work be performed which does not comply with requirements of applicable State
Codes, City Codes, and utility company regulations, changes for compliance shall be
done at no additional cost.
H. Notify Engineer of any materials or apparatus believed to be inadequate, unsuitable, in
violation of laws, ordinances, rules or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.06 GUARANTEE
A. Entire installation shall be guaranteed as called for in the general conditions.
B. All equipment shall be guaranteed to meet capacities specified.
C. The entire installation shall be guaranteed to operate with no noise or vibration
perceptible outside of the equipment space. Contractor shall make any necessary
15050-2
corrections at his own expense.
1.07 GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. Contractor shall obtain copies of drawings and specifications for all trades of this Project,
and review same for additional related Work. This Work shall be included in the Scope
of this Division, whether or not the information appears on the Mechanical Drawings.
B. Small details not usually shown or specified, but necessary for the proper operation and
installation of the Work, shall be furnished and installed at no additional cost; complete
and operable systems shall be furnished.
C. Contractor shall note that all service connections may not be shown in true positions.
Each bidder is cautioned, therefore, to verify same with field conditions.
D. Where discrepancies exist within the contract documents the proposal for the work shall
be based on the better quality, or greater quantity of work involved. No other method of
estimating shall be used in preparing the bid proposal, unless contrary instructions are,
issued in the form of an Addendum before the bid,proposal due date.
E. Any claim by the Contractor that they, In submitting their respective bid proposals, did not
include all items as shown in the Contract Documents will not be given consideration for
an adjustment of their bid. If any item specified in a section which would not normally
furnish this item, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide the Work in
question, without any additional cost to the Omer.
1.08 SCOPE
A. Work specified under this Division includes furnishing all materials, labor, equipment,
permits, licenses, taxes and other items required for execution and completion of all work
indicated. Everything necessary for a complete and satisfactory installation, including all
necessary pads, devices, accessories, etc. required by the Codes or required to
satisfactorily complete the installation of the above items shall be provided.
B. The Plumbing Work required under this Division shall include, but is not necessarily
limited to the following;
1. Sanitary drainage system.
2. Vent systems.
3. Domestic cold and hot water systems. Includes hot water specialties, circulating
pumps, storage tank, piping and related equipment for a fully operational
domestic water system.
4. Plumbing fixtures.
5. Access doors.
6. Floor drains.
7. Mechanical insulation.
B. All hangers and supports.
9. All testing required.
10. Permits and inspections.
11. Cleanup and removal of debris.
12. Fire sprinkler system
13. One (1)year guarantee.
15050-3
14. Condensate Piping.
C. The Mechanical Work required under this Division shall include, but is not necessarily
limited to the following:
1. Permit filing.
2. Setting of all equipment.
3. Exhaust fans and ductwork.
4. HVAC units and ductwork.
5. Volumetric dampers, fire dampers and access doors.
6. Ductwork insulation.
7. Acoustical duct lining.
B. Pool Dehumidification system
9. Guest Room PTHP units
10. Temperature controls and low voltage*widng.
11. Testing and balancing of air and water systems.
12. Clean up and removal of debris.
13. One (1)year guarantee.
1.09 EXPLANATION AND PRECEDENCE OF DRAWINGS:
A. For purposes of clearness and legibility, drawings.are essentially diagrammatic and,
although size and location of equipment are drawn to scale where ever possible, the
contractor shall make use of all data in all of the contract documents and shall verify this
information at building site.
B. The drawings indicate required size and points of termination of pipes and ducts, and
suggest proper routes of pipe to conform to structure, avoid obstructions and preserve
clearances. However, it is not intended that drawings indicated all necessary offsets, and it
shall be the work of this section to install piping in such a manneras to conform to
structure, avoid obstructions, preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways
clear without further instruction or cost to the Owner.
C. Shop Drawings shall be furnished by this section, indicating all changes to meet space
requirements, code requirements, and as necessary to resolve all space conflicts.
D. It is intended that all apparatus be located symmetrical with architectural elements, and
shall be installed at exact height and locations as shown on the architectural drawings.
E. The Contractor shall fully inform himself regarding any and all peculiarities and limitations
of the spaces available for the installation of all work and materials furnished and installed
under the contract. He shall,exercise due and particular caution to determine that all parts
of his work are made quickly and easily accessible.
F. The Contractor shall be guided by the architectural details and conditions existing at the
job, correlating this work with that of the other trades, and report to the Architect any
discrepancies and interferences shall result in the correcting of these errors or omissions
by the contractor at his own expense. All work installed under this division which deviates
from the drawings and specifications as directed by the Architect.
G. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for taking his own measurements and installing
his work to suit conditions encountered.
15050-4
1.10 SUBMITTALS:
A. Equipment Submittals, Copies of equipment drawings and/or manufacturers descriptive
data of a nature to completely identify the quality of the material or equipment intended for
installation shall be submitted for approval before beginning any construction and within
30 days after signing contract. Failure to submit data for approval within 30 days time limit
shall be construed as meaning the Contractor shall furnish equipment called for by name.
Data shall be submitted all in one brochure, indexed by flysheet on front page, and be
bound in sets, all sets identical. No mception shall be made to this procedure and time
schedule.
B. Maintenance and Operating Instructions:
1. Before acceptance of this work by the Architect, the contractor shall furnish complete,
clean bound copies of all supplementary shop drawings,diagrams,part list,serial number
and inventory of equipment,manufacturers operating and maintenance instructions,and
all other similar material pertinent to the satisfactory maintenance and operation of
mechanical systems and equipment furnished under this division of the work. After
completion of his work and after satisfactory tests and adjustments of systems and
equipment, the contractor shall provide the services of a competent mechanic for the
period of two days for the purpose of instruction the Owner's authorized representative in
the maintenance and operation of the mechanical facilities.
2. The contractor shall also provide a glass, wood framed enclosure with a clear and
concise typed set of system operating instructions for each system. System operating
instruction shall be submitted for approval prior to posting.
1.11 WORK BYOTHERS
A. The General Contractor shall provide foundation for equipment, chases, furring, curbs with
roof flashing, framed openings, finish painting and all other similar work of a general
construction nature. The General Contractor shall also provide all temporary water,
electric power, heating, and toilet facilities required for general construction purpose.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide floor drains, site drains, etc. as required for
disposal of wastewater resulting from heating and air conditioning installation. The
Mechanical Contractor shall install drain lines for condensate, to point of discharge over
receptor, provided by plumbing contractor.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall provide complete power and control wiring and connection
to all motor driven and electrically operated heating and air conditioning equipment.
Furnishing and installing necessary disconnect switches, not specified herein, and all
other such work of an electrical nature shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor.
1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Make provisions for the delivery and safe storage of all materials, and arrange with other
trades on the job for the introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass
through finished openings.
B. Arrange to have materials delivered to the job at such stages of the work as will expedite
15050-5
the work as a whole. Mark and store all materials in such a manner as to be easily
checked or inspected.
1.13 TEST AND INSPECTION REPORTS:
A. Provide typewritten reports to Owners representative indicating time, pressure,,personnel
involved and other pertinent data for all vacuum or pressure testing.
B. Provide copies of all test or inspection reports by public agencies for systems such as
plumbing drainage.
C. Balancing and testing reports for HVAC systems shall be provided.
1.14 SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit one blue line copyand one reproducible, sepia is
acceptable, for following.,
A. Entire ductwork system, thoroughly coordinated with surrounding construction.
,B. All mechanical equipment rooms.
C. As required for project coordination.
1.15 UTILITY CONNECTIONS & EXTENSIONS, PERMITS AND FEES
A. Arrange for all utility connections, extensions, and water meter required to serve systems
included in this Division. See civil drawing & specifications for further coordination.
B. Pay all costs for utility extensions required to serve systems in this Division.
C. All permits,fees, utility extensions costs, etc., required for the work in Division 15 shall be
paid for under the Sections involved.
1.16 USE OF DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and Specifications together describe the project. Any provisions occurring in
one shall be considered to occur in both. Where discrepancies occur between Drawings
and Specifications, the more stringent requirement shall prevail.
B. The abbreviation "HVAC"where used herein shall mean "Heating, Ventilating and Air
Conditioning".
C. Refer to the various working drawings for other trades in order that work required herein
shall conform in detail with the work of others.
D. No additional compensation will be allowed for any labor or material unless this Contractor
can clearly show same to be an addition beyond the intent and meaning-of the Drawings
and/or Specifications.
E. The Drawings are diagrammatic: therefore, for all dimensions and exact locations, refer to
the Architectural and Structural Drawings unless specifically noted otherwise.
F. In preparation of the Drawings, it is intended that they be utilized by competent mechanics
15050-6
in completing the system installations.
G. Where equipment is specified to be installed in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations, a copy of these recommendations shall be kept on the job site at all
times and shall be made available to the Owner's representative'upon a request for same.
1.17 RECORD (AS BUILT)_DRAWINGS
A. Prepare reproducible record drawings of all systems installed herein. Drawings shall be
prepared utilizing plastic"Mylar"transparencies of the bidding drawings. Standard
symbols and drafting techniques shall be followed. After submitting and obtaining Owner's
approval of white rints of the completed record drawings, deliver to Owner the approved
reproducible drawings.
B. Job site record set of black-line drawings shall be posted neatly each day to indicate work
progress and information for record drawings. Posting shall be done with colored pencils
coded to the various systems. Incorporate all changes and departures from bidding
drawings. Show principal dimensions of all concealed work. Show all piping encountered
in,excavation work.
C. Bear all costs for printing, drafting, record keeping, etc. involved in preparation of the
above record drawings.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 SAFETY DEVICES
A. Provide suitable guards on all equipment to enclose belts,pulleys, motor shafts, electrical
contacts, etc. Removable guards shall be cast iron, sheet metal or wire mesh, rigidly
secured.
B. Pressure and temperature relief devices of proper size and rating shall'be provided on each
item of equipment where normally required.
2.02 ELECTRIC MOTORS
A. Manufacturers: As specified on drawings
B. Electric Service: Refer to Division 16 for required electrical characteristics.
C. Motors: For continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment, and for temperature rise
to ANSINEMA MG I limits.
D. Single Phase Motors: Split phase.
E. Three Phase Motors: Squirrel cage motors to ANSINEIVIA MG 1 Class B, high efficiency
type with thermistor system for motor frame sizes 254T and larger, ball bearings.
2.03 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15050-7
A. Plastic Nameplates: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters in light
background color.
B. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light
background color, minimum 1-1/2 inch (38 mm)diameter.
C. All pipes shall be labeled with flow arrows and 1/2"letters on vinyl or polyethylene coated
cloth With pressure sensitive adhesive. Letters shall be black on yellow background.
Pipe labels shall have custom leftedng, as required. Labels shall be as manufactured by
Kobi, Seton, W.H. Brady, or equal.
2.04 THERMOMETERS
A. Adequate instrumentation shall be provided for operation, evaluation, adjustment, and
malfunction indications of systems.
B. Thermometers shall be installed with separable sockets, bronze in-nonferrous systems
and stainless steel in ferrous systems. Thermometers shall be red mercury type with 9"
long, adjustable angle white face with black figures.
2.05 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
A. Each "DX"system air conditioning unit shall be provided with a space thermostat located
where indicated on the drawings. Thermostat shall be capable of being set from 55
degrees F. to 85 degrees F. and shall be adjustable to provide 10 degree F. range
between full heating and full cooling.
B. Thermostats for the systems serving Guest Rooms shall be manual changeover with
standard "COOL-OFF-HEAT' and "AUTO-ON"for control and temperature adjusting
lever or dial.
C. Thermostats for remaining systems shall be auto changeover with standard
"On/Off/Auto" control, fan only switch and temperature'dial. Provide clear, high strength
plastic, locking thermostat guard of same manufacturer a's thermostat.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that no defects or errors are present in completed portions of the Work and that
structures or surfaces to receive materials or products have no defects which would
result in poor application or cause latent defects in workmanship.
B. Do not start Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
15050-8
B. Install plastic nameplates with adhesive.
C. Install plastic tags with corrosion resistant metal chain.
D. Take into account the varying ceiling heights, beams, etc., and offset piping or ducts up
or down as required even if such offsets are not shown on the Drawings. However,
before making any changes from the work shown on the Drawings,first obtain the
approval of the Engineer. Failure on part of the Contractor to preserve maximum
headroom will require him to raise his piping, ducts, and/or equipment without any
additional cost to the Owner, whenever directed to do so by the Engineer..
E. Conflicts:
I In case of conflicts between different parts of Drawings, Specifications, or
between drawings and specifications, Contractor shall promptly request an
interpretation from the Engineer.
2. If Contractor fails to request an Interpretation, he shall make all changes ordered
by the Engineer, without additional cost to the Omer.
F. Clearance at Access Door's and Panels:
1. Do not install any piping, insulation, hangers, or ductwork that will obstruct-or
interfere with the use of any access doors or removal of access panels, whether
on equipment, in walls, or in the ceiling.
2. Comply with t'his requirement, if necessary, by rerouting piping or ductwork at no
extra cost after obtaining the approval of the Engineer.
G. Safety.
1. Installations must be entirely safe in every respect, and must not create any
condition of any kind, at anytime, that will be harmful to any occupant of building,
operating personnel, installation personnel, testing personnel, workmen, public,
or to any other persons.
a. Contractor shall be solely responsible for providing installations which will
meet these conditions.
b. If Contractor believes that installations will not be safe for all people, he shall
so report, in writing, to the Engineer before any equipment is purchased
or work is installed, giving his exact recommendations and reasons for them.
H. The mechanical designs as indicated on the Drawings and described in these
specifications are intended to be complete and fully functional in accordance with all
applicable codes. All miscellaneous parts required, whether indicated on plans or not
shall be included as part of the Work.
I. Inspection of Site: Prior to submitting his bid, the Contractor shall visit the site of the
proposed construction and shall thoroughly acquaint himself with existing utilities, working
conditions to be encountered, etc. No additional compensation shall be allowed for
conditions increasing the Contractors cost which were not known or appreciated by him
when submitting his proposal if the condition was obvious and could have been
discovered by him if he had Visited the project and thoroughly informed himself of all
15050-9
existing conditions which would affect his work.
J. Workmanship, Materials, and Equipment: All work shall be performed in a workmanship
manner and shall present a neat and mechanical appearance when completed. All
materials shall be of type, quality, and minimum rating prescribed herein or indicated on
the plans. Where material and equipment are indicated by manufacturer's name, type,
model or catalog number, such items or one of those so specified must be Included in the
base bid for contract. Other materials and equipment will not be acceptable.
K. Coordination: The Contractor shall coordinate his work with that of the other contractors
on the job and also with that of the Owner, in order that there will be no delay in the proper
installation and completion of the work. If, in the opinion of the Architect, any piping,
equipment, etc., has been improperly placed or installed due to lack of coordination with
the other trades, such piping and equipment shall be relocated as directed by the
Architect and at the Contractors expense.
L. Cutting and patching: This contractor shall perform all cuffing and patching required for
the introduction and placement of his wok He shall employ men to perform all patching
work that are skilled in the particular trade involved. Cuffing and patching required as a
result of the omission of an opening in construction, shall be done by the contractor at his
own expense.
M. Painting and Identification: The following protective painting and identification of
equipment shall be provided under this division of the work; other finish painting shall be
provided under the"painting"division of the specifications.
1. Equipment including motors, and similar factory fabricated and assembled units
shall be furnished baked enamel as specified hereinbefore. Equipment surfaces
damaged during this course of construction shall be refinished by the contractor. tE
2. All finish painting shall be provided by the General Contractor under painting
division of the specifications.
3. Detached motor controllers, disconnects, etc., shall be identified with metal or
plastic plates with etched letters to completely identify the service of the electrical
equipment.
4. All exposed gas piping outdoors shall be painted silver, and all interior gas piping
shall be painted yellow.
3.03 ACCESS PANELS
A. Provide access doors or plates for all concealed valves and cleanouts.
3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and patching shall be performed per Division 1.
B. Provide detail drawings for all necessary openings in ample time.
C. Work under this Contract shall progress so that cutting of constructed or finished Work
will be avoided.
1. Do not cut Work of other Trades without Engineers Approval.
15050- 10
2. Seal all openings In walls, floors and ceilings with a UL listed fire retardant seal.
3.05 TEMPORARY LIGHTING
A. Provide extension cords and lights essential to the execution of the Work. See
Temporary Facilities -Division 1.
3.06 VALVE TAGS
A. Except where specified otherwise, provide valve number tags on all valves, including
automatic valves and cocks.
B. For all valves furnished by the Heating Contractor, valve tags shall be stamped with a
letter"H"followed by the valve number.
C. For all valves furnished by the Plumbing Contractor, valve tags shall be stamped with a
letter"P"followed by the valve number.
D. Valve tags shall be 1-1/2" diameter brass with minimum of one-inch stamped bold letters
and numbers filled with black enamel.
E. Omit tags on valves which are end-of-branch pipe to only one item of equipment and
which are located close to that•item of equipment.
F. Provide brass"S"hooks on tags for attaching to valves.
G. Range of numbers to be as directed in order to avoid confusion with tags of other trade.
H. The typed valve directory, on quality bond paper, shall be installed under glass in a wood
frame, anchored flat to wall where directed. Hanging frames on wall will not be
acceptable.
1. Function and location of each valve shall be adequately described.
J. Submit three (3) copies of typed valve directory for approval before installing.
3.07 PIPE LABELS
A. Label piping in the following areas:
1. Equipment rooms
2. Rooms in which piping is exposed
3. Rooms with accessible ceilings
4. On branches with accessible shafts
B. Labels shall be applied as follows:
1. Minimum of once in a room.
2. In large areas or corridors, minimum of 80 feet apart.
C. Labels shall be provided by the trade installing the pipe.
D. Provide flow arrows for all piping.
15050-11
E. For insulated piping, apply pipe labels with 3/4"wide pressure sensitive tape around the
pipe at both ends of the label. For manufacturer's instructions, tape shall be the same
color as background of label.
F. Provide pipe labels for the following utilities:
1. Domestic Hot and Cold Water
2. Gas
3. Fire Sprinkler.
4. Hydronic Piping
G. No labels for pipes on roof.
H. Locate labels so as to be visible from normal Viewing location.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Internal tests shall be made to ensure that all items of equipment and systems operate
properly.
B. All defective materials and workmanship discovered as a result of the tests shall be
removed and replaced at the Contractors expense and the test repeated until
satisfactory results obtained.
C. Make all adjustments which are necessary to place nonoperating equipment in proper
operating condition.
D. Adjustments will include, but not be limited to, regulating systems, set points, operating
limits, etc.
3.09 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of the mechanical installation, clean up and remove all debris.
B. Clean all fixtures and equipment intended to be left exposed.
C. Leave all work in perfect operating condition.
3.10 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
A. As required, shall be executed by this Contractor with the least interference to other
trades.
B. Should underground obstructions be encountered (utility piping, electrical wiring or
drainage structure), the Contractor shall repair all damages to these obstructions.
1. Selected backfill material shall be deposited and compacted in four(4),Iayers. This
material shall be sufficiently damp to permit thorough compaction under and around
the pipe so that it will support the pipe adequately.
2. Backfill shall be compacted by puddling with hose and long pipe nozzle or by flooding
the trench. If these methods fail to consolidate the fill material, the Contractor shall
compact the fill be use of tamping.
15050- 12
3. All backfill shall be free of all debris and shall contain no rocks larger than 2"in
diameter.
3.11 LAYOUT
A. Work lines and established limits shall be in strict accordance with plans and
specifications.
1. Fumish the General Contractor and other Contractors, in ample time, any information
they may require to accommodate this Work.
2. Set all sleeves, anchors, bolts and/or inserts before any concrete is poured.
3.12 WATERPROOFING
A. Whenever Work must pierce waterproofing, this Work shall be done with care.
1. After the item piercing the waterproofing has been set in place, the opening made for
this purpose shall be sealed and made absolutely watertight.
3.13 SLEEVES
A. Where pipes or ducts pierce concrete floors, ceilings or masonry walls, provide and
install substantial metal sleeves.
1. Sleeves in exterior building walls below grade, or piercing waterproof surface shall be
caulked after installation of conduit to make a watertight seal.
2. Where items must pass through beams, the methods and locations proposed must
be submitted to the Structural Engineer for approval.
3.14 PIPE INSTALLATIONS
A. Run all piping concealed in pipe chases, soffits, hung ceilings, walls, partitions, as shown
on the drawings, except in unfinished spaces where piping shall be nin exposed.
B. All piping to be pitched to low points with drain valves. Soil, storm and waste lines to be
sloped at 1/8"per foot, minimum or as noted on Drawings.
C. Flash all piping though roof.
D. Provide valves required for complete control of all systems. Stop valves for supply to all
fixtures to be chrome plated and have escutcheon plates to match, Mere exposed.
E. All piping including valves, traps, vents and accessories shall be installed so as to be
easily accessible for maintenance, removal, replacement and cleaning.
F. Provisions for expansion and contraction shall be made in all mains and connections in
order that there will be no undue strain on the pipe work under any conditions.
G. Particular care shall be taken in running the branches to prevent trapping. If after the
plant is in operation any heating surfaces do not circulate or water hammer develops due
to trapped connections, this Contractor must bear the expense of making the proper
alterations in those defective connections. Contractor shall also bear the cost of
refinishing any building construction damaged or disturbed.
15050-13
3.15 CLEANOUTS
A. Provide cleanouts at the following locations for all sanitary and waste lines.
1. At ends of lines.
2. Base of soil and waste lines
3. Horizontal changes of directions greater than 45 degrees.
4. At junction of building drain and building sewer.
5. At property line.
B. Cleanouts shall not be more than 75 feet apart in horizontal drainage lines of 4 inch
nominal diameter or less, and not more than 100 feet apart for larger pipes.
C. Cleanouts shall be sized as follows:
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE NOMINAL SIZE OF CLEANOUT
11/4'1 111411
1 1/2" 1 1/2"
211 211
Y 31'
4 and 6" 4"
8 and 10" 6"
3.16 HANGARS AND SUPPORTS
A. Horizontal Lines: Adjustable clevis type.
B. Insulated Pipe: Curved steel pipe saddles at hanger location. No wire to be used for
pipe support.
C. Copper Pipe: Copper clad or copper split ring hangers.
D. Support:
1. Hanger rods to be machine threaded, secured to approved type beam clamps,
angle clips or suitable inserts.
2. Where construction permits, expansion bolts may be used for piping two (2)
inches and smaller.
E. Shall be capable of screw adjustment after piping is erected.
F. Hangers supporting piping expanding into loops, bends and offsets shall be secured to
the building structure in such a manner that horizontal adjustment perpendicular to the
run of piping supported may be made to accommodate displacement due to evansion.
G. All such hangers shall be finally adjusted both in the vertical and horizontal direction
when the supported piping is hot or chilled as required.
H. All vertical piping shall be supported by means of heavy wrought iron or steel clamps
securely bolted or welded to the piping and with end extensions bearing on the building.
All horizontal piping 1-1/4" and smaller in size shall be supported With hangers, spaced
15050- 14
not more than Von centers. All horizontal,piping 1-1/2" and larger shall be supported
with hangers spaced not more than 10 feet on centers except that copper tubing shall be
supported with hangers spaced not more than 8 feet on centers,
I. For all makeup water piping, provide"Insulshield"as made by Insulcoustic Corp., or pipe
covering protection shield, F & S Fig. 980 with steel shield 9"long and with vapor barrier
jacket. For hot water heating piping 2"and smaller, same as above. For hot water
heating piping 2-1/2"and larger, provide steel pipe covering protection saddle spot
welded to pipe as follows:
For pipe 8"and smaller- Grinnell Figs. 185, 186, 187.
Hanger rods shall be of the following diameters:
PIPE SIZE ROD DIAMETER
2 inches and below 3/8 inch
2-1/2 inch 1/2 inch
3 inch
4 inch 5/8 Inch
5 inch I
J. Hanger rods shall be attached to concrete inserts with steel reinforcing rod through the
insert and both ends hooked over the reinforcing mesh.
K. Piping shall not be hung from other piping or from equipment of other trades. Hanger
rods shall not,pierce ducts.
L. Where additional steel is required for the support of hangers, the Contractor shall furnish
and install same subject to the approval of the Architect.
M. Lateral bracing of horizontal pipe shall be provided where required to prevent side sway
or vibration. The lateral bracing shall be of a type approved by the architect and shall be
installed where directed by the Architect.
3.17 VALVES
A. All systems shall be supplied with valves in all branch mains and risers, at all pumps,
tanks reducing valves, heating surfaces and all apparatus; so located, arranged, and
operated as to give complete shutoff and isolation from all other components of the
system. Except where flanged valves are used, each connection to equipment shall be
made with screwed or flanged union on the equipment or discharge side of the valve.
B. All valves shall be installed with the best workmanship and are to have neat appearance
and be arranged so that they are easily accessible.
C. Generally, all valves are to be of the Ball type, except that globe valves shall be used for
throttling services, on traps, and pressure reducing and control valve bypasses.
15050-15
D. Drain valves shall be provided on tanks, receivers, risers and where they may be
required or necessary or directed for draining the lines and equipment. Drain valves or
plug cocks shall be provided at the low points for proper drainage. All drain valves not
permanently connected to drain piping shall be furnished with threaded ends for hose
connections.
E. Check Valves installed in the horizontal position shall be swing checks; valves installed in
the vertical position shall be silent checks.
F. Provide 3/4"minimum drain valves at all low points of water systems.
G. Provide 3/4"minimum blow-off valves at all strainers.
H. All gate and globe valves shall be designed for repacking under pressure when fully
opened, and shall be equipped with packing suitable for the intended service. When the
valve is fully opened, the back seat shall protect the packing and the stem threads from
the fluid. All gate and glove valves shall have a gland follower. The pressure-
temperature ratings of valves shall be not less that the design criteria applicable to all
components of the system.
1. Gate valves shall be of the solid wedge type, designed and manufactured in such a way
that seating surfaces are prevented from contacting until near the point of closure.
Valves two inches and smaller shall be rising stem with threaded, solder, socket, or
flanged end to suit service. Valves 2-1/2"and larger shall be flanged, or butt weld end,
and unless otherwise specified, all shall be OS&Y.
J. Unless a composition disc is specified, swing check valves two inches and smaller shall
be bronze, regrinding, with seating angle 40 to.45 degrees. A stop plug is required as a
renewable stop for the hanger, unless otherwise specified. Disc and hangershall be
separate parts, and the disc shall be free to rotate. Hanger pins shall be supported on
both ends by removable side plugs.
K. Check valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be flanged, swing type, unless otherwise
specified.
L. Valves shall be as scheduled below. Figure numbers are Jenkins Brothers. Valves of
equivalent specifications, in the opinion of the Engineer, as manufactured by Crane,
Stockham or Kennedy, will be considered for approval.
M. Valves to be used in 200 PSI voter service to 250 PSI non-shock (Domestic, Heating
Water):
Gate Valves: (threaded) 2-1/2" and smaller Fig,. 47
(solder) 2-1/2"and smaller Fig. 1240
(flanged) 3"and larger Fig. 651 A
Check Valves: (threaded) 2-1/2" and smaller Fig. 92A
(solder) 2-1/2"and smaller Fig. 1222
(flanged) 3"and larger Fig. 624
Butterfly: (lug) 2-1/2"and larger Fig. 232B
15050- 16
Valves: (20-180)
Ball Valves: (threaded) 2"and smaller Fig. 30A
and sweat
3.18 THERMOMETERS
A. Provide therrnometers at all lines leaving water heaters lines and at other required
locations.
B. Gauges shall be installed on gauge cocks at suction and discharge of all pumps.
C. Gauge cocks and capped thermometer wells shall be provided where required.
3.19 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS
A. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
B. All equipment components such as motors, lubrication points, disconnects, etc.,,shall be
readily accessible for servicing and replacement.
C. Motors and motor control devices shall be installed having suitable electrical
characteristics to cooperate at required voltages.
D. All HVAC equipment (Air handling units, Rooftop units, Condensing units, Make-up air
units, Fan coil units, etc.)shall be provided with permanent metal identification tags,
screwed at all four comers to equipment,with pertinent information engraved into tag.
Information shall include, but not be limited to; capacities, \01tage and phase,
horsepower, make and model numbers, and pressure.
3.20 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS
A. Sleeves shall be installed where piping passes through structures. All structural openings
shall be approved by the structural engineer. Sleeves shall be ample sizes for pipe
movement and shall not be used for pipe support. Sleeve openings shall be packed with
an approved fireproof material. Insulation for ductwork and cold piping shall be
continuous through each sleeve.
B. Sleeves through structural concrete members shall be galvanized steel pipe unless
otherwise required to be of different materials. Sleeves through other than structural
components of building shall be 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal or approved plastic with
lock seam joints. Sleeves shall be sufficient sizes to pass pipe insulation through where
pipe is insulated.
C. Sleeves shall be set flush with walls and ceilings. Floor sleeves shall 11 extend 1"above
floors in finished areas and 2" in all other areas. Where piping passes through below-
grade walls or on-grade floors, spaces between sleeves and pipes shall be caulked with
oakum and lead or other suitable waterproofing. Spates between pipes and floor sleeves
shall be filled with glass fiber and non-hardening caulking.
15050-17
D. In finished areas chromium plated escutcheon plates shall be installed Mere exposed
piping passes through walls, ceilings and floors of projects. Plates shall be properly sized
to conceal sleeves and fastened to pipe or insulation. Exposed hanger rods in finished
spaces shall have cast iron escutcheons with set screws.
3.21 TESTING
A. All piping shall be tested and proven tight before covering is applied or piping concealed.
All tests shall be witnessed by Owner or Owner's Representative.
B. All piping except sanitary and storm drainage systems shall be tested by hydrostatic or
pneumatic pressure at least I Y2t!me maximum operating pressure but not less than 100
psi for sufficient time to detect all leaks and defects.
C. Each test set-up shall provide for changes in ambient temperatures from causing false
pressure readings during tests.
D. Each pipe system shall be tested and balanced so that design conditions are achieved at
each piece of equipment.
E. Each pipe system shall be completely balanced and tested including the following:
1. All valves shall be opened to full open position.
2. Water in systems shall be examined to determine if water has been treated and
I cleaned.
3. Remove and clean all strainers.
4. Proper pump rotation shall be verified.
5. All temperature controls shall be set for proper operating conditions.
6. Operation of all automatic valves shall be checked.
F. Sanitary and rainleader systems shall be thoroughly tested by hydrostatic or pneumatic
pressure suitable to local plumbing code; however, of not less than 10 feet of water
column to detect all leaks and defects.
3.22 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Upon completion of the installation of all work and equipment, the Contractor shall start all
equipment and make all necessary adjustments to place entire heating, ventilation, air
conditioning, and plumbing systems in a satisfactory condition for continuous safe
operation.
B. All filters shall be replaced with the specified type after the period of adjustment.
C. Air circulation system shall be cleaned free of all dirt and debris and adjusted to provide
uniform heating and/or cooling of all spaces served by each system. Test adjustments
shall be continued until uniform temperature within conditioned areas has been attained
two (2)degrees Fahrenheit for(1) degree above and below thermostatic setting.
D. Lubricate all bearings of equipment fumished using only lubricant recommended by a
manufacturer of such equipment. Tag each piece of equipment with date of lubrication,
with subcontractor's name imprinted thereon. Bearings shall be left in cool, trouble free,
operating condition.
15050-18
E. Temperature and safety controls shall be adjusted as necessary to insure continuous,
trouble free, safe, and automatic operation of systems including boiler, gas, bumer,
refrigerating equipment, etc.
F. Clean Up: The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of
waste materials or rubbish caused by his employees or work. At the completion of the
work, the contractor shall remove all surplus materials, tools, etc., and shall leap the
premises "broom clean".
END OF SECTION
15050- 19
SECTION 15190
NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
PART I -GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Natural gas systems, including (but not limited toy
a. Gas service and meter(by Utility Company).
b. Gas distribution piping,valves, unions, regulators, etc.
c. Connections devices to for gas-fired equipment and fixture.
d. Miscellaneous gas system components.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements
1. Ensure gas equipment complies with AGA listing or approved requirements and bears
listing or approval seal of recognized testing agency such as American Gas Association
Laboratories, Inc: or Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
.1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with requirements of SECTION 01300-Submittals
B. Product Data:Submit manufacturers product literature including,material specifications and
other information required demonstrating compliance with specified requirements for
following items:
1. Pipe
1. Flexible gas piping
3. Check valves
4. Manual valves
5. Pressure regulating valves
6. Pressure relief valve
7. Cathodic protection components
8. Flexible gas connector
9. Gas solenoid valve
10. Gas cocks
C. Shop Drawings -Submit shop drawings of following components:
1. Gas meter and regulator assembly layout drawing.
D. Contract Closeout Submittals: Comply with requirements of SECTION 01700, including
submission of operating and maintenance instructions as item in "General Construction
Instructions" manual described in that section.
15190-1
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:Complywith all applicable rules and regulations of utility company
for installation of gas piping system.Obtain copy of gas company Codes and Standards prior
to installation of gas piping system.
B. Install gas equipment, piping materials and provide testing in accordance with applicable
American National Standards Institute(ANSI)code and NFPA 54-National Fuel Gas Code
and rules and regulations of local gas company.
1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Arrange for gas.service and pay for all applicable fees associated with new gas system to be
installed by local gas company. Schedule work to be,in timely manner meeting construction
schedules.
1. Coordination of gas service work with utility company shall be made through:
a. Name of Contact: Buzz Nelson
b. Name of Gas Company. NYSEG .
c. Telephone: (607) 347-2167
2. Include gas service and meter and regulator setting installed by utility company in
Contract. Make arrangements with local gas company for gas service line installation
and meter setting. Obtain dimensions for meter setting and regulator setting and
coordinate all gas work. Provide pipe extensions of gas vents from relief valves and
pressure regulating valves to safe distance from equipment, building openings and
grade acceptable to local utility company.
PART 2 _PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING AND FITTINGS
A. General Characteristics
1. Metallic pipe and fittings threads:
a. Comply with Standard for Pipe Threads, General Purpose, ANSI/ASME B1.20.1
b. Pipe Threads: Comply with National Fuel Gas Code "Table I Specifications for
Threading Metallic Pipe" for length of threaded portion of pipe and number of
threads to be cut.
B. Above grade Piping and Fittings
1. Piping 2-1/2"and Smaller:Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe,Type S,Grade B,ASTM Spec.
A-53-90b,Schedule 40 black steel pipe and 150#black malleable iron screwed fittings.
2. Piping 3"and Larger: Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe, Type S, Grade B,ASTM Spec.A-
53-90b, Schedule 40 black steel pipe with welded fittings,cast iron flanges,and vee-butt
welded joints.
3. All sizes:Type"Gas"ASTM B 837 Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for
Natural Gas and Liquefied Petroleum (LP)Gas Fuel Distribution Systems, or Type W'
15190 -2
copper tubing and wrought copper fittings with brazed joints using BAg-5 filler metal
containing less than 0.05%phosphorous and compatible flux,conforming to AWS A5.8-
92-Brazing Filler Metal or continuous tubing with no joints.
C. Concealed Gas Piping Located Within Studwalland Masonry Construction Chases:
1. All sizes: Type"Gas" ASTM B 837 Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube
for Natural Gas and Liquefied Petroleum(LP)Gas Fuel Distribution Systems or Type"IV'
copper tubing and wrought copper fittings with brazed joints using BAg-5 filler metal
containing less than 0.05%phosphorous and compatible flux,conforming to AWS A5.8-
92 - Brazing Filler Metal or continuous tubing with no joints.
2. Piping 3"and Larger: Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe, Type S, Grade B,ASTM Spec.A-
53-90b, Schedule 40 black steel pipe with welded flttings and vee-butt welded joints.
D. Concrete Encased Gas Piping:
1. Type"Gas" ASTM B'837 Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Natural
Gas and,Liquefied Petroleum (LP) Gas Fuel Distribution Systems or Type "K' copper
tubing and wrought copper fittings with brazed joints using BAg-5 filler metal containing
less than 0.05% phosphorous and compatible flux, co'nforming to AWS A5.8-92 -
Brazing Filler Metal or continuous tubing with no joints.
2.02 VALVES
A. Above Grade Manual Valves
1. Exterior(Y2"to 4"size): Cast iron body construction,electroless nickel plated cast iron
plug , flanged ends, BUNA O-Ring stem seal, HYCAR plug seal, ANSI drilling,
wrenching flats for lever actuation, and lever handle with 175 PSI rating. Similar to
"Series 400, Fig. 425,F,1,RS49"by DeZU RIK.
a. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories as natural gas and shutoff valve and labeled
accordingly.
2. Interior Valves (1/2"to 2"size): Bronze ball valve with 1316 chrome plated brass ball and
threaded ends;vinyl-coated steel handle;factory-tested under waterwith air pressure in
open and closed positions. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories as natural gas shut-off
valve and labeled accordingly. Similar to"80-1 00-YRPV" by Apollo.
3. Interior Manual Valves(2-1/2"to 4"size): Cast iron body construction,electroless nickel
plated cast Iron plug ,flanged ends, BUNA O-Ring stem seal, HYCAR plug seal,ANSI
drilling,wrenching flats for lever actuation,and lever handle with 175 PSI rating. Similar
to "Series 400, Fig. 425,F,I IRS49"by DeZURIK.
a. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories as natural gas shutoff valve and labeled
accordingly,
B. Pressure Regulating Valves
1. Valve Type"A": 2"pipe size, flanged connections, spring color Green for 6"w.c to 14"
w.c. outlet pressure regulation, die cast aluminum alloy diaphragm case and cast iron
body,diaphragm type regulator valve,internal control tube for pressure control,straight
body with flow horizontal and vent outlet pointing downward. Similar to"Model 122-12"
15190 -3
by Equimeter.
a. Provide
e Aluminum BLO-VENT with 16 x 16 -018 stainless steel screen gas vent as
manufactured by UPSCO Inc. in relief port opening of regulator.
b. Provide regulator meeting following design conditions:
(1) Inlet pressure 2 psi
(2) Outlet pressure 14"w.c.
2. Valve Type"B": 1-1/2"pipe size,threaded connections,spring color Blue for 57-w.c to
8-1/2"w.c.outlet pressure regulation,diaphragm type regulator valve,straight body with
Internal relief vent. Similar to"Model 243-12-1" by Equimeter.
a. Provide regulator meeting following design conditions:
(1) Inlet pressure 14"w.c.
(2) Outlet pressure 7"w.c.
3. Valve Type "C": 2" pipe size, threaded connections, diaphragm type regulator valve,
straight body With configuration number 101 or 105,flow,upward with vent outlet pointing
downward.Spring size and orifice shall be selected to meet the minimum inlet pressure
of 2 psi and maximum inlet pressure of 5 psi to regulate outlet pressure to 7"w.c.at total
gas load.; similar to"Model 143-80-2" by Rockwell.
a. Provide Aluminum BLO-VENT with 16 x 16 .018 stainless steel screen gas vent as
manufactured by UPSCO Inc. in relief port opening of regulator.
b. Provide regulator meeting following design conditions:
(1) Inlet pressure range 2 to 5 psi
(2) Outlet pressure 7"w.c.
C. Check Valves: Bronze swing check valve with soft resilient disc, suitable for natural gas
service. Similar to "B-320B, Class 125, threaded ends, with BONA-N Disc"by Stockham.
D. Over-Pressurization Relief Valve: 3" pipe size, flanged connections, initial relief setting at
21" w.c., weight type relief valve, cast iron angle body. Similar to "Model 250 DW by
Equimeter.
1. Provide capacity in valve for full relief capacity when pressure regulator fails in widest
position and include vent pipe rising 7'-0" above grade.
E. Vent Cap
1. (3/4"-1"pipe size):Aluminum body, built in drip edge for rain and painter protection,full
size venting sized to compensate for effective screen opening, stainless steel screen;
similar"Blo-Vent", UPSCO.
2. (2"pipe size): 180 degree return bend steel end with 0.23 gauge stainless steel 12 x 12
mesh screen on outlet; similar to"2"Return Bend" by UPSCO.
3. (1-1/4"-4"pipe size): Iron body,90 degree elbow with standard pipe thread with 12 x 12
mesh stainless steel screen on outlet; similar to "Gas Vent" by UPSCO.
.PART 3 -EXECUTION
15190 -4
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions(by Installer): Examine conditions under which fuel piping systems
are to be installed and notify Prime Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to
proper and timely installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Gas service interruptions:Make all necessary arrangements for gas service interruptions with
local gas supplier in compliance with schedule approved by owner.
B. Gas Service (up to and including meter and primary regulator):
1. Make all necessary arrangement for gas service from utility company gas main to,and
Including, meter and primary regulator setting. ,
2. Provide complete installation of gas service performed by utility company, including
excavating, backfilling, piping, valves, meter and primary regulator.
a. Include cost of gas service installed by utility company gas in Contract.
b. Include cost of gas service installation in Contract.
c. Include restoration of all disturbed grades,grass,paving,curbing,etc.,not repaired
by utility company.
d. Include construction of bollards and concrete pad and restoration of all disturbed
grades, grass, paving, curbing, etc., not repaired by utility company.
e. Provide gas piping,valves,unions,regulators,etc. required for complete gas meter
and regulator assembly not furnished as part of local gas company services.
f. Provide concrete pad for gas meter installation, conforming with gas company
requirements.
C. Above Grade Gas Piping Systems:
1. 'Provide installation of gas system and components for complete and operating system,
including but,not limited to piping, fittings, gula�or, valves, supports and brackets.
2. Grade all horizontal piping in building to drain, ensuring no sags, humps or pockets are
left in system. 1
3. Run exposed piping neatly and support adequately.
4. Provide sediment traps at equipment connections and at low points in system.
5. Make connections to all gas fired equipment. Field verify and provide type of coupling
connection is required for final connection.
6. Provide flange connections at valves and on exterior gas piping only. Do not install
flanges on gas pipe runs within building ceiling spaces or concealed space.
7. Purge all gas lines in accordance with latest NFPA 54 standards and local gas'company
standards and regulations.
8. Provide gas shutoff valves at all equipment.
9. Verify exact location of building wall penetrations and regulator locations in field
with Owner's representative.
10. Support and anchor gas lines in accordance with latest standards and regulations of
NFPA 54.
D. Concealed Gas Piping Within Conduit or Masonry Chases:
15190 -5
I Provide striker plates for gas piping installed in partition and hollowwalls in conformance
with NFPA 54.
2. Provide continuous piping inside conduits and chases. Do not install joints inside
conduits.
E. Gas Valves:
1. Provide gas valves same as line size.
2. Provide manual gas valve within 6 feet of gas utilization equipment, fixtures and
components.
3. Provide union or flanges connection downstream of manual valve to permit removal of
rigid or flexible gas piping serving gas utilizing equipment and fixtures.
4. Do not locate gas valve in ceiling spaces.
F. Pressure Regulator and Overpressurization Relief Valves:
1. Install vent caps for pressure regulator and over pressurization relief valves at
termination of relief vent piping with outlet facing in downward. Locate vent openings
such that opening Js at least 7'-0"above grade and not located within 1'-6"from window
or other opening into building. Extend relief vent piping full size to outdoors for outlet to
be no closer than 12 feet to air intake or building opening.
2. Do not overload pressure regulator diaphragm with sudden surge of inlet pressure.
Monitor outlet pressure during start-up to prevent outlet pressure overload.
3. Include in manual valve ahead of overpressurization valve a device locking handle in
open position.
G. Buried Pipe Tape: Install tape at V-0"below grade directly above buried steel or plastic gas
piping.
H. Tracer Wire: Install tracer wire in trench of plastic pipe without touching plastic pipe. Bring
tracer wire to surface at each valve box and service riser. Connect tracer wire on service line
to tracer wire on mains.
I. Grounding: Coordinate grounding of above grade gas piping systems in accordance with
NFPA 70 with Electric Work Prime Contractor.
J. Testing Piping: Provide testing and purging in accordance with NFPA 54 and gas utility
requirements.
--- END OF SECTION
15190-6
SECTION 15250
MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART I GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping insulation,jackets and accessories.
B. Ductwork insulation.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each
service or equipment scheduled locations, and manufacturers installation instructions.
1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,
mastics, and insulation cements.
B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE INSULATION
A. Manufacturers:
1. Johns Manville
2. Owens Coming
3. PPG
B. Glass Fibers: ASTM C547; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1. 'K' ('ksi)Value: 0.24 at 75 degrees F (0.035 at 24 degrees C).
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F
3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and
bonded to aluminized film, secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt
strips or with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.
C. Cellular Foam: ASTM C534; flexible, cellular elastomeric, molded or sheet.
1. 'K' ('ksi')Value: 0.27 at 75 degrees F
2. Maximum Service Temperature of 220 degrees F (104 degrees C).
3. Maximum Flame Spread: 25.
4. Maximum Smoke Developed: 100
5. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.
D. Jackets
1. PVC Plastic: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off white
color.
a) Thickness: 20 mil
15250 - 1
b) Connections: Brush on welding adhesive
2. Canvas Jacket: UL listed fabric, 6 oz/sq. yd (220 g/sq. m)plain weave cotton
treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive.
2.02 DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. Manufacturers:
1. Johns Manville
2. Owens Coming
3. PPG
B. Flexible Glass Fiber. ASTM C612; flexible, non-combustible blanket.
1. 'W ('ksj')Value: 0.29 at 75 degrees F (0.042 at 24 degrees C).
2. Density: .75 lb./cu ft
3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yam and bonded to
aluminized film, secured with pressure sensitive tape.
C. Rigid Glass Fiber Board: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket.
1. W ('ksi')Value: 0.29 at 75 degrees F (0.042 at 24 degrees C).
2. Density: 2.0 lb./cu ft(32 kg/cu m).
3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yam and bonded to
aluminized film, secure with pressure sensitive tape.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Verify that ductwork and piping have been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean,foreign material removed, and dry.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Continue Insulation vapor barrier through penetrations.
C. Piping Insulation
1. Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
2. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.,
3. Provide insulated dual temperature pipes or cold pipes conveying fluids below
ambient temperature with vapor barrier jackets. Finish with glass cloth and vapor
barrier adhesive. Insulate complete system.
4. For insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature, provide
standard jackets. Bevel and seal ends of insulation at equipment, flanges, and
unions.
5. Provide insert between support shield and piping on piping 2 inches (50 mm)
diameter or larger. Fabricate of cork or other heavy density insulating material
suitable for temperature, not less than 6 inches (150 mm)long.
6. For pipe exposed in mechanical equipment rooms or in finished spaces below 10
feet (3 meters) above finished floor,finish with canvas jacket sized for finish
painting.
15250 -2
7. For exterior applications, provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate pipe, fittings,
joints, and valves and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement.
Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located,on bottom side of horizontal
piping.
D. External Ductwork Insulation:
1. Provide insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature with vapor
barrier jacket. Finish with tape. Sea] vapor barrier penetrations with vapor�barrier
adhesive.
2. Provide insulated.d uctwork conveying air above ambient temperature with or
without standard vapor barrier jacket. Where service access is required, bevel
and seal ends of insulation.
3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.
4. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical
fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging.
5. For ductwork exposed in mechanical equipment rooms or in finished spaces,
finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting.
6. For exterior applications, provide insulation with vapor barrier jacket. Cover with
outdoor jacket.
E. Acoustical Duct Lining:
1. All air ductwork, 20 lineal feet on both sides of air handlers, make-up air units,
supply fans, return fans, exhaust fan intakes, and as otherwise shown, shall be
acoustically lined. Lining shall be 3 pounds percubic foot and shall be
Owens/Coming Aeroflex 300. Thickness shall be 1". Duct sizes indicated are
inside clear dimensions after insulation is installed. Provide oversized sheet
metal as required to accommodate duct lining.
3.03 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE: As a minimum complywith NYS Energy Code
PIPE SIZE THICKNESS
Inch Inch
A. Glass Fiber Insulation
Domestic Cold Water All
Plumbing Vents Within 10 Feet All
of the Exterior
Piping Exposed to Freezing Y2" & Up 1 Y2"
Hot Water s 1.5"
> 1.5" 2"
B. Cellular Foam Insulation
Refrigerant lines < 1.5"
> 1.5"
3.04 DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE: As a minimum complywith NYS Energy Code
THICKNESS in.
Inches
A. Flexible Glass Fiber
Exhaust Ducts Within 10 ft of
15250 -3
Exterior Openings
Exhaust Ducts Exposed to Outside Air
Ventilation'Equipment Casings
HVAC Ducts 1.5
Outside Air Intake Ducts 2
B. Rigid Glass Fiber
Combustion Air Ducts
Return and Relief Ducts in Mechanical Rooms 1
END OF SECTION
15250 -4
SECTION 15300
FIRE PROTECTION
PART I -GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Automatic wet sprinkler fire protection system design parameters
2. Fire protection system equipment, piping, fittings, valves
3. Miscellaneous components
4. Includes design,fabrication and installation of a complete and operational automaticfire
sprinkler system
5. The system shall be zoned by floor
6. Provide panels for access to valves for service or testing in enclosed ceiling and walls.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Applicable Standards
1. Fire Protection Products, Design and Installation
a. Comply with applicable requirements of
(1) New York State Uniform Fire Prevention and Building Code,
(2) NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems —'latest edition.
(3) NFPA 13R Installation of Residential Sprinkler Systems -latest edition
(4) NFPA 24 Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances-
latest edition.
B. Materials
1. Provide fire protection system products meeting or exceeding material specifications
described in these Contract Documents.
C. Design Parameters
1. Layout Drawings and Hydraulic Calculations: Prepare detailed fire sprinkler system
layout drawings and hydraulic calculations of all fire protection systems, stamped by
professional engineer licensed in New York,certified in design of fire protection systems,
and regularly employed by fire protection subcontractor.
2. Scope of Fire Protection:
a. Automatic wet type fire sprinkl6r system for entire building
3. Flow Test Information: Obtain flow test information from local water authority for use in
final design Pay costs associated with conducting flow test.
jDale Barrows of Southern Cayuga Lake Inter-municipal Water Commission, at
Bolton Point (Tel: 277-0660).
4. Sprinkler Head and Piping Layout:
15300 - 1
a. Coordinate location of sprinkler heads and piping to eliminate interference with work
of other Prime Contractors.
b. Include field survey work required for obtaining dimensions and layout of existing
obstructions and conditions affecting design and installation of fire protection
systems.
c. Sprinkler head layout drawings intended to represent general geometric appearance
required for acceptable sprinkler installation within finished ceiling spaces. Do not
interpret as representing maximum number of sprinklers required for compliance
with NFPA 13 standards for building spaces to be sprinklered. Provide additional
fire sprinklers coverage required for compliance with NFPA 13 standards and local
fire department codes and ordinances using specified sprinkler heads.
d. Position sprinkler heads in finished ceiling spaces with similar general geometric
appearance indicated on Drawings.
e. Locate sprinkler heads in finished ceiling spaces in geometric pattern parallel with
ceiling grids and walls.
f. Locate fire sprinklers centered in 2 foot wide dimension of ceiling tiles. Locate
sprinkler head 6"from each edge of one foot dimension in 1 foot wide ceiling tiles.
Align and space fire sprinklers with accuracy resulting in straight sight lines of rows
of fire sprinklers.
6. Design sprinkler piping layout and sprinkler head layout in unfinished spaces including:
coordinate spacing and locations with obstructions to ensure compliance with NFPA 13
standards for obstructions caused by structural members, roof vents openings and
ductwork, etc.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide approval of all authorities prior to submitting to Architect/Engineer for review.
B. Samples: Submit sample of sprinkler heads for approval by the Architect. Do not order
products or materials until samples have been approved in writing by the Architect.
C. Record Drawings: Provide record drawings and equipment data to Owner and hotel
engineer,
D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature including,material specifications and
other information required demonstrating compliance with specified requirements for
following items:
1. Piping
2. Gate valves
3. Valve tamper switches
4. Butterfly valves
5. Check valves
6. Detector check valve assembly
7. Double check valve assembly
8. Alarm check valves
9. Fire alarm switches
15300 - 2
10. Fire sprinkler heads
11. Ball drip valve
12. Air relief valves
13. Fire department connections
14. Identification signs
15. Inspector's test valves and restriction unions
.E. Shop Drawings
1. Provide fire sprinkler system shop drawings and hydraulic calculations with submittal of
product data.
2. Submit shop drawings of complete sprinkler systems, including hydraulic calculations,
. accordance With NFPA 13, NJAC 5:232.15(e)vil
3. Submit detailed layout shop drawings of complete sprinkler systems, as indicated for
coordination with other Prime Contractors
4. Include following in shop drawings in addition to requirements of NFPA 13:
a. Finished ceiling components such as ceiling grid, lights and air diffusers.
b. Beams and other sprinkler obstructions in unfinished spaces.
c. Details and sections to clarify design and installation to be in conformance with
design criteria and standards described in this section.
d. Written statement that coordination has been accomplished with work of other Prime
Contractors.
F. Quality Control Submittals
1. Test Reports: Submit results of flow test conducted for design of fire protection systems
with hydraulic calculations submittal.
G. Contract Closeout Submittals: Comply with requirements of SECTION 01700, including
submission of operating and maintenance instructions as item in "General Construction
Instructions" manual described in that section.
1-.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Installer: Install fire protection systems using mechanics regularly employed by and
under supervision of approved fire protection subcontractor with minimum of 5 years
work experience with installation of fire protection systems of similar nature and scope.
2. System Designer:Provide for design fire protection systems under direct supervision of
licensed professional engineer,certified in design of fire protection systems and regularly
employed by fire protection subcontractor.
B. Grooved Mechanical Coupling and Fitting System: Prepare piping in accordance with the
latest published Victaulic specifications, ANSI/AWWA C-606, UL, FM, NFPA or other
standards as applicable.
C. The fire protection contractor shall be responsible for all code research,design,coordination
and installation of a complete and functional hydraulically calculated sprinkler system and
15300 - 3
standpipe system that meets the approval of and is in accordance with all applicable
regulations and requirements as further specified:
1. The current editions of NFPA Standards#13, #14,#20 and #72.
2. Applicable Local and/or State Codes.
3. Authorities having jurisdiction and Owner insurance company.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING AND FITTINGS
A. Above Ground Piping:U L Corrosion Resistance Ratio(CRR): Not be less than 1.00,similar
to piping available from American Tube and Pipe Company
1. Threaded Pipe Systems 1"-6" Diam-.:
a. Pipe, ASTM A-795 or A-53, Schedule 40 carbon steel pipe
b. Threaded Fittings:ASTM A197 malleable iron,ANSI Standard Taper Pipe Threads
B2.1, ANSI B1 6.3 Class 150, rated for 300 psi minimum at 20deg to 150deg F.,
2. Grooved Mechanical Coupling System 2"-6"Diam.:
a. 2"�-6" Dam.: Al 35IA795 Schedule 10 steel pipe or Schedule 40 carbon steel pipe.
b. Grooved Mechanical Couplings:
(1) Couplings:
(a) Rigid Joints-Victaulic FireLock Style,005,"Grade"E"Type A gaskets.
(b) Flexible Joints-Victaulic Style 77, Grade "E" standard gaskets.
(2) Bolts: Zinc plated to ASTM B-633, heat treated carbon steel track head
conforming to physical properties of ASTM A-449, minimum tensile strength
110,000 psi, painted black.
(3) Gasket:C-Shaped,Victaulic Grade"E"EPDM compound(green color coded)
conforming to ASTM D-2000 designation 2CA615A25B24F1 7Z.Temperature
operating range -30 degrees F to +230 degrees F (-34 degrees C to +110
degrees.)
c. Reducing Joints: Victaulic 750 Reducing Couplings with Grade "E" standard
gaskets.
d. Outlets Coupling: Victaulic Style 72 outlet couplings with Grade "E" standard
gaskets.
e. Victaulic Flange Adapters: Vic-Flange Adapter Style 741, for connection to ANSI
class 125/150 flanged components or Vic-Flange Adapter Style 743 for connection
to ANSI class 250/300 flanged components.
f. Fittings:Cast ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536 or malleable iron conforming to
ASTM A-47,or forged steel conforming to ASTM A-234(A-1 06,Gr. B),with grooved
or shouldered ends for direct connection into grooved piping systems with steel pipe.
15300 - 4
g., Branch Outlets - Victaulic Style 920, 921, 925 or 929 Mechanical branch
connections with locating, collar engaging into hole With Grade "E" standard
pressure-responsive gasket (Grade"E" O-Ring in Style 925).
h. Direct sprinkler head connections, branch connections, drop nipples and sprigs:
Victaulic Style 925 Snap-Let outlet connections with locating collar engaging into
hole, Grade"E" standard pressure-responsive gasket and standard plated bolt.
I. Reducing Outlet Tees: Victaulic FIT Style 96 with female threaded outlets.
j. Reducing Run and Outlet Tees:Victaulic FIT Style 969 with female threaded outlet
k. Degree Elbows: Victaulic FIT Style 961.
1. Outlet/Mechanical-T: Victaulic FIT Style 929 with FIT locking lug branch outlet.
m. Straight Tee: Victaulic FIT Style 963 with FIT'locking lugs on outlets.
n. ,Coupling: Victaulic FIT Style 960.
o. Reducing Elbows: Victaulic Style 966 with female threaded reduction.
2.02 ISOLATION VALVES
A. Gate Valves 4"and Larger: Iron body, resilient wedge, OS&Y, 200 PSI working pressure,
bronze mounted, flanged pattern, epoxy coated interior and exterior, pregrooved stem for
tamper switch, UL listed, FM approved; similar to "Fig. F-607-RW" by Nibco.
B. Gate Valves 2"and smaller Line Size: Bronze body, solid wedge, OS &Y, 175 PSI working
pressure, bronze mounted, threaded, UL listed, FM approved; similar to"Fig.T-104-0"by
Nibco.
C. Butterfly Valves 2-1/2"and Larger:Victaulic Series 708-W or 708, UL listed for specification
1091, FM approved under Approval Standard 1112, ductile iron body conforming to ASTM
A-536 coated with polyphenylene sulfide blend,ductile iron disc conforming to ASTM A-536
with EPDM coating providing bubble tight shut-off, approved weatherproof manual actuator
suitable for indoor or outdoor use with two single pole, double throw supervisory switches
either pre-wired(WRD)or unwired(UWD)monitoring the open position as required to meet
design requirements,grooved ends for installation with grooved mechanical couplings and
rated for service up to 175 psi (11200 kPa)working pressure.
D. Butterfly Valves: UL listed, FM approved, slow-open quarter turn valve with built in tamper
switches, 175 psi,threaded ends.Valve shall be provided with tamper switches rated for 0.6
Amps, 28 VDC; similar to "No. BB-SCS02"by Milwaukee Valve.
E. Angle Gate Valve: UL listed, bronze angle valve rubber disc, 175 PSI working pressure;
similar to " KT-67UL" by Nibco.
F. Globe Valve: Bronze body side outlet,rubber disc,400 psi working pressure;similar to"KT-
292-W3'by Nibco.
G. Ball Valves - Victaulic Series 727 FireBall Valves, sizes 2" through 3", UL listed for
specification 1091, FM approved under Approval Standard 1112, ductile iron body
15300- 5
conforming to ASTM A-536, painted, and a ball conforming to Type 316 stainless steel,
factory installed double pole,double throw switches monitoring open position,grooved ends
for installation with grooved mechanical couplings and rated for service up to 175 psi (1200
kPa)working and rated for service up to 300 psi (2065 kPa)working pressure.
H. Ball Valve: 2"and smaller. Bronze body, standard port,TFE seats,threaded ends,400 psi
working pressure; similar to "KT-580" by Nibco.
2.03 CHECK VALVES
'A. Check Valve 2-1/2"and Larger: Iron body,swing check, 175 PSI working pressure,bronze
mounted, flanged pattern, UL listed, FM approved; similar to "Fig. F-908-W" by Nibco.
B. Check Valve 4" and Larger: Iron body, swing check, 175 PSI working pressure, bronze
mounted, flanged pattern, UL listed, FM approved; similar to"Fig. F-908-W" by Nibco.
C. Check Valve 4" - 8" Line Sizes: Victaulic Series 714 and 710 Vic-Check dual disc, spring
loaded, check valves, UL listed and FM approved for a single check and anti water hammer
service and for horizontal or vertical installation, supplied drilled, tapped and plugged
downstream for drainage outlet with Grade "E" EPDM seal, housing cast of ductile iron
conforming to ASTM A-536 or malleable iron to ASTM A-47 with grooved ends for installation
with Victaulic grooved end couplings rated for service up to 250 psi working pressure.
D. Check Valve 2" and smaller Line Size: Bronze body, swing check, 200 PSI working
pressure,bronze mounted,threaded ends,rubber disc;similar to"Fig. KT 403-W"by Nibco.
E. Alarm Check Valves: Wet pipe alarm valve with vertical mounting,alarm test bypass,main
drain with angle valve, bronze trim fittings, pressure gauges, U.L. listed and F.M.
1.. Manufacturers offering acceptable products include Victaulic, Grinnell Corp., Central
Sprinkler, or Reliable.
2. Provide water motor alarm bell assembly and similar components,where required by
local jurisdictional authorities.
F. Double Check Valve Assembly: Epoxy coated cast iron check valve bronze body ball valve
test cocks and OS&Y resilient wedge gate valve with pregrooved stem for tamper switch;
meeting requirements of USC's FCCC &HR Manual, Sec. 10,ASSE1013 and CSA B64.4;
similar to 7 09-OSY-RW , 6"size" by Wafts.
G. Detector Check Valve: FDA approved epoxy coated cast iron check valve, stainless steel
check module and replaceable bronze seat ring with by pass meter assembly including,GPM
meter, check valve, and ball valve, UL listed, FM approved;similar to"No 07F",.8"size"by
Watts.
2.04 SWITCHES
A. Flow Switches: UUFM listed, rated for450 PSI and surges up to 18 FPS,alarm activation at
10 GPM,2 sets of single pole double throw Form C synchronized sets of contacts rated at 15
A, 125 VAC and 2A, 24 VDC.; corrosion-resistant using factory-installed, non-corrosive
insert; similar to"Model VSR-F" by Potter Electric Signal Manufacturing.
1. Switch Enclosure:Tamper resistant,meeting NFPA4 rating,and equipped with instantly
recycling adjustable retard with 0-90 second range.
15300 - 6
B. Valve Tamper Switches: 2 sets of single pole double throw Form C synchronized sets of
contacts rated at 15A, 125/250 VAC and 2.5 A, 0-30 VDC, located within tamper resistant
NEMA 6P enclosure with electrical
1. OS&Y Gate Valve Tamper Switch: Similar to Potter Electric Signal Manufacturing
"Model OSYSU-2".
2. Butterfly: Similar to Potter Electric Signal Manufacturing"Model PCVS-2".
2.05 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Basic Requirements
1. Select to conform with applicable standards to specific building construction
requirements, i.e., orifice sizes and coverages.
2. Provide minimum Y2"orifice size for sprinklers for standard coverage sprinklers heads
unless otherwise noted.
3. Do not use sprinkler heads with EPDM O-ring within sprinkler head assembly.
B. Quick Response and Quick Response Extended Coverage Type Sprinklers
1. Use acceptable if sprinklers meet following conditions:
a. U.L. listed, F.M. approved
b. Installed in conformance U.L. listed, F.M. guidelines
c. Spacing between sprinklers no greater than 18'-0".
2. Where quick response sprinkler heads are provided, include features,finishes,styles as
specified for spaces and areas specified.
C. Standard Response Type Sprinkler Heads- Minimum Design Requirements: Comply with
following minimum design requirements for standard response type sprinkler heads in
specific areas of building, where allowed by NFPA 13 standards.
1. Unfinished Ceiling Spaces: Center strut design with fusible alloy with no protruding
elements beyond sprinkler frame,upright head with brass frame and deflector,UL listed
and FM approved, 165degF ordinary temperature rating, similar to "Sprinkler A" by
Central Sprinkler Co.
2. Sidewall Sprinklers Finished Areas: Center strut design with fusible alloy with no
protruding elements beyond sprinkler frame, chrome plated brass frame and deflector,
UL listed and FM approved, 165F ordinary temperature rating, similar to "Sidewall
Sprinkler-H" by Central Sprinkler Co.
3. Sidewall Sprinkler in Unfinished Spaces: Center strut design with fusible alloy with no
protruding elements beyond sprinklerframe,brass frame and deflector, UL listed and FM
approved, 165F ordinary temperature rating,similarto"Sidewall Sprinkler-H"by Central
Sprinkler Co.
4. Sidewall Sprinkler under Skylights: Center strut design with fusible alloy with no
protruding elements beyond sprinkler frame, chrome plated brass frame and deflector,
UL listed and FM approved, 212F ordinary temperature rating, similar to "Sidewall
15300 - 7
Sprinkler-H"by Central Sprinkler Co.
5. Boller Room:Center strut design with fusible alloy with no protruding elements beyond
sprinkler frame,upright head with brass frame and deflector, UL listed and FM approved,
212E ordinary temperature rating, similar to "Sprinkler A" by Central Sprinkler Co.
6. Finished Ceiling Spaces - Recessed Style: Glass bulb recessed style sprinkler head
with chrome plated brass frame escutcheon and deflector, UL listed and FM approved,
155F ordinary temperature rating, similar to "Sprinkler GB"by Central Sprinkler Co.
7. Finished Ceiling Spaces - Concealed Style: Adjustable, glass bulb, concealed style
brass frame sprinkler head with white painted cover plate, UL listed and FM approved,
155F ordinary sprinkler temperature rating and 135E cover plate temperature rating,
similar to"Royal Flush Concealed GB4", by Central Sprinkler Co.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS
A. Ball Drip Valve:3/4"cast brass,straight orangle as required:similarto"No.6781 or6783"by
Croker.
B. Fire Department Connections:
1. Provide fire department connections and thread standard style or coupling matching
requirements of local fire protection authority requirements. Verify requirements with
local fire department authority and include written verification that fire department
connection meets local standards with product submittals for review by Architect.
2. Labeling: "STANDPIPE" , "AUTO SPRINKLER" , or "STANDPIPE-SPRINKLER"
matching fire system as required.
C. Inspectors Test Components .
1. Victaulic Style 719 TestMasterwith FIT locking lugsforthe 1-1/4"(32 mm)IPS inletand
outlet, a combination sight glass/orifice, bronze top works and 1/4" NPT plug for
attachment of a gauge or water hose for pressure testing.
2. Restriction Union: Includes orifice providing flow equivalent to 1 nominal Y27 orifice
sprinkler.
3. Inspectors Test Valve: U.L. listed, Class 150, bronze ball, full port, 'two-piece
construction, 400 w.w.p. non-shock cold water with lockable handle, or approved
inspectors test and drain combination assembly with equivalent vandal-resistant
features.
4. Similar to Grinnell Model F360 Sectional Test and Drain with flow switch, pressure
gauge, and butterfly valve.
5. Discharge: Locate through exterior wall and discharge to grade.
D. Identification Signs: Metal identification signs, nominally Z'x 6"or 3"x 5", red background
with white lettering; similar to Potter-Roemer"Series 6300" or equivalent by W. D. Allen or
Sierra.
1. Include appropriate warning and/or identification information such as"Inspectors Test',
"Drain","Main Drain","Fire Sprinkler Valve-Do Not Close","Sprinkler Fire Alarm-Call
15300- 8
Fire Department", hydraulic design information indicating design flow and residual
pressure, etc.
2. Submit list of signs to be used indicating location and wording for approval by Architect.
3. Label control valves, fire riser, etc., with appropriate brief descriptions of operating
functions.
4. Provide signage to locate main or section valves in accordance with NFPA 13.
2.11 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Strength: Minim'um 4000.psi. ultimate compressive strength at 28 days with a
minimum 6 sacks of cement per cubic yard.
B. Concrete Durability
1. Air Entrainment: 5%to 7%air entrain ment,for maximum 1"size coarse aggregate.
2. Water/Cement Ratio: Maximumwater/cement ratio of 0.4.
C. Concrete reinforcement: 6 x 6 -1.4x 1.4welded wire mesh.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Coordination: Nature of fire protection system installation requires close coordination with
construction of other prime contracts.Relocate sprinklers to avoid obstructions encountered
at no additional cost to Owner.
B. Installation Standards
1. Comply with procedures and methods,for fire suppression systems in accordance with
the more stringent requirements identified the Contract Documents, and applicable
standards.
2. Provide drains on fire protection piping where required to meet NFPA 13
recommendations.
3. Provide supports, braces and hangers for piping systems in accordance with NFPA 13.
4. Provide identification of piping systems in accordance with SECTION 15050-Plumbing
Identification and NFPA 13.
5. Install products, devices, valves and piping between system components in
conformance with manufactures installation procedures and descriptions.
C. Power and Control Wiring: Provide power and control wiring as required between controllers
and fire and jockey system components,and in conformance with manufactures installation
procedures and descriptions.
D. Pressure Gauges: Provide pressure gauges at alarm check valve with each gauge
controlled by valve and arranged for draining and where indicated on Drawings.
E. Identification Signs: Provide appropriate metal identification and warning signs for alarm
15300 - 9
valves, drain valves, test valves, alarm lines, etc. Attach with suitable length and type of
chain.
F. Fire Sprinklers:
1. Install and adjust fire sprinkler head deflector to be parallel with finished ceiling. Install
and adjust fire sprinkler head cover plate to be flush with finished ceiling.
2. Install fire sprinklers with level of accuracy resulting in straight sight lines of rows of fire
sprinklers.
G. Piping Systems:
1. Do not install piping systems,which will interfere,disturb,bend or touch obstructions,i.e.
duct work,lights,supports,etc.Make required offsets and drainage provisions of piping
to miss obstructions.
2. Coordinate elevations of pipe and pipe routing with ceiling heights, soffits, supports,
structure, lights and ductwork and other construction within ceiling space.
3. Do not force,or bend piping to make piping It into ceiling space.
H. Flow Switches: Provide flow switch on each system riser and on each sprinkler zone main
branch as required for applicable standards. Arrange for and coordinate wiring connections
required to annunciate building alarm system with Electrical Work Prime Contractor.
I. Valve Tamper Switches: Provide tamper switches for trouble alarm signaling to building fire
alarm at closing of normally open control valves,on water supply isolation valves,sectional
control valves,and other valves in supply pipes to sprinklers,in conformance with applicable
standards.
J. Identification Signs: Submit list of signs to be used indicating location and wording for
approval by Architect.
1. Label control valves, fire riser, etc., with appropriate brief descriptions of operating
functions.
2. Provide signage to locate main or fire riser/zone valve, inspectors test valve location,
section valves in accordance with NFPA 13.
3. Attach identification, hydraulic design data,and warning signs with suitable length and
type of chain to alarm valves, drain valves, test valves, alarm lines, etc.
K. Sprinkler Emergency Cabinets:
1. Provide number of cabinets with minimum of sprinklers of each style sprinkler installed
inside cabinet with installation wrenches designed for sprinkler styles as defined in NFPA
13.
2. Sprinkler Emergency Cabinets: Mount rigid to wall in room as directed by Owner's
Representative.
L. System Drains and Inspector Test Drains: Locate through exterior wall and discharge to
grade and use bronze piping and fittings on exterior face of building with cast brass
escutcheon plate with set screw.
15300 - 10
M. Connect water piping to the supply main and extend to the sprinkler system.
N. Hangers and Clamps for piping shall be hung independently of the ceiling.
O. Horizontal branch piping shall be pitched to main which shall also be pitched to provide
complete drainage at drain valve drain.
P. Flanged Joints shall be made with neoprene gaskets and assembled with machine bolts.
Q. Set FD connection at least 2'-6"from hose inlet centerline to grade. Provide discharge drain
line.,
R. Fire protection system shall be designed,installed and supported so as to resist all applicable
forces.
S. A threaded cap connection shall be located at the end of each sprinkler piping run to flush
the system.
T. Install basket type metal guards over sprinkler heads to protect them from damage in
Laundry, Mechanical, Electrical and Storage Rooms.
U. Inspector test assemblies are required. Locate at remote ends of systems, and hardpipe
discharge to exterior of building. Discharge shall not be directed onto sidewalks or
landscaping.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests:
1. Provide flushing and testing of piping systems.
2. Test all alarm devices for proper operation and connection to central alarm system.
3.03 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owners personnel in care and maintenance of sprinkler system components.
3.05 FREEZE PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for freeze protection as follows:
1. A dry pipe system(s) shall be provided in attics and other unheated areas where
necessary so as to prevent freezing.
2. Dry sprinkler systems shall be completewith tank mounted compressor,controls,valves
and all necessary appurtenances. Termination of drains shall be approved by the
Architect.
3. Wet pipes shall not be routed through unheated spaces.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for repairing and/or all costs incurred from damage
caused by freezing of the fire protection services.
3.06 CLEANING
A. At the completion of this work, remove from the site all excess materials and debris. Leave
entire work in a neat and workmanlike condition ready for the Architect's inspection.
15300 - 11
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect all work of this Section until date of Substantial Completion. Repair or replace
damaged work at no additional cost to the Ovoer.
END OF SECTION
15300 - 12
SECTION 15400
PLUMBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe and pipe fittings, valves.
B. Plumbing Specialties: floor drains, interceptors, cleanouts,water hammer arresters.
C. Plumbing Fixtures.
D. Plumbing Equipment.
E. Include all applicable service charges, tap fees, connection charges, payments to utilities
for construction of service lines and meters, fees, permits, royalties, taxes and other
similar costs in connection therewith.
F. Explanation and Precedence of Drawings:
1. For purposes of clearness and legibility, plumbing drawings are essentially
diagrammatic and, although size and location of equipment are drawn to scale
wherever possible, the Contractor shall make use of all data in all of the Contract
Documents and shall verify this information at building site.
2. The Drawings indicate required size and points of termination of pipes and suggest
proper routes of pipe to conform to structure avoid obstructions and preserve
clearances. However, it is not intended that drawings indicate all necessary offsets,
and it shall be the work of this section to install piping in such a manner as to conform
to structure, avoid obstructions, preserve headroom, and keep openings and
passageways clear, without further instruction or cost to the Owner.
3. Prepare shop drawings showing location of all underground piping before concrete
footings, etc., are poured to familiarize him with location of same. An "extra"shall not
be allowed for relocation of any piping due to interference of structural elements,
4. Shop Drawings shall be furnished by this Section,indicating all changes to meet space
requirements, code requirements, and as necessary to resolve all space conflicts.
5. It is intended that all apparatus be located symmetrical with architectural elements,and
shall be installed at exact height and locations as shown on the architectural drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide for plumbing specialties, fixtures, and equipment.
1.03 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year warranty under provisions of Division 1.
1.04 SCOPE
15400- 1
A. Provide new plumbing facilities as shown on the Contract Drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BEYOND BUILDING
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight, with neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum
joints.
B. Cast Iron Pipe: ❑ISPI 301, hubless, service weight,with neoprene gaskets and stainless
steel clamps.
C. PVC Schedule 80: Where allowable by Local Code.
D. SDR 35
2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED AND EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE, WITHIN
BUILDING
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight, with neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum
joints.
B. Cast Iron Pipe: DISPI 301, hubless, service weight, with neoprene gaskets and stainless
steel clamps.
C. PVC schedule 40 where allowable by local code.
2.03 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE WITHIN BUILDING
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight, with neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum
joints.
B. Cast Iron Pipe: DISPI 301, hubless, service weight,with neoprene gaskets and stainless
steel clamps.
C. Copper Tube: ASTM B306, type DWV with cast bronze or wrought copper fittings and
Grade 50B solder joints.
D. PVC schedule 40 where allowable by local code.
2.04 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L hard drawn, with cast brass or wrought copper
fittings and Grade 95 TA solder joints.
2.05 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A. Pipe Size 2 Inches (50 mm)and Under malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous
piping; bronze unions for soldered copper pipe joints.
15400 -2
B. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: Malleable iron housing: "C" shape,
composition sealing gasket; steel bolts, nuts, and vashers.
C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper
solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.
2.06 BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Watts
2. Jenkins
3. Jamesbury
B. Up to 2 Inches (50 mm): Bronze or stainless steel body, stainless steel ball, Teflon seats
and stuffing box ring, lever handle, solder or threaded ends.
2.07 RELIEF VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Wafts Regulator CO.
2. A.W. Cash
3. McDonnell Miller Inc.
B. Bronze body, Teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated,
capacities ASME certified and labeled.
2.08 STRAINERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Watts
2. Zurn
3. Mueller
B. Size 2 inch (50 mm)and Under Screwed brass or iron body, Y pattern with stainless
steel perforated screen.
2.09 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Josarn
2. Zurn
3. Smith
B. FD-1: Lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, and
round, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer.
2.10 CLEANOUTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Josarn
2. Zurn
15400-3
3. Smith
B. Floor: Lacquered cast iron, two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes,
reversible clamping collar, and adjustable nickel-bronze strainer, round scorlated cover in
service areas and round depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas.
C. Wall: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover,
and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.
2.11 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS
A. Sleeves through structural concrete,members and sleeves for walls below grade and
floors on grade shall be standard weight galvanized steel pipe. Sleeves through other
than structural components of the building shall be 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal with
lock seam joints.
B. Escutcheon plates to be installed where exposed piping passes through walls, ceilings,
and floors of building, shall be minimum 20 gauge steel, chromium plated. Exposed
hanger rods in finished spaces with ceiling shall have cast iron escutcheon with set
screw.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside piping before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D. Coordinate cutting or forming of roof or floor construction to receive drains to required
invert elevations.
E. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings
before rough-in and installation.
F. Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough-in work of this Section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Provide dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
B. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. Group
piping whenever practical at common elevations.
C. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints, or
connected equipment.
D. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
E. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points.
15400 -4
F. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
G. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
H. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with
mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for nodding of drainage
system.
1. Install water hammer arresters complete with accessible isolation valve.
J. Install each fixture with chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies with screwdriver stops,
reducers, and escutcheons.
K. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to Mures without splashing, noise, or
overflow.
L. Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners, and dielectric connections only in
accessible locations.
B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder
adapters to pipe.
D. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
E. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
3.04 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide sanitary sewer connections. Before commencing work check invert elevations
required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly
connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.
B. Provide new domestic and fire sprinkler water service per details on drawings, and all
water utility requirements.
C. Provide new gas service per details on drawings, and all gas utility requirements.
3.05 TESTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Upon completion of Work, and before Work is concealed, all equipment shall be cleaned
and adjusted for proper operation and any defects discovered shall be corrected before
final inspection prior to acceptance.
B. Methods of Testing Drainage and Vent Systems:
1 Rough Plumbing- Piping of plumbing drainage and venting system shall be
tested upon completion of the rough piping installation by water or air and proved
15400 -5
watertight.
2. Finished Plumbing-After the plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps
filled with water, their connections shall be tested and proved gas and water tight.
C. Methods of Testing Building Sewers:
I The building sewer shall be tested by insertion of a test plug at the point of
connection with the public sewer. It shall then be filled with water under a head of
not less than 10 feet. The water level at the top of the test head of water shall not
drop for at least 15 minutes.
D. Methods of Testing Water Supply Systems:
1. Prior to commencement of testing the entire potable water system shall be
disinfected.
2. Upon completion of a section, the entire water system shall be tested and proved
tight.
3.06 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Make drawings showing the exact location of all piping installed underground. These
drawings shall be made on sheets the same sine as the working drawings. Deliver to the
Architect.
3.07 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE BROCHURES:
A. Prepare two complete "Operating and Maintenance" brochures. 'Brochures shall contain
descriptive date on all items submitted in Submittal Brochures. Include parts lists and
operating instructions for all operating equipment. The most convenient source of securing
replacements parts shall be listed for each piece of equipment; generally the local
distributor or sales representative. Brochure shall be bound and tab indexed and clearly
labeled on the cover indicating the project name, date and responsible parties.
B. Brochures shall be turned over to Architect for the Owner prior to Contract Closeout.
3.08 PAINTING
A. The following protective painting and identification of equipment shall be provided under
this Division of the work. Other finish painting shall be provided under the"Painting"
Division of the specifications.
I Equipment, including pumps, motors, and similar factory fabricated and
assembled units shall be furnished with factory applied protective prime coat paint
of finished baked enamel as specified herein. Equipment surfaces damaged
during course of construction shall be refinished by the Plumbing Contractor.
B. Uncoated black ferrous piping and fittings except where concealed by furring or chases shall
be cleaned and painted with one coat of black enamel heat resistant paint. Exposed cast iron
piping shall be provided with one coat of asphalt varnish. Steel frame equipment supports
shall be cleaned and painted with one coat of aluminum paint. Underground piping and fittings
of various ferrous materials shall be provided with heavy coating of asphaltum or coal tar pitch.
Underground water piping shall be provided with heavy coating of protective bituminous
compound.
3.09 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS
A. Masonry Walls: Sleeve all penetrations.
15400-6
B. Floors: Sleeve piping that penetrates floor system. Sleeves shall be installed flush with the
top of the floor slab.
C. Fire Rated Gypsum Wallboard Partitions: cut gypsum wallboard to fit pipe, and seal void
between the wallboard and the pipe. For the following services, sleeves are not required:
1. Rain water leaders.
2. Domestic cold water piping.
3. Any piping subject to condensing.
D. Non-Fire-rated Drywall Partitions: Sleeves are not required. Seal wall penetration against
pipe or insulation.
E. Firestopping:
1. Install piping, sleeves and insulation through fire-rated walls in accordance with
U.L. Fire Resistant Directory.
a. Clearance Between Sleeve and Pipe: Minimum of Y27 for hot piping and 1"for
cold piping or as otherwise dictated by U.L. Fire Resistance Directory.
2. Where piping penetrates the floor slab(second floor slab and above),provide and
install "Code Red Fire Stop Device" as manufactured by ProSet Systems of
Atlanta, Georgia. . -
F. Provide chromium plated escutcheon plates for exposed uninsulated pipes projecting
through floors or walls in"finished"spaces. Mechanical rooms,storerooms,electric closets
and janitor's closets are not considered "finished"spaces.
3.10 CROSS CONNECTIONS
A. Piping shall not be installed in a manner to permit back-siphonage or any flow of polluted
water or other liquids into domestic water piping system under any condition.
B. Air gaps, receptor type drains and approved vacuum breaking devices shall be provided as
required by local codes and ordinances. Piping to hose-end faucets or to inlet below.fixture
overflow shall have vacuum breakers of make, design, size and location approved by the
inspector of plumbing. Vacuum breakers shall not be concealed,shall be full size of pipe and
shall be chrome plated.
2.11 SERVICING ACCESSIBILITY
A. All equipment shall be placed and arranged so that all items requiring periodic service are
accessible. This shall include all motors, oil reservoirs,filters,valves, controls and related
items. Provide access doors as required.
END OF SECTION
15400 -7
SECTION 15530
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART I -GENERAL
1.0 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings showing layout of refrigerant piping,specialties,and fittings including,but not
necessarily limited to: pipe and tube size, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of
horizontal rubs, wall and floor penetrations,,and equipment connection details. Show
interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate to equipment.
B. Brazers certificates signed by Contractor certifying that brazers comply with requirements
specified under"Quality Assurance"below.
C. Maintenance data for refrigerant valves and piping specialties,for inclusion in Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualify brazing processes and brazed operators in accordance with ASME "Boiler and
pressure Vessel Code", Section IX 'Welding and Brazing Qualifications".
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with provisions of the following codes:
2. ANSI B31.5: ASME Code for Pressure Piping -Refrigerant Piping.
3. ANSUASHRAE Standard 15: Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
1r.2 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the installation of roof piping supports, and roof penetrations.
IPART 2-PRODUCTS
2.0 PIPE AND TUBING'MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Refer to Part 3, Article "PIPE APPLICATION"for identification of systems where the
below specified pipe and fitting materials are used.
B. Copper Tubing:
1. ASTUB 280,Type ARC, hard-drawn straight lengths,and soft annealed coils,seamless
copper tubing. Tubing shaill be factory cleaned, ready for installation, and have ends
capped to protect cleanliness of pipe interiors prior to shipping.
C. Copper Tubing:
1. ASTM B 88, Type L, hard-drawn straight lengths and soft-annealed coils, seamless
copper tubing.
15530- 1
2.1 FITTINGS
A. Wrought-Copper Fittings:
1. ANSI B16.22, streamlined pattern.
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Brazing Filler Metals:
1. AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (silver).
IPART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine rough-in for refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections prior to installation.
3.2 PIPE APPLICATIONS
A. Use Type L,or Type ACR drawn copper tubing with wrought copper fittings and brazed joints
above ground, within building. Use Type K, annealed temper copper tubing for 2" and
smaller without joints, below ground and within slabs. Mechanical fittings(crimp or flair)are
not permitted.
1. Install annealed temper tubing in pipe duct. Vent pipe duct to the outside.
B. If other than Type ACR tubing is used, clean and protect inside of tubing as specified in
Article "CLEANING" below.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
X General:
1. Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15-"The Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration".
B. Install piping in as short and direct arrangement as possible to minimize fittings.
C. Install piping for minimum number of joints using as few elbows and other fittings as possible.
D. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and servicing of compressor and other equipment.
Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for servicing and inspection.
E. Provide adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hanger,or between pipes
for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit
installation of full thickness insulation.
F. Insulate suction lines. Liquid lines are not required to be insulated, except where they are
installed adjacent and clamped to suction lines,where both liquid and suction lines shall be
insulated as a unit.
15530 -2
1. Do noUnstall.insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks have been
eliminated.
G. Install branch tie-in lines to paralleled compressors equal length, and pipe identically and
symmetrically.
H. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible condition in locations where copper tubing will be
exposed to mechanical injury.
I. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot gas discharge piping with 1/2" per 10 feet downward slope away
from the compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with 1" per 10 feet downward slope to the compressor,
with no long traps or dead ends which may cause oil to separate from the suction gas
and return to the compressor in damaging slugs.
3. Install traps and double risers where indicated, and where required to entrain oil in
vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
J. Use fittings for all changed in direction and all branch connections.
K. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not
permitted, unless expressly indicated.
L. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper
insulation applications.
M. Conceal all pipe installation in walls,pipe chases,utility spaces,above ceilings,below grade
of floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.
N. Install piping tight to slabs, beams,joints,columns,walls,and other permanent elements of
the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications,with 1"clearance outside the
insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow panel removal.
O. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and
servicing of valves.
P. Exterior Wall Penetrations:
1. Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve
seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6"shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6"and larger shall be
sheet metal.
Q. Fire Barrier Penetrations:
1. Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions,ceilings, and floors, maintain the
fire rated integrity.
R. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with the level side
down.
15530 - 3
S.. Install strainers immediately ahead of each expansion valve,solenoid valve,hot gas bypass
valves, compressor suction valve, and as required to protect refrigerant piping system
components.
T. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter/driers and thermostatic
expansion valves and in liquid line to receiver.
1. Install moisture/liquid indicators in lines larger than 2-1/8"OD, using a bypass line.
U. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure regulating valves, expansion
valves, and at connections to compressors and evaporators'.
V. Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection of compressors.
3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Brazed Joints:
1. Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual".
2. When solenoid valves are being installed, remove the coil to prevent damage. When
sight glasses are being installed,remove the glass. Remove stems,seats,and packing
of valves,and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties before brazing. Do not
apply heat near the bulb of the expansion valve.
B. Fill the pipe and fittings during brazing with an inert gas (i.e. nitrogen or carbon dioxide)to
prevent formation of scale.
C. Heat joints using oxyacetylene torch. Heat to proper and uniform brazing temperature.
3.5 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. The Drawings indicated the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow servicing and maintenance.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect, test, and perform corrective action of refrigerant piping in accordance with ASME
Code B31.5, Chapter VI.
B. Repair leaking joints using new materials, and retest for leaks.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Before installation of copper tubing other than Type ACR tubing,clean the tubing and fittings
using following-cleaning procedure:
1. Remove coarse particles of dirt and dust by drawings a clean, listless cloth through the
tubing by means of a wire or an electrician's tape.
2. Draw a clean, lintless cloth saturated with trichlorethylene through the tube or pipe.
Continue this procedure until cloth is not discolored by dirt.
15530-4
3. Draw a clean, lintless cloth, saturated with compressor oil, squeezed dry, through the
tube or pipe to remove remaining lint. Inspect tube or pipe visually for remaining dirt and
lint.
4. Finally, draw a clean, dry, lintless cloth through the tube or pipe.
3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Verify actual evaporator applications and operating conditions, and adjust thermostatic
expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements.
B. Clean and inspect refrigerant piping systems in accordance with requirements of Division 15
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Pipes and Pipe Fittings".
C. Adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment
with new materials and products.
END OF SECTION
15530 - 5
SECTION 15531
REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services to perform all operations required for a
complete installation and related work as required.
B. General Req turements:
1. Liquid line filter driers and suction line filters shall be included in all systems. When not
of the replaceable core type, line connections shall be flared. When replaceable core
types are used, connections are to be soldered and a full line size valved bypass will be
installed. Schrader Gauge connections shall be provided on the filter housing.
2. A pump down solenoid valve shall be incorporated on all systems.
3. On systems containing over 50 lbs.of refrigerant charge,a receiver shall be provided for
refrigerant pump down.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data, including rated capacities where applicable, furnish options and
accessories, and installation instructions for each item below.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A., Regulatory Requirements:
1. ANSI B31.5: ASME Code for Pressure Piping -Refrigerant Piping.
2. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15: Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
1PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Complete refrigerant piping specialty shall be UL listed and designed to conform to ARI 760.
2.02 STRAINERS
A. Y-type pattern with solder end connections.
B. Rated for maximum operating pressure of 500 prig.
C. Cast bronze body with monel 80-mesh screen, and screwed cleanout plug.
D. Manufacturer:
1. Sporlan Valve Company or approved equal.
15531 - 1
2.03 MOISTURE/LIQUID INDICATORS
A. Solder or flared end connections.
B. Forged brass body, with indicator element replaceable from bottom, and large polished
optical viewing window.
C. Rated for maximum operating pressure of 500 psig,and maximum operating temperature of
200 F.
D. Manufacturer:
1. Sp6rlan Valve Company or approved equal.
2.04 FILTER- DRIERS
A. Steel shell with flange ring and spring, ductile iron cover plate with steel capscrews.
B. Internal parts to be cadmium plated.
C. Rated for maximum operating pressure of 500 psig.
D. Provide complete with replaceable filter-drier core kit, high core kit,high capacity desiccant
sieves to provide micronic filtration and extra drying capacity, including gaskets.
E. Manufacturer.
1. Sporlan Valve Company or approved equal.
2.05 SUCTION LINE FILTER DRIER
A. Steel shall and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections.
B. Rated for maximum operating pressure of 350 psig and maximum operating temperature of
225 F.
C. Permanent filter element shall be molded felt core surrounded by a desiccant for removal of
acids and moisture from refrigerant vapor.
D. Manufacturer:
1. Sporlan Valve Company or approved equal.
2.06 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Rated for 500 psig maximum operating pressure and refrigeration service.
B. Seamless tin, bronze or stainless steel core.
C. High tensile bronze braid covering.
D. Solder end connections.
15531 -2
E. Connector shall be dehydrated, pressure tested, and a minimum of 7" in length.
2.07 PIPE CURBS
A. Pipe curb assembly shall be factory fabricated from heavy gauge galvanized steel, unitized
construction,with an integral base plate, and 2 x 2 pressure treated wood nailer.
B. Curb shall be insulated with 3 lb. density fiberglass rigid insulation.
C. Curb shall be provided with an acrylic,clad thermoplastic cover,fastening screws,graduated
step rubber boots with stainless steel clamps.
D. Provide coverwith the appropriate numberand size of openings with collars to accommodate
all refrigerant piping and electrical conduit (power and control wiring).
E. Provide curb style as detailed or noted on drawings.
F. Manufacturer:
1. The Pate Company or approved equal.
2.08 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Schedule 40 galvanized,welded steel pipe,ASTM A53,Grade A,for sleeve 6"diameter and
smaller.
B. Galvanized sheet metal, 10 gauge, round tube with welded longitudinal joint for sleeves
larger than 6".
C. Galvanized sheet metal, 20 gauge, round tube with welded longitudinal joint (for sleeves
installed in masonry block construction).
2.09 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to
continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. Sleeve seals shall be connected
with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when
tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.
B. Manufacturer:
1. Thunderline Corp., or approved equal.
2.10 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Chrome plated, stamped steel, hinged, split-ring escutcheons, with set screw.
B. Inside diameter shall closely fit pipe outside diameter, or outside diameter of pipe insulation
where piping is insulated. Outside diameter to completely cover the opening in the floor,wall,
or ceiling.
C. Manufacturer:
15531 -3
1. Grinnell or approved equal.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and instructions.
B. Strainers:
1. Install strainer-immediately ahead of each expansion valve, solenoid valve, hot gas
bypass valve, compressor suction valve., and as required to protect refrigerant piping
system components.
C. Moisture/Liquid Indicators:
1. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter/driers and thermostatic
expansion valves and in liquid line to receiver.
a. Install moisture/liquid indicators in lines larger than 2-1/8"O.D.,using a bypass line.
D. Filter-Driers:
1. Install filter-drier in liquid line for sealed units. Provide full size bypass with isolation
valves for filter-driers with replaceable cores.
E. Suction Line Filter-Drier:
1. Provide suction line filter-drier where not provided as a part of installed equipment by
compressor manufacturer.
F. Flexible Connectors:
1. Provide flexible connectors in suction and liquid lines at condensing unit.
G. Pipe Curbs:
1. Provide roof pipe curb assembly for all piping penetrations of roof.
2. Install adjacent to condensing unit to minimbe length of piping above roof.
H. Pipe Sleeves:
1. Provide pipe sleeves for all piping penetrations of masonry walls and floors.
a. Provide light gauge sheet metal sleeves for all penetrations of masonry block
partitions.
b. Provide schedule 40 pipe and 10 gauge sheet metal sleeves for penetrations of
poured masonry walls and floors.
c. Set sleeve 1/2" above finished floor for all piping passing through toilet,rooms,
kitchens, equipment rooms, and rooms where the floor may be wet during normal
15531 -4
maintenance.
2. For existing construction, bore round holes 10 larger than pipe outside diameter for
uninsulated piping,and 1/2"larger than insulation outside diameter for insulated piping.
Sleeves are not required for bored holes except where required for waterproofing as
specified above.
3. For precast concrete construction, bore round holes 1/2" larger than pipe outside
diameter for uninsulated piping, and 1/2" larger than insulation outside diameter for
insulated piping. Sleeves are not required for bored holes except where required for
waterproofing as specified above.
4. Caulk annular space between pipe and sleeve with Silicone Elastomer Compound(Dow
Coming Fire Stop Sealant - Catalog 42000) at all penetrations of fire rated walls and
floors.
5. Do not cut reinforcing rods.
I. Mechanical Sleeve Seals:
1. Provide seals at all penetrations of exterior walls and at sleeves installed in wet areas
(kitchens, toilet rooms, equipment rooms, etc).
J. Escutcheons:
1. Provide escutcheons for all piping penetrations of walls,floors,and ceilings exposed to
view.
END OF SECTION
15531 -5
SECTION 15670
REMOTE AIR COOLED HEAT PUMP UNIT
PART I -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide and install as shown on Plans and herein specified a remote air cooled heat pump
unit.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide manufacturers specifications data for each unit,showing operating weight,all sizes,
dimensions, capacity, operating and performance characteristics, motor horsepower, and
other pertinent data.
B. Fan outlet velocities and coil face velocities are maximum allowable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.02 DESCRIPTION
A. Basic Units:
1. Shall be arranged for vertical air flow on units with a capacity over 8 tons. Condensers
shall be multiple fan design and shall perform as'herein specified.
2. Shall be factory assembled, leak tested, evaluated, and charged with a replacement
holding charge.
3. Condenser shall consist of casing, condenser coil, multiple direct drive propeller fans
driven by independent fan motors, fan guards, and mounting legs. Al[motors shall be
factory wired to individual electrical junction boxes and disconnect switches.
4. Condenser coil:
a. The condenser coil shall be constructed of seamless copper tubes. Tubes shall be
mechanically expanded into rippled aluminum fins for permanent metal-to-metal
contact. The fins shall have full depth fin collars completely covering the copper
tube.
b. Copper tubes shall be attached to headers with heavy wall fittings for maximum
resistance to piping strain and vibration due to discharge gas pulsation.
c. Coils shall have a working pressure of 450 psig. A 450 prig relief device, one per
circuit, to be field installed.
d. Coils shall be factory leak tested, dehydrated, evacuated, and sealed with caps
brazed on coil connections.
5. Casing:
15670 - 1
a. The condenser casing shall be constructed of 18 gauge galvanized steel. Casing
shall be divided into individual fan sections by full width galvanized partitions.
b. Structural support members,including coil support frame and legs,shall-be 7 and 10
gauge continuous galvanized steel for strength and corrosion resistance.
c. Unit to be finished with zinc phosphate primer and two coats of acrylic enamel.
6. Fan and fan guard:
a. Fans to be direct drive propeller type with a maximum rotating speed of'1200 rpm.
The maximum fan diameter shall not exceed 28".
b. Fan guards shall be heavy-gauge,closed meshed,steel wire,zinc plated and irldite
dipped. Guards shall be contoured for maximum rigidity.
7. Motors: Fan motors shall be weather protected,have ball bearings and built-in overload
protection.
8. Condensing unit capacities as noted on schediules,
9. Condensing unit to be supplied with a prewired, fused, unit mounted, weatherproof
disconnect switch.
10. Controls:
a. Unit to be supplied with low ambient operating. package to allow starting and
operation at temperatures down to 0 F.
b. Controls to be located in a weatherproof enclosure:
(1) High pressure cut out
(2) Low pressure cut out
(3) Compressor overload relays
(4) Internal compressor winding high temperature thermostat
(5) High pressure fusible plug
(6) Oil failure cut out
(7) Five minute anti-recycle timer
c. Liquid line solenoid valve to be Installed at evaporator coil.
11. Compressors:
a. For unit with capacities from 5 to 8 tons:
(1) Compressor shall be accessible hermetic type with suction and discharge
service valves, crankcase heater, oil sightglass and oil charging connection.
15670 -2
Compressor shall have a force feed lubrication system with reversible oil
pump. Compressor shall have an operating oil charge. Compressor motor
shall be high torque, hermetic induction type, 1750 RPM and shall be
protected against overload, single phasing and locked motor conditions.
Compressor shall be mounted on resilient isolators to minimize vibration and
to eliminate the need of suction or discharge vibration isolators.
(2) A sub-cooling section shall be integral with the main condenser coil but piped
afterthe liquid receiver and shall provide a minimum of 15 degrees liquid sub-
cooling for improved system performance and longer piping runs without flash
gas.
b. For units with capacities from 8 to 30 tons:
(1) Compressors shall be designed for industrial duty and fully sealed.
Compressors are to have force-feed lubrication systems using integral oil
pumps. Internal accumulators shall be provided in each compressor to
prevent liquid slugging. Internal mufflers shall be provided to eliminate the
transmission of motor and piston vibrations. Units 20 tons and larger shall
utilize (2)compressors with-(2)completely independent refrigeration circuits.
(2) Compressors over 7.5 nominal tons shall include mechanical compressors
with separate refrigerant circuits in lieu of mechanical unloading. Units of
more than 20 tons shall have 4 steps of capacity reduction.
12. Accessories:
a. All units to be provided with:
(1) Filter dryer
(2) Liquid line solenoid valve
(3) Sight glass
(4) Refrigerant service valves
2.02 MANUFACTURER
A. Carrier
B. Trane
C. Approved Equal
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Condensing unit to be installed in strict accordance with manufacturers instruction and so as
to provided a complete and properly operable system.
B. Roof mounted condensing units to be installed by the Heating Contractor on a curb.
Vibration isolation to be installed on all roof mounted units and piping.
15670 -3
C. Condensing units located on the ground to be installed on a 6"high pad with#3 reinforcing
bars each way by the Heating Contractor.
END OF SECTION
15670-4
SECTION 15800
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING
PART I GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Includes all labor, materials, equipment, tools, instruments, etc. required to furnish and
install a complete heating, ventilating and air conditioning system.
1. This contractor shall verify.the correct voltage of all equipment before purchase.
B. Work By Others:
1.. The General Contractor shall provide foundation for equipment,chases,furring,curbs with
roof flashing, framed opehings, finish painting and all other similar work of a general
construction nature. The General contractor shall also provide all temporary water,electric
power, heating, and toilet facilities required for general construction purpose.
2. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide floor drains, site drains, etc. as required for
disposal of wastewater resulting from heating and air conditioning installation. The
Mechanical Contractor shall install drain lines for condensate,to point of discharge over
receptor, provided by plumbing contractor.
3. The Electrical Contractor shall provide complete power and control wiring and connection
to all motor driven and electrically operated heating and air conditioning equipment.
Furnishing and installing necessary disconnect switches,not specified herein,and all other
such work of an electrical nature shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Materials and/or equipment involved in the specified installation shall be of the best for
the purpose intended and shall meet with the approval of the Architect. The Architect
reserves the right to reject any materials and workmanship not in accordance with
those specified or not meeting with his approval, either before or after installation.
2. Materials and/or equipment specified herein to be a certain manufacture or brand are
issued as a standard and materials and/or equipment of other manufacture maybe
submitted for substitution provided that,they meet or exceed quality and all capacities
specified and space requirements shown on the drawings.
B. Materials:
1. Thru Wall Heat Pumps:
a. Units shall be air-to air heat pumps with auxiliary electric coil, designed to operate
at required voltage.
b. Each heat pump unit shall be complete and ready to operate after installation,
and consist of the following sections and components. Units shall be as
scheduled.
1. Hermetically-sealed refrigerant system consisting of compressor, condenser,
coils and microprocessor based electronic controls.
2. Cooling condensate disposal system.
3. Condenser and evaporator coils of copper tube with not less than 12 Ins in 1
inch tightly bonded to tubes in fashion which will prevent electrolytic action.
15800- 1
4. Unit air flow, both indoor and outdoor, matched to capacity of coils to provide
efficient heat transfer and to prevent water blow-off from evaporator coil.
5. Fresh air damper inside chassis with easily accessible manual control, but
adaptable to automatic control where required.
6. Factory-installed electric heater, located to be inaccessible from outside
cabinet and,grille, but readily serviceable by servicing technician.
7. U.L. listing.
8. Easily accessible controls.
9. Wrap-around or similar type room cabinet.
10. Wall case of not less than 18 gauge steel. Furnish with subbase.
11. Unit shall be equipped with a permanent washable type filter with metal
frame and the full width of the unit for lowest media velocities in order to
reduce dirt"pull through".
a Cases shall be shipped with outside weather panel. Weather panels shall remain
in place until outdoor louver and air conditioner chases are installed.
b Unit air conditioner chassis shall be standard product of manufacturer and
shipped in protective cartons to preclude damage. Cartons shall be
appropriately marked at factory with wording sufficient to warn handlers against
improper stacking, up-ending, rolling or dropping,
c Two-speed indoor fan motor shall manually changed between high and low
speeds as load demands. Only indoor fan shall run during heating cycle in
resistance heating mode. Motors shall be permanent split-capacitor type.
d Manual controls on unit shall be within easy reach.
e Chassis shall be equipped with electrical connections compatible with unit's
capacity. Case, subbase and electrical connection devices shall be UL listed and
comply with NEC and local codes.
f Wall case shall be of same dimension as scheduled.
g Provide Y2 inch coated dual density fiberglass insulation internally on top and
sides of wall sleeve. Full void between wall and sub-base with 3 inches fiberglass
insulation.
h Drain connectors shall be provided to remove condensate during outdoor high-
humidity operation.
i Unit chassis shall have ability to resist.75 mph direct wind force with 4 inches of
water per hour applied simultaneously.
j Each unit shall be factory-equipped with heaters of required wattage ratings.
Heaters shall be selected for required voltage.
k Units shall be supplied with a minimum 1 year warranty on all parts and labor for
the entire unit and a 5-year warranty on parts for the refrigeration circuit.
I Units shall be certified under ARI certification program and be UL listed.
m Rear Louvers
1. Rear Louvers shall be architectural extruded anodized aluminum. Finish as
scheduled.
2. Louvers shall be installed easily from within building after Wall
Sleeve is installed.
3. Louvers supplied by others shall be submitted to manufacturer for
approval of free area and airflow characteristics.
2. Heat Pump Split-System Fan and coil Units;
a. Furnish and install all direct expansion fan coil units in the locations shown on the
plans. Units shall meet or exceed Scheduled cooling capacities at scheduled
entering air conditions.
b. Cooling coils shall be no ferrous construction With mechanically bonded smooth
15800 - 2
plate fins. All tube joints shall be brazed with phoscopper or silver alloy.
c. Evaporator fan section shall have forward curved blades, double inlet fans
mounted on motor shaft. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and
shall run on factory-lubricated bearings. The motor shall be multi speed,
resiliently mounted.
d. Casing shall'be made of galvanized steel, bondedzed and finished with baked
enamel.
e. Filters shall be standard size and not less than 1 inch thick. Lowvelocity throw-
away filters shall be used and shall be protected from the cooling could
condensate.,
f. Electric resistance heaters shall have minimum scheduled capacities at
scheduled voltages,
g. Units shall be provided with all necessary controls, fan drives, etc. Units shall be
provided with overhead suspension package with vibration isolators where
suspended overhead and nin-in—shear isolation pads where floor mounted.
h. Unit shall be Trane, York, Carrier or approved equal.
3. Outdoor Heat Pump-Units:
a. Furnish and install an air-to-air electric heat pump unit (outdoor unit) in
combination with a direct expansion fan-coil unit (indoor unit)in the location and
manner shown on the plan. The units shall be designed and tested for use with
Refrigerant 22 and be equipped with refrigerant line fittings which permit
mechanical or sweat connection.
b. Coil shall be constructed with ripple-edge aluminum fins machine fitted to
seamless copper tubing with all joints silver soldered.
c. The unit shall contain a welded hermetic compressor with intemal vibration
isolators, crankcase heater, intemal and extemal motor protection. Outdoor fan
shall be propeller type, with vertical discharge, and direct driven by a factory-
lubricated motor resiliently mounted.
d. Controls and protective devices shall include a high pressurestat, loss of charge
pressurestat, crankcase heater, suction line accumulator and pressure relief
device. Motor compressor shall have both thermal and current sensitive overload
devices. The outdoor unit shall provide short cycle protection or safety lock-out
compressor protection. A 24-volt transformer shall be factory installed and wired
on outdoor units for extemal control circuit. Provide with liquid line filter dryer,
sight glass and solenoid valve. Provide hard start kits on all single-phase units.
e. Units shall be supplied with a minimum 5-year warranty on the compressor(s).
f. Units shall be York, Trane, Carrier or approved equal.
4. Electric Wall Heaters: Provide electric all heater equal to Markel type G3325 with
architectural grille, built in thermostat, disconnect switch and wall housing.
Capacity shall be as scheduled in electric heater schedule. Unit shall be UL
listed.
5. Make-up Air HVAC Unit Specifications For 100% OSA:
a Provide AAON, Inc., Model RK Series rooftop make-up air unit(s). Unit(s) shall
be designed specifically for 100% outside air applications with weatherproof
cabinet, refrigeration system, heating system, operating and safety controls, filter
system. Unit shall have a minimum heating system efficiency of 80%.
b Unit shall be shipped completely assembled by the manufacturer including all
standard items and optional items, be 100%run tested by the manufacturer With
a copy of the run test report shipped with the unit and shall be specifically
designed for outdoor rooftop application with a fully weatherproof cabinet.
c Unit design shall be dedicated bottom suppiVretum air style system for mounting
15800 - 3
on a roof curb.
d Cabinet shall be constructed entirely of G90 wt. Galvanized metal with the
exterior constructed of 18 gauge or heavier metal.
e The roof shall be cross broke and/or sloped to assure drainage.
f Access to compressor, controls, filters, blower, heating section, and other items
needing periodic checking or maintenance shall be through hinged access doors
with a quarter turn latch (door fastening screws are not acceptable).
g Air side service access doors shall be fully gasketed with rain break overhangs.
h Filter access door shall have an internal metal liner to protect the doors
insulation.
i Unit's exterior shall be painted with two part, polyurethane heat dried paint.
j The interior air side of the cabinet shall be entirely insulated on all exterior panels
with 1"thick, one pound density, neoprene coated, fiberglass insulation.
k To guarantee no leakage of conditioned air from the cabinet, all of the cabinet
under positive pressure, downstream from the supply air blower, shall have a
separate internal cabinet contained within and separated from the exterior cabinet
by an air gap. The internal cabinet shall be guaranteed to hold a static pressure
of up to 12 inches water column.
I All openings through the base pan of the unit shall have upturned flanges of at
least Y2" in height around the opening through the base pan.
m Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate unit lifting-rigging, service areas and
caution areas. Wiring diagrams, installation and maintenance manuals shall be
supplied with each unit.
n Blowers shall be entirely self contained on a slide out deck for service and
removal from the cabinet.
o Adjustable V-belt drive shall be provided with a minimum rating of 150% of the
motor nameplate brake horsepower.
p Blowers, drives and motors shall be dynamically balanced,
q The condensing section shall be equipped with direct drive, vertical discharge
condenser fans. The condenser coil shall be sloped at least 30 degrees from the
horizontal or provided with a protective guard to protect the coil from damage.
r Condenser coils shall be copper tube with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to
the tubes (aluminum tubes not acceptable), and to be sized for a minimum of 10
degrees sub-cooling.
s Evaporator coils shall be copper tube with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to
the tubes (aluminum tubes not acceptable).
t Evaporator coils shall gave galvanized steel end casings and equalizing type
vertical tube distributors.
u Evaporator coils for multi-compressor units shall be circuited with one circuit and
expansion valve per compressor.
v On dual compressor units, coil shall be interlaced in order that all air is cooled
when only one circuit is in operation. Horizontal split coil in unacceptable.
w Compressors shall be of the hermetic reciprocating type with crankcase heaters,
internal thermal overlaid protection, internal spring isolators an mounted on the
compressor manufacturer's recommended rubber vibration isolators,
x All units over nominal 7 tons shall be multiple stage and shall stage their
operation with a minimum of 2 stage capacity control.
y Compressors shall be mounted remotely, on the ground.
z System shall be equipped with thermostatic expansion valve type refrigerant flow
control and be equipped with Schrader type service fittings on both the high and
low pressure sides of the system.
15800 - 4
as Each circuit shall be equipped with automatic re-set low pressure and manual re-
set high-pressure refrigerant controls.
bb Unit shall be equipped with refrigerant liquid line filter driers and be full factory
charged with refrigerant R-22.
cc All circuits shall be equipped with liquid line sight glasses.
dd Unit shall be equipped with a 5-minute anti-short cycle delay timer f9r each
compressor with a 20 second between stage delay timer between compressors.
ee Unit shall,be provided with a gas-heating furnace consisting of a stainless steel
tubular heat exchanger, an induced draft blower and an electric pressure switch
to lockout the gas valve until the combustion chamber is purged and combustion
airflow is.established.
ff Provide a gas ignition system consisting of an electronic igniter to a pilot system
which will be continuous when the unit is in a heating mode, but Wil shut off the
pilot when heating is not required.
gg Unit's tubular gas heat exchanger, furnace system and controls shall carry a 25-
year non-prorated warranty for the stainless steel heat exchanger and a 1 0-year
warranty for the furnace and controls.
hh Unit shall heat using natural gas fuel and with two stages of heat capacity, unless
LP gas is specified on plans.
I! Unit shall be furnished with 2"pleated filters. Provide one extra set of filters per
unit.
jj Provide adjustable ambient temperature compressor lockout thermostat for each
circuit. Factory set lead compressor thermostat to shut of compressor at 60
degrees and lag compressor at 80 degrees on dual circuit units.
kk Provide hot gas bypass on lead refrigerant circuit.
11 Provide heat reclaim with reheat coil on lead refrigerant circuit, including required
operating controls.
mm All controls for the complete operation of the unit shall be supplied by the
unit manufacturer. Provide 2-stage discharge ductstat to override room
thermostat in heating mode.
nn Remote accessory controls to be provided by the unit manufacturer shall include
2 stage heating, 2 stage cooling, mil mounted thermostat, locking guard and wall
mounted humidistat with locking guard.
oo Outside air shall be a 100%OSA with bottom inlet and mesh grille eliminating the
possibility of rain or large foreign objects from being drawn into the outside air
opening.
pp Sequence of operation:
1) Control setup and sequence of operation as follows: Set compressor lockout
thermostat to close first stage at 60 degrees F. and second stage at 80
degrees F. outside temperature. Set discharge ductstat located in discharge
plenum to close first stage at 55 degrees F. Set wall mounted thermostats at
75 degrees F. for heating and cooling. System switch in AUTO position and
fan switch in ON position.
2) If wall mounted thermostat calls for cooling, both compressors shall run and
heating locked out whenever outside air is above setpoint. Hot gas bypass
valve shall maintain evaporator coil above icing condition, regardless of
enthalpy of outside air. Compressor shut off thermostats shall lock out
second stage compressor below approximately 80 degrees F, and first stage
compressor below approximately 60 degrees F outside air. As temperature
continues to drop, wall thermostat shall energize first and second stage
heating as required. If room thermostat is satisfied, discharge ductstat shall
15800 - 5
override wall scat whenever unit leaving air temperature falls below 55
degrees F.
3) If humidity level is above setpoint, wall mounted humidistat will energize 1 s'
stage of cooling and hot gas solenoid valve diverting compressor hot gas to
heat reclaim coil. Note that if both cooling and dehumidification are called for
simultaneously, cooling will take precedent to avoid overheating space.
4) Units shall be supplied with a minimum 5 year warranty on the compressor(s).
2.02 POOL DEHUMIDIFIER
A. Fumish and install as shown on plans and specifications herein,natatorium environmental
control unit.The system shall be specifically designed for natatorium environment control
Including dehumidification, pool water heating,air heating and cooling.The unit shall have a
fully self contained microprocessor controller with diagnostics, status reporting and alarm
functions.
B. Submit overall dimension drawings,operating weights,field wiring diagram,and
product data including air flow, static pressures, motor horsepower,total power consumption,
,moisture removal capacity, moisture removal efficiency,air leaving conditions under all
operating modes,water heater characteristics and total refrigerant charge.
C. QUALITY AND SAFETY ASSURANCE
1. The entire unit shall be ETL or CSA listed and shall comply with BOCA code M-401.1 and
M-402.1.
2. Coils, blower motor and compressor shall be UL or CSA listed.
3. Pool water heater shall be UL or CSA listed and comply With BOCA code P.1505.12.2. It
shall be rated suitable for potable water and protected from cross contamination.
4. Piping shall be in accordance with BOCA code M-702.0 far joints and connections.All
refrigerant pipes shall be copper type"U'.
5. Unit shall be completely factory assembled,wired, piped and tested.All controls shall be
factory adjusted and preset to the design conditions. Test report shall be available on
request. Engineer reserves the right to witness factory performance testing.
6. Dehumidifier shall be of design and construction as proven in similar application by a
minimum of five years operating experience.
D WARRANTY
1. The system shall have a limited warranty for one full year from start-up or 15 months from
shipment.
2. Provide an extended 4year compressor warranty.
E MANUFACTURER
1. Design Make: Dectron Dry-O-Tron with capacities as scheduled.
F. GENERAL
1. The dehumidifier shall be a single packaged unit.The unit shall include compressor,
evaporator coil, condenser coil, double wall vented coaxial de-superheater/water heater,
supply air blower, blower motor, motor starters,air filters and controls in one complete
enclosure. A microprocessor based control panel shall be provided for remote mounting.
2. The unit shall be mounted on an exterior pad.
15800 - 6
G. CABINET CONSTRUCTION
1. The base shall be constructed of 14-gauge hot dipped zinc coated sheet metal. The metal
shall be formed and reinforced for maximum rigidity.
2. The unit shall be constructed of 16-gauge hot dipped zinc coated sheet metal.
3. All metal to be phosphate degreased and then painted baked epoxy powder paint,
providing a chlorine and pool chemistry resistant finish.
4. Removable service panels shall be furnished to provide access to all internal parts from
both sides and in both sections.
5. The unit shall have a built-in electrical control panel in a separate compartment in order not
to disturb the air flow within the dehumidifier during electrical servicing.All electrical
components shall be mounted on a 14 gauge painted sub-panel.
6. The unit shall have a built-in air filter rack with separate hinged access door With
compression fasteners.The filter rack shall be minimum 18"deep.
7. The unit shall be equipped with an opening suitable for connection of a duct to admit
outdoor air to comply with ASHRAE Ventilation Standard 62-1989. Outdoor air intake
assembly shall be welded to become an integral part of the enclosure.The section shall be
painted internally and'6xtemally. It shall have a built in air filter rack with separate hinged
access door and manual air balancing dampers. Unit shall be provided with motorized
damper controlled by internal seven day time clock. Outdoor air shall be admitted between
the evaporator and condenser coils.
H. INSULATION
1. Entire coil section shall be insulated to prevent condensation with 1/2 inch thick fiberglass
duct liner insulation, approved for 250 OF operating temperature and up to 5,000 fpm air
velocity. Surface to be protected against perforation with a reinforcing mesh. Fire
resistance rating to conform with NFPA Standard 90A. Sound attenuation coefficient shall
be not less than 0.64 at a frequency of 1000 Hz as per ASTM Standard C423.Thermal
conductivity shall be not more than 0.232 Btu-in/h-sq ft 0-F at 750 F. Insulation shall be
securely fastened by spot welding to become an integral component of the enclosure and
held on by mechanical fasteners.
I. REFRIGERATION
1. Evaporator shall be eight rows deep for maximum moisture removal capacity with air
velocity not to exceed 500 fpm, 1/2 inch OD seamless copper tubing mechanically
expanded to assure high heat transfer with maximum ten aluminum fins per inch.
2. Condenser coil shall be sized to transfer 100% of the compressor heat of rejection into the
air if necessary with 1/2 inch OD seamless copper tubing mechanically expanded to assure
high heat transfer with maximum twelve facetized aluminum fins per inch.
3. All refrigeration coils shall have HyPoxy@ coated fins for maximum corrosion resistance.
Untreated fin material shall not be acceptable. Coating shall comply with ASTM
81 17/1311654 and ASTM D2126 for corrosion resistance. Coils shall have 16-gauge
galvanized casing and end plates and factory tested at air pressures not less than 400 psig
in a water bath.
J. DRAIN PAN
1. Condensate drain pan shall be a sloped non-trapping type under the entire evaporator
2. coil and prevent condensate carryover. The drain pan shall be made of 12-gauge grey
Nory) resin with hair cell finish ,temperature resistant to 200 OF complete with
3. recessed bottom drain, sanitary round comers, and flush mounted stainless steel
4. strainer for minimum condensate collection in pan. The unit's condensate drain line shall
15800 - 7
have an internal p4rap and 1 Y2"side connection to drain.
K. BLOWER
1. Blower shall be double width,double inlet, multi-blade forward curved centrifugal type
blower wheel, dynamically and statically balanced and tested, mounted on a solid steel
shaft coated with silicon. It shall have a galvanized steel wheel and galvanized steel casing
painted with a baked epoxy finish. Bearings shall be grease-lubricated, self-aligning for
200,000 hours average life.
2. Blower motor shall have inverter-rated insulation system and be open,drip-proof, class F
insulation, induction type,40 OC rise, pre-lubricated ball bearings mounted on an adjustable
base. Motor shall have a service factor rating of 1.15 or higher and must be marked
premium efficiency.
3. Blower belt drive assembly shall be double V-belt with a safety factor not less than 1.5
based on nominal motor horsepower,dynamically balanced cast iron fixed pitch blower
sheave and dynamically balanced cast iron variable pitch motor sheave.
L. POOL WATER HEATER
1. Pool water heat exchanger shall be sized specifically for the pool water heating
requirements. Exchanger shall be coaxial,double wall, vented-,for maximum heat transfer
from refrigerant toapotable water and have cross contamination prevention feature. Pool
heater shall be corrosion resistant, cupro-nickel water circuit, self-purging and self-draining
counter flow design.Water circuit shall be supplied with self-aligning union fittings for easy
connection.The internal water circuit of the unit shall be smooth, valveless,and designed
for constant water flow.
M. COMPRESSOR
1. Compressor shall be scroll type, suction gas cooled,suitable for refrigerant R-22,equipped
with intemal solid state sensor thermal protection, service valves, resilient type external
mounting and easily removable extemal crankcase heater for liquid migration protection.
N. REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT
1. Refrigeration circuit shall have an in-line solder type liquid line filter drier, liquid and
moisture indicator visible from outside the unit without removal of the access panel, and
thermostatic expansion valve. Tamper proof, hermetically sealed non-adjustable high and
low pressure controls and refrigeration service valves shall be installed using Schraeder
type valves. Refrigeration service valves shall be located outside of the air stream.
O. ELECTRICAL
1. Electrical control panel shall be built-in within a separate compartment in order not to
disturb the air flow during servicing. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with UL or
CSA safety electrical code regulations, and shall be in accordance with NFPA.All
components used shall be UL or CSA listed. Color coding and wire numbering shall be
provided for easy troubleshooting. All wires shall be in a wire duct,
2. On three phase units, blower motor and compressor shall be protected with push-button
operated, adjustable thermal trip and fixed magnetic trip overloads.On single phase units,
blower motor and compressor shall be protected with internal thermal overloads.
3. Unit shall be provided with single point power connection.
4. Compressor shall be controlled by contactors and shall have a time delay start to prevent
short.cycling. Dry contact shall be provided for auxiliary pool heater and remote alarm
indication.
P. MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL
15800 - 8
1. HT-800 microprocessor control system shall be integral to the unit and continuously
monitor and control the unit through a remote control panel. The remote control panel
shall be connected to the unit via a three-wire shielded cable at a maximum distance of 300
feet. The remote control panel shall be easily detachable from the remote location'and
plug directly onto the unit to simplify initial start-up and service diagnostics.
2. Remote control panel shall provide LED indications for unit operation including,power on,
blower on, dehumidification, pool water heating,cooling, and air heating. Panel shall be
equipped With a service light that flashes to indicate the'unit requires service. A service
code shall be indicated so that a service diagnosis can be performed quickly and 6fficlently.
Built-in diagnostics shall be provided to detect:sensor failures, refrigerant high or low
pressure, low water flow, etc.
3. Room air temperature, humidity and pool water temperature set points shall be accessible
on the remote control panel LED display. All room conditions shall be monitored by the
microprocessor and displayed.
4. Unit shall be provided with factory mounted and wired sensors to measure and monitor
entering and leaving air temperatures, entering and leaving water temperatures, relative
humidity.
Q. FILTERS
1. Return air filters shall be 2 inch disposable type suitable for commercial application,to
handle average dust loading. Initial resistance at 100% R.A.F. of 0.12 inch W.G. and
average arrestance efficiency of 85%based on 500 fpm air velocity.
2. Outdoor air filters shall be two inch cleanable permanent type suitable for commercial
application. The frame shall be made of galvanized formed channel with drain holes
punched for ease of cleaning. Initial resistance at 100%R.A.F. of 0.07 inch W.G.,,dust
holding capacity of 232 grams/ft2 and average arrestance efficiency of 67% based on
500 fpm air velocity
R. AIR-COOLED CONDENSER
1. Unit shall be equipped with air conditioning feature to reject all compressor heat to a
remote outdoor air-cooled condenser.The outdoor condenser shall be equipped with a
transformer and 24VAC control including contactor for fan motor. Unit shall be provided
with a dry contact rated for 24VAC/5A to operate the remote outdoor condenser control.
S. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
1. The unit shall be designed to maintain optimum comfort levels.The unit shall be able to
simultaneously heat pool water and reject heat to the air, or provide air conditioning.
2. The unit shall not allow wide swings in pool water or room air conditions.
3. The unit shall operate according to the following sequence.The warm humid air from the
natatorium passes through the dehumidifying coil and is cooled below its dew point,
thereby condensing moisture. The heat captured by this process and the heat generated by
the compressor power consumption are absorbed by a mechanical refrigeration system.
This heat is then distributed as specified herein.
4. Besides humidity control,the first priority is to maintain the pool water temperature by
rejecting compressor heat through a water-cooled condenser.An automatic compensation
system shall proportionally direct the heat where it is required and permit unit start-up
regardless of water temperature. During initial start-up with low pool water temperature, all
available heat shall be directed to the pool water.Once the desired pool water temperature
is reached,the water heating system shall adjust its output automatically. Unit shall be
equipped with field adjustable water heating capacity accessed externally.
15800 - 9
5. The unit shall be equipped with the Smartflow control logic that allows the system to
continue to dehumidify and air condition normally regardless of water flow rate.The unit will
only sound an alarm if the water flow is beyond +/-20%of the specified flow rate.The
water temperature difference between the inlet and the outlet shall not exceed 20OF in all
operating modes to allow for the use of non-metallic piping on pool water mains.Water
temperatures exceeding 120 OF shall not be acceptable.
6. All remaining heat shall be transferred to the air and contribute to the pool enclosure
heating requirement unless air conditioning is in operation.The leaving supply air dry bulb
temperature is always the same or higher than the entering return air temperature,except
when air conditioning is in operation.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install dehumidifier as indicated on drawings and shop drawings, in accordance with the
specifications and the manufacturers instructions, and in compliance with requirements of
applicable codes.
B. Electrical contractor shall be responsible for external power wiring, disconnect switch and
disconnect switch fusing.
C. Provide all required supports, attachment devices,vibration isolators and accessories to insure
quiet, stable operation.
D. Furnish factory authorized check, test, start and one-year warranty service including
operating refrigerant charge.
E. Provide four(4) copies of instruction books.
END OF SECTION
1 5800 - 10
SECTION 15880
DUCTWORK
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Ductwork and ductwork accessories.
B. Flexible duct connections.
C. Louvers and roof hoods.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Provide for manufactured products, assemblies, and duct fabrication.
1. Submit scaled layout drawings of metal ductwork and fittings including but not
limited to: duct sizes, locations elevations, and slopes of horizontal runs, all and
floor penetrations, and connections. 'Show interface and spatial relationship
between ductwork and proximate equipment. Show modifications of indicated
requirements, made to conform to local shop practice, and h6w those
modifications ensure that free area, materials, and rigidity are not reduced.
2. At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed metal ductwork and
ductwork products, in accordance with the requirements of Division 1.
B. Product Data: Include for manufactured products and assemblies.
C. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Include instructions for lubrication, filter
replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301; tested to AMCA 300 and bearing AMCA Certified Sound
Rating Seal.
B. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99 and ARI 430.
C. Filter Media: ANSI/UL 900 listed, Class I or Class 11.
D. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible"for
fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.
E. ASHRAE Standards: Complywith ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment Volume, Chapterl
"Duct Construction", for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.
F. NFPA Compliance: Complywith NFPA 96 for Kitchen Hood Exhaust ductwork, 90A
"Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", and NFPA
90B "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems"
1.04 WARRANTY
15880- 1
A. Provide warranty under provisions of Division 1.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.02 DUCTWORK
A. Materials:
1. Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality.
2. Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum sheet, alloy3003-1-114.
3. Flexible Ducts: Fabric supported by helically wound spring steel wire or flat steel
bands.
4. Insulated Flexible Ducts: Flexible duct wrapped with flexible glass fiber
insulation, enclosed by vapor barrier jacket.
5. Fibrous Glass Ducts: Not Permitted -
6. Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, used alone orwith tape.
B. Metal Ductwork:
1. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards- Metal and Flexible, except as indicated.
2. Construct Ts, bends, and elbows with radius of 1-1/2 times width of duct on
centerline. Where not possible, provide turning vanes.
3. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 30 degrees divergence and 45
degrees convergence.
4. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus tape.
5. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inches (200
mm)and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow.
6. Shop fabricate ductwork of gages and reinforcement complying with SMACNA
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards".
2.03 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible, and as indicated.
B. Fabricate splifter dampers of same material and gage as duct to 24 inches (600 mm)
size in either direction, and two gages heavier for larger sizes, secured with continuous
hinge or rod, operated with minimum 1/4 inch (6mm)diameter rod.
C. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x 30 inch (240 x 760 mm).
D. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x
72 inch (300 x 1 825 mm). Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or
galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware.
E. Except in round ductwork 12 inches (300 mm)in diameter and smaller, provide end
bearings.
F. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.
Where width exceeds 30 inches (750 min), provide regulator at both ends.
2.05 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
15880 -2
A. Gravity backdraft dampers furnished with air moving equipment, size 18 x 18 inches (457
x 457 mm)or smaller, may be air moving equipment manufacturers standard
construction.
B. Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action, gravity balanced backdraft dampers of galvanized
steel or extruded aluminum, with center pivoted blades linked together, with sealed
edges, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin.
2.06 AIR TURNING DEVICES
A. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension, steel or aluminum
construction; with individually adjustable blades and mounting straps.
B. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel or
aluminum construction, with push-pull operator strap.
2.07 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. UL listed, fire-retardant, neoprene-coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A;
approximately 3 inches (75mm)wide, crimped.into metal edging strip.
2.08 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and
Flexible.
B. Access doors smaller than 12 inches (300 mm)square may be secured with sash locks.
Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
2.09 FITTINGS
A. Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15 degree
change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45 degree
laterals and 45 degree elbows for branch takeoff connections. Where 90 degree
branches are indicated, provide conical type tees.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install flexible connections specified between fan inlet and discharge ductwork. Flexible
connectors shall not be in tension while running.
C. Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated.
D. Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with felt, rubber, or neoprene gaskets.
E. Install filter gage static pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter
gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Adjust and
15880-3
level.
F. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and
controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete
with metal cap with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage.
G. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
maintenance activities.
H. Connect diffusers or troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 5 ft (1.5 m)maximum length
of flexible duct. Hold in place with strap or clamp.
I. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open
ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
J. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated and at all crossings of fire walls. Install with
required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connection, corrosion
resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.
K. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with
fans and motorized equipment.
L. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans,
automatic dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated.
M. Support terminal units individually from structure. Do nonsupport from adjacent
ductwork. Provide minimum of 10 ft of 1 inch thick lined ductwork downstream of units.
N. Check location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to
conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
0. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers,
regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register
assembly.
P. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Division 9.
Q. Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which
will achieve air-tight(5% leakage for systems rated 3"and under, 1%for systems rated
over 3")and noiseless systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install
each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections,
within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts
rigidly With suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true-
to-shape and prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor.
R. Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally
and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs,as indicated by diagrams,
details, and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which
does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment.
Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of the building. Limit clearance to YV'where furring is
15880 -4
shown for enclosure of concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any.
Where possible, locate insulated ductvmrk for 1" clearance outside of insulation.
Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by
locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction, or above suspended ceilings. Do
not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions except as specifically shown. Coordinate
layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.
Q. Do not make final connections to diffusers with bent flex duct. Provide 90 degree elbows
at each diffuser for flex duct connection,
END OF SECTION
15880 -5
SECTION 15950
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
1.01 SCOPE
A. The Contractor shall furnish, to the jobsite, and'install all equipment and matelals herein
specified. Installation shall include all accessories required to assure a complete and
workable installation in accordance v0th'the scope of work outlined herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall provide the following for approval prior to commencing the work:
1. Manufacturers descriptive literature of all products to be used.
2. Sequence of operations outline for each system verifying set points, control
ratios, reset schedules and adjustable ranges.
3. A diagram for each system indicating and clearly labeling each component and its
function. (Shall include components famished by the Unit Manufacturer).
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All electrical control work under this contract shall be performed by electricians familiar
with control work.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. The control system shall be electrical, refer to Part 3 for the required sequences of
operation.
PART EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. All control components and Wring shall be installed byworkmen fully skilled in control
work.
3.02 THERMOSTATS.
A. Thermostats shall be located where shown on the drawings. Mounting height shall be
ADA approved, unless specifically noted otherwise.
B. Thermostats required to be mounted on exterior walls shall be mounted on an insulating
base.
3.03 CONTROL PANELS
A. Local control panels (furnished with units)shall be installed by this Contractor as
specified in the sequences hereinafter.
15950- 1
B. Panels shall be located for ease of servicing the systems, not for the shortest runs of
wiring.
C. Panels shall be wall mounted or provided with separate angle iron frames. Panels shall
not be attached to fans or other equipment.
3.04 ACCESSORIES
A. All necessary relays, positioners, etc., required to make complete, workable systems
capable of performing the sequence of operations hereinafter specified shall be provided
by this Contractor in addition to equipment furnished by the Unit Manufacturer.
3.05 WIRING
A. All control wiring shall be furnished and installed by this contractor. Wiring shall be
performed by competent electricians in strict conformance with the National Electrical
Code.
3.06 OWNER INSTRUCTION
A. On completion of the job, the Contractor shall have completely adjusted the entire control
system. He shall arrange to instnict the Owner's representative on the operation of the
control system and supply him with three copies of the control operating and instruction
manual. He shall obtain, from the Owner's representative, a signed receipt that he has
received the instruction manuals and complete instruction in the operation of the system.
3.07 SERVICE AND GUARANTEE
A. The control system herein specified shall be free from defects in workmanship and
material under normal use and service. After completion of the installation,, the
Contractor shall regulate and adjust all thermostats, control valves, control motors and
other equipment provided. If within twelve (12) months from the date of completion any
of the equipment herein described is proved to be defective in workmanship or materials,
it shall be replaced or repaired free of charge.
B. The Contractor shall, after completion, provide any service incidental to the proper
performance of the Control System under guarantees outlined above for a period of one
(1)year. Normal maintenance of the system or adjustments of components is not to be
considered part of the guarantee.
END OF SECTION
15960-2
SECTION 15990
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of all air supply and exhaust systems.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Draft Reports: Prior to commencing work, submit draft reports indicating data required. ,
Include detailed procedures and sample report forms.
B. Test Reports: Submit prior to final acceptance of project and for Inclusion in operating
and maintenance manuals. Provide five (5) copies in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder,
with index page and tabs, and cover identification. Include reduced scale drawings with
air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating
therm6stat locations. Each final systems report shall bear the signature of the person
performing the Work and recording the data and the signature of the certified on-the jab
supervisor for the performing agency. Submit simultaneously with the final reports, a list
of the instruments used with the last date of calibration for each instrument.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Environmental Systems Balancing Agency.
1. Provide the services of a certified independent agency for the testing, adjustment,
and balancing of all air distribution and hydronic distribution systems complete
with all connected apparatus and equipment. The agency shall be certified by the
Associated Air Balance Council Bureau -AABC, Los Angeles, CA 90026 or by
National Environmental Balancing Bureau -NEBB, Arlington, VA 22209.
2. The work shall be performed by skilled mechanical technicians under the direct
supervision of certified personnel in the employ of the independent agency. The
on-the-job supervisor shall be personally certified by the national council or
bureau, as approved by the Engineer.
PART EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Scheduling:
1. Perform environmental systems testing and balancing after cleaning,
miscellaneous testing, adjustment and operational testing Work has been
completed.
B. Report any defects of deficiencies or abnormal conditions in mechanical systems which
prevent system balance,
C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
15990- 1
D. Recorded data shall represent actually measured or observed condition.
E. Permanently mark setting of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices. Set and
lock memory stops.
3.02 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Adjust air handling,systems to plus or minus 5 percent for supply systems and plus or
minus 10 percent for return and exhaust systems from figures indicated.
3.03 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return,
and exhaust air quantities.
B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by traverse of entire cross sectional area of
duct.
C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do
not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct
internal.devices such as dampers.
E. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes
required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.
F. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil
pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Allow for 50 percent loading of filters.
G. Adjust automatic outside air, return air, and exhaust air dampers for design conditions.
H. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust air dampers
to check leakage.
1. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme
conditions.
3.05 PROJECT FINALIZATION
A. Provide one return trip to rebalance the system for comfort, noise, or any other reason; 1-
3 months after the Owner has occupied the building.
END OF SECTION
15990-2
SECTION 16050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART I GENERAL
1.01 SECTION'INCLUDES
A. Electrical basic requirements.
B. Connection of utilization equipment.
C. Supports.
D. Identification.
1122 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to NFPA 70
B. Certify inspection and approval from authority having jurisdiction,
1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing conditions shown on Drawings are based on preliminary field observations.
B. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
C. Report discrepancies to Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work to requirements of NECA Standard of Installation.
B. Use personnel with appropriate experience to perform Work on energized equipment
and circuits.
C. Review submittals for equipment famished under other sections prior to installation and
electrical rough-in. Verify location, size, and type of connections. Coordinate details of
equipment connections with supplier and installer.
1.05 CODE RULES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The electrical installation shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code and
the National Fire Protection Association. In addition, all state, municipal orother codes,
rules or regulations applicable to the work shall be followed.
B. All work shall be inspected by the Board of Fire Underwriters with a Certificate of
Inspection furnished to the Owner for the following items:
1. Temporary inspection of electrical work for service at job site for temporary
construction power and all contractor trailers requiring power.
2. Temporary inspection of building primary and secondary power systems before
building, permanent power will be energized.
16050- 1
3. Final inspection of the complete electrical system before final payment is
requested at end of project.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of
related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal.
C. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.
D. Submit detailed working drawings showing the exact locations of proposed Work after
consulting mechanical, architectural, structural, and electrical drawings. All Work shall
be coordinated with all architectural, structural, electrical, and mechanical features of the
building.
E. No item shall be installed without prior approval of the Engineer.
F. All operating equipment or components supplied under this Division require maintenance
manuals and operating instructions to be supplied.
G. Submittals Required For
1. Panelboards
2. Wire and cable.
3. Lighting fixtures and lamps.
4. Switches and receptacles.
1.07 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. The arrangement, position and connection of boxes, wiring, equipment, and apparatus
shown on the Contract Drawings may be diagrammatic, but should be followed as closely
as possible.
B. The responsibility of accurately laying out the work to best fit with details of job conditions
rests with the Contractor and he shall conform to any reasonable variation and change
that may be required, without extra or additional cost to the Owner.
C. Before installing any materials, insure that they do not interfere with clearance required in
finished rooms or with other work.
D. All electrical equipment for any one system shall be the product of the same
manufacturer, wherever possible.
E. All electrical products used on this project shall conform, unless otherwise specifically
noted, to applicable standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers'Association and
shall also be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and/or other agencies, as
approved.
F. Materials and workmanship shall comply with latest revisions of applicable State Codes,
City Codes, and utility company regulations.
16050-2
G. Should work be performed which does not comply with requirements of applicable State
Codes, City Codes, and utility company regulations, changes for compliance shall be
done at no additional cost.
H. Notify Engineer of any materials or apparatus believed to be inadequate, unsuitable, in
violation of laws, ordinances, rules or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.08 GUARANTEE
A. Entire installation shall be guaranteed as called for in the general conditions.
B. All equipment shall be guaranteed to meet capacities specified.
1.09 GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. Contractor shall obtain copies of drawings and specifications for all trades of this Project,
and review same for additional related Work. This Work shall be included in the Scope
of this Division, whether or not the information appears on the Electrical Drawings.
B. Small details not usually shown or specified, but necessary for the proper operation and
installation of the Work, shall be furnished and installed at no additional cost; complete
and operable systems shall be furnished.
C. The Contractor shall note that all service connections may not be shown in true positions.
Each bidder is cautioned, therefore, to verify same with field conditions.
D. Where discrepancies exist within the contract documents the proposal for the work shall
be based on the better quality, or greater quantity of work involved. No other method of
estimating shall be used in preparing the bid proposal, unless contrary instructions are
issued in the form of an Addendum before the bid proposal due date.
E. Any claim by the Contractor that they, in submitting their respective bid proposals, did not
include all items as shown in the Contract Documents will not be given consideration for
an adjustment of their bid. If any item specified in a section which would not normally
furnish this item, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide the,Work in
question,without any additional cost to the Owner.
1.10 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work specified under this heading includes furnishing all materials, labor, equipment,
permits, licenses, taxes and other items required for the execution and completion of all
Work indicated. Everything necessary for a complete and satisfactory installation,
including all necessary parts, devices, accessories, etc.. required by Codes or required to
satisfactorily complete the installation of the above items shall be provided.
B. The Work required under this section shall include, but is not necessarily limited to the
following:
1 Branch circuit wiring, unistrut,wire, lighting outlets, time clocks, watches,
receptacles, power outlets.
2. Connect all motors, electrically'ope rated equipment, and interlock/control wiring
16050-3
for same (except specific control wiring performed by the plumbing and HVAC
Contractors), furnished under this or any other division of this specification.
3. Furnish and install all lighting fixtures and lamps.
4. Furnish and install all fused disconnect switches, motor starters, auxiliary relays,
control and interlock wiring for plumbing, heating, ventilating and air conditioning
equipment, except as noted otherwise on the Drawings and in these
Specifications.
5. Pay for all permit, inspection and approval fees required by local authorities
having jurisdiction over the Work.
6. Clean up and remove debris, as required.
7. Provide a one (1)year guarantee.
8. Empty conduit system for telephone and data Wring.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BASIC MATERIALS
A. Steel Channel: Galvanized or painted steel.
B. Miscellaneous Hardware: Treat for corrosion resistance.
C. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic' black letters on white background.
D. Wire and Cable Markers : Cloth markers, split sleeve or tubing type.
PART EXECUTION
3.01 TEMPORARY POWER
A. Provide temporary wiring and connections for all trade's construction use as noted in
Scope Section,
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Make electrical connections to utilization equipment in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's instructions.
1. Verify that wiring and outlet rough-in work is complete and that utilization
equipment is ready for electrical connection, Wring, and energization.
2. Make wiring connections in control panel or in wiring compartment of pre-wired
equipment. Provide interconnecting wiring where indicated.
3. Install and connect disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control
devices as indicated.
4. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight
flexible conduit in damp or wet locations.
5. Use wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered in
heat-producing equipment.
6. Install pre-fabricated cord set where connection with attachment plug Is indicated
or specified, or use attachment plug with suitable strain-relief clamps.
7. Provide suitable strain-relief clamps for cord,connections to outlet boxes and
equipment connection boxes.
16050-4
B. Install support systems sized and fastened to accommodate weight of equipment and
conduit, including wiring, which they carry.
1. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet arid junction bo)es to building
structure using expansion anchors.
2. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum
board partitions and walls; expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry
walls; self-drilling anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces; sheet metal
screws in sheet metal studs; and mod screws in wood construction.
3. Do not fasten supports to piping, ceiling support wires, ductwork, mechanical
equipment, or conduit.
4. Do not use powder-actuated anchors.
5. Do not drill structural steel members.
6. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted.
7. Install free-standing electrical equipment on concrete pads.
8. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
9. Provide steel channel supports to stand cabinets one inch off wall in wet
locations.
10. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush-mounted cabinets and
panelboards in stud walls.
C. Identify electrical distribution and control equipment, and loads served, to meet regulatory
requirements and as scheduled.
1. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and tape labels.
2. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws, rivets, or adhesive,with
edges parallel to equipment lines. Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed
panelboard doors in finished locations.
3. Use nameplates with 1/4 inch lettering to identify distribution and control
equipment.
4. Provide a new typewritten panel directory in each panel used for circuits on this
project,
D. Install wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and
junction boxes, and at load connections.
1. Use branch circuit or feeder number to identify power and lighting circuits.
2. Use control wire number as indicated on equipment manufacturers shop
drawings to identify control wiring.
E. Take into account the varying ceiling heights, beams, etc., and offset wiring or conduits
up or down as required even if such offsets are not shown on the Drawings. However,
before making any changes from the work shown on the Drawings, first obtain the
approval of the Engineer. Failure on part of the Contractor to preserve maximum
headroom will require him to raise his conduit, and/or equipment without any additional
cost to the Owner, whenever directed to do so by the Engineer.
F. Conflicts:
1. In case of conflicts between different parts of Drawings, Specifications, or
between drawings and specifications, Contractor shall promptly request an
interpretation from the Engineer.
2. If Contractor fails to request an interpretation, he shall make all changes ordered
by the Engineer, without additional cost to the Omer.
16050-5
G. Clearance at Access Doors and Panels:
I Do not install any conduit, hangers, boxes or devices that will obstruct or interfere
with the use of any access doors or removal of access panels,whether on
equipment, in walls, or in the ceiling.
2. Comply with this requirement, if necessary, by rerouting wiring at no extra cost
after obtaining the approval of the Engineer.
H. Safety:
1. Installations must be entirely safe in every respect, and must not create any
condition of any kind, at anytime, that will be harmful to any occupant of building,
operating personnel, installation personnel, testing personnel, workmen, public,
or to any other persons.
a. Contractor shall be solely responsible for providing installations which will meet
these conditions.
b. If Contractor believes that installations will not be safe for all people, he shall
so report, in writing, to the Engineer before any equipment is purchased or work
is installed, giving his exact recommendations and reasons for them.
3.03 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
A. As required, shall be executed by this Contractor with the least interference to other
trades.
B. Should underground obstructions be encountered (utility piping, electrical wiring or
drainage structure), the Contractor shall repair all damages to these obstructions.
C. Selected backfill material shall be deposited and compacted in four(4) layers. This
material shall be sufficiently damp to permit thorough compaction under and around the
pipe so that it will support the pipe adequately.
D. Backfill shall be compacted by puddling with hose and long pipe nozzle or by flooding the
trench. If these methods fail to consolidate the III material, the Contractor shall compact
the fill by use of tamping.
E. All backfill shall be free of all debris and shall contain no rocks larger than 2"in diameter.
Perform in accordance with detail on Plans.
3.04 PAINTING
A. Provide a prime coat of paint for all supports, hangers, frames, etc., furnished and installed
under this division of the specifications.
B. Provide any miscellaneous painting described in this division of the specifications or on the
drawings.
C. Touch-up or repaint equipment finishes where factory finish is damaged.
3.05 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Identify all items of equipment and circuitry furnished under this division of the
specifications throughout the building.
16050-6
B. Equipment shall be identified With painted nomenclature using stencils having letters
approximately 1-1/2 inches high. 'Identification nomenclature shall be same as that on
contract drawings except where specifically requested otherwise by Owner.
C. Feeder circuits shall be identified with painted nomenclature using brass stencil sheets
having letters approximately 1 inch high. Stencils shall be cut in brass sheets which shall
be delivered to Owner after all paint identification requirements have been met. Conduit
shall be identified where exposed as well as co'ncealed with a minimum of one stencil at
each end of run, one stencil every 100 feet of horizontal run and at each floor level on
risers. Voltage shall be stenciled adjacent to each identification stencil. Red paint shall be
used for 480V feeders and black paint shall be used for 240V, or 208V feeders.
D. Provide in the directory frame of each panelboard and for each feeder switch or circuit
breaker, neatly typed directory cards indicating the general area and type of electrical load
served by each circuit. Stencil on the inside of each panelboard door, in letters 1-1/2
inches high, the particular panelboard designation as indicated on the drawings. Each
panel shall have the voltage neatly stenciled above the directory card inside the door. Do
not label free hand.
E. All wiring for control systems, including mechanical equipment Wring, shall be color-coded
or Identified by tags in order to facilitate Checking of work by those so authorized. Provide
stencil identification data on the starters, disconnect switches, etc., for all motors specified
in these specifications. This data shall be submitted to the Engineerfor approval but shall
generally be in accordance with the designation given the motors on the mechanical
drawings.
3.06 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION POWER
A. Provide temporary construction power wiring and lighting as specified herein and as
required for all construction needs. Temporary electrical service shall be obtained in the
name of the General Contractor. It will be the General Contractor's responsibility to pay all
power company charges. The temporary service shall be obtained from the local utility
company.
B. Provide one 20A., 120V., grounded duplex receptacle for each 5000 square feet or portion
thereof. Receptacles shall be not more than 70 feet apart and not more than 50 feet from
any part of the building construction. Provide one 20A., 220V., 1-phase grounded
receptacle near the center of each floor area of each building in the project.
C. Temporary lights shall be 200 watt size spaced a maximum of 50 feet apart and as evenly
as possible throughout the building.
END OF SECTION
16050-7
SECTION 16110
RACEWAYSYSTEIVIS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conduit and fittings.
B. Electrical metallic tubing.
C. Surface raceway system.
D. Electrical boxes and service fittings.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Conduit:
1. Metal Conduit and Tubing: Galvanized steel.
2. Flexible Conduit: Steel or Aluminum.
3. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit: Flexible conduit with PVC jacket.
4. Plastic Conduit and Tubing: NEMA TC 2; PVC. Use Schedule 40 conduit.
B. Conduit Fittings:
1. Metal Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1.
2. Plastic Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA.TC 3.
2.02 CONDUIT SYSTEMS
A. Rigid steel conduit shall be Underwriters' approved hot-dip galvanized or zinc metallized.
Couplings, locknuts;and bushings shall be zinc coated and threaded. "Erickson"couplings
may be used where necessary.
B. Electrical metallic tubing shall be zinc coated. Couplings and connectors shall be
galvanized or sherardized steel, concrete-tight, with insulated throat, of the glandular
compression ring or tap-on bushed and insulated type. Die Cast, setscrew, and
pressure ind ented type may be used only where separate.ground conductor is installed
in each conduit.
C. Plastic conduit shall be high impact, schedule 40, PVC conforming to industry NEMA
standards and equal to Carton type 40 heavy wall rigid PV-Duit or Carlon type EB power
and communication duct. All joints and fittings shall be of same material and shall be
solvent welded.
D. Flexible conduit for motor connections and all wet locations shall be Carlon "Carflex"
flexible, liquid-tight conduit. Flexible conduit for lighting fixture connections shall be
"Greenfield". Fittings shall be as manufactured by Appleton, Pyle-National or Thomas
and Betts.
E. Watertight entrance seals for conduit shall be a 3 piece malleable iron casting set with a
16110- 1
gland sealing assembly. Entrance seal shall be Type"FSK'as manufactured by O.Z.
Electrical Manufacturing Company, Inc. orequal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Examine supporting surfaces to determine that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Electrical boxes shown on Contract Drawings are approximate locations unless
dimensioned
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Use conduit and tubing for raceways in the following locations, unless noted otherwise on
drawings:
1. Underground Installations More than Five Ft from foundation Wall: PVC conduit.
2. Installations In or Under Concrete Slab, or Underground Within Five Ft of Foundation
Wall: Rigid steel conduit.
3. In Slab Above Grade: Rigid steel conduit
4. Exposed Outdoor Locations: Rigid steel conduit, Use threaded or raintight fittings.
5. Wet Interior Locations: Rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit. Use
threaded or raintight fittings for metal conduit.
6. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Electrical metallic tubing or type MC cable inside
walls only.
7. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. Size raceways for conductor type installed or for Type THW conductors, whichever is
larger.
1. Minimum size Conduit: Y2inch,
2. Conduit fill: Maximum conduit fill for new,work shall be 25%of cross-sectional area of
conduit for branch circuit, control wiring, alarm systems, and other electrical systems.
Fill for feeders and motor circuits shall be a maximum of 30%.
C. Arrange conduit and tubing to maintain headroom and to present neat mechanical
appearance.
1. Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping.
2. Maintain minimum 6 inch (150 mm)clearance to piping and 12 inch (300mm)
clearance to heat surfaces such as flues, steam pipes, and heating appliances.
3. Maintain required fire, acoustic, and vapor barrier rating when penetrating walls,
floors, and ceilings.
4. Route conduits through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible;
otherwise, route through roof jack with pitch pocket.
5. Group in parallel runs where practical. Use rack constructed of steel channel.
Maintain spacing between raceways or de-rate circuit ampacities to NFPA 70
requirements.
6. Use conduit hangers and clamps; do not fasten with wire or perforated pipe straps,
7. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction.
8. Terminate conduit stubs with insulated bushings.
9. Use suitable caps to protect installed raceway against entrance of dirt and moisture.
10. Provide No. 12 AWG insulated conductor or suitable pull string in empty raceways,
except sleeves and nipples.
16110-2
11. Install expansion joints where raceway crosses building expansion joints.
12. Set screw type fittings are prohibited.
D. Install surface metal raceway and multi-outlet assemblies in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
1. Use flat-head screws or clips and straps suitable for the purpose, to fasten channel to
surfaces. Mount plumb and level. 1,
2. Use suitable insulated bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and comer
fittings in metal raceway.
3. Use fittings and accessories designed for use with raceway system.
E. Install auxiliary gutter and wireway in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Bolt auxiliary gutter to wall using two-piece hangers. Install level.
2. Mount raintight gutter in horizontal position only.
F. Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire
pulling, equipment connections and regulatory requirements.
1. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations and wet locations.
2. Use hinged cover enclosure for interior pull and junction box larger than 12 inches
(300 mm)in any dimension.
3. Locate and install electrical boxes to allow access. Provide access panels if required.
4. Locate and install electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present neat
mechanical appearance.
5. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings or in unfinished areas.
6. Provide knockout closures for unused openings.
7. Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
8. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets above counters, benches, and
backsplashes.
9. Install lighting outlets to locate luminalies as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
G. Use recessed outlet boxes in finished areas and where indicated.
1. Secure boxes to interior wall and partition studs, accurately positioning to allow for
surface finish thickness.
2. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable
steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes. '
3. Locate boxes in masonry walls to require cuffing comer only. Coordinate masonry
cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes.
4. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls; provide 6 inch (150 mm)separation,
minimum. In acoustic-rated walls provide 24 inch (600mm)separation, minimum.
5. Do not damage insulation.
H. Layout: Work lines and established limits shall be in strict accordance with plans and
specifications.
1. Furnish the General Contractor and other Contractors, in ample time, any information
they may require to accommodate this Work.
2. Set all sleeves, anchors, bolts and/or inserts before any concrete is poured.
1. Cuffing and patching: Cut and rough patch as necessary for the installation of this Work.
1. Do not cut Work of other Trades without Engineers Approval.
2. Seal all openings in walls, floors and ceilings with a UL listed fire retardant seal.
J. Waterproofing: Whenever Work must pierce waterproofing, this Work shall be done with
care.
16110-3
1. After the item piercing the waterproofing has been set in place,the opening made for
this purpose shall be sealed and made absolutely watertight.
K. Sleeves: Where conduits pierce concrete floors, ceilings or masonry walls, provide and
install substantial metal sleeves.
1. Sleeves in exterior building walls below grade, or piercing waterproof surface shall be
caulked after installation of conduit to make a watertight seal.
2. Where conduits must pass through beams, the methods and locations proposed
must be submitted to the Structural Engineer for approval,
3.03 PHYSICAL PROTECTION OF WIRING
0
A. All wiring systems shall be installed in conduit unless specifically indicated otherwise in
these specifications or on the drawings.
B. Conduit Systems:
1. Conduit systems shall be continuous and shall be rigid steel, intermediate metal,
electrical metallic tubing (E.M. T.) rigid aluminum, non-metallic fiber or
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic as specified herein or as indicated on plan.
2. Rigid steel conduit shall be used for installation in earth, concrete slabs on grade,
where exposed to the weather and other areas as indicated on plans. All joints shall
be made with standard conduit couplings or unions. Running threads will not be
permitted. Conduit shall be reamed after cutting. Newly cut conduit threads shall be
protected from rusting by coating with graphite grease or other rust resisting, non-
insulating compound. Double lock nuts shall be used at terminations.
3. Electrical metallic tubing and intermediate metal conduit maybe used for both
exposed and concealed Wring in dry locations and where not subjected to
mechanical damage. Electrical metallic tubing shall not be installed in concrete
slabs on grade. Electrical metallic tubing shall not be used in sims larger than 2-
inch nominal diameter.
4. Aluminum conduit may be used in dry locations for exposed or concealed work.
Minimum size 2-1/2 inch nominal diameter. In no case, shall aluminum conduit or
fittings be installed in concrete, earth or in damp or corrosive atmosphere.
5. Non-metallic fiber or type EB, PVC plastic ducts may be used for underground
sections of feeders and service conduits unless otherwise indicated on the
drawings. Ducts shall be encased in a 34nch minimum thickness concrete
envelope for mechanical protection. The joints of the ducts shall be assembled
together with approved couplings to make a watertight joint. Approved type grade
blocks, 2 per section of duct, shall be provided. Care shall be taken to securely
anchor conduit in place in order to prevent displacement of the conduit during
pouring and puddling operation. Risers from underground ducts shall consist of
galvanized rigid steel long radius elbows and conduit. Provide grounding conductor
for entire length of non-metallic conduit and bond to rigid steel terminal conduit at
each end to provide a continuous ground system. Ground wire shall be installed
inside of duct and shall be sized as required by NEC.
6. Schedule 40, heavy wall, PVC plastic conduit maybe used in all areas of the project
where allowed by local code enforcing authority and subject to the following:
a. Exposed conduit shall not be installed within 8 feet of floor or where subject
to damage.
b. Conduit shall not be installed where exposed to weather or extreme temperature
variations.
c. Conduit must be protected by 3 inch concrete envelope where used underground
outside the building.
16110-4
d. Plastic conduit shall be prepared, Installed, and all joints cement melded in strict
accordance with manufacturers recommendations as described in Carton
publication No. TC2.
e. Install a rigid galvanized steel conduit elbow at the base of each riser from each
underground and underfloor non-'metallic conduit above ground and above floor,
coupled in the non-metallic conduit with the proper non-metallic to metallic fitting.
f. Install'a ground wire in each plastic conduit. Wire shall be sized in accordance with
the NEC.
7. Expansion fittings shall be provided in all conduits at building expansion joints..
8. Conduit shall be securely supported, strapped or otherwise attached to the building
structure at intervals of not more than 5 feet for sizes up to and including 1 Inch, at
intervals of not more than 8 feet for large sizes. In concrete slab construction,
conduit shall be supported with at least three wraps of No. 12 gauge iron wire
twisted to support every five feet or less.
9. in all finished areas, conceal all conduits below floors, within slabs, within walls,
above suspended ceilings, or within other building construction, unless indicated or
specified otherwise.
10. Conduits shall be exposed where indicated, and may be exposed in mechanical
equipment rooms, at electrical distribution centers, in unfinished areas, and where
directed by the Engineer. Exposed runs shall be installed in neat symmetrical lines
parallel to or at right angles to the building lines.\
11.All runs shall be installed to avoid piping and ducts of the mechanical equipment
systems, providing at least 3 inches separation from steam or hot water pipes.
12. Conduits terminating at motors, valves or vibration producing equipment shall be
connected to the equipment by means of flexible conduit not to exceed 3 feet in
length.
13. Install a 200 pound test nylon pull line in all empty conduits.
3.04 CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION
A. Splices, taps, attachment fittings and lugs shall be electrically and mechanically secure and
shall use solderless; lugs and connectors. There shall be sufficient slack cable in boxes,
outlets and cabinets to insure that there is no binding at the bushings. All lugs shall be of
the correct sizes for the conductors joined and in no case shall strands be cut from a
conductor in order to fit the conductor into a lug. Taping of joints shall be eitherwith
Scotch electrical tape, rubber tape and friction tape or varnish Cambric tape and friction
tape to secure insulation strength equal to that of the conductors joined. Splices or joints
with friction tape outer covering in conductors of size No. 4 AWG or larger shall have three
(3) coats of suitable insulation varnish paint applied over'the tape.
B. Wire sizes shall be as follows unless indicated otherwise:
1. Branch circuit wire-—----------—-No. 12 AWG
2. Control 14 AWG
3. Special system wire-----——-----As recommended by the manufacturer of the
equipment involved
4. Where the distance between the panelboard and the first outlet in a branch circuit is
more than 60 feet, No. 10 AWG wire or larger shall be used.
END OF SECTION
16110-5
SECTION 16119
WIRING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wire and cable.
B. Wiring devices.
C. Service fittings.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Building Wire:
1. Feeders and Branch Circuits Larger than 6 AWG: Copper, stranded conductor,
600 volt insulation, THHN/THWN.
2. Feeders and Branch Circuits 6 AWG and Smaller. Copper conductor, 600 volt
insulation, THHN/THWN. 6 and 8 AWG, stranded conductor; smaller that 8
AWG, solid conductor.
3. Control Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor, 600 volt insulation, THHN/THWN.
B. Remote Control and Signal Cable:
I Control Cable for Class I Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor,
600 volt insulation, rated 60 degree C, individual conductors twisted together,
shielded, and covered With PVC jacket.
2. Control Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper
conductor, 300 volt insulation, rated 60 degree C, individual conductors twisted
together, shielded, and covered with PVC jacket; UL listed.
C. Cords: Oil-resistant thermoset insulated multi-conductor flexible cord with identified
equipment grounding conductor, suitable for extra hard usage in damp locations,
2.02 CONDUCTORS
A. Wires for lighting and receptacle circuits shall be color-coded to indicate various phases
and neutral. Color-coding shall be consistent throughout the system and in accordance
with Article 210-5 of the National Electrical Code. Color coding shall be by means of
suitable colored, permanent, non-aging insulating tape applied to conductors at each
outlet, cabinet, orjunction point. The color-coding shall be accomplished as the
conductors are installed. The following systems of color coding shall be strictly adhered to:
PHASE 120/208 VOLTS 277/480 VOLTS
A Black Brown
16119- 1
B Red Purple
C Blue Yellow
Neutral White Natural Gray
Ground Green Green
Isolated Ground Green w/Yellow Tracer
2.03 OUTLET BOXES, PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Ceiling Boxes
1. Ceiling outlet boxes shall be four-inch octagonal,2-1/8"deep for exposed work or furred
ceiling work, and three inches deep for concrete work. All boxes for the concrete work
shall be of the type especially designed for this construction. Plaster rings and/or fbdure
studs shall be provided where required.
2. Ceiling outlet boxes for recessed lighting fixtures in lay-in ceilings and in accessible
acoustical tile ceilings shall be flour inches square, 1-3/4 inches deep.
B. Wall Boxes
1. Flush mounted types of boxes shall, in general, be suitable for the device housed
and correspond to the type wall in which mounted. All boxes shall be provided with
extension rings, covers and/or plaster rings with sufficient depth to bring the covers
flush with the finished wall and to match the device mounted or the purpose intended.
2. Plaster walls shall utilize 4 inches square boxes or gang boxes, 1-1/2"deep with
plaster ring for normal use and square cornered masonry boxes for through-wall use.
Masonry boxes shall be similar to those specified for concrete block use.
3. Concrete block walls with flush outlets shall Utilizer square comered, extra deep
masonry boxes. Boxes shall be RACO No.S570 through 578, Steel City No. GW-1 35
through GW-635, Appleton No.S M1-350 through M5-350 or equal.
4. Outlet boxes for exposed wall mounting and outdoor Installation shall be cast metal
"FS"or"FD" boxes. Exposed outlets in hazardous areas shall have boxes approved
for that purpose by Underwriters'.
5. Where mullion switches are indicated, a narrow box suitable for mounting in the
mullions should be used. Box shall be 1-5/16 inch wide by 1-5/8 inch deep by 3-3/4
inches high as manufactured by RACO or equal.
C. Pull boxes and junction boxes shall be code gauge sheet steel, sized according to the
NEC with galvanized finish inside and outside. Covers for pull boxes and wiring gutters
shall be secured with screws in an approved manner. Pull boxes and junction boxes
where exposed to weather and moisture in wet or damp locations shall be galvanize
weatherproof type with threaded hubs and gasketed covers.
D. Underground boxes (if any indicated or required) shall be Hope HD6000 galvanized cast
iron, watertight submersible type, with wide flanges on box top, neoprene cover gasket,
cover bolted on with stainless steel bolts, and threaded hubs for all conduit connections.
2.04 WIRING DEVICES
16119 -2
A. Wiring,devices shall be one make, Underwriters' approved type as manufactured by
Hubbell, Bryant, Pass & Seymour, or approved equal. All devices shall be ivory except
as otherwise directed by the Engineer.
B. Wall switches shall be installed on strike side of door and shall be equal to the
following:
SPST Bryant#490-1
DPST Bryant#4902-1
3WAY Bryant#4903-1
SPST w/PILOT Bryant#4901-PLR
C. Receptacles shall be installed at locations indicated on plan and as otherwise
required and shall be equal to the IbIlowing:
Duplex 20A, 125V, Bryant#5352-1
Weatherproof, Duplex; Bryant#5352 w/#451 0,cover
Floor, Duplex, Surface, Hubbell #B-2529 floor box w/SC-3091 fitting
Floor, Duplex, Flush, Hubbell #B-2529/S-3925
Clock Outlet Bryant#2828G
50A, 250V, 3-wire, Bryant#3846
30A, 250V, 3-wire, Bryant#9303 w/#9302-G plate
20A, 250V, 3-wire, Bryant#5461
D. Telephone outlets shall be installed at locations as indicated on plan and as otherwise
directed by the Owner. Cover plates for boxes shall have single hole in center of adequate
size for telephone cable to be installed.
E. Device Plates shall be installed plumb with all four edges in continuous contact with
finished surfaces.
Interior(Flush) Bryant 72000 Series
Interior(Surface) Crouse-Hinds DS Series
Exterior(Receptacle) Bryant#4510
F. Dimmer Switches
1. Dimmer switches shall be solid state devices to dim incandescent lighting units from full
bright to full�off in a smooth, continuous dimming curve. All shall fit in single ormultiple
hang switch boxes and shall have positive on-off switching incorporated in a rotary
16119 -3
control knob.
2. Six hundred waft incandescent units shall operate up to a maximum of 600 waft
incandescent,load in a maximum ambient temperature of 120 degrees F. Unit may be
required to operate in 3 way switching circuits. Six hundred waft fluorescent units shall
operate from 4 to 8 forty watt rapid start lamps in the same ambient temperature noted
above. Units shall be a manufactured by Hunt Electronics Company, Atmos,
Corporation, Lutron Eectronics or equal.
3. One thousand and fifteen hundred waft incandescent units shall operate a rated wattage in
a maximum 120 degrees F. ambient temperature and shall be provided with cooling fins
and electro-magnetic filter. Provide wall plates as specified hereinbefore to hide cooling
fins. Units shall be as manufactured by Hunt Electronics, Atmos; Corporation, Lutron
Electronics or equal.
2.05 TIME SWITCHES
A. Time switches for contactor control shall be equal to Tork#1 837ZSKL. Time switches
for individual circuit control.shall be Tork#7000 ZL series with astronomic dial and
reserve power feature. Provide surface or flush cabinets as indicated on the plans.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Verify that interior of building has been physically protected from weather.
B. Verify that mechanical work which is likely to injure conductors has been completed.
C. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing,conductors.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Methods:
1. Concealed Interior Locations: Type MC or building Wring in raceway.
2. Exposed Interior Locations: Building wire in raceway.
3. Above Accessible Ceilings: Building wire in raceway
4. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Building wire in raceway.
.5. Exterior Locations: Building wire in raceways.
6. Underground Locations: Building wire in raceway.
B. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than 14
AWG for control Wring.
1 Use 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuit home runs longer
than 75 ft
C. Neatly train and secure wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards.
D. Use UL listed wire pulling lubricant for pulling 4 AWG and larger wires.
E. Protect exposed cables.
F. Support cables above accessible ceilings to keep them from resting on ceiling tiles.
16119 -4
G. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without
perceptible temperature rise.
H. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape.
1. Install modularwiring system in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
J. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Install specific purpose receptacles at heights shown on Drawings.
2. Install cord and attachment plug caps on equipment underthe provisions of Section
16050. Size cord for connected load and rating of branch circuit overcurrent
protection.
3. Install wall mounted lighting fixtures, alarm bells, homy, speakers, etc.. @ TAFF or
V below ceiling in low ceiling areas.
K. Install wall plates flush and level.
1. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas,
using over-sized plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
L. All conductors connected to terminals or circuit breakers rated 100 amps or less shall
have their ampacities; rated in accordance with the 60 degree C temperature rating of
NEC table 310-16, as required by UL. All conductors connected to terminals or circuit
breakers rated larger than 100 amperes shall be rated in accordance with the 75 degree
C rating of NEC table 310-16.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection and testing of equipment under provisions of Division 1.
1. Inspect wire and cables for physical damage and proper connection.
2. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturers
recommended values.
3. Perform continuity test on,all power and equipment branch circuit conductors.
Verify proper phasing connections.
3.04 OUTLET BOXES, PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Boxes shall be sized in accordance with the NEC and in no case be smallerthan
necessary to adequately receive the equipment for which it was intended. Outlet, switch,
and other flush mounted boxes shall be set with the outer edge flush with finished
surface. Provide watertight gasketing under box covers for all boxes exposed to the
weather.
B. Boxes for floor mounted outlets shall be set lush with finished floor level. Provide carpet
flange where carpet is used.
C. Boxes for convenience outlets and telephone outlets shall be installed 8 inches above
the floor and wall switches 48 inches to bottom of box, except as otherwise noted or as
required by ADA to be 16"to the bottom of the box. For block or brick wall construction,
the height of the boxes may be adjusted to fit the block or brick coursing if approved by
the Engineer.
E. All boxes shall be rigidly mounted and shall be equipped with suitable screw fastened
16119-6
covers. Open knockouts or holes in boxes shall be plugged with suitable blanking
devices.
3.05 GROUNDING
A. The interior electrical systems shall be completely and effectively grounded as required
by the NEC,Article 250.,
B. Ground wire shall be included with feeder to respective electrical panels from
switchboard. Ground wire shall also be included in feeder to each motor control center
or distribution panel.
C. All metallic raceways shall be mechanically and electrically secure at all joints and at all
boxes, cabinets, fittings and equipment. Metallic raceways shall be connected to a direct
ground at the point of electrical service entrance and shall be electrically continuous
throughout the entire system.
D. Provide ground wire in all non-metallic conduits and all conduits with set screw or die cast
fittings.
F. Motors shall be connected to the conduit system by a section of flexible conduit with
integral ground wire.
END OF SECTION
16119-6
SECTION 16400
SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Enclosed switches.
B. Grounding.
C. Panelboards.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electric Service System:
1. 120/208 volts, three phase, 4 Wire, 60 Hz.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate relevant Information on panelboards.
B. Product Data: Provide data on enclosed switches and circuit breakers, fuses, circuit
breakers, motor starters, and contactors.
C. Test Reports: Submit for field inspection and testing. Include description of procedures,
duration, instruments used, and test values obtained. Present information in table form
comparing acceptable values to actual values.
D. Operating and Maintenance Instructions:
1. Panelboard : Submit NEMA PB 2.1
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of Utility Company, NEC, and the local Authority having
jurisdiction.
1.05 MAINTENANCE
A. Submit extra materials required for maintenance:
1. Provide two of each size and type fuse.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 ENCLOSED SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Cutler Hammer
2. Square D
16400- 1
B. Enclosed Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; Type HD.
1. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate Class R fuses.
C. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1; Type as indicated on Drawings.
2.02 FUSES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Bussman
B. Fuses 600 Amperes and Less: as scheduled on drawings.
C. Fuses Larger Than 600 Amperes: NOT APPLICABLE
D. Fuse Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes.
2.03 GROUNDING MATERIALS
A. Ground Rods: Copper-encased steel, 3/4 inch (19 mm) diameter, minimum length 8
feet
B. Clamps: Bronze.
2.04 PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Cutler Hammer
2. Square D
B. Main and Distribution Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; circuit breaker type.
1. Enclosure: Type 1.
2. Provide surface cabinet front with screw cover
3. Bus: Tin plated aluminum
4. Ground Bus. Tin plated aluminum
5. Voltage: As scheduled on drawings
6. Minimum Integrated Equipment Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240-
volt panelboards.
C. Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; circuit breaker type.
1. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1; Type 1.
2. Provide flush or surface cabinet as shown on drawings and front with lockable door,
keyed alike.
3. Bus: Tin plated aluminum
4. Ground Bus: Tin plated aluminum
5. Voltage: As shown on drawings
6. Minimum Integrated Equipment Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240-
volt Panelboards, or as shown on Drawings.
PART EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Make arrangements with Utility Company To obtain permanent electric service to the
16400-2
Project.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards and load centers to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
C. Install proper fuses in each fused switch.
D. Provide grounding and bonding to NFPA 70.
1'. Supplementary Grounding Electrode: Use driven ground rod on exterior of building.
2. Provide separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor in feeder circuits.
Terminate each end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing.
3. Provide grounding and bonding at Utility Company's metering equipment.
4. Use 6 AWG minimum size, copper conductor to bond communications system
grounding conductor to nearest effectively grounded metallic water pipe.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and
proper installation.
B. Measure ground resistance from system neutral connection at service entrance to
convenient ground reference point by passing minimum current of 10 amperes DC and
measuring voltage drop. Maximum resistance: 10 ohms.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean equipment finishes to remove paint and concrete splatters.
3.05 PANELBOARDS
A. Location and mounting of panelboards shall be as indicated on the drawings. Where
conflicts with other equipment or building features occur, the Contractor shall relocate the
panel, as directed by the Owners designated representative, anywhere within a 10 ft.
radius of the location shown at no additional cost.
3.06 FEEDER, SWITCH AND DEVICE RATINGS
A. The sizes of feeders, motor starters, switches, protective devices, and other devices
indicated on the electrical drawings for electrically operated equipment of the same
general types and sizes upon which the designs of the air conditioning, plumbing,
electrical and other systems are based. Horsepower ratings indicated on the drawings
are for guidance only, and shall not limit the size of the equipment or feeders. Check the
current and horsepower ratings of all electrically operated equipment actually furnished
and installed, and adjust the sizes of all feeders, starters, switches, protective devices,
and other devices as required to provide for proper protection and satisfactory operation
16400-3
of the equipment actually installed.
B. This includes increasing to the next larger size, or decreasing to the next smaller size,
any individual feeder, starter, switch, breaker, or other device, to match the equipment
sizes actually installed, as required, except that no sizes shall be decreased without
approval in writing from the Engineer.
C. Where starters, switches, protective devices, and other devices are specified in other
sections of these specifications, check the rating of each device with the current or
horsepower rating of the corresponding electrically operated equipment which is actually
installed, before installing and/or connecting any such device. Do not install and/or
connect any device that is found to be the incorrect size.
END OF SECTION
16400-4
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Luminaires and lampholders.
B. Lamps.
C. Ballasts.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: indicate construction details for Products which are not manufacturers
standard.
B. Product Data: Provide product data for each luminaire and lighting unit.
1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101
C. Furnish products listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or other testing firm acceptable
to authority having jurisdiction.
1.04 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide two extra of each type lamp installed.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMINAIRES AND LAMPHOLDERS
A. Luminaire Schedule: Product requirements for each luminaire and lampholder are
specified in luminaire schedule on Drawings.
B. Accessories: Provide required accessories for mounting and operation of each luminaire
as indicated.
1. Recessed Luminaires: Provide trim type suitable for ceiling system in which
luminaire is installed.
2. Thermal Protection: Provide thermal protection devices to meet NFPA 70
requirements.
3. Surface Luminaires: Provide spacers and brackets required for mounting.
4. Pendant Luminaires: Provide swivel hangers, pendant rods, tubes, and chains as
indicated to install luminaire at appropriate height.
16500- 1
2.02 LAMPS
A. Manufactu*rers:
1. General Electric
2. Sylvania
B. Description:
1. Incandescent Lamps: 125 volts, shape as scheduled.
2. Fluorescent Lamps: Type and color as scheduled. T-8 lamps shall be 4', 32 waft
with a color rendering index(CRI)of at least 85, color temperature (CT)of 31 OOK
or less, minimum initial light output of 3050 lumens, lamp current 265 ma, and a
MTBF of 20,000 hours based on 3 hours per start. GE F32 T8 1SPX 30.
3. Mercury Vapor HID Lamps: Deluxe white.
4. Metal Halide HID Lamps: Clear, pulse start type
5. High Pressure Sodium HID Lamps: Clear, suitable for ballast furnished in
luminaire and for all burning positions.
6. Reflector Lamp Beam Patterns: Conform to ANSI C78.379.
2.04 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Advance
2. Magnetek
B. Provide fluorescent ballast suitable for use under installation conditions listed tar each
luminaire and lampholder.
1. Voltage: As scheduled.
2. Ballasts: Electronic type.
C. T-8 Ballasts
1. Rapid or instant start, series or parallel wired, discrete circuit, high frequency,
crest factor controlled, electronic type with a minimum ballast factor of 0.95.
Instant start ballasts shall not decrease lamp longevity.
2. THD shall not be more than 25%, crest factor 1.7 max., power factor 90% min.,
max. starting voltage 360 V, filament voltage 2.5 -4.1 V.
3. Three lamp ballasts are not acceptable
4. Ballasts or ballast controllers shall not increase the audible noise, RFI, or power
system noise above that produced by a standard ballast.
5. Ballast warranty: 3 years parts.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Examine adjacent surfaces to determine that surfaces are ready to receive work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install luminaires and accessories in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
1. Provide pendant accessory to mount suspended luminaires and exit signs at
height indicated. Use swivel hanger on sloped ceilings.
2. Support surface-mounted luminaires from ceiling grid tee structure; provide
auxiliary support laid across top of ceiling tees. Fasten to prohibit movement.
16500-2
3. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. Install grid clips.
4. Luminaire Pole Bases: Construct as indicated on Drawings. Install poles on
bases plumb; provide for adjustment.
5. Install lamps in luminaires and lampholders,
6. Provide safety wires on all recessed troffers tied to Bldg steel per ASTIVI.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Align luminaires and clean lenses and diffusers at completion of work.
B. Aim adjustable luminaires and lampholders as indicated or as directed.
C. Adjust directional arrows on exit signs to meet approval of authority having jurisdiction.
D. Clean paint splatters, dirt and debris from installed luminaires.
E. Touch up luminaire finish at completion of work.
F. Relamp, luminaires which have failed lamps at completion of work.
3.04 SCHEDULES: See drawings for all schedules.
END OF SECTION
16500-3
SECTION 16622
ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT WIRING
PART I -GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Elevator Equipment Wiring for:
1. Passenger elevator
B. Elevator Equipment Wiring includes:
1. Power service connection.
2. Fire alarm system connections.
C. Elevator control wiring and interlock controls not included.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. SECTION 14200-Elevators
B. SECTION 16119—Wiring Systems
C. SECTION 16721 -Fire Alarm Systems
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to SECTION 01300-Submittals.
B. Provide submittals as called for under other sections of this Division.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide separate fused safety switches for power and cab lights, with external operating
handle lockable in the OFF position.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate entire installation with�elevator system installer prior to installation of equipment.
B. Coordinate location of lights,machines,and equipment installed in elevator pit and machine
rooms with elevator system installed on site prior to installation.
16622 - 1
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Place elevator power disconnect devices, cab light power disconnect device, and elevator
machine room light switch on lock side of door within elevator machine room.
B. Provide power connection from safety switch to elevator controller.
C. Install fire alarm system smoke detectors at each elevator lobby,as shown on drawings,for
designated recall and alternative recall options of the elevator. Provide smoke detectors in
the elevator machine room and at the top of the elevator shaft and connect to the alternative
recall fire alarm zone. Refer to drawings for additional information.
D. Provide fire alarm system wiring between the fire alarm panel and the elevator controller to
send designated recall and alternative recall signals to auxiliary fire alarm relays mounted
within three feet of the elevator controller. The elevator installer shall make connections from
the auxiliary relays to the elevator controls.- Refer to drawings for additional information.
E. Coordinate installation of smoke detectors in elevator machine room and elevator shaft with
elevator equipment installer.
F. Provide weather proof light and duplex receptacle in pit. Coordinate location with elevator
installer.
END OF SECTION
16622 -2
SECTION 16660
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Requirements: Applicable provisions of the General Conditions and Division 1,
General Requirements, govern all work specified in this Section.
B, Description: The work under this Section includes providing a functional and
unobtrusive lightning protection system and related accessories as specified
herein and/or required for a complete system. Any departure from the Contract
Drawings or submittal drawings covered below shall be deemed necessary by
the Contractor, details of such departures and reasons therefore shall be
submitted as soon as practicable to the Architect for approval. No such
departures shall be made without prior written approval of the Architect.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 16— Electrical
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The lightning protection system shall conform to the latest issue of the following
standards.
1. U.S. Bureau of Standards Handbook H-46
2. Underwriters' Laboratories Standards for Lightning Protection.
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Code No. 78.
B. The system shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in
the production of lightning protection systems and shall be the manufacturer's
latest approved design.
C. System manufacturer shall be U.L. listed and approved manufacturer.
D. The lightning protection shall be installed by a firm regularly engaged and
experienced in installing lightning protection systems and listed with
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings: Submit the type, size, and locations of all equipment, grounds
and cable routings on a set of drawings prepared by the Contractor to the same
scale as the contract drawings. Shop drawings shall include a 3-dimensional
sketch of the system and details of air terminal mounting.
B. Manufacturer's product data with proposed list of materials.
16660- 1
PART 2—PRODUCTS w.
2.01 GENERAL
A. All material and equipment shall be UL approved.
B. All equipment shall be the product of a single manufacturer and of a design and
construction to suit the application for which it is to be used, in accordance with
accepted industry standards, NFPA and UL requirements. The system shall be a
complete electrically and mechanically low resistance lightning protection system'
utilizing stranded copper conductors. All ground rods, conductors, air terminals,
connections,fittings, etc., necessary shall be provided by the manufacturer of the
system. ,
C. Approved manufacturers are Independent Protection Company, Thompson
Lightning Protection, Inc., Robbin Lightning Protection Company or approved
equal.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. All downlead conductors shall be soft drawn annealed bare copper cable,
weighing not less than 215 pounds per thousand feet and 65,500 circular mils
area.
B. Air terminals shall be solid aluminum with tapered points and W x 12"size.
C. All,fasteners shall be substantial in construction, not subject to breakage and
shall be of the same material as the conductor or of such nature that there will be
no serious tendency toward electrolytic corrosion in the presence of moisture.
D. Ground rods shall be made of copper-clad steel. The proportion of copper on
copper-clad rods shall be approximately 30% of the weight of the rod. Ground
rods shall be driven vertically. Minimum 5/8" in diameter and 10'-0" long.
PART EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be accomplished by an experienced installer.
B. All equipment shall be installed in the most inconspicuous manner possible.
System shall be installed complete with cable network on the roof, air terminals,
splices, and bonds with cable downleads routed concealed-directly in the building
construction or in conduit to ground.
C. Downlead cables shall not be brought directly through the roof. Connectors with
solid rods or conduit through pitch pockets shall be used for through roof
connections. Downlead conductors shall be installed In PVC conduit concealed
in building construction.
16660-2
D. Equipment shall not be connected to aluminum surfaces except by a UL
approved bimetal transition fitting.
E. Air terminals, cable fasteners and down conductors shall be located and spaced
in compliance with UL requirements.
F. Equipment on stacks and chimneys shall be protected from corrosion.
G. Roof conductors shall be coursed along ridges of gable and hip roofs, and
around the perimeter of flat roofs.
H. Roof conductors shall interconnect all air terminals and afford a two-way path to
ground from the base of each air terminal.
I. All metallic masses above the structure which are a permanent part of the
building,with the exception of those of comparatively small size and not within
six feet of the lightning conductor, shall be made a part of the lightning protection
system by interconnection with the system, or shall be independently grounded.
Plumbing vent stacks, fan housings, fences and other metallic masses high in the
building shall be permanently and effectively grounded by bonding to the
lightning conductor.
3.02 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate lightning protection work to insure a correct, neat and unobstructive
installation.
B. Provide a tight, mechanically sound bond to the main water service to assure
interconnecting with other building ground systems, including both telephone and
electrical.
3.03 CERTIFICATION
A. Upon completion, the Contractor shall obtain the Underwriters' Laboratories
"Master Label"for the system.
END OF SECTION
16660-3
SECTION 16721
FIRE ALARM
PART I GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire alarm and smoke detection system including, but not limited to the bilowing:
1. Audible and visual indicating alarm devices
2. Conduit
3. Wire
4. Fittings
5. Control panel
6. Pull stations
7. Signal initiating devices.
8. All accessories required to provide complete operating system.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Fire alarm system:
1. Simplex Tru-Alarm addressable system
2. Approved Equal
1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1. Specifications sections apply to work of this section.
B. Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section.
1.04 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Life Safety System work is indicated by specifications, drawings, and diagrams.
B. Furnish and install a new fire alarm system for the entire building.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers shall be firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of Life Safety
Systems of types, sizes, and electrical characteristics required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Prior to installations,
the Contractor shall submit data which will show that he has successfully installed
systems of the same type and design as specified herein. The data shall include the
names and locations of at least 3 installations where the Contractor or the Subcontractor
referred to above has installed such systems and certify that these systems have
performed satisfactorily in the manner intended for a period of not less than 24 months.
B. Fire alarm installers must possess a valid NYS fire alarm license.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
16721 - 1
A. Complete description of proposed equipment.
B. Separate pricing on all accessory items not included as standard, but as asked for In
invitation to bid.
C. Time required for delivery of equipment following receipt of purchase order.
D. Name of fire alarm equipment manufacturer and details of local service capabilities.
E. Exceptions to requirements Included herein shall be submitted in writing for approval.
F. Drawings, Material list, and Instruction books furnished as follows:
1. Four(4)copies of as-Built Drawings showing information such as overall
dimensions, wiring diagrams, etc.
2. Four(4)copies of instruction books.
3. Statement of guarantee for one (1)year.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. All components shall be UL listed and Factory Mutual approved.
B. System shall comply with National Electrical Code (NEC), NFPA life safety code #101,
NFPA#72, and all local codes. Certify inspection and approval from authority having
jurisdiction.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 WIRING
A. Conductors for initiating circuits and indicating circuits shall be #14 solid or stranded
THHN copper, power limited-fire alarm cable.
B. All initiating and indicating circuits shall be color coded and identified by number at fire
alarm panel termination point. Color code for other system functions shall be different
from initiating and control circuits.
C. Junction boxes containing fire alarm system conductors shall have red covers and be
marked "FIRE ALARM" in 1/4"white letters.
2.02 FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION EQUIPMENT
A. Manufacturers:
1. Simplex
2. Approved Equal
B. Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System:
1. Design to NFPA 72 A, B &C. Meet requirements for automatic fire alarm system.
2. Provide smoke detection system performance to NFPA 72E.
3. System Supervision: Electrically-supervised alarm initiating and alarm signaling
circuits.
C. Audible Signal Appliances -All audible alarm signals shall be homs except exterior
16721 -2
1 Provisions for 4 wires,for connecting to style z system or 4 terminal screws.
2. Red in color.
3. Visual indication of alarm condition.
4. Adjustable sound control not less than 95 decibel output at 10 feet.
5. Shall have dedicated power supplies.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install fire and smoke detection alarm system in accordance with manufacturers
instructions.
1. Install audible and visual signal devices 80" above floor or 6"below the ceiling
3. Mount end-of-line device in box with last device or separate box adjacent to last
device in circuit.
4. Make conduit and wiring connections to duct smoke detectors with sealtite
conduit.
5. Wire shall be color coded throughout system.
6. Junction box covers shall be painted red and marked "LIFE ALARM" in 114"
letters.
7. Tag all wires at terminations and junctions.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection and testing of fire alarm and smoke detection system under
provisions of Division 1.
1. Inspect and test to NFPA 72H and local fire service requirements.
B. Tests during installation:
I Contractor shall conduct tests during installation of wiring and system
components. Any deficiency pertaining to these requirements shall be corrected
by the Contractor prior to final functional and operational tests of the system and
shall provide all additional equipment, instruments and personnel to perform
these tests.
2. When all wire is pulled, and prior to closing junction boxes, the Contractor shall
contact the Engineers representative and request an inspection of the system
wiring network.
C. Final Testing:
1. The system shall be considered ready for such testing only after all necessary
preliminary tests have been made and all deficiencies found have been corrected
to the satisfaction of the Equipment Manufacturer's Technical Representative.
The system shall be tested for approval in the presence of representatives of the
Manufacturer and the Engineer. All necessary tests shall be made including the
following and any deficiency found shall be corrected and the system retested at
no cost to the Owner.
2. The entire system shall be tested by operating all manual "pull"stations, smoke
detectors, heat detectors, on/off/shutdown devices and cross activation features.
Every smoke detector shall be tested using a Gemini Corp. tester or equivalent
approved testing device.
3. The supervisory system including all trouble alarms shall be operated
4. Additional Tests: When deficiencies, defects or malfunctions develop during the
16721 -3
tests required, all further testing of the system shall be suspended until proper
adjustments, corrections or revisions have been made to assure proper
performance of the system. If these revisions require more than a nominal delay,
the Engineer shall be notified when the additional work has been completed to
arrange a new inspection and test of the Information Processing System.All tests
required shall be repeated prior to final acceptance unless otherwise directed.
5. All circuits shall be opened at two locations to test for supervision.
6. Horns shall be checked for proper sound levels.
7. At completion of all tests, contractor and manufacturers representative shall co-
sign letters attesting to completion of testing and forward two (2)copies of said
letters to Architect.
8. All testing shall be done at time convenient to the Owners representatives, and
all costs to be paid by the contractor.
END OF SECTION
16721 -4
SECTION 16740
EMPTY CONDUIT SYSTEM FOR TELEPHONE WIRING
PART I GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. The General Conditions, Instructions to Bidders, and all other general requirements of
these specifications shall be considered a component part of this division of the
specifications.
B. Bidders to this section shall review all other sections of these specifications. All items in
other sections relating to this section are as binding on this bidder as if repeated herein.
1.02 SCOPE
A. This section covers the empty conduit, boxes, pull wires, etc. for the telephone system
wiring. Attention is directed to all other sections of this division of the specifications.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT, BOXES, ETC.
A. Conduit, boxes, etc., shall be as specified in Section 16110 of these specifications.
PART EXECUTION
3.01 CONDUIT SYSTEM
A. All necessary conduits, wall boxes, plaster rings, and plywood mounting boards required
by project conditions or local telephone company shall be provided. All lines concealed
in walls or floor, etc., shall be run in conduit.
B. Minimum conduit sizes shall be Y7. Conduit serving two or more telephones shall be V
or larger, as required. Size all underground conduit as required by the telephone system
supplier. Provide 200#pull string in all empty conduits.
C. Contractor shall obtain approval of intended locations and sizes of conduit from the
Owner's telephone supplier prior to installation.
D. A standard single gang electrical box is required at each standard telephone outlet.
Provide a two gang box at the console location.
3.02 TELEPHONE INSTRUMENTS AND EQUIPMENT
A. The Owner will furnish, under a separate contract, all telephone instruments, terminal
equipment, wires, and cables and make all connections required.
16740- 1
3.03 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. The conduit shall not have any 90 degree bends, but shall have sweeps at 45 degrees.
B. The conduit shall be glued at all connecting joints.
C. The conduit shall protrude approximately 8"above the building floor level.
D. All open ends shall be closed (taping is sufficient)so that foreign objects do not enter the
conduit.
E. Provide a conduit from the equipment room to the service location in accordance with the
requirements of the local telephone company.
END OF SECTION
16740 -2
I'SECTION 16780
5
EMPTY CONDUIT SYSTEM FOR TELEVISION ANTENNA
PART GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. The General Conditions, Instructions to Bidders, and all other general requirements of
these specifications shall be considered a component part of this division of the
specifications.
B. Bidders to this section shall review all other sections of these specifications. All items in
other sections relating to this section are as binding on this bidder as if repeated herein.
1.02 SCOPE
A. This section covers the empty conduit, boxes, pull wires, etc. for the television antenna
system. Attention is directed to all other sections of this division of the specifications.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT, BOXES, ETC.
A. Conduit, boxes, etc., shall be as specified in Section 16110 of these specifications.
PART EXECUTION
3.01 CONDUIT SYSTEM
A. Ail necessary conduits, wall boxes, plaster rings, and plywood mounting boards required
by project conditions or the television equipment supplier shall be provided. All lines
concealed in walls or floor, etc., shall be run in conduit. Exposed lines in attic maybe run
without conduit.
B. Minimum conduit sizes shall be 3l". Size all underground conduit as required by the
television antenna system supplier.
C. Contractor shall obtain approval of intended locations and sizes of conduit from the
Owner's television antenna system supplier prior to installation.
D. A standard single gang electrical box is required at each standard television outlet.
3.02 TELEVISION ANTENNA WIRING AND EQUIPMENT
A. The Owner will furnish, under a separate contract, all televisions, antennas, terminal
equipment,wires, and cables and make all connections required.
16780- 1
3.03 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. The conduit shall not have any 90 degree bends, but shall have sweeps at 45
degrees.
B. The conduit shall be glued at all connecting joints.
C. The conduit shall protrude approximately 8" above the building floor level.
D. All open ends shall be closed (taping is sufficient)so that foreign objects do not enter
the conduit.
E. Provide a conduit from the equipment room to the satellite dish location in
accordance with the requirements of the owners television equipment supplier.
END OF SECTION
16780 -2